2023 BMW 8 Series Owners Manual

Content A-Z
OWNER'S MANUAL.
BMW 8 SERIES COUPE.
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A55987 - II/22

WELCOME TO BMW.
Owner's Manual.
Thank you for choosing a BMW.
The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control you will
have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest:
Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new BMW. Also use
the Integrated Owner's Manual in your vehicle. It contains important notes
on vehicle operation that will help you make full use of the technical fea-
tures available in your BMW. The manual also contains information de-
signed to enhance operating reliability and traffic safety, and to contribute
to maintaining the value of your BMW.
At the time of production at the plant, the printed Owner's Manual is the
most current resource. After a vehicle software update – such as, a Re-
mote Software Upgrade – the Integrated Owner's Manual for the vehicle
will contain the latest information.
You can find supplementary information in the additional brochures in the
onboard literature.
We wish you a safe and enjoyable ride.
3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
After a vehicle software update – such as, a Remote Software Upgrade –

the Integrated Owner's Manual for the vehicle will contain the latest infor-
mation.
NOTES
Information ........................................................................................................... 6
Owner's Manual media ..................................................................................... 15
QUICK REFERENCE
Getting in ............................................................................................................. 18
Set-up and use ................................................................................................... 22
On the road ......................................................................................................... 26
CONTROLS
Dashboard .......................................................................................................... 32
Sensors of the vehicle ....................................................................................... 37
Operating condition of the vehicle ................................................................... 41
iDrive .................................................................................................................... 44
BMW Remote Software Upgrade ................................................................... 60
General settings ................................................................................................ 64
Personal settings ............................................................................................... 69
Connections ........................................................................................................ 75
Opening and closing ......................................................................................... 84
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel ................................................................. 113
Transporting children safely ........................................................................... 126
Driving ................................................................................................................ 132
Displays .............................................................................................................. 151
Lights .................................................................................................................. 172
Safety ................................................................................................................ 180
Driving stability control systems .................................................................... 213
Driver assistance systems ............................................................................. 218
Driving comfort ................................................................................................ 266
Climate control ................................................................................................ 268
4
Interior equipment ........................................................................................... 279
Storage compartments .................................................................................. 289
Cargo area ........................................................................................................ 292
DRIVING TIPS
Things to remember when driving ............................................................... 296
Saving fuel ......................................................................................................... 301
MOBILITY
Refueling .......................................................................................................... 308
Wheels and tires ............................................................................................... 310
Engine compartment ...................................................................................... 340
Operating materials ........................................................................................ 343
Maintenance ..................................................................................................... 351
Replacing components ................................................................................... 353
Breakdown Assistance ................................................................................... 357
Vehicle Care ..................................................................................................... 364
REFERENCE
Technical data ................................................................................................. 370
Appendix ........................................................................................................... 372
Everything from A to Z .................................................................................... 374
© 2022 Bayerische Motoren Werke

Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written consent of BMW AG, Munich.
US English ID7 II/22, -
Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.
5
NOTES Information
Information
Using this Owner's Manual Additional sources of
information
Orientation
The fastest way to find information on a partic- Service center
ular topic is by using the index.
A service center will be glad to answer ques-
An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in tions at any time.
the first chapter.
Internet
Validity of the Owner's Manual Vehicle information and general information on
BMW, for instance, on technology, are availa-
Production of the vehicle ble on the Internet: www.bmwusa.com.
At the time of production at the plant, the
printed Owner's Manual is the most current re- Integrated Owner's Manual in the
source. Due to updates after the editorial
vehicle
deadline, differences may exist between the
printed Owner's Manual and the Integrated The Integrated Owner's Manual specifically
Owner's Manual in the vehicle. describes features and functions found in the
vehicle. The Integrated Owner's Manual can
Notes on updates can be found in the appen-
be displayed on the Control Display.
dix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehi-
cle.
BMW Driver’s Guide app
After a software update in the vehicle The BMW Driver's Guide app specifically de-
scribes features and functions found in the ve-
After a vehicle software update, such as via
hicle. The app can be displayed on smart-
Remote Software Upgrade, the Integrated
phones and tablets.
Owner's Manual for the vehicle will contain the
latest information.
BMW Driver’s Guide Web
Owner's Manual for Navigation, The BMW Driver’s Guide Web shows the most
Entertainment, Communication suitable information for the selected vehicle. If
possible, only equipment and functions that
The Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain- are actually installed in the vehicle will be ex-
ment, and Communication can be obtained as plained. The BMW Driver’s Guide Web can be
a printed book from the service center. displayed in any current browser.
The topics are also discussed in the Integrated
Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
6
Information NOTES
Symbols and displays Vehicle equipment and

options
Symbols in the Owner's Manual
This Owner's Manual describes all models and
Icon Meaning all standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series.
Precautions that must be followed in
That is why this Owner's Manual also de-
order to avoid the possibility of injury to
scribes and illustrates features and functions
yourself and to others as well as
that are not available in a vehicle, for instance,
serious damage to the vehicle.
because of the selected optional equipment or
Measures that can be taken to help the national-market version.
protect the environment. This also applies to safety-related functions
and systems.
"..." Texts in vehicle used to select
individual functions. When using these functions and systems, the
applicable laws and regulations must be ob-
›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the served.
voice activation system.
For any options and equipment not described
››...‹‹ Responses generated by the voice in this Owner's Manual, refer to the Supple-
activation system. mentary Owner's Manuals.
Your BMW service center is happy to answer
Action steps any questions that you may have about the
features and options applicable to your vehicle.
Action steps to be carried out are presented as
a numbered list. The steps must be carried out
in the defined order.
Status of the Owner's
1. First action step. Manual
2. Second action step.
Basic information
Enumerations
The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a
Enumerations without mandatory order or al-
policy of constant development that is con-
ternative possibilities are presented as a list
ceived to ensure that our vehicles continue to
with bullet points.
embody the highest quality and safety stan-
▷ First possibility. dards. In rare cases, therefore, the features de-
▷ Second possibility. scribed in this Owner's Manual may deviate
from those in your vehicle.
Icons on vehicle components
This symbol on a vehicle component
Validity of the Owner's Manual
indicates that further information on the
component is available in the Owner's Manual. Production of the vehicle
printed Owner's Manual is the most current re-
7
NOTES Information
printed Owner's Manual and the Integrated tronics, requires suitable maintenance and re-
Owner's Manual in the vehicle. pair work.
Notes on updates can be found in the appen- The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
dix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehi- that you entrust corresponding procedures to a
cle. BMW center. If you choose to use another
service facility, BMW recommends use of a fa-
After a software update in the vehicle cility that performs work, e.g., maintenance
After a vehicle software update, such as via and repair, according to BMW specifications
Remote Software Upgrade, the Integrated with properly trained personnel, referred to in
Owner's Manual for the vehicle will contain the the Owner's Manual as "another qualified
latest information. service center or repair shop".
If work is performed improperly, for instance
maintenance and repair, there is a risk of sub-
For Your Own Safety sequent damage and related safety risks.
Improperly performed work on the vehicle
Intended use paintwork can lead to a failure or fault of com-
ponents, e.g., the radar sensors, and thereby
Heed the following when using the vehicle:
result in a safety hazard.
▷ Owner's Manual.
Improperly performed routine work on the ve-
▷ Information on the vehicle. Do not remove hicle, e.g., mounting a license plate, can lead to
stickers. a failure or malfunction of components, e.g.,
▷ Technical vehicle data. the sensors, and thereby result in a safety haz-
▷ The traffic, speed, and safety laws where ard.
the vehicle is driven.
▷ Vehicle documents and statutory docu-
Parts and accessories
ments. BMW recommends the use of parts and acces-
sory products approved by BMW.
Warranty Approved parts and accessories, and advice
Your vehicle is technically configured for the on their use and installation are available from
operating conditions and registration require- a BMW center.
ments applying in the country of first delivery, BMW parts and accessories have been tested
also known as homologation. If your vehicle is by BMW for their safety and suitability in BMW
to be operated in a different country it might be vehicles.
necessary to adapt your vehicle to potentially BMW warrants genuine BMW parts and acces-
differing operating conditions and registration sories.
requirements. Noncompliance with homologa-
BMW does not evaluate whether each individ-
tion requirements in a certain country may af-
ual product from another manufacturer can be
fect warranty coverage. Please consult the
used with BMW vehicles without presenting a
New Vehicle Limited Warranty Booklet for fur-
safety hazard, even if a country-specific official
ther information on warranty matters.
approval was issued. BMW does not evaluate
whether these products are suitable for BMW
Maintenance and repairs vehicles under all usage conditions.
Advanced technology, for instance the use of
modern materials and high-performance elec-
8
Information NOTES
California Proposition 65 Warning Service and warranty

For vehicles sold in California, the law requires We recommend that you read this publication
vehicle manufacturers to provide the following thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the fol-
warning: lowing warranties:
▷ New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Warning ▷ Rust Perforation Limited Warranty.
Engine exhaust and a wide variety of Auto- ▷ Federal Emissions System Defect War-
mobile components and parts, including ranty.
components found in the interior furnishings ▷ Federal Emissions Performance Warranty.
in a vehicle, contain or emit chemicals known
▷ California Emission Control System Limited
to the State of California to cause cancer and
Warranty.
birth defects and reproductive harm. In addi-
tion, certain fluids contained in vehicles and Detailed information about these warranties is
certain products of component wear contain listed in the New Vehicle Limited Warranty
or emit chemicals known to the State of Cali- Booklet.
fornia to cause cancer and birth defects or Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and
other reproductive harm. Battery posts, ter- designed to meet the particular operating con-
minals and related accessories contain lead ditions and homologation requirements in your
and lead compounds. Batteries also contain country and continental region in order to de-
other chemicals known to the State of Califor- liver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle is
nia to cause cancer. Wash your hands after operated under those conditions. If you wish to
handling. Used engine oil contains chemicals operate your vehicle in another country or re-
that have caused cancer in laboratory ani- gion, you may be required to adapt your vehi-
mals. Always protect your skin by washing cle to meet different prevailing operating con-
thoroughly with soap and water. For more in- ditions and homologation requirements. You
formation go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/ should also be aware of any applicable war-
passenger-vehicle. ranty limitations or exclusions for such country
or region. In such case, please contact Cus-
tomer Relations for further information.
Warning
Maintenance
Operating, servicing and maintaining a pas-
senger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the
can expose you to chemicals including en- road safety, operational reliability and the New
gine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, Vehicle Limited Warranty.
and lead, which are known to the State of Specifications for maintenance measures:
California to cause cancer and birth defects ▷ BMW maintenance system.
or other reproductive harm. To minimize ex-
Maintenance, refer to page 351.
posure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle
the engine except as necessary, service your ▷ Maintenance Booklet, available online and
vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear accessible via a QR code in the New Vehi-
gloves or wash your hands frequently when cle Limited Warranty Booklet.
servicing your vehicle. For more information ▷ Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for
go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger- Canadian models.
vehicle.
9
NOTES Information
If the vehicle is not maintained or is improperly ▷ Status messages for the vehicle and its in-
maintained, this could result in serious dam- dividual components, e.g., wheel RPM,
age to the vehicle. wheel speed, deceleration, lateral accelera-
A failure to maintain your vehicle or improper tion, engaged seat belt indicator.
maintenance may affect your warranty cover- ▷ Ambient conditions, e.g., temperature, rain
age. Please consult the New Vehicle Limited sensor signals.
Warranty Booklet for further information on The processed data is only processed in the
warranty matters. vehicle itself and generally volatile. The data is
Refer to section on engine oil change regard- not stored beyond the operating period.
ing recommended service intervals for oil Electronic components, e.g. control units and
changes. vehicle keys, contain components for storing
technical information. Information about the
vehicle condition, component usage, mainte-
Data memory nance recommendations, events or faults can
be stored temporarily or permanently.
General information This information generally documents the
Electronic control devices are installed in the state of a component, a module, a system, or
vehicle. Electronic control units process data the surrounding area, for instance:
they receive from vehicle sensors, self-gener- ▷ Operating states of system components,
ate or exchange with each other. Some control for instance, fill levels, tire pressure, battery
units are necessary for the vehicle to function status.
safely or provide assistance during driving, ▷ Malfunctions and faults in important sys-
for instance driver assistance systems. Fur- tem components, for instance lights and
thermore, control units facilitate comfort or in- brakes.
fotainment functions.
▷ Responses by the vehicle to special driving
Information about stored or exchanged data situations such as airbag deployment or
can be requested from the manufacturer of the engagement of the driving stability control
vehicle, in a separate booklet, for example. systems.
▷ Information on vehicle-damaging events.
Personal reference
The data is required to perform the control unit
Each vehicle is marked with a unique vehicle
functions. Furthermore, it also serves to detect
identification number. Depending on the coun-
and correct malfunctions, and helps the vehicle
try, the vehicle owner can be identified with the
manufacturer to optimize vehicle functions.
vehicle identification number, license plate and
corresponding authorities. In addition, there The majority of this data is stored temporarily
are other options to track data collected in the and is only processed within the vehicle itself.
vehicle to the driver or vehicle owner, for in- In some circumstances the vehicle may store
stance, via the ConnectedDrive account that is some data for an additional but limited period
used. of time.
When servicing, for instance during repairs,
Operating data in the vehicle service processes, warranty cases, and quality
assurance measures, this technical informa-
Control units process data to operate the vehi-
tion can be read out from the vehicle together
cle.
with the vehicle identification number.
For example, this includes:
10
Information NOTES
A dealer's service center or another qualified MP3 player. If this data is stored in the vehicle,
service center or repair shop can read out the it can be deleted at any time.
information. The diagnostic socket required by This data is only transmitted to third parties
law in the vehicle is used to read out data. upon personal request as part of the use of on-
The data is collected, processed, and used by line services. The transmission depends on the
the relevant organizations in the service net- selected settings for the use of the services.
work. The data documents technical condi-
tions of the vehicle, which can be used to de- Incorporation of mobile devices
termine vehicle maintenance status, and Depending on the vehicle equipment, mobile
facilitate quality improvement. devices connected to the vehicle, for instance
Fault and event memories in the vehicle can smartphones, can be controlled via the vehicle
be reset when a dealer’s service center or an- control elements.
other qualified service center or repair shop The sound and picture from the mobile devices
performs repair or servicing work. can be played back and displayed through the
multimedia system. Certain information is
Data entry and data transfer into transferred to the mobile devices at the same
the vehicle time. Depending on the type of incorporation,
this includes, for instance position data and
General information other general vehicle information. This opti-
Depending on the vehicle equipment, comfort mizes the way in which selected apps, for in-
and individual settings can be stored in the ve- stance navigation or music playback, work.
hicle and modified or reset at any time. There is no further interaction between the
For example, this includes: mobile device and the vehicle, such as active
access to vehicle data.
▷ Settings for the seat and steering wheel
positions. How the data will be processed further is de-
termined by the provider of the particular app
▷ Chassis and climate control settings. being used. The extent of the possible settings
If necessary, data can be transferred to the en- depends on the respective app and the operat-
tertainment and communication system of the ing system of the mobile device.
vehicle, for instance via smartphone.
This includes the following depending on the Services
respective equipment:
▷ Multimedia data such as music, films or General information
photos for playback in an integrated multi- If the vehicle has a wireless network connec-
media system. tion, it will enable data to be exchanged be-
▷ Address book data for use in conjunction tween the vehicle and other systems. The
with an integrated hands-free system or an wireless network connection is realized via an
integrated navigation system. in-vehicle transmitter and receiver unit or via
personal mobile devices brought into the vehi-
▷ Entered navigation destinations.
cle, for instance smartphones. This wireless
▷ Data on the use of Internet services. network connection enables 'online functions'
This data can be stored locally in the vehicle or to be used. These include online services and
is found on a device that has been connected apps supplied by the vehicle manufacturer or
to the vehicle, e.g., a smartphone, USB stick or by other providers.
11
NOTES Information
Services from the vehicle manufacturer short period of time, typically 30 seconds or
Where online services from the vehicle manu- less.
facturer are concerned, the corresponding The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
functions are described in the appropriate such data as:
place, for instance the Owner's Manual or ▷ How various systems in your vehicle were
manufacturer's web page. The relevant legal operating.
information pertaining to data protection may
▷ Whether or not the driver and passenger
also be found on the manufacturer’s website.
seat belts were fastened.
Personal data may be used to perform online
services. Data is exchanged over a secure con- ▷ How far, if at all, the driver was depressing
nection, for instance with the IT systems of the the accelerator and/or brake pedal.
vehicle manufacturer intended for this purpose. ▷ How fast the vehicle was traveling.
Any collection, processing, and use of personal This data can help provide a better under-
data above and beyond that needed to provide standing of the circumstances in which
the services must always be based on a legal crashes and injuries occur.
permission, contractual arrangement or con- EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a
sent. It is also possible to activate or deactivate nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data is re-
the data connection as a whole. That is, with corded by the EDR under normal driving condi-
the exception of functions and services re- tions and no personal data, for instance name,
quired by law such as Assist systems. gender, age, and crash location, are recorded.
However, other parties, such as law enforce-
Services from other providers
ment, could combine the EDR data with the
When using online services from other provid- type of personally identifying data routinely ac-
ers, these services are the responsibility of the quired during a crash investigation.
relevant provider and subject to their data pri-
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
vacy conditions and terms of use. The vehicle
equipment is required, and access to the vehi-
manufacturer has no influence on the content
cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the ve-
exchanged during this process. Information on
hicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law
the way in which personal data is collected and
enforcement, that have the special equipment,
used in relation to services from third parties,
can read the information if they have access to
the scope of such data, and its purpose, can
the vehicle or the EDR.
be obtained from the relevant service provider.
Event Data Recorder EDR Vehicle identification

number
This vehicle is equipped with an event data re-
corder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR is to General information
record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa-
Depending on the national-market equipment,
tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting
the vehicle identification number is located in
a road obstacle, data that will assist in under-
different positions in the vehicle. This chapter
standing how a vehicle’s systems performed.
describes all possible positions for the series.
The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a
12
Information NOTES
Engine compartment Windshield
The engraved vehicle identification number The vehicle identification number can also be
can be found in the engine compartment, on found behind the windshield.
the right-hand side of the vehicle.
iDrive
Right nameplate It is also possible to display the vehicle identifi-
cation number via iDrive.
Additional information:
Displaying the vehicle identification number
and software part number, refer to page 76.
Reporting safety defects

For US customers
The vehicle identification number can be found
on the nameplate, on the right-hand side of The following only applies to vehicles owned
the vehicle. and operated in the US.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause in-
Left nameplate jury or death, you should immediately inform
the National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis-
tration NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of
North America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood,
New Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone
1-800-831-1117.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign.
The vehicle identification number can be found However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
on the nameplate, on the left-hand side of the individual problems between you, your dealer,
vehicle. or BMW of North America, LLC.
13
NOTES Information
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle

Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://
www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator,
NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., Wash-
ington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
For Canadian customers

Canadian customers who wish to report a
safety-related defect to Transport Canada, De-
fect Investigations and Recalls, may call the
toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can also
obtain other information about motor vehicle
safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety.
14
Owner's Manual media NOTES
Owner's Manual media

Vehicle features and options Owner's Manual for the vehicle will contain the
latest information.
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features and functions
Printed Owner's Manual
that are not necessarily available in your vehi-
cle, e.g., due to the selected options or country Principle
versions. This also applies to safety-related The printed Owner's Manual describes all
functions and systems. When using these standard, country-specific, and optional equip-
functions and systems, the applicable laws ment offered with the series.
and regulations must be observed.
General information
General information The Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain-
ment, and Communication can be obtained as
a printed book from the service center.
Media at a glance
You can use various media formats to call up Supplementary Owner's Manuals
the content in the Owner's Manual. The follow-
Also follow the Supplementary Owner's Man-
ing Owner's Manual media formats are availa-
uals, which are included in addition to the on-
ble:
board literature.
▷ Printed Owner's Manual.
▷ Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
Integrated Owner's Manual
Validity of the Owner's Manual in the vehicle
Production of the vehicle
Principle
The Integrated Owner's Manual specifically
describes features and functions found in the
vehicle.
printed Owner's Manual and the Integrated The Integrated Owner's Manual can be dis-
Owner's Manual in the vehicle. played on the Control Display.
Notes on updates can be found in the appen-
dix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehi- Selecting the Owner's Manual
cle.
1. Press the button.
After a software update in the vehicle 2. "CAR"
After a vehicle software update, such as via 3. "Owner's Manual"
Remote Software Upgrade, the Integrated 4. Select the desired method of accessing the
contents.
15
NOTES Owner's Manual media
Scrolling through the Owner's

Manual
Turn the Controller, until the next or previous
contents are displayed.
Context help
General information
The Integrated Owner's Manual can be ac-
cessed from any menu. Depending on the se-
lected function, either the associated descrip-
tion or the main menu of the Integrated
Owner's Manual will be displayed.
Opening via iDrive

Change directly to the Options menu from the
function on the Control Display:

2. "Help"
Opening when a Check Control

message is displayed
Directly from the Check Control message on
the Control Display:
"Owner's Manual"
16
Owner's Manual media NOTES
17
QUICK REFERENCE Getting in
Getting in
Opening and closing Buttons for the central locking
system
Buttons on the vehicle key
Overview
1 Unlocking
Buttons for the central locking system.
2 Locking
3 Opening the trunk lid
Locking
4 Panic mode, pathway lighting
Press the button with the front doors
closed.
Unlocking the vehicle
The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
Press the button on the vehicle key.
Unlocking
Depending on the settings, either only the driv-
er's door or all vehicle access points are un- Press the button.
locked.
If only the driver's door is unlocked, press the
button on the vehicle key again to unlock the
Panic mode
other vehicle access points. You can trigger the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation.
Press and hold the button on the vehi-
cle key after unlocking. ▷ Press the button on the vehicle key
and hold for at least 3 seconds.
The windows open for as long as the button ▷ Briefly press the button on the vehicle key
on the vehicle key is pressed. three times in succession.
Locking the vehicle To switch off the alarm: press any button.
1. Close the driver's door.
2. Press the button on the vehicle key.

All vehicle access points are locked.
18
Getting in QUICK REFERENCE
Comfort Access Opening and closing the trunk lid with

no-touch activation
Principle
The vehicle can be accessed without operating Principle
the vehicle key. The trunk lid can be opened and closed with
Carrying the vehicle key with you, e.g., in your no-touch activation using the vehicle key you
pants pocket, is sufficient. are carrying.
The vehicle automatically detects the vehicle Performing the foot movement
key when it is in close proximity or in the inte-
rior. 1. Stand in the middle behind the vehicle at
approx. one arm's length away from the
rear of the vehicle.
2. Wave a foot under the vehicle in the driving
direction and immediately pull it back. With
this movement, the leg must pass through
the ranges of both sensors.
Grasp the handle of a vehicle door completely.
Locking the vehicle
Trunk lid
Opening
Touch the grooved surface on the handle of a

closed vehicle door with your finger for approx.
1 second without grasping the door handle.
▷ Unlock the vehicle and then press the but-

ton on the outer side of the trunk lid.
▷ Press and hold the button on the

vehicle key for approx. 1 second.
19
QUICK REFERENCE Getting in
Depending on the setting, the doors may Driver's door

also be unlocked.
Closing
Press the button on the inside of the
trunk lid.
Displays, control elements

In the vicinity of the steering wheel 1 Seats, comfort features
2 Central locking system
3 Power windows
4 Exterior mirrors
5 Opening/closing trunk lid
Switch console
1 Light switch element

2 Turn signal indicator, high beams
3 Instrument cluster
4 Wipers
Indicator/warning lights
The indicator/warning lights can light up in a 1 Selector lever
variety of combinations and colors. 2 Controller
Several of the lights are checked for proper 3 Parking brake, Automatic Hold
functioning and light up temporarily when 4 Driving Dynamics Control
drive-ready state is turned on.
5 Start/Stop button
6 Assistance systems
iDrive
Principle
iDrive is the operating concept of the infotain-
ment system and includes a large number of
functions.
20
Getting in QUICK REFERENCE
Buttons on the Controller
Button Function
Call up the main menu.
Go to Apps menu.
Call up the Media/Radio menu.
Call up the Communication menu.
Call up the navigation map.
Call up the destination input menu

for navigation.
Call up the previous display.
Call up the Options menu.
Voice control
Activating the voice control system

Press the button on the steering
wheel.
Say the command.
Canceling voice control

Press the button on the steering wheel
or ›Cancel‹.
21
QUICK REFERENCE Set-up and use
Set-up and use

Seats, mirrors and steering Adjusting the distance: basic seat
wheel
Electrically adjustable seats
▷ Back: press the button and push the head

restraint toward the rear.
▷ Forward: pull the head restraint toward the
front.
1 Backrest width After setting the distance, make sure that the
2 Forward/backward, height, seat tilt head restraint engages correctly.
3 Backrest tilt, head restraint
4 Lumbar support Adjusting the distance: M Sport seat
The distance to the back of the head is ad-
Adjusting the head restraint justed via the backrest inclination.
Adjusting the height Adjusting the exterior mirrors
Press switch up or down. 1 Adjusting

2 Selecting a mirror, Automatic Curb Monitor
3 Folding in and out
22
Set-up and use QUICK REFERENCE
Adjusting the steering wheel Entering the rear
Electrical steering wheel adjustment Fold the seat backrest forward

1. Pull the loop.
Press the switch to adjust the forward/back

position and height of the steering wheel to the 2. Fold the seat backrest forward.
seat position.
For equipment specification with M sport seat:
1. Pull the lever.

Memory function
Principle
The following settings can be stored and, if
necessary, retrieved using the memory func-
tion:
▷ Seat position.
▷ Exterior mirror position.
▷ Steering wheel position.
▷ Height of the Head-up Display. 2. Fold the seat backrest forward.
To make the entry to the rear easier, the seat
Storing will automatically move to the most forward
1. Set the desired position. position.
2. Press the button. The lettering on Push the seat backrest rearward
the button is illuminated. Push the seat backrest rearward and engage
3. Press the desired button 1 or 2 at the door it.
while the lettering is illuminated. A signal The seat moves automatically to the last seat
sounds. position that was stored.
Calling up settings
Press the desired button 1 or 2.
23
QUICK REFERENCE Set-up and use
Infotainment The search term may be completed auto-

matically in orange lettering.
Tilt the Controller up to accept the sug-
Radio gested search term.
4. Select the icon, if needed.
Buttons and functions
A list of the results is displayed.
Depending on the country and equipment ver-
sion, the radio has the following buttons. 5. If necessary, "Filter"
6. "Show results"
Button Function
7. Select the desired entry.
Press: turns sound output on/
8. If necessary, "Start guidance"
off.
Turn: adjusts the volume.
Using the mobile phone
General information
Change the entertainment
After the mobile phone is connected once to
source.
the vehicle, the mobile phone can be operated
Press once: changes the sta- using iDrive and the steering wheel buttons.
tion/track.
/ Press and hold: fast forward/ Connecting via Bluetooth®
rewind the track. 1. "COM"
2. "Mobile devices"
Programmable memory but- 3. Tilt the Controller to the right.
tons. 4. "New device"
/ 5. "Phone calls and audio"
The vehicle's Bluetooth name is displayed
on the Control Display.
Changeover of wave range/ 6. Compare the control number displayed on
satellite radio. the Control Display with the control number
on the display of the mobile device, and
Menu Apps. confirm that the two match.
7. A Bluetooth connection is established.
The mobile device is connected to the vehicle
Navigation destination input and displayed in the device list.
Entering a destination via the search Accepting a call

1. Press the button on the Controller. Depending on the equipment, incoming calls
can be answered in several ways.
2. "Where to?"
▷ Via iDrive:
3. Enter at least two letters or characters.
Select point of interest categories from the
points of interest menu as needed.
24
Set-up and use QUICK REFERENCE
"Accept" ▷ Bluetooth®, Wi-Fi, and Siri voice control

are turned on the iPhone.
▷ / ▷ Wi-Fi and Bluetooth are enabled in the ve-
Press the corresponding button on the hicle.
steering wheel.
▷ Use the thumbwheel on the steering wheel Pairing the iPhone with CarPlay
to select from the list in the instrument clus- 1. "COM"
ter: "Accept" 2. "Mobile devices"
▷ Via touchscreen: tap on the corresponding 3. "New device"
entry on the Control Display.
4. "Phone calls and audio"
Dialing a number The vehicle's Bluetooth name is displayed
1. "COM"
5. On the mobile device, search for Bluetooth
2. If necessary, "Telephone"
devices in the vicinity and select the vehicle.
3. "Dial number:"
A control number is displayed.
4. Enter the numbers.
6. Compare the control number displayed on
5. Select the icon. The connection is es- the Control Display with the control number
tablished via the mobile phone to which this on the display of the mobile device, and
function has been assigned. confirm that the two match.
Establish the connection via the additional te- 7. "Use Apple CarPlay"
lephone:
The iPhone is connected to the vehicle and
displayed in the device list.
2. "Call via"
Apple CarPlay© preparation
Principle
CarPlay allows operation of select functions of
a compatible Apple iPhone via Siri voice con-
trol and iDrive.
Functional requirements
▷ Compatible iPhone, iPhone 5 or later with
iOS 7.1 or later.
▷ Corresponding mobile contract.
▷ If necessary, the setting for mobile data
must be activated on the iPhone.
25
QUICK REFERENCE On the road
On the road
Driving Releasing
With drive-ready state switched on:
Drive-ready state Press the switch while stepping on the
brake pedal or selector lever position P is set.
Turning on the drive-ready state The LED and the indicator light go out.
The parking brake is released.
Parking
Make sure the parking brake is engaged.
1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Press the Start/Stop button. Steptronic transmission
Turning off drive-ready state Engaging selector lever position D, N,

Steptronic transmission:
R
1. Engage selector lever position P with the

vehicle stopped.
2. Set the parking brake.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
The engine is switched off.
Auto Start/Stop function

The Auto Start/Stop function switches the en-
gine off automatically while stationary to save ▷ Gear position D.
fuel. The engine starts automatically under the ▷ Neutral N.
following preconditions: ▷ R is reverse.
Steptronic transmission: To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you
▷ By releasing the brake pedal. select a gear position or reverse, maintain
▷ When Automatic Hold is activated: step on pressure on the brake pedal until you are
the accelerator pedal. ready to drive off.
Engage selector lever position R only when the
Parking brake vehicle is stationary.
Setting
Pull the switch.
The LED on the switch and the indicator
light in the instrument cluster are illuminated.
26
On the road QUICK REFERENCE
Releasing the selector lever lock Light and view

Turn signal, high beams, headlight
flasher
Turn signal
Press the button.
Engaging P
Engage selector lever position P only when the
vehicle is stationary.
▷ Blinking: press the lever past the resistance
point.
▷ Triple turn signal activation: lightly tap the
lever up or down.
▷ Brief blinking: press the lever to the resist-
ance point and hold it there for as long as
you want the turn signal to blink.
High beams, headlight flasher

Press button P.
Press the lever forward or pull it backward.

▷ High beams on, arrow 1.
The high beams light up when the low
beams are switched on.
▷ High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2.
27
Lights and lighting ▷ Normal wiper speed: position 2.

▷ Fast wiper speed: position 3.
Lighting functions
Turn off the window wiper system and
Icon Function
flick wipe
Lights off.
Daytime driving lights.
Parking lights.
Automatic headlight control.

Adaptive lighting functions.
Low beams.
Press the lever down.
▷ Turn off: press the lever down until it
Instrument lighting. reaches the 0 position.
▷ Flick wipe: press the lever down from the 0
position.
Right roadside parking light.
Activate/deactivate rain sensor

Left roadside parking light.
Window wiper system
Turn on window wiper system
Activate: press the lever up once from its 0 po-

sition, arrow 1.
Deactivate: press the lever back into the 0 po-
sition.
Press the lever up until the desired position is

reached.
▷ Resting position of the wipers: position 0.
▷ Rain sensor: position 1.
28
Adjusting the rain sensor sensitivity Button Function
Air distribution, manual.
Defrost function.
Rear window defroster.
Active seat ventilation.
Turn the thumbwheel on the wiper lever.

Seat and armrest heating.
Cleaning the windshield

Air conditioning.
Opening the Climate menu.
For example, for the following
settings: upper body tempera-
ture adjustment, pre-ventila-
tion.
Intermediate stop
Pull the lever.
Refueling
Climate control Fuel cap

1. To open the fuel filler flap, press on the rear
edge, arrow. The fuel filler flap opens.
Automatic climate control
Button Function
Temperature.
Maximum cooling.
AUTO program.
2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.

Air recirculation mode.
3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached to
the fuel filler flap.
Air flow, manual.
Intensity AUTO program.
29
Gasoline Displaying the engine oil level

For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline should 1. "CAR"
be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur content. 2. "Vehicle status"
Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as 3. "Engine oil level"
containing metal must not be used.
Different messages appear on the Control Dis-
play depending on the engine oil level. Pay at-
Wheels and tires tention to these messages.
Tire pressure specifications Adding engine oil

The tire inflation pressure specifications can be
found in the tire inflation pressure table in the General information
printed Owner's Manual.
Safely park the vehicle and switch off drive-
ready state before adding engine oil.
After correcting the tire pressure
For the flat tire monitor: Adding engine oil
Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.
With Tire Pressure Monitor:
The corrected tire inflation pressures are ap-
plied automatically. Make sure that the correct
tire settings have been made.
With tires that cannot be found in the tire pres-
sure values on the Control Display, reset the
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM.
Checking the tire pressure Only add engine oil when the message is dis-
Regularly check the tire inflation pressure and played in the instrument cluster.
correct it as needed:
Observe the top-up quantity in the message.
▷ At least twice a month.
Take care not to add too much engine oil.
▷ Before embarking on an extended trip.
Observe recommended engine oil types.
Cleaning the wheels

The friction during hard braking may produce
brake dust and make the rims dirty. Brake dust
can be removed by cleaning the rims. BMW
recommends using vehicle care and cleaning
agents from BMW.
Electronic oil measurement
A current measured value is available after ap-
prox. 30 minutes of normal driving.
30
Providing assistance Teleservices

Teleservices are services that help to maintain
vehicle mobility.
Hazard warning flashers
Teleservices can comprise the following serv-
ices:
▷ BMW Roadside Assistance.
▷ BMW Accident Assistance.
▷ Teleservice Call.
▷ Your dealer’s service center.
The button is located in the center console.
Breakdown Assistance
BMW Roadside Assistance

1. "APPS"
2. "Installed apps"
3. "BMW Assist"
4. If necessary, "BMW Roadside Assistance"
A voice connection is established.
ConnectedDrive
Concierge service
The BMW Assist Concierge service offers infor-
mation on events, filling stations or hotels, and
provides phone numbers and addresses. Many
hotels can be booked directly by the BMW
Concierge service. The Concierge service is
part of the optional BMW Assist Response
Center.
1. "COM"
2. "BMW Assist"
3. If necessary, select the entry for the Con-
cierge Service.
A voice connection to the Concierge service is
established.
31
CONTROLS Dashboard
Dashboard
Vehicle features and options cle, e.g., due to the selected options or country
versions. This also applies to safety-related
functions and systems. When using these
functions and systems, the applicable laws
In the vicinity of the steering wheel
1 Power windows 111 Unlocking
2 Exterior mirror adjustment button 119 Locking
3 Opening/closing trunk lid 104

6 Lights
4 Seating comfort features Light switch 172
Memory function 121

Lights off
Daytime driving lights 174
5 Central locking system 99
32
Dashboard CONTROLS
Parking lights 173 With Steering Assistant 233:

Cruise control, distance control
and lane guidance on/off
Automatic headlight control 172
Adaptive lighting functions 174
Automatic High Beam Assis-
Cruise control: to store the speed
tant 175
Speed Limit Assistant: accept
Low beams 173
suggested speed 231
Interrupt or continue cruise control
Instrument lighting 177
Active Cruise Control: increase

Right roadside parking light 173 distance
Active Cruise Control: reduce dis-

Left roadside parking light 173 tance
Cruise control rocker switch

7 Pitman arm, left 10 Instrument cluster 151
Turn signal 140 11 Steering wheel buttons, right
Selection lists 167
High beams, head-
light flasher 141
Volume, see Owner's Manual for
Automatic High Beam Assis- Navigation, Entertainment and
tant 175 Communication 6
Voice activation system 52
Widgets 153
Trip data 168
Telephone, see Owner's Manual
8 Shift paddles for Navigation, Entertainment and
9 Steering wheel buttons, left Communication 6
Manual Speed Limiter 218 Thumbwheel for selection lists 167
12 Pitman arm, right

Depending on the equipment: Wipers 141
Cruise control on/off 220
Rain sensor 142
Cleaning the windshield 143
33
CONTROLS Dashboard
13 Horn, entire surface 15 Adjusting the steering wheel 121
14 Steering wheel heating 121 16 Unlocking the hood 342
In the vicinity of the center console
1 Control Display 48 8 Parking brake 137

2 Hazard warning system 357
Automatic Hold 138
Intelligent Safety 183
9 Driving Dynamics Control 135

3 Ventilation 273 SPORT drive mode
4 Glove compartment 289 COMFORT drive mode
5 Automatic climate control 268
6 Radio/multimedia, see Owner's Manual for
Navigation, Entertainment, and Communi-
cation 6
7 Controller with buttons 48
34
Dashboard CONTROLS
ECO PRO drive mode Panorama View 260
ADAPTIVE drive mode Dynamic Stability Control 213
10 Turning the drive-ready state 12 Steptronic transmission selector lever 144

on/off 132
11 Auto Start/Stop function 132
Parking assistance systems 240
In the vicinity of the headliner
1 Emergency Call, SOS 359 2 Indicator light, front passenger

airbag 183
35
CONTROLS Dashboard
3 Reading lights 178 4 Interior lights 178
36
Sensors of the vehicle CONTROLS
Sensors of the vehicle

Vehicle features and options Cameras
This chapter describes all standard, country- Front camera
cle, e.g., due to the selected options or country
Overview Front camera
Depending on the equipment, the following

cameras and sensors are installed in the vehi- Cameras behind the windshield
cle:
▷ Front camera.
▷ Cameras behind the windshield.
▷ Top view cameras.
▷ Rearview camera.
▷ Front radar sensor.
▷ Radar sensors, side, front.
▷ Radar sensors, side, rear.
▷ Ultrasound sensors in the front/rear bump- The cameras are located in the area of the in-
ers. terior mirror.
▷ Ultrasonic sensors, side.

Keep the vehicle cameras and sensors, as well
as surrounding areas, clean and unobstructed.
37
CONTROLS Sensors of the vehicle
Top view cameras ▷ Camera behind the windshield: if the cam-

era has overheated and been temporarily
switched off due to excessively high tem-
peratures.
▷ Camera behind the windshield: during cali-
bration of the camera immediately after ve-
hicle delivery.
If applicable, a Check Control message will be
displayed when the system limits are reached.
One camera is located at the bottom of each

exterior mirror housing.
Radar sensors
Front radar sensor
Rearview camera
The radar sensor is located in the front

The camera is located in the handle of the bumper.
trunk lid.
Radar sensors, side, front

System limits of the cameras
The cameras may not be fully functional and
may provide incorrect information in the fol-
lowing situations:
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
▷ On steep hills, in steep depressions or in
tight curves.
▷ When the camera field of view is covered,
for instance by a fogged up windshield or
labels. The radar sensors are located in the bumper.
▷ If the camera lens is dirty or damaged.
▷ With exterior mirrors folded in.
▷ When driving toward bright lights or strong
reflections, e.g., because of a setting sun.
▷ When it is dark outside.
38
Sensors of the vehicle CONTROLS
Radar sensors, side, rear Ultrasound sensors

Ultrasound sensors in the front/rear
bumpers
The ultrasonic sensors of the
Park Distance Control are lo-
cated in the bumpers.
The radar sensors are located behind the

bumper. Ultrasonic sensors, side
System limits of the radar sensors

The radar sensors may not be fully functional
or may not be available in the following situa-
tions:
▷ If sensors are dirty, such as due to icing.
▷ If sensors are covered, such as by labels,
films or a number plate baseplate.
▷ If the sensor is not aligned correctly, for in- The ultrasound sensors of the Automatic Park-
stance due to parking damage. ing Assistant are located on the side of the ve-
hicle.
▷ If the radiation range of the sensors is cov-
ered, e.g., by protruding cargo.
▷ When the field of view of the sensors is cov- System limits of the ultrasonic
ered, e.g., by garage walls, hedges, snow sensors
hills, vehicles or trailers.
The detection of objects with ultrasonic meas-
▷ After improper paint work on the vehicle in urements can run into physical limits, e.g., in
the area of the sensors. the following situations:
▷ On steep hilltops or in sharp dips in the ▷ In case of dirty sensors.
road.
▷ In case of covered sensors, such as due to
If applicable, a Check Control message will be labels.
▷ If the sensor is not aligned correctly, for in-
stance due to parking damage.
▷ After improper paint work on the vehicle in
the area of the sensors.
▷ For small children and animals.
▷ For persons with certain clothing, for in-
stance jacket.
39
CONTROLS Sensors of the vehicle
▷ In case of external interference of the ultra-

sound, for instance from passing vehicles,
loud machines or other ultrasonic sources.
▷ Under certain weather conditions, e.g., high
moisture, wet conditions, snowfall, cold, ex-
treme heat, or strong wind.
▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other
vehicles.
▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
▷ With moving objects.
▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as
ledges.
▷ With objects with corners, edges, and
smooth surfaces.
▷ With objects with a fine surface structure
such as fences.
▷ For objects with porous surfaces.
▷ With small and low objects, for instance
boxes.
▷ With soft obstacles or obstacles covered in
foam material.
▷ With plants and bushes.
▷ In automatic car washes.
▷ On uneven surfaces, such as speed bumps.
▷ Due to heavy exhaust.
▷ Cargo that extends beyond the perimeter of
the vehicle is not taken into account by the
ultrasonic sensors.
If applicable, a Check Control message will be
40
Operating condition of the vehicle CONTROLS
Operating condition of the vehicle

Vehicle features and options In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, follow the following:
This chapter describes all standard, country- ▷ Set the parking brake.
specific and optional features offered with the ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
series. It also describes features and functions turn the front wheels in the direction of
that are not necessarily available in your vehi- the curb.
cle, e.g., due to the selected options or country ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
versions. This also applies to safety-related also secure the vehicle, for instance with
functions and systems. When using these a wheel chock.
Warning
General information Unattended children or animals in the vehicle
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger
Depending on the situation, the vehicle is in themselves and traffic, for instance due to the
one of the three states: following actions:
▷ Idle state. ▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Standby state. ▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Drive-ready state. ▷ Opening and closing the doors or win-

dows.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
Idle state ▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
Principle leave children or animals unattended in the
When the vehicle is in idle state, it is switched vehicle. Take the vehicle key with you when
off. exiting and lock the vehicle.
General information
Automatic idle state
The vehicle is in idle state prior to opening
from the outside and after exiting and locking. For instance, the idle state is automatically es-
tablished under the following conditions:
Safety information ▷ After several minutes, if no operation takes
place on the vehicle.
▷ If the charge state of the vehicle battery is
Warning low.
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and ▷ Depending on the configuration via iDrive:
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident. one or both front doors will be opened after
Before leaving the vehicle, secure the vehicle driving when exiting the vehicle.
against rolling away.
41
CONTROLS Operating condition of the vehicle
In some situations, the idle state is not set au- Via button on the radio
tomatically, for instance during a phone call or
Press the button on the radio.
when the low beams are switched on.
The control display and the in-
strument cluster illuminate.
Establishing idle state when
opening the front doors
After a trip, the sleep mode can be established
by opening the front doors. For this purpose, Via start/stop button
the driver and front passenger must exit the
Press the Start/Stop button. The
vehicle.
control display and the instru-
1. "CAR" ment cluster illuminate.
2. "Settings"
3. "Doors/ vehicle access"
4. "Turn off vehicle after opening door" Display in the instrument cluster
Manual idle state OFF is displayed in the instru-
ment cluster. The drivetrain is
To establish idle state in the vehicle after com- switched off and standby state
pletion of trip: switched on.
Press and hold the button on
the radio until the OFF indicator
on the instrument cluster goes
out. Drive-ready state
Principle
Standby state Turning on drive-ready state corresponds to
starting the engine.
Principle General information

When standby state is switched on, most func- Some functions, such as the Dynamic Stability
tions can be used while the vehicle is station- Control, can only be used with the drive readi-
ary. Desired settings can be adjusted. ness turned on.
General information Safety information

The vehicle is in the standby state after the
front doors are opened from the outside.
DANGER
Standby, manual If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventilation is
insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can pene-
General information trate the vehicle. The exhaust gases contain
pollutants which are colorless and odorless.
Standby can be switched back on after the ve-
In enclosed areas, exhaust gases can also
hicle is automatically set to idle state.
accumulate outside of the vehicle. There is a
42
Operating condition of the vehicle CONTROLS
danger to life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and Steptronic transmission
ensure sufficient ventilation. 1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
The ignition is activated automatically for a
Warning
brief time and is stopped as soon as the en-
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and gine starts.
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident.
Most of the indicator/warning lights in the in-
Before leaving the vehicle, secure the vehicle
strument cluster light up for a varied length of
time.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, follow the following: Gasoline engine
▷ Set the parking brake. Depending on the motorization, full drive
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, power and the entire speed range may not be
turn the front wheels in the direction of available for approx. 30 seconds after starting
the curb. the engine. In this case, the vehicle will not ac-
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, celerate as usual.
also secure the vehicle, for instance with Additional information:
a wheel chock. ▷ Tachometer, refer to page 161.
▷ Power gauge, refer to page 162.
NOTICE
Display in the instrument cluster
Repeated attempts to start the vehicle or re-
peated starting of the vehicle in rapid succes- The activated drive readiness is indicated in
sion can cause the starter to overheat. This the instrument cluster, depending on the
also results in unburned or inadequately equipment, by the display of information re-
burned fuel, and can cause the catalytic con- quired for driving or the READY display.
verter to overheat. There is a risk of damage
to property, among other potential damage. Turning off drive-ready state
Avoid repeated starting of the vehicle, partic-
ularly repeated starting in rapid succession. Steptronic transmission
1. Engage selector lever position P with the
vehicle stopped.
Turning on the drive-ready state
Principle 3. Press the Start/Stop button.

The engine is switched off. The vehicle
Drive-ready state is switched on
switches into standby state.
via the Start/Stop button.
43
CONTROLS iDrive
iDrive
Vehicle features and options ranted, stop and use the systems and devi-
ces while the vehicle is stationary.
Input and display
Main menu
General information
functions and systems, the applicable laws The main menu is divided into two areas. The
and regulations must be observed. left area contains menu items that can be used
to call up all the iDrive functions. The right area
contains widgets that provide quick access to
Operating concept certain functions.
Principle
iDrive is the operating concept of the infotain-
ment system and includes a large number of
functions.
General information
Depending on vehicle equipment, the functions
can be operated as follows:
▷ Via the Controller. Media/Radio
▷ Via the Control Display. All functions of the entertainment system,
▷ Via the touchpad. e.g., radio stations or connection with external
devices.
▷ Via the BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant.
▷ Via the gesture control. Communication
Phone and message functions, e-mail and
Safety information calendar, and also the connection and man-
agement of mobile devices, such as smart-
Warning phones.
Operating the integrated information systems

Navigation
and communication devices while driving can
distract from surrounding traffic. It is possible Access to the navigation system, destina-
to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of tion input and traffic bulletins. Configurable
accident. Only use the systems or devices map views and other functions, such as points
when the traffic situation allows. As war- of interest and areas to be avoided.
44
iDrive CONTROLS
My Car character entered, with characters being

Information about vehicle status and trips. added as necessary.
Access to the Integrated Owner's Manual and Entries are continuously compared with data
also administration of driver profiles and range stored in the vehicle.
of adjustments for vehicle and iDrive. ▷ Only those letters and numbers are offered
during entry for which data is available.
Apps
▷ Destination search: place names can be
Management of apps, access to apps and entered in all languages that are available
vehicle functions. Additional apps and vehicle in iDrive.
functions can be purchased from the BMW
Store. Activating/deactivating the functions
Widgets Several menu items are preceded by a check-
box. The checkbox indicates whether the func-
Widgets provide quick access to fre- tion is activated or deactivated. Selecting the
quently used functions. The configured widg- menu item activates or deactivates the func-
ets display dynamic contents such as the navi- tion.
gation map, and serve as interfaces at the
same time. Function is activated.
Function is deactivated.
Letters and numbers
Letters and numbers can be selected when Status information
making the destination input, for example.
General information
Letters and numbers can be entered using the
controller, touchpad, control display, or voice The status field can be found in the upper area
control, depending on vehicle equipment. The of the Control Display. Status information is
keyboard's display changes automatically. displayed in the form of symbols.
Icon Function Telephone symbols

Change between capital and
Icon Meaning
lower-case letters.
Incoming or outgoing call.
Enter a blank space.
Missed call.
Switching between languages.
Signal strength of mobile phone net-
Use voice control.
work.
Confirm entry.
Network search.
Shift the input area to the left
Mobile phone network is not available.
or right.
The critical charge state of the mobile
Entry comparison phone has been reached.
When entering names and addresses, the se- Roaming is active.
lection is gradually narrowed down for every
Locating is active.
45
CONTROLS iDrive
Icon Meaning Programmable memory buttons

SMS text message received.
General information
Message received. The iDrive functions can be stored on the pro-
grammable memory buttons and called up di-
Reminder.
rectly, for instance radio stations, navigation
Sending not possible. destinations, phone numbers and menu en-
tries.
Entertainment symbols
Overview
Icon Meaning
Bluetooth audio.
USB device.
Connected Music.
Wi-Fi.
Apple CarPlay.
Android Auto.
Programmable memory buttons
Satellite radio is switched on.
Other symbols Storing a function

A function can be stored on a programmable
Icon Meaning memory button. A button with a stored func-
tion can be overwritten with another function.
Check Control message.
1. Select function via iDrive, for instance radio
Sound output active. station.
Sound output deactivated.
2. Press and hold the desired button
Voice activation system active. until the displayed bar on the control dis-
Request for the current vehicle position. play has loaded completely.
Checking the current vehicle position. Executing a function

Driver profile. Press the button.
Notifications.
The function will work immediately. This
Data protection. means, for instance that the connection is es-
Destination guidance active. tablished when a phone number is selected.
Passengers on board. Displaying the key assignment

Do not disturb. Touch buttons with finger. Do not wear gloves
or use objects.
46
iDrive CONTROLS
The assignment of the buttons is displayed in objects in the area in front of the Control Dis-
the upper area of the Control Display. play.
Deleting all button assignments

Switching on/off automatically
All button assignments can be deleted.
The Control Display is turned on automatically
1. Press and hold buttons 1 and 8 at the same when the vehicle is unlocked or as soon as the
time. control display is needed for operation.
2. "OK" In certain situations, the Control Display is
switched off automatically, for instance if no
operation is performed on the vehicle for sev-
Control Display and eral minutes.
Controller
Switching on/off manually
Principle The Control Display can also be switched off
manually.
The iDrive functions are displayed on the Con-
trol Display. 1. Tip the Controller up.
2. "Screen off"
Overview Press the Controller or any button on the Con-
troller to switch it back on again.
System limits
In the case of very high temperatures on the
Control Display, for instance due to intense so-
lar radiation, the brightness may be reduced
down to complete deactivation. Once the tem-
perature is reduced, for instance through
shade or air conditioning system, the normal
1 Control Display functions are restored.
2 Controller
Controller
Control Display General information
The buttons can be used to open the menus
Safety information directly. The Controller can be used to select
menu items and enter the settings.
NOTICE
Operation
Objects in the area in the front of the Control
Display can slip and damage the Control Dis- ▷ Turn to switch between menu items, for ex-
play. There is a risk of damage to property, ample.
among other potential damage. Do not place
47
CONTROLS iDrive
Button Function
Call up the navigation map.
Call up the destination input menu

for navigation.
Call up the previous display.
▷ Press to select a menu item, for example. Call up the Options menu.
Operating via the Controller

Opening the main menu
Press the button.
▷ Tilt in four directions to switch between dis-

plays, for example.
The main menu is displayed.
Selecting a menu
Buttons on the Controller
Selecting menu items
Button Function 1. Turn the Controller until the desired menu
item is highlighted.
Call up the main menu.
2. Press the Controller.
Go to Apps menu. Select a widget

1. Move the Controller in the main menu to
Call up the Media/Radio menu. the right.
2. Turn the Controller until the desired widget
Call up the Communication menu. is selected.
48
iDrive CONTROLS
It is also possible to select widgets in the in- ▷ Tilt the Controller to the left.
strument cluster. The current display closes and the previous
display is shown.
Adjusting the menu
▷ Press the button.
Adjusting widgets The previous display re-opens.
The widgets can be adjusted in the main ▷ Tilt the Controller to the right.
menu. It is possible to create multiple pages
The new display opens.
with widgets and switch between pages. The
adjustments can only be performed when the An arrow indicates that additional displays can
vehicle is stationary. be opened.
1. Select the desired page in the main menu.

Going to the Options menu
Only the currently selected page can be ad-
justed. The menu items can be used to access addi-
tional options.
2. Tip the Controller up.
Various options are available depending on
3. "Adjust main menu"
the menu item selected.
4. Select the desired adjustment:
Press the button.
▷ Symbol and select desired widget:
add new widget.
Available options are displayed.
The requested widget will be inserted in
the relevant position. A maximum of
four widgets can be displayed per page.
Entering letters and numbers
▷ Select icon: delete selected widget.
Input
▷ Add new page: "Add page".
1. Turn the Controller: select letters or num-
▷ Delete selected page: "Delete page". bers.
▷ Adjust the content of the widget: select 2. : confirm entry.
widget.
5. "Done" Deleting
Adjusting contents Icon Function

Depending on vehicle equipment, the contents Press the Controller: delete letters or
of the menus "MEDIA" and "COM" can be ad- number.
justed, for instance to remove the entries of
unused functions from the menu Hold the Controller down: delete all let-
ters or numbers.
1. Select the menu.
2. "Personalize menu"
3. Select the desired setting.
Changing between displays

After a menu item is selected, for instance
"Settings", a new display appears.
49
CONTROLS iDrive
Using alphabetical lists Entering special characters

For alphabetical lists with more than 30 en-
tries, the letters for which an entry exists can Input Operation
be displayed in a text box. Delete a charac- Swipe to the left on the
1. Turn the Controller to the left or right ter. touchpad.
quickly. Enter a blank Swipe to the right in the
2. Select the first letter of the desired entry. space. center of the touchpad.
The first entry of the selected letter is dis-
Enter a hyphen. Swipe to the right in the
played in the list.
upper area of the touch-
pad.
Operation via touchpad Enter an under- Swipe to the right in the
score. lower area of the touch-
pad.
General information
Depending on vehicle equipment, some iDrive
functions can be operated with the controller Using the map
touchpad. The map in the navigation system can be
moved via the touchpad. Tap the map on the
Selecting functions control display and then continue the operation
using the touchpad.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings" Function Operation
3. "General settings" Move map. Swipe in the appropriate di-
4. "Touchpad" rection.
5. Select the desired setting. Display menu. Tap once.
Entering letters and numbers Using alphabetical lists

▷ Enter characters as they are displayed on
Alphabetical lists with more than 30 entries
the Control Display.
permit a direct jump to letters for which an en-
▷ Always enter associated characters, such try exists.
as accents or periods so that the letter can
Enter the first letter on the touchpad.
be clearly recognized.
The first entry of the entered letter is displayed
▷ The set language determines what input is
in the list.
possible. Where necessary, enter special
characters via the Controller.
Setting the system language, refer to Operation via touchscreen
page 65.
General information
Depending on the equipment version, the Con-
trol Display is equipped with a touchscreen.
50
iDrive CONTROLS
You can tap on menu items and widgets. ▷ Delete selected page: tap "Delete
Touch the Control Display with your fingers. Do page".
not use any objects. ▷ Adjust content of the widget: tap center
of widget.
Opening the main menu 4. Tap "Done".
Tap on the icon.
Showing/hiding the display bar
In the upper area of the Control Display, it is
possible to show or hide a display bar with ad-
ditional functions.
▷ To show the display bar, pull down the dis-
play bar at the top edge of the screen.
▷ To hide the display bar, pull up the display
bar at the top edge of the screen.
The main menu is displayed. Changing between displays

After a menu item is selected, a new display
Adjusting widgets opens.
The widgets can be adjusted in the main
An arrow indicates that additional displays can
menu. It is possible to create multiple pages
be opened.
with widgets and switch between pages. The
adjustments can only be performed when the ▷ Swipe to the left.
vehicle is stationary. ▷ Tap arrow.
1. Select the desired page in the main menu. The new display opens.
Only the currently selected page can be ad-
justed. Entering letters and numbers
2. Tap the icon in the main menu.
Input
3. Select the desired adjustment:
1. When approaching the touchscreen, a key-
▷ Tap icon and select desired widget:
board appears on the Control Display.
add new widget.
2. Enter desired letters and numbers.
The requested widget will be inserted in
the relevant position. A maximum of
Deleting
four widgets can be displayed per page.
▷ Tap on the icon. Icon Function
The widget is made larger.
Tapping the icon: deletes the letter or
▷ Tap on the icon. number.
The widget is made smaller.
Tapping and holding the icon all letters:
▷ Tap on the icon. deletes all letters or numbers.
The widget is deleted.
▷ Add new page: tap "Add page".
51
CONTROLS iDrive
Using the map ▷ Say the commands and numbers fluently

as well as with normal volume, emphasis,
The navigation map can be moved using the
and speed.
touchscreen.
▷ ›...‹ identifies commands that can be spo-
Function Operation ken.
Move map. Swipe in the appropriate
direction. Functional requirements
▷ A language that is supported by the Per-
Enlarge/shrink Drag in or out with the fin-
sonal Assistant must be set via iDrive.
map. gers.
Setting the system language, refer to
Display menu. Tap once. page 65.
▷ Always say commands in the configured
Using alphabetical lists system language.
For alphabetical lists with more than 30 en- For the full range of functions, the following
tries, the letters for which an entry exists can functions should be activated, set or booked:
be displayed in a text box. ▷ Online speech processing, refer to
1. Tap the letter in front of the list. page 55.
A letter box is displayed. ▷ For all settings under
2. Tap the first letter of the desired entry. BMW ConnectedDrive, see Owner's Manual
on navigation, entertainment, and commu-
nication.
BMW Intelligent Personal ▷ Activation word, refer to page 53.
Assistant ▷ A driver profile.
▷ Synchronize driver profile, refer to
Principle page 73.
The BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant is a ▷ Relevant ConnectedDrive services from the
personal assistant that enables natural voice ConnectedDrive Store.
operation of various vehicle functions. The
Personal Assistant simplifies the operation of Activating the voice control system
the vehicle with the automation of processes
and habits. General information
There are various methods for activating the
General information voice control feature:
▷ BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant is avail-
able depending on national-market version. ▷ Press the button on the steering
▷ The system includes special microphones wheel.
on the driver side and the front passenger The microphone on the driver's side is ac-
side. tive.
▷ Say commands at a normal volume. ▷ Say the activation word ›Hello BMW‹ or a
Speaking directly into the microphone does personal activation word.
not improve the speech recognition. The microphones on the driver's or front
passenger's side are active with the follow-
52
iDrive CONTROLS
ing voice control, depending on where the The activation word should consist of multiple
activation word was spoken. syllables to ensure good recognition. An addi-
Then say the command. The activation word tion, such as ›Hello‹ is not necessary.
and the command can be spoken without 1. "CAR"
pause in one sentence. No other commands
2. "Settings"
may be available. In this case, operate the
function via iDrive. 3. "General settings"
4. If necessary, "Personal assistant"
Button on the steering wheel 5. "Voice control"
6. "Wake word"
1. Press the button on the steering
wheel briefly. 7. "Personal wake word"
2. Say the command. 8. "Set wake word"
Activation word
Activation word from third-party providers
General information Depending on the national-market version,
Speaking the activation word ›Hello BMW‹ or some third-party providers provide digital voice
the personal activation word will start the sys- assistants, e.g. Amazon Alexa.
tem. Supported voice assistants can be used with a
connected smartphone in the vehicle. In addi-
Preset activation word tion to the preset or personal activation word,
The preset activation word ›Hello BMW‹ can the activation word from connected third-party
be activated and deactivated. providers can be used.
1. "CAR" 1. "CAR"
2. "Settings" 2. "Settings"
3. "General settings" 3. "General settings"
4. If necessary, "Personal assistant" 4. If necessary, "Personal assistant"
5. "Voice control" 5. "Voice control"
6. "Wake word" 6. "Third-party providers"
7. "Wake word" 7. Select the desired setting.
Personal activation word Canceling voice control

In addition to a preset activation word ›Hello
BMW‹, a personal activation word can be set ▷ Press the button on the steering
up in the active driver profile. The personal ac- wheel again.
tivation word can also be changed or deleted. ▷ ›Cancel‹
▷ Tilt the Controller to the right or left.
▷ Press the Controller.
53
CONTROLS iDrive
Possible commands Windows and light

▷ ›Open the windows automatically.‹
General information ▷ ›Delete activation point for automatic power
Most contents on the Control Display can be window.‹
spoken as commands, e.g. menu items or list ▷ ›Ambient lighting.‹
entries. Say list entries as shown.
Instructions can be issued or questions can be Owner's Manual via voice operation
asked where the Personal Assistant provides You can ask simple questions about vehicle
support. functions and the operation of the vehicle.
The voice activation system and the feedback
Function examples
it provides does not replace the printed or
Integrated Owner's Manual. The speech rec-
Vehicle status and vehicle information
ognition and quality of the feedback may vary.
▷ ›Is my tire pressure still OK?‹
›How can the passenger airbag be
▷ ›Show me the sport displays.‹ deactivated‹
▷ ›Open Owner's Manual.‹ The Personal Assistant returns feedback.
When stationary, the section of the integrated
Navigation Owner's Manual is displayed on the Control
▷ ›Drive me to 300 Chestnut Ridge Road, Display.
Woodcliff Lake in New Jersey.‹
▷ ›Take me home.‹ Menu items
▷ ›Are there any traffic messages?‹ The commands of the menu items are spoken
just as they are selected via the Controller.
Communication 1. Activating the voice control system.
For example, when a mobile phone is con- 2. ›MEDIA‹
nected, calls can be started or SMS can be
3. ›Presets‹
sent.
The stored stations are displayed on the Con-
▷ ›Call John Doe on cell phone.‹
trol Display.
▷ ›Dial the number 1 8 0 0 8 3 1 1 1 1 7.‹
▷ ›New text message to John Doe: I'll be right Help for voice control
there.‹ ▷ ›Voice commands‹: to have the available
spoken commands announced.
Entertainment
▷ ›General information on voice control‹: have
▷ ›What song is this?‹ information on the operating principle of the
▷ ›Play Blue Suede Shoes by Elvis Presley‹ voice control announced.
▷ ›Next title.‹ ▷ ›Help‹: have help for the current menu read
out loud.
Climate control
▷ ›Turn off the air conditioning.‹
▷ ›Activate fresh air.‹
▷ ›I'm cold.‹
54
iDrive CONTROLS
Settings 5. "Voice control"

6. "Online speech processing"
Setting the voice control
You can set the system to use standard dialog Adjusting the volume
or a short version. Turn the volume button during the voice guid-
The short version of the voice control plays ance until the desired volume is set.
back short messages in abbreviated form. The volume remains constant even if the vol-
ume of other audio sources is changed.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
Using the voice activation of the
3. "General settings" smartphone
4. If necessary, "Personal assistant" Depending on the device, a smartphone con-
5. "Voice control" nected to the vehicle can be used via voice
6. "Response length" control.
7. Select the desired setting. The device must be connected via Apple Car-
Play or Android Auto.
Speaking during voice output
It is possible to answer during inquiries of the 1. Press and hold the button on the
voice activation system. The function can be steering wheel for approx. 3 seconds.
deactivated if inquiries are often undesirably The voice activation of the smartphone is
canceled, for instance due to background noise activated.
or conversations in the vehicle.
2. Release the button.
1. "CAR"
If activation is successful, a confirmation
2. "Settings"
appears on the Control Display.
3. "General settings"
4. If necessary, "Personal assistant" Automating routines
5. "Voice control"
6. "Speaking during voice output" General information
The Personal Assistant can automate routines,
Online speech processing for instance the automatic activation of the
Online speech processing improves the quality seat heating from a specific outside tempera-
of the speech recognition and search results ture. Rules are created for this purpose, which
for points of interest. To use the functions, can be activated and deactivated at any time.
data is transmitted to a service provider via an
encrypted connection and stored locally there. Activate/deactivate
1. "APPS"
1. "CAR"
2. "Installed apps"
2. "Settings"
3. "Personal assistant"
4. "Automate habits"
4. If necessary, "Personal assistant"
55
CONTROLS iDrive
Experience Modes Activate/deactivate

1. "CAR"
Principle 2. "Caring Car"
The Experience Modes combine different vehi- 3. Select the desired program.
cle functions in the car's interior to an overall
experience. The program can be stopped prematurely:
"End program"
General information
For example, the selection of a mode harmo- Adjusting a program
nizes the ambient light and seat climate con- 1. "CAR"
trol. 2. "Caring Car"
3. Select the desired program.
4. "Music settings"
▷ The Experience Modes app is installed in
the vehicle. 5. Select the desired setting.
▷ Drive-ready state is switched on.

System limits
Activate/deactivate ▷ The Personal Assistant provides informa-
tion about vehicle functions that may not be
1. "CAR"
installed in the vehicle.
2. "Experience Modes"
This also applies to safety-related functions
3. Select the desired mode. and systems.
The mode can be deactivated: "End" ▷ Certain noises can be detected and may
lead to problems. Keep the doors and win-
Adjusting the mode dows closed.
1. "CAR" ▷ Noises from the front passenger or occu-
2. "Experience Modes" pants can impair the system. Avoid making
other noise in the vehicle while speaking.
3. Select the desired mode.
▷ Major language dialects can cause prob-
4. "Settings"
lems with the speech recognition feature.
▷ A poor data connection influences the re-
sponse time of the Personal Assistant and
Caring Car the Search.
Principle
Different vehicle functions in the car's interior BMW Gesture Control
are harmonized for the driver in a short-term
program.
Principle
General information Several iDrive functions can be operated by
hand motion using BMW Gesture Control.
By selecting a program, the interior lighting, cli-
mate control and music selection will be ad-
justed. A program takes 3 minutes.
56
iDrive CONTROLS
Overview 4. "Gesture control"

5. "Gesture control"
Settings
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
4. "Gesture control"
The camera in the headliner detects gestures
that are carried out in the area of the center Carrying out gestures
console at the height of the Control Display. ▷ Perform gestures underneath the interior
mirror and next to the steering wheel.
Activate/deactivate ▷ Execute gestures clearly.
1. "CAR" ▷ The gestures can also be executed from
2. "Settings" the front-passenger side.
Possible gestures
Gesture Operation Function
Move index finger forward and backward in the Accept call.

direction of the screen. Select a highlighted entry in a
list during voice control.
Confirm pop-up.
Move hand across the width of the Control Dis- Reject call.
play in the direction of the front-passenger side. Close pop-up.
End voice control.
Slowly move hand clockwise in a circular pattern Increase the volume.

with the index finger stretched out forward.
Gesture is detected after one circular movement.
57
CONTROLS iDrive
Gesture Operation Function
Slowly move forearm counterclockwise in a cir- Reduce the volume.

cular pattern with the index finger stretched out
forward.
Gesture is detected after one circular movement.
Pinch with thumb and index finger and move Surround View: turn camera
hand horizontally to the right or left. view.
This gesture can only be exe-
cuted while the vehicle is sta-
tionary.
Move stretched out index and middle finger for- Individually assignable ges-
ward. ture.
Move fist with thumb extended to the left back Reverse Skip function.
and forth. The previous title is played.
Move fist with thumb extended to right left back Forward Skip function.
and forth. The next title is played.
Stretch out five fingers, form a fist and stretch Individually assignable ges-
five fingers out again. ture.
Assigning gesture individually Select function

1. "CAR"
General information 2. "Settings"
Two gestures can be assigned individually and 3. "General settings"
can be configured for certain functions, such
as: 4. "Gesture control"
▷ Destination guidance to home address. 5. "Function assignment gesture 1" or

"Function assignment gesture 2"
▷ Mute/Playback
▷ Control Display on/off
58
iDrive CONTROLS
System limits
Gesture recognition by the camera in the
headliner can be disturbed by the following cir-
cumstances:
▷ The camera lens is covered.
▷ Objects are located on the interior mirror.
▷ The camera lens is dirty, clean camera
lens.
Sensors and camera lenses, refer to
page 368.
▷ The gesture is executed outside of the de-
tection range.
▷ Wearing of gloves or jewelry.
▷ Smoking in the car's interior.
59
CONTROLS BMW Remote Software Upgrade
BMW Remote Software Upgrade

Vehicle features and options ▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
This chapter describes all standard, country- There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
specific and optional features offered with the leave children or animals unattended in the
series. It also describes features and functions vehicle. Take the vehicle key with you when
that are not necessarily available in your vehi- exiting and lock the vehicle.
functions and systems. When using these Functional requirement
functions and systems, the applicable laws ▷ Active ConnectedDrive contract.
▷ The integrated SIM card in the vehicle has
been activated.
BMW Remote Software ▷ Cellular network reception.
Upgrade ▷ Consent to the transmission of the corre-
sponding data has been granted in the
data protection menu.
Principle
Remote Software Upgrade can be used to up- Search for an upgrade
date the entire software of the vehicle. This
Standby must be turned on to search for a
makes new functions, functional enhance-
software upgrade.
ments or quality improvements available.
Automatic search
General information
The vehicle regularly searches for updates in
BMW recommends performing the Remote the background.
Software Upgrade as soon as it becomes
available.
Manual search
1. "CAR"
Safety information
2. "Settings"
Warning
4. "Remote Software Upgrade"
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger 5. "Search for upgrades"
themselves and traffic, for instance due to the 6. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis-
following actions: play.
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win-
dows.
60
BMW Remote Software Upgrade CONTROLS
Download of an upgrade and after the installation has been successfully

completed, the information about the version
Automatic download can be displayed on the Control Display.
The available data for Remote Software Up- This information is also available in the Con-
grade is automatically loaded into the vehicle. nectedDrive customer portal.
No download consent is required.
Displaying information
Via BMW app Display in the vehicle:
If an upgrade is available, information about 1. "CAR"
the new software version is displayed in the
2. "Settings"
BMW app.
The data for the upgrade can then be down-
loaded to a mobile device, for instance via an 4. "Remote Software Upgrade"
existing WLAN connection. 5. "Info about version"
The data can then be transmitted from the Display in the ConnectedDrive customer portal:
mobile device to the vehicle. www.bmw-connecteddrive.com.
This transmission method accelerates the
download of the data, for instance in areas Installing the upgrade
with limited mobile network availability.
1. Download the upgrade in the BMW app to General information

the smartphone. ▷ The installation of the upgrade may result
2. Follow the instructions in the BMW app. in a deletion of software changes, e.g., in-
creases in performance that have been
3. Establish connection to the vehicle.
made by parties other than the manufac-
▷ iOS: connect Bluetooth audio and turer of the vehicle.
WLAN.
▷ Modifications to the electrical system of the
▷ Android: connect WLAN. vehicle, for instance to control units, that
The data transfer of the upgrade from the have not been made by the vehicle manu-
mobile device to the vehicle occurs in the facturer can lead to an interruption of the
background only while driving. installation.
4. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis- ▷ The installation may take approx. 20 mi-
play. nutes.
Additional information: ▷ The installation cannot be terminated.
Connecting mobile devices to the vehicle, refer ▷ The vehicle cannot be used during the in-
to page 75. stallation.
▷ The vehicle can be exited during the instal-
Information about the version lation.
▷ The installation does not occur until the
General information consent was given.
The information about the version contains a
description of the updates included in the Re-
mote Software Upgrade. During the download
61
CONTROLS BMW Remote Software Upgrade
Prerequisites for the installation Starting installation

▷ The battery is sufficiently charged. The upgrade can be installed when all prereq-
▷ The outside temperature is above uisites have been met.
14 ℉/-10 ℃. 1. "CAR"
▷ The vehicle is parked in a horizontal posi- 2. "Settings"
tion.
▷ The hazard warning system is turned off.
4. "Remote Software Upgrade"
▷ The selector lever position P is engaged.
5. "Start upgrade now"
▷ The engine is turned off and sufficiently
Follow the instructions on the Control Dis-
cooled down.
play.
▷ Automatic engine start for pre-conditioning
is not activated via iDrive.
Functional limitations
If applicable, follow the notes for further pre-
During the upgrade, the majority of functions is
requisites on the control display.
temporarily unavailable, for instance:
If the prerequisites are not met, such as a suffi-
▷ Hazard warning system.
cient vehicle battery charge state, the upgrade
will not be offered for installation. ▷ Central locking system and, if necessary,
Comfort Access.
Pay attention to an offer for installation, e.g.,
after longer trips. ▷ Parking lights.
▷ Horn.
Preparing the vehicle ▷ Alarm system.
▷ Park the vehicle safely away from the public ▷ Emergency call.
road.
▷ Power windows.
▷ Cellular network reception must be ensured
▷ Operation of the trunk lid.
so that a fault message can be sent, for in-
stance if the installation is terminated. ▷ Checking the fuel filler flap lock.
▷ Close the windows. The driver's door can be locked and unlocked
from the outside using the integrated key.
▷ Close the trunk.
▷ Remove energy consuming devices, such After successful upgrade
as a mobile phone.
The vehicle can be used again immediately.
▷ The vehicle key must be located in the vehi-
cle for the consent for installation. Booked services such as. Advanced Real Time
Traffic Information or Remote Services are au-
▷ Switch off the exterior lighting. tomatically reactivated during the next trip.
▷ Remove the devices connected to the diag- After an extended stationary period, charge
nostic socket. the vehicle battery with an extended drive.
Malfunction
In the event of a malfunction, follow the in-
structions on the control display or in the BMW
app.
62
BMW Remote Software Upgrade CONTROLS
If the malfunction cannot be remedied, contact

a dealer's service center or another qualified
service center or a repair shop.
Validity of the Owner's Manual
Production of the vehicle

source.
After a software update in the vehicle

After a vehicle software update, such as via
Remote Software Upgrade, the Integrated
Owner's Manual for the vehicle will contain the
latest information.
63
CONTROLS General settings
General settings
Vehicle features and options Setting the time format
1. "CAR"
This chapter describes all standard, country- 2. "Settings"
that are not necessarily available in your vehi- 4. "Date and time"
cle, e.g., due to the selected options or country 5. "Time format:"
versions. This also applies to safety-related 6. Select the desired setting.
and regulations must be observed. Automatic time setting
Depending on your vehicle's optional features,
Time the time, date and, if needed, the time zone
are updated automatically.
Setting the time zone
1. "CAR"
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
2. "Settings"
4. "Date and time"
4. "Date and time"
5. "Automatic time setting"
5. "Time zone:"
Date
Setting the time
1. "CAR" Setting the date
2. "Settings" 1. "CAR"
3. "General settings" 2. "Settings"
4. "Date and time" 3. "General settings"
5. "Time:" 4. "Date and time"
6. Turn the Controller until the desired hours 5. "Date:"
are displayed. 6. Turn the Controller until the desired day is
7. Press the Controller. displayed.
8. Turn the Controller until the desired mi- 7. Press the Controller.
nutes are displayed. 8. Make the settings for the month and year.
9. "OK" 9. "OK"
64
General settings CONTROLS
Setting the date format and uses the data to analyze the attention of
the driver. This system supports various vehi-
1. "CAR"
cle assistance systems, e.g.:
2. "Settings"
▷ Fatigue alert.
▷ Steering Assistant with Assisted Driving
4. "Date and time" Plus.
5. "Date format:"
6. Select the desired setting. Activating/deactivating
1. "CAR"
Language 2. "Settings"
4. "Driver Attention Camera"
Setting the system language
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
System limits
The Driver Attention Camera may not be fully
4. "Language" functional in the following situations:
5. Select the desired setting. ▷ When the Driver Attention Camera is cov-
ered by the steering wheel rim.
Setting the units of ▷ When the driver is wearing infrared imper-

meable sunglasses.
measurement
Depending on the national-market version, Trip data settings
you can set the units of measurement for
some values, for instance consumption, dis-
Principle
tances, and temperature.
The intervals in which the trip data will be reset
1. "CAR" can be configured.
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings" Resetting trip data
4. "Units" 1. "CAR"
5. Select the desired menu item. 2. "Settings"
6. Select the desired setting. 3. "General settings"
4. "Reset trip data"
Driver Attention Camera
Principle
A camera that monitors driver activity is lo-
cated in the instrument cluster. The camera
evaluates the head position and eye opening
65
Speed warning Activating/deactivating pop-

ups
Principle
The speed warning can be used to set a speed For some functions, pop-ups are displayed au-
limit. A warning will be issued when this speed tomatically on the Control Display. Some of
limit is exceeded. these pop-ups can be activated or deactivated.
1. "CAR"
The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed
exceeds the set speed limit again, after it has
dropped below it by 3 mph/5 km/h. 4. "Pop-ups"
Adjusting
1. "CAR"
Control Display
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings" Brightness
4. "Speed warning"
1. "CAR"
5. "Warning at:"
2. "Settings"
6. Turn the Controller until the desired speed
3. "Displays"
is displayed.
4. "Control display"
5. "Brightness at night"
Activate/deactivate 6. Press the Controller.
1. "CAR" 7. Turn the Controller until the desired bright-
ness is set.
2. "Settings"
Depending on the light conditions, the bright-
4. "Speed warning"
ness control may not be clearly visible.
5. "Speed warning"
Accept current speed as the speed Reset vehicle data

warning
All individual settings can be reset to the fac-
1. "CAR"
tory settings when the drive-ready state is
2. "Settings" switched off.
1. "CAR"
4. "Speed warning"
2. "Settings"
5. "Select current speed"
4. "Reset vehicle data"
5. "Reset vehicle data"
66
General settings CONTROLS
When the saved settings in a driver profile are

synchronized with the ConnectedDrive ac- 4. Press the button.
count, these settings will remain in the Con- 5. Select the desired setting.
nectedDrive account.
Settings
Notifications It is possible to set which notifications are per-
mitted and which notifications will be displayed
at the start of the trip or upon completion of
Principle the trip.
The menu centrally displays all notifications ar- 1. Tip the Controller up.
riving in the vehicle in form of a list.
2. "Notifications"
General information 3. Tilt the Controller to the right.
The following notifications can be displayed: 4. "Settings"
▷ Traffic messages. 5. Select the desired setting.
▷ Check Control messages.

Display, notifications
▷ Messages on service notifications.
▷ Communication messages, for example e- General information
mails, SMS text messages or reminders.
The BMW Intelligent Personal Assistants al-
▷ Messages, for instance from the BMW app. lows the configuration of the range of mes-
▷ Messages from the manufacturer of the ve- sages that will be displayed. Depending on the
hicle, for instance technical information or situation, the desired condition can be acti-
important customer information. vated.
The number of notifications is additionally dis- Condition Description
played in the status field.
"Do not Incoming calls and non-criti-
disturb" cal notifications are not dis-
Go to notifications
played.
1. Tip the Controller up.
Icon is shown in the sta-
2. "Notifications" tus information with the
3. Select desired notification. number of messages.
"Passenger Private contents, such as

Delete notifications on board" messages, will not be dis-
Notifications can be deleted from the list. played directly.
Sustained Check Control messages or mes- Icon is shown in the sta-
sages from the vehicle manufacturer with im- tus information with the
portant customer information are displayed as number of messages.
long as they are relevant.
1. Tip the Controller up. Activate/deactivate
2. "Notifications" 1. Tip the Controller up.
3. Select desired notifications. 2. "Notifications"
67
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.

4. "Notification display"
68
Personal settings CONTROLS
Personal settings
Vehicle features and options Deleting personal data in the vehicle
This chapter describes all standard, country- Principle

specific and optional features offered with the Depending on the usage, the vehicle stores
series. It also describes features and functions personal data, such as stored radio stations.
that are not necessarily available in your vehi- This personal data can be permanently de-
cle, e.g., due to the selected options or country leted using iDrive.
functions and systems. When using these General information
Depending on the equipment, the following
data is deleted:
▷ Driver profile settings.
Data protection ▷ Stored radio stations.
▷ Stored programmable memory buttons.
Data transfer ▷ Travel and trip computer information.
▷ Navigation, for instance stored destina-
Principle tions.
The vehicle offers different services, whose ▷ Phone book.
use requires a data transfer to BMW or a serv-
▷ Online data, for instance Favorites, cookies.
ice provider. The data transfer can be deacti-
vated for some services. ▷ Office data, for instance voice memos.
▷ Login accounts.
General information ▷ Linking vehicle and ConnectedDrive ac-
When the data transfer is deactivated, the re- count.
spective service cannot be used. Altogether, the deletion of the data can take up
Only make these settings while stationary. to 15 minutes.
Settings Functional requirement

The data transfer can be configured in different Data can only be deleted while stationary.
stages or individually for separate services.
Deleting data
1. "CAR"
The personal data in the vehicle will be deleted
2. "Settings"
when the vehicle is reset to the factory set-
3. "General settings" tings.
4. "Data privacy" Additional information:
5. Select the desired setting. Reset vehicle data, refer to page 66.
69
CONTROLS Personal settings
Driver profiles This option is offered in new vehicle for a

limited period of time.
As soon as the engine is started or any button
Principle is pressed, the Welcome screen will be hidden.
Driver profiles can be created to store personal
vehicle settings. If the vehicle is used by multi- Setup assistant
ple drivers, each driver can create his personal
The setup assistant is offered in new vehicles
driver profile. When a driver profile is selected,
for a limited period of time on the Welcome
the vehicle will automatically apply the stored
screen to configure the most important set-
settings in the driver profile.
tings for the vehicle.
General information "Getting started" Select to start the set-up as-

sistant.
Three personal driver profiles can be created.
The set-up assistant can be started via iDrive
In addition, a guest profile is available that can at any time.
be selected by any driver. The guest profile is
active when a personal driver profile has not 1. "CAR"
been selected. 2. "Settings"
Changes to the vehicle settings are automati- 3. "General settings"
cally stored in the active driver profile or in the
4. "Getting started"
guest profile.
The driver is guided step by step through the
The vehicle can already adjust to the driver
following functions:
when it is unlocked. For this purpose, the rec-
ognition via a vehicle key or a digital key must ▷ Setting the system language.
be assigned to a driver profile. ▷ ConnectedDrive countries:
ConnectedDrive countries:The settings stored If the set-up assistant was opened in the
in the driver's profile can be synchronized with guest profile: create driver profile.
the personal BMW ConnectedDrive account. It ▷ Pairing mobile devices with the vehicle.
is thereby possible to use these settings in
▷ If the set-up assistant was opened from an
other BMW vehicles as well.
already defined driver profile: set up per-
sonal assistant.
▷ Depending on whether the set-up assistant
When a driver profile is created, switched or was opened from an already defined driver
deleted, the vehicle must move at a maximum profile or a guest profile: set up services or
of walking speed. confirm the explanation for the transmis-
sion of vehicle related data.
Welcome screen
▷ Set up other methods for use.
After the Control Display is switched on, the
The selected settings are stored in the active
Welcome screen will be displayed.
driver's profile.
The following actions can be carried out on the
Welcome screen: Guest profile
▷ Switching the driver profile. The guest profile can be activated by any
▷ Starting the set-up assistant. driver. Vehicle settings that are entered when
70
the guest profile is active will be stored in the ConnectedDrive countries:An existing Con-
guest profile. nectedDrive account must be assigned to a
In the following cases the guest profile is auto- driver profile. The following options are
matically active: available for this purpose:
▷ A driver profile has not been created yet. ▷ "Via My BMW app"
▷ No driver profile has been assigned to the Scanning the displayed QR code will ac-
vehicle key that was used to unlock the ve- cept the access data for the Connected-
hicle. Drive account from the BMW app.
▷ No driver profile has been assigned to the ▷ "Log in"

digital key that was used to unlock the vehi- The access data must be entered via
cle. iDrive.
The following limitations apply: ▷ "New registration"
▷ The guest profile cannot be renamed. Scan the displayed QR code and follow
▷ It is not possible to assign the recognition the instructions on the smartphone.
to the guest profile. 5. If the vehicle is in the guest profile:
▷ It is not possible to assign a PIN to the "Transfer current settings"
guest profile. The settings of the guest profile are ap-
▷ ConnectedDrive countries: It is not possible plied.
to synchronize with a ConnectedDrive ac- 6. ConnectedDrive countries:
count.
"Synchronize driver profile"
The guest profile is selected on the Welcome
Future changes to the settings are
screen or via iDrive:
synchronized with the BMW Cloud.
1. "CAR"
2. "Driver profiles" Selecting recognition
As an alternative for Steps 1 and 2, the pro- 1. "CAR"
file image can be tapped in the top status 2. "Driver profiles"
bar.
3. "Guest"
As an alternative for Steps 1 to 3, the profile
4. "OK" image can be tapped in the top status bar.
4. "Driver recognition"
Creating a driver profile
5. Select the desired setting:
1. "CAR"
▷ "with vehicle key"
2. "Driver profiles"
The vehicle key that is recognized in the
3. Tilt the Controller to the right. vehicle interior is assigned to the driver
As an alternative for Steps 1 to 3, the profile profile. If multiple vehicle keys are de-
image can be tapped in the top status bar. tected, the unintended vehicle keys
4. "Add driver profile" must be removed from the vehicle inte-
rior.
Non-ConnectedDrive countries:A name
must be entered for the driver profile. ▷ "With Digital Key"
71
The digital key that is recognized in the If no driver profile is assigned to this key,
vehicle interior is assigned to the driver the guest profile is activated.
profile. If multiple digital keys are de-
tected, the unintended digital keys must Setting up a PIN
be removed from the vehicle interior.
A driver profile with recognition cannot be acti-
6. "Activate linkage" vated without vehicle key and without digital
If the vehicle key or the smartphone with the key. In this case, a PIN can be set up to acti-
digital key is not carried with you or not recog- vate the driver profile.
nized, the driver profile can only be selected on Countries in which ConnectedDrive is not avail-
the Welcome screen when a PIN has been set able:If a PIN was not set up or the PIN is not
up. known, the driver profile cannot be activated.
Countries in which ConnectedDrive is availa-
Automatic recognition ble:If a PIN was not set up or the PIN is not
If recognition has been defined, automatic acti- known, the driver's profile can be activated
vation of the driver profile is triggered by the with the access data of the corresponding
following activities: ConnectedDrive account.
▷ By unlocking the vehicle using the button 1. "CAR"
on the assigned vehicle key.
▷ By unlocking the vehicle using an external
door handle. The assigned vehicle key or
the assigned Digital Key must be carried As an alternative for Steps 1 to 3, the profile
with you. image can be tapped in the top status bar.
▷ By automatic unlocking when approaching 4. "Driver recognition"
the vehicle. The assigned vehicle key or the 5. "using PIN"
assigned Digital Key must be carried with
you. Depending on the country, it may not Changing/canceling the recognition
be possible to recognize the Digital Key.
function
If there are several vehicle keys or Digital Keys
When another vehicle key or another digital
in the vicinity of the vehicle, activation of the
key is assigned to a driver profile, the current
driver profile is done according to the following
assignment must be canceled first.
priority:
▷ The key that unlocks the vehicle triggers 1. "CAR"
activation of the assigned driver profile. 2. "Driver profiles"
If the vehicle is unlocked using an unas- 3. Tilt the Controller to the right.
signed key, the guest profile is activated. As an alternative for Steps 1 to 3, the profile
▷ If a vehicle key and a Digital Key are de- image can be tapped in the top status bar.
tected at the same time, the Digital Key 4. "Driver recognition"
triggers the activation of the assigned driver
profile.
▷ "with vehicle key"
▷ If another key is detected on the driver’s
door after activation of the driver profile, the ▷ "With Digital Key"
driver profile of the last key detected is acti- 6. "Activate linkage"
vated.
72
When the vehicle and vehicle key will be As an alternative for Steps 1 to 3, the profile
handed over, such as for maintenance, carry image can be tapped in the top status bar.
out the following steps first: 4. "Settings"
▷ Setting up PIN. 5. "Synchronize driver profile"
▷ Canceling recognition using the vehicle key. 6. "Synchronize driver profile"
▷ Switching to the guest profile.
The handed over vehicle key can then no lon- Renaming a driver profile
ger be used to access the personal driver pro- Non-ConnectedDrive countries:
file.
1. "CAR"
Selecting a driver profile 2. "Driver profiles"
Depending on the recognition setting, the As an alternative for Steps 1 and 2, the pro-
driver profile will be selected automatically. file image can be tapped in the top status
bar.
If the guest profile is active, the driver profile
will be selected on the Welcome screen or via 3. Select driver profile.
iDrive. A PIN may have to be entered. 4. "Settings"
1. "CAR" 5. Enter a profile name.
2. "Driver profiles" 6. Select the icon.
As an alternative for Steps 1 and 2, the pro- ConnectedDrive countries:
file image can be tapped in the top status The name of the driver profile is transferred
bar. from the ConnectedDrive account. Changes for
3. Select driver profile. the profile name must be made in the Con-
nectedDrive account.
4. "OK"
All settings stored in the selected driver profile
Selecting a profile picture
are automatically applied.
1. "CAR"
Switching synchronization with the 2. "Driver profiles"
ConnectedDrive account on/off 3. Tilt the Controller to the right.
The settings stored in the driver's profile are As an alternative for Steps 1 to 3, the profile
synchronized with the personal Connected- image can be tapped in the top status bar.
Drive account. This means that it is possible to 4. "Avatar"
use the personal settings in other BMW vehi-
5. Select the desired profile picture.
cles with ConnectedDrive access as well, if this
function is supported. ConnectedDrive countries:
The synchronization with the ConnectedDrive The profile image is transferred from the Con-
account is enabled when a driver profile is cre- nectedDrive customer portal or the BMW app.
ated or via iDrive:
Deleting the driver profile
1. "CAR"
1. "CAR"
73
As an alternative for Steps 1 to 3, the profile

image can be tapped in the top status bar.
4. "Settings"
5. "Remove driver profile"
6. Select the desired driver profile.
7. "Delete now"
ConnectedDrive countries:If the driver profile
was synchronized with a ConnectedDrive ac-
count, the stored data in the ConnectedDrive
account will be retained.
System limits
A clear detection of the desired vehicle key
may not be possible in the following cases,
e.g.:
▷ The driver changes, but the vehicle is not
locked and unlocked.
▷ When multiple vehicle keys or multiple digi-
tal keys with an assigned driver profile are
located in the outer area on the driver's
side of the vehicle.
▷ When the vehicle was unlocked from the
BMW app.
ConnectedDrive countries:
A driver profile can only be created and
synchronized with the ConnectedDrive account
when the vehicle has cellular network recep-
tion.
The use of personal settings that are stored in
the ConnectedDrive account in other vehicles
is subject to technical limitations. For example,
settings may be stored for a system that is not
available, or available in a non-compatible ver-
sion, in other vehicles.
74
Connections CONTROLS
Connections
Connecting mobile devices to the vehicle

Principle General information
Various connection types are available for us- The following overview shows possible func-
ing mobile devices in the vehicle. The connections and the suitable connection types for
tion type to select depends on the mobile de- them. The range of functions depends on the
vice and the desired function. mobile device.
Function Connection type Symbol in the

device list
Making calls via the hands-free sys- Bluetooth.

tem.
Using phone functions via iDrive or
touchscreen.
Other functions, e.g. Contacts or
SMS.
Playing music from the smartphone Bluetooth audio.

or the audio system.
WLAN in the vehicle: Wi-Fi.

Using apps in the vehicle.
Wi-Fi hotspot: Wi-Fi.

Using the vehicle Internet access.
USB port: USB.

Playing music or videos from a USB
device.
75
CONTROLS Connections
Function Connection type Symbol in the

device list
Apple CarPlay: Bluetooth and Wi-Fi.

Using apps via iDrive and via voice
operation.
Android Auto: Bluetooth and Wi-Fi.

Using apps via iDrive and via voice
operation.
The following connection types require one- Displaying the vehicle identification
time pairing with the vehicle: number and software part number
▷ Bluetooth. With a search for compatible devices, you may
▷ Wi-Fi. have to state the vehicle identification number
Paired devices are automatically recognized and the software part number. These numbers
later on and connected to the vehicle. can be displayed in the vehicle.
1. "COM"
Safety information 2. "Mobile devices"
Warning 4. "Settings"
Operating the integrated information systems 5. "Bluetooth® info"
and communication devices while driving can
6. "System information"
distract from surrounding traffic. It is possible
to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of
accident. Only use the systems or devices
when the traffic situation allows. As war-
Managing mobile devices
ranted, stop and use the systems and devi-
ces while the vehicle is stationary. General information
▷ After one-time pairing, the devices are au-
tomatically recognized and reconnected
Compatible devices when standby state is switched on.
▷ After stored content on the SIM card or the
General information mobile phone, such as contacts, has been
Information on compatible mobile devices is detected, the data is transmitted to the ve-
available as follows: hicle and can be used via iDrive.
▷ On the BMW homepage. ▷ For some devices, certain settings are nec-
▷ Via Hotline/Customer Support essary, for instance authorization; see the
operating instructions of the device.
▷ At a dealer's service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Displaying the device list
All devices paired with or connected to the ve-
hicle are displayed in the device list.
76
A maximum of four devices can be connected The device remains paired and can be
to the vehicle via Bluetooth®, and a maximum connected again.
of ten devices can be connected to the vehicle ▷ "Delete device"
via Wi-Fi.
The device is disconnected and re-
1. "COM" moved from the device list.
2. "Mobile devices" ▷ "Connection mode"
An icon to the right of the device name indi- Select a connection mode, for instance
cates, for which function the device is used. Apple CarPlay.
When the icon is displayed in white, this func- ▷ "Telephone"
tion is actively connected to the vehicle. The Set telephone.
icon is displayed in gray when the function of
▷ "Bluetooth® audio"
the device is inactive.
Playback of music files on external devi-
Icon Meaning ces such as audio devices or mobile
Telephone. phones via Bluetooth®.
▷ "Apps"
Bluetooth audio.
With the installed BMW app, apps from
WLAN in the vehicle, Wi-Fi hotspot. the smartphone can be displayed in the
vehicle.
Apps.
▷ "Wi-Fi®"
Apple CarPlay.
Connects the device with the WLAN in
Android Auto. the vehicle.
Configuring the device Priority of the phones

Functions can be activated or deactivated for When multiple mobile phones are connected to
paired and connected devices. the vehicle, you can specify the priority of the
mobile phones. The mobile phone with the
The range of functions depends on the mobile
highest priority is preferred, for instance for
device.
outgoing calls and messages.
Follow the information on the Control Display.
1. "COM"
1. "COM"
2. "Mobile devices"
2. "Mobile devices"
3. Select the desired device.
4. "Settings"
5. "Priorities for telephones"
▷ "Connect device"
6. Select the desired device.
The functions that were assigned to the
7. Select the desired priority by sliding.
device before disconnecting are as-
signed to the device when it is recon-
nected. The functions may be deacti-
vated on a device already connected.
▷ "Disconnect device"
77
Bluetooth connection Frequently Asked Questions

All prerequisites are met and all required steps
were completed in the specified order. Despite
that, the mobile device does not function as
▷ Compatible device with Bluetooth interface. expected.
Compatible devices, refer to page 76. In this case, the following explanations can
▷ The vehicle key or BMW display key is in help:
the vehicle. Why could the mobile phone not be paired or
▷ The device is ready for operation. connected?
▷ Bluetooth is switched on in the vehicle and ▷ There are too many Bluetooth devices con-
on the device. nected to the mobile phone or vehicle.
▷ The pairing readiness is displayed on the In the vehicle, delete Bluetooth connections
Control Display. with other devices.
▷ Bluetooth presettings, such as visibility, Delete the Bluetooth connection from the
may be required on the device; refer to the device list on the mobile phone and start a
operating instructions of the device. new device search.
Too many Bluetooth devices with the same
Activate Bluetooth function are paired. Adapt the functions in
1. "COM" the device list on the control display.
2. "Mobile devices" ▷ The mobile phone is in power-save mode
or has only a limited remaining battery life.
Charge the mobile phone and deactivate
4. "Settings"
the power-save mode where required.
5. "Bluetooth®"
Why does the mobile phone no longer react?
6. Select setting.
▷ The applications on the mobile phone do
not function anymore.
Connecting the device
Switch the mobile phone off and on again.
1. "COM"
▷ Too high or too low ambient temperature
2. "Mobile devices" for mobile phone operation.
3. Tilt the Controller to the right. Do not subject the mobile phone to ex-
4. "New device" treme ambient temperatures.
5. "Phone calls and audio" Why can telephone functions not be used via
The vehicle's Bluetooth name is displayed iDrive?
on the Control Display. ▷ Phone functions are not configured for the
6. Compare the control number displayed on mobile phone.
the Control Display with the control number Connect the mobile phone with the tele-
on the display of the mobile device, and phone function.
confirm that the two match. Why are no or not all telephone book entries
7. A Bluetooth connection is established. displayed or why are they incomplete?
The mobile device is connected to the vehicle
and displayed in the device list.
78
▷ Transmission of the telephone book entries

is not yet complete.
WLAN connection
▷ It is possible that only the telephone book
entries of the mobile phone or the SIM card
General information
are transmitted. For certain applications, such as apps, the
▷ It may not be possible to display telephone data exchange between smartphone and vehi-
book entries with special characters. cle occurs via WLAN.
▷ It may not be possible to transmit contacts

from social networks.
▷ Standby state is switched on.
▷ The number of phone book entries to be
transmitted is too high. ▷ Compatible device with activated WLAN in-
terface.
▷ Data volume of the contact too large, for in-
stance due to stored information such as
memos. Activate WLAN in the vehicle
Reduce the data volume of the contact. 1. "COM"
▷ The mobile phone has only been connected 2. "Mobile devices"

as an audio source. 3. Tilt the Controller to the right.
Configure the mobile phone and connect it 4. "Settings"
with the telephone function. 5. "Wi-Fi®"
▷ Contact was created in the contact list of
the phone after the last synchronization.
Synchronize contacts again: "Reload Wi-Fi hotspot
contacts"
How can the telephone connection quality be Principle
improved? Compatible devices with WLAN interface can
▷ Adjust the strength of the Bluetooth signal use the Internet connection of the vehicle via
on the mobile phone, depending on the the Wi-Fi hotspot.
mobile phone.
▷ Insert the mobile phone into the wireless General information
charging tray. Up to ten devices can be connected to the Wi-
▷ Adjust the volume of the microphone sepa- Fi hotspot simultaneously.
rately in the sound settings.
If all points in this list have been checked and Functional requirements
the required function is still not available, con- ▷ Compatible device with activated WLAN in-
tact Customer Relations, a dealer’s service terface.
center or another qualified service center or re- Compatible devices, refer to page 76.
pair shop.
▷ WLAN is activated on the vehicle.
▷ Internet use is activated for the vehicle.
▷ Registration and data contract with a serv-
ice provider where required.
79
Connecting a device to the Internet Deactivating Internet usage via the

via the Wi-Fi hotspot Wi-Fi hotspot
Using the Internet for the first time via the Wi- Internet usage may be deactivated if the data
Fi hotspot requires registration and possibly a volume is used up, for instance.
data volume purchase from a service provider.
1. "COM"
Depending on the national-market version,
2. "Mobile devices"
data volume can be purchased via the con-
nected mobile communication device or from 3. Tilt the Controller to the right.
the ConnectedDrive Store. 4. "Settings"
1. "COM" 5. "Internet connection"
2. "Mobile devices" 6. Select the desired setting.
4. "New device" Apple CarPlay© preparation
5. "Internet, apps"
Hotspot name and hotspot code are dis- Principle
played on the Control Display.
CarPlay allows select functions of a compatible
6. Activate Internet usage via WLAN if neces- Apple iPhone to be used via Siri voice control
sary. and iDrive.
"Open settings"
7. Activate Internet usage. Functional requirements
"Internet connection" ▷ Compatible iPhone, iPhone 5 or later with
iOS 7.1 or later.
8. Tilt the Controller to the left.
Compatible devices, refer to page 76.
9. Search for WLAN networks on the mobile
device. Select network name on the device. ▷ Corresponding mobile contract.
10. Enter hotspot code on the device and con- ▷ Bluetooth, Wi-Fi, and Siri voice control are
nect. activated on the iPhone.
The device is displayed in the device list. ▷ If necessary, the setting for mobile data
must be activated on the iPhone.
Additionally, a QR code will be displayed on
the Control Display. Alternatively, this QR code ▷ Wi-Fi and Bluetooth are enabled in the ve-
can be used to pair the mobile device with the hicle.
hotspot.
All devices connected via the hotspot use this Pairing the iPhone with CarPlay
data volume. 1. "COM"
2. "Mobile devices"
4. "New device"
5. "Phone calls and audio"
The vehicle's Bluetooth name is displayed
80

Android Auto© preparation
Principle
the Control Display with the control number Android Auto allows select functions of a com-
on the display of the mobile device, and patible smartphone to be operated via Goo-
confirm that the two match. gle Assistant voice control and via iDrive.
8. "Use Apple CarPlay"

General information
The iPhone is connected to the vehicle and
The range of services offered depends on the
displayed in the device list.
country.
Operation
For more information, refer to the Integrated
▷ Compatible Android smartphone: Samsung
Owner's Manual or the Owner's Manual for
or Google smartphone with Android 10 or
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication.
an Android smartphone with Android 11, re-
gardless of the manufacturer.
Frequently Asked Questions
▷ Compatible devices, refer to page 76.
All prerequisites are met and all required steps
were completed in the specified order. Despite ▷ Corresponding mobile contract.
that, the mobile device does not function as ▷ Bluetooth and WLAN are enabled on the
expected. smartphone.
In this case, the following explanations can ▷ The smartphone must support a Wi-Fi con-
help: nection with 5 GHz.
The iPhone has already been paired with ▷ If necessary, the setting for mobile data
Apple CarPlay. When a new connection is set must be activated on the smartphone.
up, CarPlay can no longer be selected. ▷ Wi-Fi and Bluetooth are enabled in the ve-
▷ Delete the iPhone concerned from the de- hicle.
vice list.
▷ On the iPhone, delete the vehicle con- Pairing a smartphone with Android
cerned from the list of stored connections Auto
under Bluetooth and under WLAN. 1. "COM"
▷ Pair the iPhone as a new device. 2. "Mobile devices"
If the desired function is still not carried out af- 3. Tilt the Controller to the right.
ter the measures listed have been performed:
4. "New device"
contact Customer Relations, a dealer's service
center or another qualified service center or re- 5. "Phone calls and audio"
pair shop. The vehicle's Bluetooth name is displayed
81

the Control Display with the control number
USB connection
on the display of the mobile device, and
confirm that the two match. General information
8. "Use Android Auto" The following mobile devices can be con-
9. If necessary, finish the setup on the mobile nected to the USB port:
device. ▷ Mobile phones.
The smartphone is connected to the vehicle ▷ Audio devices such as MP3 players.
and displayed in the device list. ▷ USB storage devices.
Common file systems are supported. FAT32
Operation and exFAT are the recommended formats.
For more information, refer to the Integrated A connected USB device will be supplied with
Owner's Manual or the Owner's Manual for charge current via the USB port if the device
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication. supports this. Follow the maximum charge
current of the USB port.
Frequently Asked Questions The following uses are possible on USB ports
All prerequisites are met and all required steps with data transfer:
were completed in the specified order. Despite ▷ Playing music files.
that, the mobile device does not function as
expected. ▷ Playing videos.
In this case, the following explanations can Follow the following when connecting:
help: ▷ Do not use force when plugging the con-
The smartphone has already been paired with nector into the USB port.
Android Auto. When a new connection is set ▷ Use a flexible adapter cable.
up, Android Auto can no longer be selected. ▷ Protect the USB device against mechanical
▷ Delete the smartphone concerned from the damage.
device list. ▷ Due to the large number of USB devices
▷ On the smartphone, delete the vehicle con- available on the market, it cannot be guar-
cerned from the list of stored connections anteed that every device is operable on the
under Bluetooth and under WLAN. vehicle.
▷ Pair the smartphone as a new device. ▷ Do not expose USB devices to extreme en-
If the desired function is still not carried out af- vironmental conditions, such as very high
ter the measures listed have been performed: temperatures; refer to the operating in-
contact Customer Relations, a dealer's service structions of the device.
center or another qualified service center or re- ▷ Due to the many different compression
pair shop. techniques, proper playback of the media
stored on the USB device cannot be guar-
anteed in all cases.
▷ To ensure proper transmission of the
stored data, do not charge a USB device
82
via the onboard socket, when it is con-

nected to the USB port.
▷ Depending on how the USB device is being
used, settings may be required on the USB
storage device, refer to the operating in-
structions of the device.
Not compatible USB devices:
▷ USB hard drives.
▷ USB hubs.
▷ USB memory card readers with multiple
slots.
▷ HFS-formatted USB devices.
▷ Devices such as fans or bulbs.
Functional requirement
Compatible device with USB port.
Compatible devices, refer to page 76.
Connecting the device

Connect the USB device using a suitable
adapter cable to a USB port.
The USB device is displayed in the device list.
USB port, refer to page 285.
83
CONTROLS Opening and closing
Opening and closing

Vehicle features and options Safety information
This chapter describes all standard, country- Warning

The vehicle key has a button cell battery.
Batteries or button cell batteries can be swal-
lowed and lead to serious or fatal injuries
within two hours, for example, due to internal
burns or chemical burns. There is a risk of in-
jury or danger to life. Keep the vehicle key
and batteries out of reach of children. Imme-
diately seek medical help if there is any sus-
picion that a battery or button cell battery has
Vehicle key been swallowed or is located in any part of
the body.
General information
Depending on the equipment version, the Warning
scope of delivery includes two vehicle keys or
People or animals in the vehicle can lock the
one vehicle key and the BMW display key.
doors from the inside and lock themselves in.
Each vehicle key contains a replaceable bat- In this case, the vehicle cannot be opened
tery. from the outside. There is a risk of injury.
Depending on the equipment and national- Take the vehicle key with you so that the ve-
market version, various settings are possible hicle can be opened from the outside.
for the button functions.
A driver profile with personal settings can be
assigned to a vehicle key. Warning
To provide information on maintenance rec- For some national-market versions, unlock-
ommendations, the service data is stored in ing from the inside is only possible with par-
the vehicle key. ticular knowledge.
To prevent possible locking in of the vehicle If persons spend a lengthy time in the vehicle
key, take the vehicle key with you when exiting and are thereby exposed to extreme temper-
the vehicle. atures, there is a risk of injury or danger to
life. Do not lock the vehicle from the outside
when there are people in it.
84
Opening and closing CONTROLS
▷ If only the driver's door and the fuel filler

Warning flap or all access to the vehicle will be un-
locked when the button is pressed for the
first time.
themselves and traffic, for instance due to the ▷ If the unlocking of the vehicle is confirmed
following actions: with a light signal or a sound signal.
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button. ▷ If the welcome light is switched on when
the vehicle is being unlocked.
Welcome lights, refer to page 174.
dows.
Press the button on the vehicle key.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
If only the driver's door and fuel filler flap have
leave children or animals unattended in the
been unlocked due to the settings, press the
vehicle. Take the vehicle key with you when
button on the vehicle key again to unlock the
exiting and lock the vehicle.
other vehicle access points.
In addition, the following functions are exe-
Overview cuted:
▷ If a driver profile has been assigned to the
vehicle key, this driver profile will be acti-
vated and the settings that are saved in it
will be applied.
▷ The interior lights are switched on, unless
they were manually switched off.
▷ Folded in exterior mirrors are folded out.
If the exterior mirrors were folded in via the
button in the vehicle interior, they will not
1 Unlocking be folded out during unlocking.
2 Locking ▷ With alarm system: The alarm system will
Stationary climate control through Remote be switched off.
Engine Start 276 After opening one of the front doors, the vehi-
3 Opening the trunk lid cle is ready for operation.
4 Panic mode, pathway lighting The lighting functions may depend on the am-
bient brightness.
Unlocking Convenient opening

General information Press and hold the button on the vehi-
cle key after unlocking.
The behavior of the vehicle during unlocking
using the vehicle key depends on the following The windows open for as long as the button
settings: on the vehicle key is pressed.
85
Locking Closing
Press and hold the button on the vehicle
General information key in close range to the vehicle after
The behavior of the vehicle during locking us- locking.
ing the vehicle key depends on the following
settings: The windows close for as long as the button
on the vehicle key is pressed.
▷ If the locking of the vehicle is confirmed
with a light signal or a sound signal. The exterior mirrors are folded in unless they
were folded in during locking. The exterior mir-
▷ If the exterior mirrors are automatically
rors are not folded in when the hazard warning
folded in when the vehicle is locked. The
flashers are switched on.
exterior mirrors are not folded in when the
hazard warning flashers are switched on.
Switching on the interior and
▷ If pathway lighting is activated during lock-
ing.
exterior lighting
Press the button on the vehicle key with
Locking the vehicle the vehicle locked.
1. Close the driver's door. The function is not available for the first 10 sec-
onds after locking.
2. Press the button on the vehicle key.
▷ The interior lights are switched on, unless
The following functions are executed: they were manually switched off.
▷ All doors, the trunk lid, and the fuel filler flap Interior lights, refer to page 178.
are locked.
▷ Depending on the settings, parts of the ex-
▷ With alarm system: The alarm system will terior lighting will be switched on.
be switched on.
The lighting functions may depend on the am-
If the drive readiness is still turned on when bient brightness.
you lock the vehicle, the vehicle horn will honk
twice. In this case, the drive-ready state must
Trunk lid
be switched off by means of the Start/Stop
button.
General information
With Comfort Access: convenient To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehicle,
do not place the vehicle key in the cargo area.
closing
Depending on the vehicle equipment and
Safety information country version, it is possible to specify
whether the trunk lid can be unlocked with the
vehicle key and how the vehicle doors will re-
Warning spond to this.
With convenient closing, body parts can be Selector lever position P must be engaged to
jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure open the trunk lid with the vehicle key.
that the area of movement of the doors is
clear during convenient closing.
86
Safety information Integrated key, refer to page 98.

2. Place the integrated key underneath the
battery compartment cover, arrow 1, and lift
Warning
the lid with a lever movement of the
Body parts can be jammed when operating integrated key, arrow 2.
the trunk lid. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the travel path of the trunk lid is
clear during opening and closing.
NOTICE
During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and
up. There is a risk of damage to property,
among other potential damage. Make sure
that the travel path of the trunk lid is clear
3. Push battery in arrow direction using a
during opening and closing.
pointed object and lift it out.
Opening
cle key for approx. 1 second.
Switching pathway lighting on

cle key for approx. 1 second.
4. Insert a type CR 2032 3 V battery with the
It is possible to adjust the duration of the path- positive side facing up.
way lighting feature.
5. Press the lid closed.
6. Push the integrated key into the vehicle key
Pathway lighting, refer to page 174. until the integrated key engages.
Have old batteries disposed of by a
Replacing the battery
dealer's service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop
NOTICE or take them to a collection point.
Improper batteries in a battery-operated de-
vice can damage the device. There is a risk of Additional vehicle keys
damage to property. Always replace the dis-
Additional vehicle keys are available from a
charged battery with a battery with the same
service center or another qualified service cen-
voltage, the same size and the same specifi-
ter or repair shop.
cation.
1. Remove the integrated key from the vehicle

key.
87
Loss of vehicle keys Switching the drive-ready state on via

A lost vehicle key can be disabled and re- emergency detection of the vehicle key
placed by a dealer’s service center or another
If the lost vehicle key has an assigned driver
profile, the connection to this vehicle key must
be deleted. A new vehicle key can then be as-
signed to the driver profile.
Malfunction
General information It is not possible to switch on the drive-ready

A Check Control message is displayed. state if the vehicle key has not been detected.
Vehicle key detection by the vehicle may mal- Proceed as follows in this case:
function under the following circumstances: 1. Hold the rear of the vehicle key against the
▷ The battery of the vehicle key is discharged. mark on the steering column. Pay attention
▷ Fault of the radio link from transmission to the display in the instrument cluster.
towers or other equipment with high trans- 2. If the vehicle key is detected:
mitting power. Turn on drive-ready state within 10 sec-
▷ Shielding of the vehicle key due to metal onds.
objects. If the vehicle key is not recognized, slightly
Do not transport the vehicle key together change the position of the vehicle key and re-
with metal objects. peat the procedure.
▷ Fault of the radio link from mobile phones
or other electronic devices in direct proxim- Frequently Asked Questions
ity to the vehicle key. What precautions can be taken to be able to
Do not carry the vehicle key in close prox- open a vehicle with an accidentally locked in
imity to other electronic devices. vehicle key?
▷ Fault of radio transmission by a charging ▷ The options provided by the Remote Serv-
process of mobile devices, for instance ices of the BMW app include the ability to
charging of a mobile phone. lock and unlock a vehicle.
▷ The vehicle key is located in direct proximity This requires an active BMW Connected-
of the tray for wireless charging tray. Drive contract and the BMW app must be
Place the vehicle key in a different location. installed on a smartphone.
In the case of interference, the vehicle can also ▷ Unlocking the vehicle can be requested via
be unlocked and locked from the outside with the BMW ConnectedDrive Call Center.
the integrated key. An active BMW ConnectedDrive contract is
Additional information: required.
Integrated key, refer to page 98.
88
BMW display key If persons spend a lengthy time in the vehicle

and are thereby exposed to extreme temper-
atures, there is a risk of injury or danger to
General information life. Do not lock the vehicle from the outside
Thescope of delivery of the BMW display key when there are people in it.
includes an additional mechanical key. If the
display key is used, the mechanical key should
be carried with you, for instance in the wallet. Warning
The mechanical key is used like the integrated
key.
The display key supports all functions of the themselves and traffic, for instance due to the
standard vehicle key. following actions:
In addition, the following functions are also ▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
available:
▷ Display status of doors and windows.
▷ Display status of the alarm system. dows.
▷ Display service information. ▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
▷ Call up range with available fuel. ▷ Using vehicle equipment.
▷ With pre-heating: operate pre-heating. There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
Without pre-heating: operate pre-ventila- leave children or animals unattended in the
tion. vehicle. Take the vehicle key with you when
▷ Pre-conditioning through Remote Engine exiting and lock the vehicle.
Start
Additional information: Overview
Safety information
Warning
In this case, the vehicle cannot be opened
from the outside. There is a risk of injury.
Take the vehicle key with you so that the ve- 1 Opening the trunk lid
hicle can be opened from the outside. 2 Unlocking
3 Press and hold or press three times in quick
succession: panic mode
Warning Press briefly: pathway lighting
For some national-market versions, unlock- 4 Locking
ing from the inside is only possible with par-
ticular knowledge. 5 Display
89
6 Back If the information area contains more than one

page, then page indicators are shown beneath
7 Turn the display on/off
the information.
8 Micro-USB charging interface
A solid indicator denotes the current
page.
Reception range Swipe to the right or left with a finger to
The number of available display key functions change between the pages.
depends on the distance from the vehicle. If further information is available on a page,
▷ When you are in close proximity to the vehi- tap the appropriate icon.
cle, all functions of the display key are To return to the original page: tap on the
available. icon beneath the display.
▷ The status information can be called up in
the extended reception range. Lower status line
With pre-heating: the pre-heating can be The lower status line indicates whether or not
operated. the display key is within reception range.
Without pre-heating: the pre-ventilation can ▷ "Connected": the display key is within re-
be operated. ception range.
▷ Outside of the reception range of the vehi- ▷ "Updated": the display key is not within re-
cle, you can display the last transmitted ception range. It indicates when the last
status information from the vehicle. data transfer from the vehicle took place.
The icon is shown on the display if one of
the buttons is pressed outside of the reception Turning on/off
range. The display will go out automatically after a
short time to conserve battery power.
Display Hiding the display on the display manually:
press the button on the left side of the display
General information key.
The display is divided into the upper status To show the display:
line, the information area, and the lower status
1. Press the button on the left side of the dis-
line.
play key.
Upper status line 2. Then, swipe with your finger from bottom to
top to unlock the screen lock.
The upper status line displays the following in-
formation: To turn off the display to increase the usable
battery life:
▷ / Vehicle secured/vehicle unse-
cured. 1. If necessary, cancel the screen lock.
▷ Set time in the vehicle. 2. Press and hold the button on the left side of
▷ Charge state of the display key battery. the display key for longer than 4 seconds.
3. "OK"
Information area To turn the display on:
The information area can be used to access in- Press the button on the left side of the display
formation and perform additional functions. key.
90
Operating concept is retained until the battery is completely

discharged.
The following information shows how to ac-
cess the information and functions using the ▷ Charge the battery for at least three hours
main menus. before using the display key for the first
time or if the key has not been used for an
Main menu Information/Function extended period.
"Security / ▷ The display key can be used while it is be-
information" Door status. ing charged via the USB port. If the battery
is fully discharged, it may take some time
Alarm system status.
before the display key can be used again.
After alarm activation:
▷ Due to the large number of USB chargers
date, time, and reason
available on the market, it cannot be guar-
for the alarm activation.
anteed that every charger will function
properly. The charging time depends on the
charger used.
Window status.
▷ Charging via the USB port may heat up the
"Vehicle Service interval indicators charger and the display key.
information" of Condition Based Serv-
Charging in the wireless charging tray may
ice.
heat up the tray and the display key.
Status of the roadside
At higher temperatures, the charge current
parking lights.
through the display key may be reduced,
"Mobility info" Range with available fuel. and in isolated cases the charging process
may be interrupted temporarily.
"Preconditioning With pre-heating: operate
setting" pre-heating. ▷ When inserting the display key into the
wireless charging tray, make sure there are
Without pre-heating: op-
no objects between it and the wireless
erate pre-ventilation.
charging tray.
Stationary climate control
through Remote Engine Safety information
Start.
Warning
Display key battery
When charging a device that meets the Qi
standard in the wireless charging tray, any
General information
metal objects located between the device
Follow the following information: and the tray can become very hot. Placing
▷ If the charge state of the display key battery storage devices or electronic cards, such as
declines, the display is switched off auto- chip cards, cards with magnetic strips or
matically. The battery must be recharged cards for signal transmission, between the
so that the display can be switched back device and the tray may impair the card func-
on. The operability of the standard buttons tion. There is a risk of injury and risk of dam-
age to property. When charging mobile devi-
ces, make sure there are no objects between
the device and the tray.
91
Charging Malfunction
Via USB General information
Connect the display key via the micro-USB A Check Control message is displayed.
charging interface to a USB port.
BMW display key detection by the vehicle may
malfunction under the following circumstances:
In the center console
▷ The battery of the display key is dis-
charged.
▷ Fault of the radio link from transmission
towers or other equipment with high trans-
mitting power.
▷ Shielding of the display key due to metal
objects.
▷ Fault of the radio link from mobile phones
or other electronic devices in direct proxim-
1. Open the tray cover. ity.
2. Place the display key into the middle of the ▷ Fault of radio transmission by a charging
wireless charging tray in front of the cup process of mobile devices, for instance
holders. charging of a mobile phone.
Ensure that the display is facing up. Do not transport the display key together with
metal objects or electronic devices.
3. Close the tray cover.
In the case of interference, the vehicle can also
LED displays be unlocked and locked from the outside with
the mechanical key.
Color Meaning
Turning on drive-ready state via
Blue The display key is charging. emergency detection of the BMW
The blue LED stays illuminated once display key
the inserted display key is fully
charged.
Or- The display key is not charging.

ange Temperature on the display key
possibly too high or foreign object in
charging tray.
Red The display key is not charging.

Contact a dealer’s service center or
another qualified service center or It is not possible to switch on the drive-ready
repair shop. state if the display key has not been detected.
Proceed as follows in this case:
1. Hold the display key with its rear against
the mark on the steering column. Pay at-
92
tention to the display in the instrument Safety information

cluster.
2. If the display key is detected:
Warning
Turn on drive-ready state within 10 sec-
onds.
If the display key is not detected, slightly In this case, the vehicle cannot be opened
change the position of the display key and re- from the outside. There is a risk of injury.
peat the procedure. Take the vehicle key with you so that the ve-
hicle can be opened from the outside.
Resetting the BMW display key
If the charged display key cannot be turned on
anymore or if the display does not respond to Warning
entries anymore, the display key can be reset.
For some national-market versions, unlock-
Press and hold the following buttons on the ing from the inside is only possible with par-
display key at the same time for at least ticular knowledge.
10 seconds until the display is switched off and
If persons spend a lengthy time in the vehicle
then on again:
▷ atures, there is a risk of injury or danger to
▷ when there are people in it.
Key Card Warning

Principle themselves and traffic, for instance due to the
The Key Card allows the vehicle to be unlocked following actions:
and locked, as well as started. ▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
General information
The availability of the Key Card depends on dows.
the equipment and the country.
A digital key that has already been paired with
the vehicle is installed on the Key Card. The ▷ Using vehicle equipment.
digital key must be activated via iDrive. There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
Before leaving the vehicle, deactivate the Key leave children or animals unattended in the
Card or take the Key Card with you because vehicle. Take the vehicle key with you when
the active Key Card can be used to start the exiting and lock the vehicle.
vehicle. Always take the vehicle key with you to
a service appointment.
93
Connection to the vehicle 5. Select Key Card.

The communication between the vehicle and 6. "Key active"
the Key Card uses near field communication, A deactivated Key Card remains in the list of
NFC. paired digital keys.
Activating/deactivating Key Card in Unlocking and locking the vehicle

the vehicle
General information
The Key Card must be located in the smart-
phone tray and a vehicle key must be located
in the vehicle to activate the Key Card.
A vehicle key must be located in the vehicle to
deactivate the Key Card.
When the BMW Digital Key is activated for the
vehicle, a digital key can be used instead of the Hold activated Key Card directly and centered
vehicle key. on the external door handle of the driver's
A deactivated Key Card remains in the list of door.
paired digital keys. If the Key Card is not detected, slightly change
the position of the Key Card and repeat the
Activate Key Card procedure.
Starting the engine
NOTICE
If the Key Card and a mobile device are in the
wireless charging tray at the same time, the
Key Card could become damaged. There is a
risk of damage to property, among other po-
tential damage. Do not place the Key Card in
1. Open the cover of the smartphone tray.
the wireless charging tray at the same time
2. Place Key Card centered into the smart- as a mobile device.
phone tray.
3. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis-
play to activate the Key Card.
Deactivate Key Card

1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
4. "Digital Key"
94
1. Open the cover of the smartphone tray. Card with you. This ensures access to the vehi-
cle, even in the event of a smartphone failure.
2. Place activated Key Card centered into the
It is also helpful to have the vehicle key or Key
smartphone tray.
Card with you if the vehicle needs to be
3. Press the Start/Stop button to start the en- handed over to another person. You can then
gine. hand over the vehicle key or the Key Card, in-
With wireless charging tray: After starting the stead of your smartphone. Always take the ve-
engine, take the Key Card out of the tray to hicle key with you to a service appointment.
make tray available for charging compatible
smartphones. Safety information
Malfunction
Warning
The detection of the Key Card by the vehicle
may be disrupted by objects between the sen-
sors and the Key Card, for instance a wallet or
In this case, the vehicle cannot be opened
smartphone cover.
from the outside. There is a risk of injury.
Take the vehicle key with you so that the ve-
BMW Digital Key hicle can be opened from the outside.
Principle
Warning
BMW Digital Key allows the vehicle to be un-
locked and locked, as well as started, with a
compatible smartphone.
ticular knowledge.
General information If persons spend a lengthy time in the vehicle

The availability of the BMW Digital Key de- atures, there is a risk of injury or danger to
pends on the equipment and national-market life. Do not lock the vehicle from the outside
version. when there are people in it.
BMW Digital Key can be used with a compati-
ble smartphone or other compatible mobile
devices, such as a Smartwatch.
Warning
To unlock and start a vehicle with a compatible
smartphone, this function must be offered by
the smartphone manufacturer. The BMW app
themselves and traffic, for instance due to the
provides a check to determine if the smart-
following actions:
phone and the vehicle are compatible.
A driver profile with individual settings can be
assigned to a digital key. ▷ Releasing the parking brake.
Additional information: ▷ Opening and closing the doors or win-
dows.
Driver profiles, refer to page 70.
When using a smartphone as a digital key, al-
ways carry a vehicle key or the activated Key ▷ Using vehicle equipment.
95
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not Sharing digital keys

vehicle. Take the vehicle key with you when General information
Digital key allows the sharing of digital keys
with other people. This option is available via
the smartphone that is enabled as digital re-
Connection to the vehicle
mote control key. This function must be sup-
The communication between the vehicle and ported by the smartphone.
the smartphone uses near field communica-
tion, NFC. Forwarding authorization
To share the digital key, select the correspond-
ing function on the smartphone, for instance in
▷ The smartphone is compatible with BMW the Wallet app.
Digital Key
As soon as a digital key is shared with another
▷ The vehicle is linked with the Connected- person, the person will receive an invitation.
Drive account of the vehicle owner. When the invitation is accepted, the digital key
▷ The rechargeable battery of the smart- on the recipient's smartphone will be activated.
phone has a sufficient charge. The neces-
sary minimum charge of the rechargeable Limiting the range of functions
battery depends on the smartphone. Certain functions of the digital key can be lim-
ited before handing it over. For instance, if the
Enable the digital remote control Digital Key is passed on to a novice driver, the
key switch-off for driving stability control systems
Vehicle owner's smartphone is enabled as a can be disabled and the engine power can be
digital remote control key in the vehicle. The reduced. For more information, refer to the
vehicle owner must prove his authorization for ConnectedDrive portal and the BMW app.
the vehicle for this purpose.
Authentication
The proof of authorization can be started via
the BMW app or the activation code in the cor- Depending on the recipient’s smartphone
responding smartphone function, e.g., the Wal- model, an authentication may be required for
let app. Both vehicle keys must be located in security and safety reasons.
the vehicle to be enabled. An authorized vehicle key, the digital remote
Follow the instructions in the Digital Key menu control key or another method may be used for
in the BMW app or on the Control Display. authentication. Follow the corresponding in-
structions on the smartphone or the Control
The valid service period of the digital key may
Display.
be limited. The expiration date of the validity
can be checked in the BMW app.
Deleting a shared key
After a digital key has expired, it can still be
used to move the vehicle until the vehicle is
General information
used with a different vehicle key or digital key.
Shared keys can be deleted via the smart-
phone with the digital remote control key, the
smartphone with a shared key or via iDrive.
96
The deletion via the smartphone using the dig- Unlocking and locking the vehicle
ital remote control will not be performed until
the vehicle is used with a key other than the
key to be deleted.
The deletion via the smartphone with a shared
key or via iDrive is executed immediately.
Deleted digital keys will be removed from the
list of enabled digital keys.
Deleted digital keys cannot be restored.
Deletion via iDrive Hold the near field communication antenna of

To be able to delete a digital key via iDrive, an the smartphone directly and centered on the
authorized vehicle key must be located in the external door handle of the driver's door.
vehicle or the remote control key must be lo- The position of the near field communication
cated in the smartphone tray. antenna depends on the smartphone model.
1. "CAR" When locking the vehicle with the smartphone,
2. "Settings" make sure that all doors including the trunk lid
are closed.
4. "Digital Key"
Starting the engine
5. If necessary, select the digital key.
6. "Delete key"
Reset the function

To reset the BMW Digital Key function, an au-
thorized vehicle key must be located in the ve-
hicle.
When resetting the BMW Digital Key function,
all digital keys including the digital main key
will be deleted. 1. Open the cover of the smartphone tray.
After the reset, the vehicle can no longer be 2. Place smartphone centered into the smart-
unlocked, locked or started with a digital key. phone tray.
The digital remote control key must be ena- Ensure that the display is facing up.
bled again to be able to use BMW Digital Key
again. 3. Close the cover of the smartphone tray.
4. Press the Start/Stop button to start the en-
1. "CAR" gine.
2. "Settings"
3. "Doors/ vehicle access" Sale of the smartphone
4. "Digital Key" Delete all digital keys on the smartphone prior
5. "Reset function" to selling the smartphone. This ensures that
the smartphone can no longer be used for the
vehicle.
97
Sale of the vehicle

Prior to selling a vehicle, reset the Digital Key NOTICE
function or remove the vehicle from the Con- The door lock is permanently joined with the
nectedDrive account of the current vehicle door. The door handle can be moved. When
owner. pulling the door handle with the integrated
When the vehicle is removed from the Con- key inserted, paint or the integrated key can
nectedDrive account, all digital keys for the ve- be damaged. There is a risk of damage to
hicle will be deleted. property, among other potential damage. Re-
move the integrated key before pulling the
external door handle.
Malfunction
Digital key recognition by the vehicle may mal-
function under the following circumstances: Removing
▷ The smartphone is shielded from the sen-
sors in the vehicle by a smartphone cover
that is not suitable.
▷ Objects such as a chip card or the Key Card
are located between the smartphone and
the smartphone cover.
Integrated key
Press the button, arrow 1, and pull out the
General information integrated key, arrow 2.
The driver's door can be locked and unlocked
without the vehicle key using the integrated
Locking/unlocking via the door lock
key.
1. Pull and hold the door handle outward with
Depending on the national-market version, the
one hand.
integrated key also fits in the glove compart-
ment.
Safety information
Warning
ticular knowledge.
If persons spend a lengthy time in the vehicle 2. Guide one finger of your other hand from
and are thereby exposed to extreme temper- the back under the cover cap and push the
atures, there is a risk of injury or danger to cover cap out.
when there are people in it.
98
Use the thumb for counter support to pre-

vent the cover cap from falling out of the
Buttons for the central
door handle. locking system
General information
In the event of a severe accident, the vehicle is
automatically unlocked. The hazard warning
system and interior lights come on.
Overview
3. Remove the cover cap.

4. Unlock or lock the door lock using the
integrated key.
Buttons for the central locking system.
Locking
Press the button with the front doors
The other doors must be unlocked or locked closed.
from the inside.
▷ The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
▷ The vehicle is not secured against theft
Alarm system
when locking.
If the vehicle is unlocked with the integrated
key via the door lock, the activated alarm sys- Unlocking
tem will be triggered when the door is opened.
Press the button.
If the vehicle is locked with the integrated key
via the door lock, the alarm system will not be
activated.
Opening
▷ Press the button to unlock all the
doors.
Pull the door opener above the armrest.
▷ Front doors: pull the door handle on the
door to open the door. The other doors re-
main locked.
▷ Back doors: pull twice on the door handle
on the door to be opened; the first time un-
99
locks the door, the second time opens it. ▷ If the unlocking of the vehicle is confirmed
The other doors remain locked. with a light signal or a sound signal.
▷ If the welcome light is switched on when
Comfort Access
Principle
The vehicle can be accessed without operating
the vehicle key.
Carrying the vehicle key with you, e.g., in your
pants pocket, is sufficient.
The vehicle automatically detects the vehicle
key when it is in close proximity or in the inte-
rior.
General information Grasp the handle of a vehicle door completely.

Comfort Access supports the following func- In addition, the following functions are exe-
tions: cuted:
▷ Unlocking and locking the vehicle from the ▷ If a driver profile was assigned to the vehi-
door handle. cle key, this driver profile will be activated
▷ Convenient closing. and the settings that are stored in it will be
▷ Touchless unlocking and locking of the ve- applied.
hicle. ▷ The interior lights are switched on, unless
▷ Unlocking and locking the vehicle using the they were manually switched off.
BMW Digital Key. ▷ Folded in exterior mirrors are folded out.
▷ Opening trunk lid. If the exterior mirrors were folded in via the
▷ Opening and closing the trunk lid with no- button in the interior, they will not be folded
touch activation. out when unlocking.
▷ With alarm system: The alarm system will
Functional requirements be switched off.
▷ To lock the vehicle, the vehicle key must be
outside of the vehicle near the doors. Locking
▷ The next unlocking and locking cycle is not
possible until after approx. 2 seconds.
General information
The behavior of the vehicle during locking via
Unlocking the Comfort Access depends on the following
settings:
General information ▷ If the locking of the vehicle is confirmed
with a light signal or a sound signal.
The behavior of the vehicle during unlocking
via the Comfort Access depends on the follow- ▷ If the exterior mirrors are automatically
ing settings: folded in when the vehicle is locked. The
100
exterior mirrors are not folded in when the Closing

hazard warning flashers are switched on.
▷ If pathway lighting is activated during lock-
ing.
Locking the vehicle

Close the driver's door.

closed vehicle door with your finger and hold it
there without grasping the door handle.
In addition to locking, the windows also closed.

The exterior mirrors are folded in unless they
were folded in during locking. The exterior mir-
rors are not folded in when the hazard warning
closed vehicle door with your finger for approx.
flashers are switched on.
1 second without grasping the door handle.
The following functions are executed: Opening the trunk lid

▷ All doors, the trunk lid, and the fuel filler flap
are locked. General information
▷ With alarm system: The alarm system will If you open the trunk lid via Comfort Access,
be switched on. locked doors will not be unlocked.
To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehicle,
Convenient closing do not place the vehicle key in the cargo area.
Safety information Safety information
Warning Warning
With convenient closing, body parts can be Body parts can be jammed when operating
jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure the trunk lid. There is a risk of injury. Make
that the area of movement of the doors is sure that the travel path of the trunk lid is
clear during convenient closing. clear during opening and closing.
101
Safety information
NOTICE
During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and Warning
up. There is a risk of damage to property,
During no-touch activation, vehicle parts may
be touched, such as the hot exhaust system.
There is a risk of injury. When moving your
foot, make sure you have a firm stance and
do not touch the vehicle.
Opening
Warning
Body parts can be jammed when operating
the trunk lid. There is a risk of injury. Make
NOTICE
Press the button on the outer side of the trunk During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and
lid. up. There is a risk of damage to property,
Opening and closing the trunk lid
with no-touch activation
Principle Functional requirements

The trunk lid can be opened and closed with Selector lever position P must be engaged for
no-touch activation using the vehicle key you touchless opening of the trunk lid.
are carrying. Two sensors detect a forward-di- Contactless opening and closing of the trunk
rected foot movement in the central rear area lid must be activated in the settings.
and the trunk lid is opened or closed.
Settings
General information
Contactless opening and closing of the tailgate
To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehicle, can be switched on or off.
If the vehicle key is in the sensor area, the 1. "CAR"
trunk lid may open or close inadvertently if you 2. "Settings"
unintentionally move your foot or if a foot 3. "Doors/ vehicle access"
movement is detected.
4. "Tailgate"
The sensor has an approximate range of
5 ft/1.50 m extending from the rear area.
If contactless opening of the trunk lid is acti-
vated, the locked doors will not be unlocked.
102
Performing the foot movement keep the vehicle key at a sufficient distance
1. Stand in the middle behind the vehicle at from the rear of the vehicle.
approx. one arm's length away from the
rear end. Touchless unlocking and locking of
2. Wave a foot under the vehicle in the driving the vehicle
direction and immediately pull it back. With
this movement, the leg must pass through Principle
the ranges of both sensors. When the driver approaches the locked vehicle
with the vehicle key, the vehicle is unlocked.
When the driver walks away from the unlocked
vehicle with the vehicle key, the vehicle will be
locked.
General information
The vehicle will be unlocked when an author-
ized vehicle key is detected in the unlocking
zone.
The unlocking zone is located within a radius
Opening of approx. 3 ft/1 m around the door handles.
Perform the foot movement described earlier. The vehicle will be locked when the vehicle key
Before the trunk lid opens, the hazard warning leaves the locking zone.
system flashes. The locking zone is located within a radius of
approx. 7 ft/2 m around the door handles.
Closing
If the vehicle key is located in the unlocking
Perform the foot movement described earlier. zone for an extended period of time without
The hazard warning system flashes and an movement, the vehicle will be locked automati-
acoustic signal sounds. cally.
Moving your foot again will stop the closing If a passenger is detected in the front passen-
motion, and moving it one more time after that ger seat during locking and the seat belt of the
will re-open the trunk lid. front passenger is engaged in the seat belt
buckle during locking:
System limits ▷ The vehicle will be locked but not secured
The detection of the foot movement may be against theft.
limited due to the following external conditions: ▷ The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
▷ Ice, snow or slush on the rear of the vehicle. The behavior of the vehicle during touchless
▷ Dirt or road salt on the rear of the vehicle. unlocking/locking depends on the following
settings:
Movement in the range of the sensors may
cause unintended opening or closing of the ▷ If the automatic unlocking is active.
cargo area, for instance due to water running ▷ If the automatic locking is active.
down when cleaning the vehicle or with heavy ▷ If only the driver's door and the fuel filler
rainfall. To prevent such unintended opening flap or all access to the vehicle will be un-
or closing of the cargo area in such cases, locked.
103
Only driver's door and fuel filler flap: the ▷ Shielding of the vehicle key due to metal
driver's door and fuel filler flap will only be objects.
unlocked when the driver approaches the Do not transport the vehicle key together
vehicle on the driver's side. with metal objects.
All vehicle entry points: the vehicle will be ▷ Fault of the radio link from mobile phones
unlocked regardless of the side on which or other electronic devices in direct proxim-
the driver approaches the vehicle. ity to the vehicle key.
▷ If the unlocking and locking of the vehicle is Do not carry the vehicle key in close prox-
confirmed with a light signal or a sound sig- imity to other electronic devices.
nal.
Wet or snowy conditions may disrupt the lock-
▷ If the welcome light is switched on when ing request detection on the door handles.
In the case of a malfunction, unlock and lock
▷ If pathway lighting is activated during lock- the vehicle using the buttons of the vehicle key
ing. or use the integrated key.
▷ If the exterior mirrors are automatically Additional information:
folded out and in when the vehicle is un-
locked and locked.
Functional requirements Trunk lid

▷ The drive-ready state must be turned off.
▷ Unlocking: when entering the unlocking General information
zone, the doors and trunk lid must be
closed. To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehicle,
▷ Locking: when leaving the locking zone, the
doors and trunk lid must be closed. Depending on the equipment and national-
market version, it is possible to specify
▷ For contactless locking of the vehicle, no whether the trunk lid can be unlocked with the
second vehicle key may be within a radius vehicle key and how the vehicle doors will
of 18 ft/6 m around the vehicle. function.
▷ If the vehicle has been in the idle state for Selector lever position P must be engaged to
several days, contactless unlocking/locking open the trunk lid with the vehicle key.
will only be available after the vehicle has
been driven. It may not be possible to open the trunk lid
when the vehicle is in valet parking mode.
Malfunction Additional information:
Vehicle key detection by the vehicle may mal- Valet parking mode, refer to page 106.
function under the following circumstances:
▷ The battery of the vehicle key is discharged.
For replacing the battery, refer to page 87.
▷ Fault of the radio link from transmission
towers or other equipment with high trans-
mitting power.
104
Safety information Depending on the setting, the doors may

also be unlocked.
Warning From the inside

Body parts can be jammed when operating Press the button in the storage compart-
the trunk lid. There is a risk of injury. Make ment of the driver's door.
Interruption of the opening procedure
The opening procedure is interrupted:
NOTICE ▷ When the vehicle starts moving.
During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and ▷ By pressing the button on the outer side of
up. There is a risk of damage to property, the trunk lid. Pressing again closes the
among other potential damage. Make sure trunk lid.
that the travel path of the trunk lid is clear ▷ By pressing the button on the inside of the
during opening and closing. trunk lid. Pressing again closes the trunk lid.
▷ By pressing the button on the vehicle key.
Pressing again continues the opening pro-
Opening and Closing
cedure.
Opening ▷ By pressing or pulling the button in the driv-
er's door. Pressing again continues the
From the outside opening procedure.
Closing
From the outside
▷ Press the button on the inside of

the trunk lid.
With Comfort Access:
▷ Press the button on the inside of

▷ Unlock the vehicle and then press the but- the trunk lid.
ton on the outer side of the trunk lid.
The vehicle will be locked after closing the
▷ With Comfort Access: carry the vehicle key trunk lid. The driver's door must be closed
with you and press the button on the outer for this purpose and the vehicle key must
side of the trunk lid. be outside of the vehicle in the area of the
trunk lid.
▷ Press and hold the button on the
vehicle key for approx. 1 second.
From the inside
Pull and hold the button in the storage
compartment of the driver's door.
105
The vehicle key must be located inside the ve-

hicle for this function.
Soft-close automatic
An acoustic signal sounds before the trunk lid
function
is closed.
Safety information
Interruption of the closing procedure
The closing procedure is interrupted in the fol-
Warning
lowing situations:
Body parts can be jammed while operating
▷ If the vehicle drives off with a jerky move-
the doors. There is a risk of injury. Make sure
ment.
that the area of movement of the doors is
▷ By pressing the button on the outer side of clear during opening and closing.
the trunk lid. Pressing again re-opens the
trunk lid.
▷ By pressing the button on the inside of the Closing
trunk lid. Pressing again re-opens the trunk To close the doors, push lightly.
lid.
The closing happens automatically.
▷ By releasing the button in the driver's door.
Pulling again and holding continues the
closing motion. Valet parking mode
Malfunction Principle
In the event of an electrical malfunction, oper-
In the valet parking mode, the Control Display
ate the unlocked trunk lid manually with a slow
is disabled. The operation via iDrive is no lon-
and smooth motion.
ger possible.
E.g., this mode can be used when the vehicle
Trunk emergency unlocking
is handed over for valet parking.
General information
In the valet parking mode, it is not possible to
change vehicle settings via iDrive. Personal
profiles cannot be changed. Personal data
cannot be displayed.
Additionally, the following actions are carried
out:
Pull the handle inside the cargo area. ▷ The volume of the audio system is limited.
▷ The integrated Universal Remote Control is
The trunk lid unlocks. deactivated.
▷ The Dynamic Stability Control cannot be
turned off.
▷ Depending on the vehicle, the trunk lid can
be locked and disconnected from the cen-
tral locking system.
106
Functional requirements The trunk lid will be locked and discon-

nected from the central locking system.
▷ At least one driver profile has been created.
2. "Activate now"
▷ A driver profile or the guest profile is active.
▷ At least one driver profile has an assigned Driver profile without PIN
ConnectedDrive account.
A PIN must be assigned to the driver profile.
Accessing the menu for the valet 1. "PIN"
parking mode 2. Enter PIN.
3. "Lock tailgate as well"
Via the switch-off screen
The trunk lid will be locked and discon-
After switching off drive-ready state the nected from the central locking system.
switch-off screen will be displayed. Select the
4. "Activate linkage"
entry for the valet parking mode on the switch-
off screen. 5. "Activate now"
Via the display bar at the upper edge Guest profile

of the Control Display The guest profile is the active driver profile.
1. Tip the Controller up. A PIN must be entered.
2. "Valet parking mode" 1. "PIN"
2. Enter PIN.
Via the vehicle settings
1. "CAR"
The trunk lid will be locked and discon-
2. "Settings"
nected from the central locking system.
4. "Activate now"
4. "Valet parking mode"
This PIN can be used once to deactivate
the valet parking mode for the active guest
Activating the valet parking mode profile.
General information Deactivating valet parking mode

Before activating the valet parking mode, a
PIN must be set up to be able to deactivate the General information
valet parking mode at a future time.
The lock screen of the valet parking mode is
The procedure for the PIN input varies de- displayed on the Control Display.
pending on the active driver profile.
The deactivation of the valet parking mode de-
pends on which driver profile is selected on the
Driver profile with PIN lock screen.
A PIN has been stored for the active driver pro-
file.
It is not necessary to enter another PIN.
107
Driver profile with PIN Unlocking and locking

Regardless of which driver activated the valet
parking mode, a driver can deactivate the valet Doors
parking mode by entering his/her PIN. 1. "CAR"
1. Select driver profile. 2. "Settings"
2. Enter the assigned PIN for the driver profile. 3. "Key button settings"
If you forgot the PIN, the valet parking mode 4. Select the icon.
must be deactivated by entering the assigned 5. Select the desired setting:
ConnectedDrive access data.
▷ "Driver's door only"
Driver profile without PIN Only the driver's door and the fuel filler
flap are unlocked. Pressing again un-
The valet parking mode was activated by an- locks the entire vehicle.
other person. To deactivate the valet parking
mode, a driver without a PIN has to enter the ▷ "All doors"
access data for his ConnectedDrive account. The entire vehicle is unlocked.
1. Select driver profile.

Confirmation signals from the vehicle
2. Enter the ConnectedDrive access data as-
1. "CAR"
signed to the driver profile.
2. "Settings"
Guest profile 3. "Doors/ vehicle access"
In the guest profile, the valet parking mode can 4. Deactivate or activate the desired confirma-
only be deactivated if the valet parking mode tion signals:
was activated in the guest profile. ▷ "Flash when locking/unlocking"
1. Select guest profile. Unlocking is signaled by blinking twice,
2. Enter the PIN that was specified during ac- locking by blinking once.
tivation. ▷ With alarm system:
If the PIN has been forgotten, the valet parking "Sound when locking/unlocking"
mode must be deactivated via a personal Unlocking is confirmed with two sound
driver profile. signals, locking is confirmed with one
sound signal.
Settings Folding mirrors in automatically

1. "CAR"
Depending on the equipment and national- 3. "Doors/ vehicle access"
market version, various settings for opening
and closing are possible. 4. "Fold mirrors in when locked"
These settings are stored for the driver profile

Automatic unlocking
currently used.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
108
3. "Doors/ vehicle access" ▷ "Tailgate opens only when vehicle is

4. Select the desired setting: unlocked."
▷ "Unlock doors when in Park" The vehicle must be unlocked before

the trunk lid can be used with the vehicle
▷ "Unlock at end of trip"
key.
After drive-ready state is switched off by
▷ "Lock tailgate button"
pressing the Start/Stop button, the
locked vehicle is automatically unlocked. The operation of the trunk lid via the ve-
hicle key is disabled.
Automatic locking
1. "CAR"
Comfort Access
2. "Settings" Touchless locking and unlocking
3. "Doors/ vehicle access" Contactless locking and unlocking can be
4. "Lock in a few minutes" switched on or off.
The vehicle locks automatically after a short 1. "CAR"
period of time if no door is opened after un-
locking. 2. "Settings"
Trunk lid 4. "Comfort access"
Trunk lid and doors Establishing idle state after opening

You can set up if only the trunk lid will be un- the front doors
locked or if the doors will also be unlocked 1. "CAR"
when the trunk lid is unlocked
2. "Settings"
Depending on the vehicle equipment and
country version, this setting may not be of-
fered. 4. "Turn off vehicle after opening door"
Idle state, refer to page 41.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Key button settings" Alarm system
4. Select the icon.
The text next to the icon indicates the cur- Principle
rent setting. The alarm system issues a visual and acoustic
5. Select the desired setting: signal when someone attempts to open the
▷ "Tailgate" locked vehicle incorrectly.
Depending on the equipment, the trunk

General information
lid will be unlocked or opened.
When the vehicle is locked, the vehicle alarm
▷ "Tailgate and door(s)"
system reacts to the following changes:
Depending on the equipment, the trunk
▷ Opening a door, the hood or the trunk lid.
lid will be unlocked or opened and the
doors are unlocked. ▷ Movements in the interior.
109
▷ Changes in the vehicle inclination, for in- Panic mode

stance, during attempts at stealing a wheel
You can trigger the alarm system if you find
or when towing the vehicle.
yourself in a dangerous situation.
▷ Disconnected battery voltage.
▷ Press the button on the vehicle key
▷ Improper use of the socket for OBD on- and hold for at least 3 seconds.
board diagnostics.
▷ Briefly press the button on the vehicle key
▷ Locking the vehicle while a device is con- three times in succession.
nected to the socket for the diagnostic
socket. To switch off the alarm: press any button.
The alarm system signals these changes visu-
ally and acoustically: Indicator light on the interior mirror
▷ Acoustic alarm:
Depending on local regulations, the acous-
tic alarm may be suppressed.
▷ Optical alarm:
By blinking of the hazard warning system
and headlights, where required.
Do not modify the system to ensure function of
the alarm system.
▷ The indicator light flashes briefly every

Turning on/off 2 seconds:
The alarm system is turned on or off as soon The alarm system is switched on.
as the vehicle is locked or unlocked with the
vehicle key or via Comfort Access. ▷ Indicator light flashes for approx. 10 sec-
onds, then it flashes briefly every 2 sec-
onds:
Opening the doors with the alarm
Interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor
system switched on
are not active, as doors, hood, or trunk lid
The alarm system is triggered when a door is are not correctly closed. Correctly closed
opened if the door was unlocked using the access points are secured.
integrated key in the door lock.
When the remaining open access points
are closed, the interior motion sensor and
Opening the trunk lid with the alarm tilt alarm sensor will be turned on.
system switched on ▷ The indicator light goes out after unlocking:
The trunk lid can be opened even when the
The vehicle has not been tampered with.
alarm system is switched on.
▷ The indicator light flashes after unlocking
After the trunk lid is closed, it is locked and
until drive-ready state is switched on, but
monitored again provided the doors are
no longer than approx. 5 minutes:
locked. The hazard warning system flashes
once. An alarm has been triggered.
110
Tilt alarm sensor Ending the alarm

The inclination of the vehicle is monitored. ▷ Unlock the vehicle with the vehicle key.
The alarm system responds in situations such ▷ Unlock the vehicle with the integrated key
as attempts to steal a wheel or when the vehi- and activate the drive-ready state via emer-
cle is towed. gency detection of the vehicle key.
Malfunction, refer to page 88.
Interior motion sensor ▷ With Comfort Access: when carrying the ve-
The vehicle interior is monitored. hicle key, grasp the driver's door or front
The alarm system responds when movement passenger door handle completely.
is detected in the vehicle interior.
The windows must be closed for the system to
function properly.
Power windows
Avoiding unintentional alarms General information

The windows can be opened with the vehicle
General information key from the outside as well as closed with
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen- Comfort Access.
sor can trigger an alarm, although no unau- With Comfort Access: The windows can be
thorized action occurred. closed from the outside via Comfort Access.
Possible situations for an unwanted alarm: When a window is frequently opened to the
▷ In car washes. same position, this task can be performed by
the BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant. For in-
▷ In duplex garages.
stance when the same parking garage is fre-
▷ During transport on trains carrying vehicles, quently used.
at sea or on a trailer.
▷ With animals in the vehicle.
▷ Vehicle key, refer to page 84.
▷ When the vehicle is locked after start of re-
▷ BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant, refer to
fueling.
page 52.
The tilt alarm sensor and the interior motion
sensor can be switched off in such situations. Safety information
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and
interior motion sensor Warning
When operating the windows, body parts and
Press the button on the vehicle key
objects can be jammed. There is a risk of in-
within 10 seconds as soon as the vehicle
jury or risk of damage to property. Make sure
is locked.
that the travel path of the windows is clear
The indicator light lights up for approx. 2 sec- during opening and closing.
onds and then continues to flash.
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen-
sor are switched off until the vehicle is locked
again.
111
Overview Jam protection system
Principle
The jam protection prevents objects or body
parts becoming jammed between the door
frame and window while a window is being
closed.
General information
If a resistance or blockage is detected while a
Power windows window is being closed, the closing will be in-
terrupted.
Functional requirements Safety information

The windows can be operated under the fol-
lowing conditions. Warning
▷ Standby state is switched on. Accessories on the windows such as anten-
nas can impact jam protection. There is a risk
▷ Drive-ready state is switched on.
of injury. Do not install accessories in the
The vehicle key must be in the car's interior. area of movement of the windows.
Opening
▷ Press the switch to the resistance Closing without the jam protection
point. system
The window opens while the switch is be- In case of danger from the outside or if icing
ing held. might prevent normal closing, proceed as fol-
lows:
▷ Press the switch beyond the resist-
ance point.
The window opens automatically. Pressing 1. Pull the switch past the resistance
the switch again stops the motion. point and hold it there.
The window closes with limited jam protec-
Closing tion. If the closing force exceeds a specific
threshold, closing is interrupted.
▷ Pull the switch to the resistance
point.
2. Pull the switch past the resistance
The window closes while the switch is be- point again within approx. 4 seconds and
ing held. hold it there.
▷ Pull the switch beyond the resist- The window closes without jam protection.
ance point.
The window closes automatically if the
door is closed. Pulling again stops the mo-
tion.
112
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel CONTROLS
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel

Vehicle features and options
Warning
This chapter describes all standard, country- With a backrest inclined too far to the rear,
specific and optional features offered with the the protective effect of the seat belt can no
series. It also describes features and functions longer be ensured. There is a risk of sliding
that are not necessarily available in your vehi- under the seat belt in an accident. There is a
cle, e.g., due to the selected options or country risk of injury or danger to life. Adjust the seat
versions. This also applies to safety-related prior to starting the trip. Adjust the backrest
functions and systems. When using these so that it is in the most upright position as
functions and systems, the applicable laws possible and do not adjust again while driv-
and regulations must be observed. ing.
Sitting safely Warning
An ideal seat position that meets the needs of There is a risk of jamming when moving the
the occupants can make a vital contribution to seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of dam-
relaxed, fatigue-free driving. age to property. Make sure that the travel
path of the seat is clear prior to any adjust-
In the event of an accident, the correct seat po- ment.
sition plays an important role. Follow the infor-
mation in the following chapters.
Additional information: Electrically adjustable seats
▷ Seats, refer to page 113.
▷ Seat belts, refer to page 116.
General information
The current seat position can be stored using
▷ Head restraints, refer to page 118.
the memory function.
▷ Airbags, refer to page 180.
Overview
Seats
Safety information
Warning
Seat setting while driving can lead to unex-
pected movements of the seat. Vehicle con-
trol could be lost. There is a risk of accident.
Only adjust the seat on the driver's side when 1 Backrest width
the vehicle is stationary. 2 Forward/backward, height, seat tilt
113
CONTROLS Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
3 Backrest tilt, head restraint Backrest tilt

4 Lumbar support
Longitudinal direction
Tilt switch forward or backward.
Calibrating the front seats

Press switch forward or backward.
General information
As soon as the electric seat setting no longer
Height functions precisely, a Check Control message
is displayed on the control display.
To restore the accuracy of the electric seat set-
ting, the front seats must be calibrated.
Safety information
Warning
There is a risk of jamming when moving the
seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of dam-
Press switch up or down.
age to property. Make sure that the travel
path of the seat is clear prior to any adjust-
Seat tilt ment.
Calibrating the front seat

1. Press and hold the switch forward until the
seat stops.
2. Press the switch forward again until the
seat stops.
3. Readjust the seat to the desired position.
As soon as the message on the control display
Tilt switch up or down. disappears, the calibration is complete. If the
message remains active, repeat the calibra-
tion.
114
If the message is still shown after repeated Backrest width

calibration, have the system checked by a
dealer's service center or another qualified Principle
service center or a repair shop.
Adjusting the backrest width may improve side
support when cornering.
Thigh support
General information
Sport seat
The backrest width is changed by adjusting
the side sections of the backrest.
Adjusting
▷ Press the front section of the
button:
The backrest width de-
creases.
▷ Press the rear section of the
Pull the lever at the front of the seat and push button:
the thigh support forward or back. The backrest width in-
creases.
Lumbar support
Principle It may not be possible to adjust the backrest
The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad- width at very high and very low temperatures.
justed in a way that it supports the lumbar re-
gion of the spine. The lower back and the Entering the rear
spine are supported for upright sitting position.
Safety information
Adjusting
▷ Press the front/rear section Warning
of the button:
The curvature is increased/ seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of dam-
decreased. age to property. Make sure that the travel
▷ Press the upper/lower sec- path of the seat is clear prior to any adjust-
tion of the button: ment.
The curvature is shifted up/
down.
Warning
Functional limitations Unexpected movements of the rear seat
backrest while driving may occur if the rear
It may not be possible to adjust the lumbar
seat backrest is unlocked. Vehicle control
support at very high and very low tempera-
could be lost. There is a risk of injury. Fold
tures.
115
back and lock the backrests before driving.

Make sure the backrest engages correctly by
Seat belts
slightly moving forward and back.
General information
The vehicle is fitted with four seat belts to en-
Fold the seat backrest forward sure occupant safety. However, the seat belts
1. Pull the loop. can only offer protection when adjusted cor-
rectly.
Always make sure that seat belts are being
worn by the occupants before driving off. The
airbags supplement the seat belts as an addi-
tional safety device. The airbags do not re-
place seat belts.
All belt fastening points are designed to ach-
ieve the best possible protective effect of the
seat belts with proper use of the seat belts and
2. Fold the seat backrest forward. correct seat setting. Notes on sitting safely, re-
fer to page 113.
For equipment specification with M sport seat:
1. Pull the lever. Safety information
Warning
Use of a seat belt to buckle more than one
person will potentially defeat the ability of the
seat belt to serve its protective function.
There is a risk of injury or danger to life. Do
not allow more than one person to fasten a
single seat belt. Infants and children are not
allowed on an occupant's lap, but must be
2. Fold the seat backrest forward. transported and secured in designated child
To make the entry to the rear easier, the seat restraint systems.
will automatically move to the most forward
position.
The process will be terminated when the Warning
switch for the forward/back direction adjust- The protective effect of safety gear, including
ment is pressed or the backrest is reclined. seat belts, can be limited or lost when seat
belts are fastened incorrectly. An incorrectly
Push the seat backrest rearward fastened seat belt can cause additional inju-
Push the seat backrest rearward and lock it. ries, for instance in the event of an accident,
braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk
The seat moves automatically to the last seat
of injury or danger to life. Make sure that all
position that was stored.
occupants are wearing seat belts correctly.
Pulling the loop again stops the motion.
116
Buckling the seat belt

Warning 1. Guide the seat belt slowly over shoulder
The protective effect of safety gear, including and hip to put it on.
seat belts, may not be fully functional or fail in 2. Insert the buckle tongue into the seat belt
the following situations: buckle. The seat belt buckle must engage
▷ The seat belts or seat belt buckles are audibly.
damaged, soiled, or changed in any
other way.
▷ Seat belt tensioners or roll-up mecha-
nism were modified.
Seat belts can be imperceptibly damaged in
the event of an accident. There is a risk of in-
jury or danger to life. Do not modify seat
belts, seat belt buckles, seat belt tensioners,
roll-up mechanisms, or belt anchors and
keep them clean. Have the seat belts
checked after an accident at the dealer’s Unbuckling the seat belt
service center or another qualified service
1. Hold down the seat belt firmly.
center or repair shop.
2. Press the red button in the seat belt buckle.
3. Guide the seat belt back into its roll-up
Correct use of seat belts mechanism.
▷ Wear the seat belt twist-free and tight to
your body over your lap and shoulders. Seat belt reminder for driver’s seat
▷ Wear the seat belt deep on your hips over and passenger’s seat
your lap. The seat belt may not press on
your stomach. General information
▷ Do not rub the seat belt against sharp The seat belt reminder is issued when the driv-
edges, or guide it or jam it in across hard or er's side seat belt is not buckled.
fragile objects. The seat belt reminder is also active when the
▷ Avoid thick clothing. front passenger seat belt is not buckled or ob-
▷ Re-tighten the seat belt frequently upward jects are on the front passenger seat.
around your upper body area. The seat belt reminder is also activated when
a passenger unbuckles a seat belt during the
trip.

The indicator light lights up and a sig-
nal sounds. Make sure that the seat
belts are positioned correctly. The seat
belt reminder can also be activated if objects
are placed on the front passenger seat.
117
Seat belt reminder for rear seats ▷ Before driving, install the removed head
restraints on the occupied seats.
General information ▷ Adjust the head restraint so its center
The seat belt reminder is automatically acti- supports the back of the head at as
vated each time the engine starts. close to eye level as possible.
The seat belt reminder is also activated when ▷ Adjust the distance so that the head re-
a passenger unbuckles a rear seat belt during straint is as close as possible to the back
the trip. of the head. Adjust the distance via the
backrest tilt as needed.
The indicator light in the instrument cluster illu-
Warning
minates after the engine is started.
Body parts can be jammed when moving the
The displays may vary depending on the
head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Make
equipment version and country variant.
sure that the area of movement is clear when
Icon Description moving the head restraint.
Green: the seat belt is buckled

on the corresponding rear seat.
Warning
Objects on the head restraint reduce the pro-
tective effect in the head and neck area.
There is a risk of injury.
Red: the seat belt is not buck- ▷ Do not use seat or head restraint covers.
led on the corresponding rear
▷ Do not hang objects, for instance clothes
seat.
hangers, directly on the head restraint.
▷ Only use accessories that have been de-
termined to be safe for attachment to a
head restraint.
▷ Do not use any accessories, for instance
Front head restraints pillows, while driving.
General information Adjusting the height

The current head restraint position can be
stored using the memory function.
Safety information
Warning
Removal or incorrect adjustment of head re-
straints can cause injuries in the head and
neck area. There is a risk of injury.
Press switch up or down.
118
To prevent a collision of the head restraint with The current exterior mirror position can be
the headliner, the head restraint cannot be ad- stored using the memory function.
justed in height in certain seat positions. Move
the seat into a lower position for head restraint Safety information
adjustment.
Adjusting the distance: basic seat Warning

Objects reflected in the mirror are closer than
they appear. The distance to the road users
behind could be incorrectly estimated, for in-
stance while changing lanes. There is a risk
of accident. Estimate the distance to the traf-
fic behind by looking over your shoulder.
Overview
▷ Back: press the button and push the head

restraint toward the rear.
▷ Forward: pull the head restraint toward the
front.
After setting the distance, make sure that the
head restraint engages correctly.
Adjusting the distance: M Sport seat

1 Adjusting
The distance to the back of the head is ad-
justed via the backrest inclination. 2 Selecting a mirror, Automatic Curb Monitor
Adjust the distance so that the head restraint 3 Folding in and out
is as close as possible to the back of the head.
Adjusting the exterior mirrors
Removing
Press the button.
The head restraints cannot be removed.
The selected mirror moves along with
the button movement.
Exterior mirrors
Selecting a mirror
General information To change over to the other mirror:
The front passenger's side exterior mirror is Slide the switch.
more curved than the driver's side mirror.
The mirror setting is stored for the driver profile
currently in use. When a driver profile is se-
lected, the saved position is called up automat-
ically.
119
Malfunction improves your view of the curb and other low-

lying obstacles when parking, for instance.
In case of an electrical malfunction, adjust the
mirror by pressing the edges of the mirror
glass. Activating
1. slide the switch to the driver's side

Folding in and out
mirror position.
2. Engage selector lever position R.
NOTICE
Depending on the vehicle width, the vehicle Deactivating
can be damaged in car washes. There is a Slide the switch to the front passenger's side
risk of damage to property, among other po- exterior mirror position.
tential damage. Before washing, fold in the
mirrors by hand or with the button.
Interior mirror
Press the button.
General information
Folding is only possible up to a speed of ap-
The interior mirror is dimmed automatically.
prox. 15 mph/20 km/h.
Photocells are used for control:
Folding the mirrors in and out is helpful in the
following situations: ▷ In the mirror glass.
▷ In car washes. ▷ On the rear of the mirror.
▷ On narrow roads.
Overview
Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto-
matically at a speed of approx.
25 mph/40 km/h.
Automatic heating
Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated
as needed and when the drive-ready state is
switched on.
Automatic dimming feature

The exterior mirror on the driver's side is auto- Functional requirements
matically dimmed. Photocells in the interior
▷ Keep the photocells clean.
mirror are used to control this.
▷ Do not cover the area between the interior
Automatic Curb Monitor mirror and the windshield.
Principle
If reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass on
the passenger's side is tilted downward. This
120
Steering wheel Steering wheel heating
Overview
Safety information
Warning
Steering wheel adjustments while driving can
lead to unexpected steering wheel move-
ments. Vehicle control could be lost. There is
a risk of accident. Adjust the steering wheel
while the vehicle is stationary only.
Button for steering wheel heating

Electric steering wheel adjustment
General information Turning on/off

The steering wheel adjustment is stored for Press the button.
the driver profile currently in use. When a driver A Check Control message is displayed.
profile is selected, the position is called up au-
tomatically when the drive readiness is turned If the trip is resumed within approx. 15 minutes
on. after an intermediate stop, the steering wheel
The current steering wheel position can be heating turns on automatically if the function
stored using the memory function. was turned on at the completion of the last trip.
To make it easier to enter and get out of the
vehicle, the steering wheel moves temporarily
into the upper position.
Memory function
Adjusting Principle
The following settings can be stored and, if
necessary, retrieved using the memory func-
tion:
▷ Seat position.
▷ Exterior mirror position.
▷ Steering wheel position.
▷ Height of the Head-up Display.
General information
Press the switch to adjust the forward/back
position and height of the steering wheel to the Two memory locations with different settings
seat position. can be set for each driver profile.
The following settings are not stored:
▷ Backrest width.
▷ Lumbar support.
121
Safety information The stored position is called up.

The procedure stops when a switch for setting
the seat is pressed or one of the memory but-
Warning
tons is pressed again.
Using the memory function while driving can
The adjustment of the seat position on the
lead to unexpected seat or steering wheel
driver's side is interrupted after a short time
movements. Vehicle control could be lost.
while driving.
There is a risk of accident. Only retrieve the
memory function when the vehicle is station-
ary. Seat and armrest heating
Principle
Warning
The system heats seats and armrests as
needed.
seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of dam-
age to property. Make sure that the travel
path of the seat is clear prior to any adjust- General information
ment. Seat heating can also be used without armrest
heating. Deactivate the armrest heating as
needed.
Overview
Overview
The memory buttons are located on the front

door. Seat and armrest heating
Storing
1. Set the desired position. Turning on
2. Press the button. The lettering on 1. Press the button.

the button is illuminated. 2. Select the temperature level:
3. Press desired button 1 or 2 while the letter- ▷ Press the button once for each level.
ing is illuminated. A signal sounds. ▷ Turn the Controller until the desired
level is reached. Press the Controller.
Calling up settings ▷ Select the desired level on the touch-
Press the desired button 1 or 2. screen.
122
Highest level reached when three red LEDs

light up on the button or three red bars are
Active seat ventilation
shown on the Control Display.
If the trip is continued within approx. 15 mi-
Principle
nutes after an intermediate stop, the functions Integrated fans in the seat and armrest areas
are turned on automatically with the tempera- extract air from the vehicle interior and thereby
ture that was last set. provide a comfortable seat temperature.
When ECO PRO is activated, the heater output
is reduced. General information
Additional information: Depending on the setting of the automatic cli-
mate control, the cooling output will be in-
ECO PRO, refer to page 302.
creased or reduced.
Turning off Air conditioning can be adjusted individually by

manually adjusting the temperature of the ven-
Press and hold the button, until the tilation and the air distribution.
LEDs turn off.
For maximum cooling power, set the manual
air distribution to the upper body area.
Seat heating distribution
The heating effect in the seat surface and the Overview
seat backrest can be distributed in different
ways.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Climate control"
4. Select the desired menu item.
5. Select desired seat.
6. Press the Controller and turn it to set the
seat heating distribution. Active seat ventilation
Switching armrest heating on/off

1. "CAR"
Switching on active seat ventilation
2. "Settings"
2. Select the ventilation level:
4. "Seat and armrest heating"
▷ Press the button once for each level.
5. Select desired seat.
▷ Turn the Controller until the desired
6. "Heat armrests with seat" level is reached. Press the Controller.
▷ Select the desired level on the touch-
screen.
123
Highest level reached when three blue Turning on

LEDs light up on the button or three blue
bars are shown on the Control Display. 1. Press the button.
2. Select the desired setting via the touch-
Switching off active seat ventilation screen.
Press and hold the button, until the One red and one blue LED each will illumi-
LEDs turn off. nate.
Turning off
Seat climate control Press and hold the button, until the
LEDs turn off.
Principle
The seat climate control combines the func-
tions of the seat heating and active seat venti- Climate control rules
lation.
Principle
General information
Depending on the equipment, some heating
The seat heating and active seat ventilation and air conditioning functions can be automat-
are operated with a common button on the air ically activated depending on the outside tem-
conditioning control panel. perature.
When both systems are active, a push of the
button reduces the intensity of both functions General information
by one level each.
The outside temperature at which the func-
The last active function or function that is con- tions are to be automatically activated can be
figured with higher intensity will be activated set via iDrive.
directly when the system is switched on again.
Activation is performed if the outside tempera-
When both functions with the same intensity
ture exceeds or falls below the set temperature
configuration are deactivated, the system will
in the first few minutes after drive-ready state
automatically activate the seat heating.
has been switched on. A new adjustment is
carried out after the settings have been
Overview changed.
Depending on the equipment package, the fol-
lowing functions can be automatically acti-
vated:
▷ Seat heating.
▷ Steering wheel heating
▷ Seat ventilation.
If the trip is continued within approx. 15 mi-
nutes after a stop, the functions are activated
automatically with the levels that were last se-
Seat climate control
lected.
124
Drive-ready state is switched on.
Activate/deactivate
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
4. If necessary, "Automate habits"
5. Select the desired function.
6. Activate the desired rule.
7. Set the level.
125
CONTROLS Transporting children safely
Transporting children safely

Warning
This chapter describes all standard, country- A heated vehicle may result in death to per-
specific and optional features offered with the sons, especially children, or animals. There is
series. It also describes features and functions a risk of injury or danger to life. Do not leave
that are not necessarily available in your vehi- persons, especially children, or animals unat-
cle, e.g., due to the selected options or country tended in the vehicle.
functions and systems, the applicable laws Warning
Exposure to intense sunlight can cause child
restraint systems and their components to
The right place for children become very hot. Persons may sustain burn
injuries when touching the hot components.
There is a risk of injury. Do not expose the
Safety information child restraint system to direct sunlight or
cover where necessary. If necessary, let the
child restraint system cool down before
Warning
transporting a child. Do not leave children un-
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle attended in the vehicle.
following actions: Transport children in the rear seat
▷ Releasing the parking brake. General information
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win- Accident research shows that the safest place
dows. for children is in the rear seat.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N. Children younger than 13 years of age or
shorter than 5 ft/150 cm should be transported
in the rear seat in suitable child restraint sys-
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not tems designed for the age, weight and size of
leave children or animals unattended in the the child. Children 13 years of age or older
vehicle. Take the vehicle key with you when must wear a seat belt as soon as a suitable
exiting and lock the vehicle. child restraint system can no longer be used
due to their age, weight, or size.
126
Transporting children safely CONTROLS
Safety information Installing child restraint

systems
Warning
The seat belt cannot be fastened correctly on General information
children shorter than 5 ft/150 cm without suit-
able additional child restraint systems. The Pay attention to the specifications and the op-
protective effect of safety gear, including seat erating and safety information of the child re-
belts, can be limited or lost when seat belts straint system manufacturer when selecting,
are fastened incorrectly. An incorrectly fas- installing, and using child restraint systems.
tened seat belt can cause additional injuries,
for instance in the event of an accident, brak- Safety information
ing or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of
injury or danger to life. Secure children
Warning
shorter than 5 ft/150 cm using suitable child
restraint systems. The protective effect of child restraint sys-
tems and their fastening systems which have
been damaged or exposed to an accident
Children on the front passenger can be limited or lost. A child cannot be prop-
erly restrained in the event of an accident,
seat
braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk
of injury or danger to life.
General information
Do not use child restraint systems which
Before using a child restraint system on the
have been damaged or exposed to an acci-
front passenger seat, ensure that the front,
dent.
knee, and side airbags on the passenger's side
are deactivated. If a child restraint system and its fastening
system has been damaged or exposed to an
accident, have these systems checked and
For automatic deactivation of front passenger replaced by a dealer's service center or an-
airbags, refer to page 182. other qualified service center or repair shop.
Safety information
Warning
Warning The stability of the child restraint system is
Active front passenger airbags can injure a limited or compromised with incorrect seat
child in a child restraint system when the air- setting or improper installation of the child
bags are deployed. There is a risk of injury. seat. There is a risk of injury or danger to life.
Make sure that the front passenger airbags Make sure that the child restraint system fits
are deactivated and that the PASSENGER securely against the backrest. If possible, ad-
AIRBAG OFF indicator light lights up. just the backrest tilt for all affected backrests
and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that
seats and backrests are securely engaged or
locked. If necessary, adjust the height of the
head restraints or remove them.
127
On the front passenger seat Child seat security
Deactivating airbags
Warning
Active front passenger airbags can injure a
child in a child restraint system when the air-
bags are deployed. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the front passenger airbags
are deactivated and that the PASSENGER
AIRBAG OFF indicator light lights up. The seat belts in the rear and the front pas-
senger seat belt can be permanently locked to
Before installing a child restraint system in the fasten child restraint systems.
front passenger seat, make sure that the front,
knee and side airbags on the passenger's side
Locking the seat belt
are deactivated.
1. Pull out the belt strap completely.
2. Secure the child restraint system with the
For automatic deactivation of front passenger
seat belt.
airbags, refer to page 182.
3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in and pull
it tight against the child restraint system.
Seat position and height
The seat belt is disabled.
After installing a child restraint system, move
the front passenger seat as far back as it will
Unlocking the seat belt
go and, if possible, bring it up to the highest
position. This seat position and height ensure 1. Unbuckle the seat belt buckle.
the best possible position for the belt and of- 2. Remove the child restraint system.
fers optimal protection in the event of an acci- 3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in com-
dent. pletely.
If the upper attachment point of the seat belt is
located in front of the belt guide of the child re-
straint seat, move the front passenger seat LATCH child seat
carefully forward until the best possible belt mountings
guide position is reached.
Backrest width General information

Adjustable backrest width: before installing a LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Chil-
child restraint system in the front passenger dren.
seat, open the backrest width completely. Do Pay attention to the specifications, operating
not change the backrest width again and do tips and safety instructions from the child re-
not call up a memory position. straint system manufacturer when selecting,
installing, and using LATCH child restraint fix-
ing systems.
128
Mounts for the lower LATCH Position

anchors
Icon Meaning
General information The corresponding icon shows
The lower anchors may be used to attach the the mounts for the lower
CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child LATCH anchors.
and CRS weight of 65 lbs/30 kg when the child Seats equipped with lower
is restrained by the internal harnesses. mountings are marked with a
pair, (2), of LATCH symbols.
Safety information For vehicles equipped with a
middle seat:
Warning It is not recommended to use
If the lower mountings of the child restraint the inner lower mountings of
system are not correctly engaged, the protec- standard outer LATCH posi-
tive effect of the child restraint system is lim- tions to fasten a child restraint
ited. There is a risk of injury or danger to life. system on the middle seat.
Make sure that the lower mountings are cor- Use the vehicle seat belt in-
rectly engaged and that the child restraint stead for the middle seat.
system fits securely against the backrest.
Before installing the LATCH child
restraint fixing systems
Warning Pull the seat belt away from the area of the
The mounts for the lower mountings and at- child seat mountings.
tachment points of the child restraint system
are intended for attaching child restraint sys- Installation of the LATCH child
tems only. If other objects are attached, the restraint fixing systems
mounts or attachment points can be dam-
aged. There is a risk of injury or risk of dam- 1. Mount child restraint system, see manufac-
age to property. Attach child restraint sys- turer's information.
tems only at the corresponding mounts for 2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop-
the lower mountings or attachment points. erly engaged.
129
Child restraint systems with Attachment points

tether strap Icon Meaning
The respective icon shows the

Safety information attachment point for the upper
retaining strap. Seats with an
Warning upper top tether are marked
with this icon. It is located on
If the upper retaining strap is incorrectly used
the rear seat backrest, the rear
for the child restraint system, the protective
shelf or the rear seat.
effect is reduced. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the upper retaining strap
does not run over sharp edges and is not Routing the retaining strap
twisted as it passes the upper anchor.
Warning
If the rear seat backrest is not locked, the
protective effect of the child restraint system
is limited or there is none. In certain situa-
tions, for instance braking maneuvers or in
case of an accident, the rear seat backrest
can fold forward. There is a risk of injury or 1 Driving direction
danger to life. Make sure that the rear seat
2 Head restraint
backrests are locked.
3 Hook for upper retaining strap
4 Attachment point/eye
Warning 5 Seat backrest
The mounts for the lower mountings and at- 6 Upper retaining strap
tachment points of the child restraint system
are intended for attaching child restraint sys-
tems only. If other objects are attached, the
Attaching the upper retaining strap
mounts or attachment points can be dam- to the attachment point
aged. There is a risk of injury or risk of dam- 1. Release the backrest, and tilt it forward.
age to property. Attach child restraint sys- 2. Guide the upper retaining strap over the
tems only at the corresponding mounts for head restraint to the anchor.
the lower mountings or attachment points.
3. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to the
attachment point.
4. Fold back the backrest of the rear seat.
Make sure that the retaining strap cannot
be jammed when folding back and locking
the rear seat backrest.
130
5. Tighten the retaining strap.

6. Push the seat backrest rearward and lock it
131
CONTROLS Driving
Driving
Vehicle features and options Auto Start/Stop function
series. It also describes features and functions The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel.
that are not necessarily available in your vehi- The system switches off the engine during a
cle, e.g., due to the selected options or country stop, for instance in traffic jam or at traffic
versions. This also applies to safety-related lights. Drive-ready state remains switched on.
functions and systems. When using these The engine starts automatically for driving off.
functions and systems, the applicable laws Additional information:
and regulations must be observed. Coasting, refer to page 304.
General information
Start/Stop button
After each engine start using the Start/Stop
button, the Auto Start/Stop function is ready.
Principle The function is activated from speeds of ap-
Pressing the Start/Stop button prox. 3 mph/5 km/h.
switches drive-ready state on or Depending on the selected driving mode, the
off. system is automatically activated or deacti-
Drive-ready state is switched on vated.
when you depress the brake
pedal while pressing the Start/Stop button. Engine stop
Pressing the Start/Stop button again switches
the drive-ready state back off and standby Functional requirements
state is switched back on.
Steptronic transmission
Additional information: The engine is switched off automatically during
▷ Drive-ready state, refer to page 42. a stop under the following conditions:
▷ Standby state, refer to page 42. ▷ The selector lever is in selector lever posi-
tion D.
Driving off ▷ The brake pedal remains depressed while
1. Turn on drive-ready state. the vehicle is at a standstill or the vehicle is
held by Automatic Hold.
2. Apply gear position.
▷ The driver's seat belt is buckled or the driv-
3. Release the parking brake.
er's door is closed.
4. Driving off.
Manual engine stop
If the engine was not switched off automati-
cally when the vehicle stopped, the engine can
be switched off manually:
132
Driving CONTROLS
▷ Depress the brake pedal forcefully again ▷ In case of a steep downhill grade.
from the current pedal position. ▷ Brake not engaged strongly enough.
▷ Engage selector lever position P. ▷ The outside temperature is high and auto-
When all functional preconditions are fulfilled, matic climate control is running.
the engine switches off. ▷ The car's interior has not yet been heated
or cooled to the required level.
Air conditioning system when the
▷ Where there is a risk of window condensa-
engine is switched off tion when the automatic climate control is
The air flow from the air conditioning system is switched on.
reduced when the engine is switched off. ▷ Engine or other parts not at operating tem-
perature.
Displays in the instrument cluster
▷ Engine cooling is required.
General information ▷ The wheels are at a sharp angle or the
steering wheel is being turned.
The display in the instrument
cluster indicates that the Auto ▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged.
Start/Stop function is ready for ▷ At higher elevations.
an automatic engine start. ▷ Hood is unlocked.
▷ The Automatic Parking Assistant is acti-
The display indicates that the vated.
conditions for an automatic en- ▷ Stop-and-go traffic.
gine stop have not been met.
▷ Selector lever position in N or R.
▷ After driving in reverse.
▷ Use of fuel with high ethanol content.
Total time with switched-off engine
ECO PRO driving mode: de- Starting the engine
pending on the vehicle equip-
ment, the total time that the en- Functional requirements
gine has been switched off
using the Auto Start/Stop func- Steptronic transmission
tion is displayed on an auto- The engine starts automatically under the fol-
matic engine stop. lowing preconditions:
The total time can be reset via the trip data. ▷ By releasing the brake pedal.
Additional information: ▷ When Automatic Hold is activated: step on

the accelerator pedal.
ECO PRO, refer to page 302.
Driving off
After the engine starts, accelerate as usual.
The engine is not switched off automatically in
the following situations:
133
CONTROLS Driving
Safety mode ▷ A situation is detected in which the stop-

After the engine switches off automatically, it ping time is expected to be very short. The
will not start again automatically if any one of engine is not automatically switched off. A
the following conditions are met: message appears on the Control Display,
depending on the situation.
▷ The driver's seat belt is unbuckled and the
driver's door is open. ▷ A situation is detected in which the vehicle
should be started up immediately. The
▷ Hood was unlocked. switched-off engine starts automatically.
Some indicator lights light up for a varied The function may be restricted if the navigation
length of time. data is invalid, outdated or not available,
The engine can only be started via the Start/ for example.
Stop button.
Activating/deactivating the system
System limits manually
Even if driving off was not intended, the deacti-
vated engine starts up automatically in the fol- Principle
lowing situations:
The engine is not automatically switched off.
▷ In case of excessive warming of the interior
The engine is started during an automatic en-
when air conditioning is turned on.
gine stop.
▷ In case of excessive cooling of the interior
when the heating is turned on. Via button
▷ In case of a risk of window condensation
when the automatic climate control is
turned on.
▷ Without mild hybrid technology: in case of a
steering operation.
▷ When changing from selector lever position
D to N or R.
▷ When changing from selector lever position
P to N, D, or R.
▷ In case of seriously discharged vehicle bat- Press the button.
tery.
▷ When starting an oil level measurement.
Via selector lever position or Driving
Additional functions Auto Start/Stop Dynamics Control
Depending on the equipment and national- The Auto Start/Stop function is also deacti-
market version, the vehicle features a variety of vated in selector lever position M/S or in
sensors for assessing the traffic situation. The SPORT driving mode of the Driving Dynamics
Auto Start/Stop function uses this information Control.
to adapt to various traffic situations in a proac-
tive manner.
For instance, this applies to the following sit-
uations:
134
Driving CONTROLS
Display Driving Dynamics Control

▷ LED comes on: Auto Start/Stop function is
deactivated.
Principle
▷ LED goes out: Auto Start/Stop function is
The Driving Dynamics Control influences the
activated.
driving dynamics properties of the vehicle.
Switching off the vehicle during an The vehicle can be adjusted depending on the
situation using various driving modes.
automatic engine stop
General information
General information
The following systems are affected, for in-
During an automatic engine stop, the vehicle
stance:
can be switched off permanently, for instance
when leaving it. ▷ Engine characteristics.
▷ Steptronic transmission.
Steptronic transmission ▷ Adaptive M chassis.
1. Press the Start/Stop button. ▷ Adaptive M Suspension Professional.
▷ Drive-ready state is switched off. ▷ Active roll stabilization.
▷ Standby state is switched on. ▷ Steering.
▷ Selector lever position P is engaged au- ▷ Integral Active Steering.
tomatically.
▷ Display in the instrument cluster.
▷ Cruise control.
Automatic deactivation
Overview
General information
In certain situations, the Auto Start/Stop func-
tion is deactivated automatically for safety rea-
sons, for instance if no driver is detected.
Malfunction
The Auto Start/Stop function no longer
switches off the engine automatically. A Check
Control message is displayed. It is possible to
continue driving. Have the system checked by
a dealer's service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop. The selected driving mode is
displayed in the instrument clus-
ter.
135
CONTROLS Driving
Driving modes Turning on
Buttons in the vehicle Press the button repeatedly until

SPORT is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
SPORT INDIVIDUAL
Button Driving Configura-
mode tion Principle
In the SPORT INDIVIDUAL driving mode, indi-
SPORT SPORT INDIVID-
vidual settings can be adjusted to support driv-
UAL
ing dynamics properties.
SPORT SPORT
PLUS Configuration
COMFORT COMFORT 1. "CAR"

2. "Settings"
ECO PRO ECO PRO INDIVID-
3. "Driving mode"
UAL
4. "SPORT INDIVIDUAL"
ADAPTIVE ADAPTIVE
Reset SPORT INDIVIDUAL to the standard
When drive-ready state is switched on, the
settings:
COMFORT driving mode is selected automati-
cally. "Reset to SPORT STANDARD".
Driving modes in detail SPORT PLUS
COMFORT Principle
The SPORT PLUS driving mode is a dynamic
Principle setting for maximum agility with an adjusted
The COMFORT driving mode is a balanced drive.
setting between sporty and consumption opti-
mized driving. Turning on
Press the button repeatedly until
Turning on SPORT PLUS is displayed in the in-
Press the button repeatedly until strument cluster.
COMFORT is displayed in the instru-
ment cluster. ECO PRO
SPORT Principle
In ECO PRO driving mode, consumption is op-
Principle timized.
The SPORT driving mode is a dynamic setting
for more agility with an optimized suspension.
136
Driving CONTROLS
Turning on INDIVIDUAL configuration

Press the button repeatedly until ECO
PRO is displayed in the instrument General information
cluster. The last individual configuration is activated di-
rectly when the driving mode is called up
again.
ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL
Principle Activating configuration of the driving

mode
In the ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL driving mode, in-
dividual settings can be adjusted to support an Press the button for the desired driving mode
economical driving style. several times.
The engine control and comfort features, for

instance the climate control output, are ad-
justed.
Parking brake
Configuration Principle
1. "CAR" The parking brake is used to prevent the vehi-
2. "Settings" cle from rolling away when it is parked.
3. "Driving mode"
Safety information
4. "ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL"
Warning
Reset ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL to the standard
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
settings:
"Reset to ECO PRO STANDARD". Before leaving the vehicle, secure the vehicle
ADAPTIVE
Principle
▷ Set the parking brake.
The ADAPTIVE driving mode is a balanced
driving mode that automatically adapts to the ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
driving situation and driving style. turn the front wheels in the direction of
the curb.
If the navigation system is active, upcoming
road sections are considered. ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, for instance with
Turning on a wheel chock.
Press the button. ADAPTIVE is dis-

played in the instrument cluster.
Warning
following actions:
137
CONTROLS Driving
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button. Pull the switch and hold it. The vehicle
▷ Releasing the parking brake. brakes hard while the switch is being
pulled.
dows. The indicator light in the instrument
▷ Engaging selector lever position N. cluster illuminates red, a signal sounds,
▷ Using vehicle equipment. and the brake lights illuminate.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not A Check Control message is displayed.
The parking brake is engaged when the vehi-
cle is stationary.
With Emergency Stop Assistant
Overview Pull the switch briefly to activate the
emergency stop function.
Emergency Stop Assistant, refer to page 207.
Releasing the parking brake
Releasing the parking brake manually

1. Turn on drive-ready state.
Parking brake
2. Press the switch while stepping on
the brake pedal or selector lever position P
is set.
Setting the parking brake
The LED and the indicator light go out.
With a stationary vehicle The parking brake is released.
Pull the switch.

Releasing the parking brake
The LED lights up. automatically
The parking brake is released automatically
The indicator light in the instrument
when you drive off.
cluster illuminates red. The parking
brake is set. The LED and the indicator light go out.
Automatic Hold
While driving
General information
Principle
Automatic Hold assists the driver by automati-
Using while driving serves as an emergency
cally setting and releasing the brake, such as
braking function.
when moving in stop-and-go traffic.
138
Driving CONTROLS
The vehicle is automatically held in place when ▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
it is stationary. ▷ Using vehicle equipment.
On uphill grades the system prevents the vehi- There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
cle from rolling back when driving off. leave children or animals unattended in the
General information exiting and lock the vehicle.
Under the following conditions, the parking
brake is automatically engaged:
▷ Drive-ready state is switched off. NOTICE
▷ The driver's door is opened while the vehi- If the vehicle is stationary, Automatic Hold
cle is stationary. engages the parking brake and prevents the
▷ The moving vehicle is brought to a stand- vehicle from rolling in a car wash. There is a
still using the parking brake. risk of damage to property, among other po-
tential damage. Deactivate Automatic Hold
Safety information prior to entering the car wash.
Warning Overview
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of
the curb. Automatic Hold
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
also secure the vehicle, for instance with
a wheel chock. Establishing operational readiness of
Automatic Hold
Warning
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle 2. Press the button.
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger The LED lights up.
The indicator light lights up green.
following actions:
Automatic Hold is functional.
After every vehicle restart, the last se-
lected setting is active.
dows.
139
CONTROLS Driving
Automatic Hold holding the vehicle Malfunction

Operational readiness is established and the If the parking brake fails or in case of a fault,
driver's door is closed. secure the vehicle against rolling away before
After the brake is applied, the vehicle is exiting.
kept from rolling away as soon as the A Check Control message is displayed.
indicator light illuminates green. Secure the vehicle against rolling away, for in-
stance with a wheel chock, after getting out of
Driving off the vehicle.
Press the accelerator pedal to drive off.

After a power interruption
The brake is released automatically and the in-
To reestablish parking brake functionality after
dicator light of the parking brake is no longer il-
a power interruption:
luminated.
1. Turn on standby state.
Activating the parking brake
automatically 2. Pull the switch while stepping on the
The parking brake is automatically set if drive- brake pedal or selector lever position P is
ready state is switched off while the vehicle is set and then push.
being held by Automatic Hold or if the vehicle This process may take a few seconds. Some
is exited. mechanical sounds associated with this proc-
ess are normal.
The indicator light changes from green
to red. The indicator light is no longer illumi-
nated as soon as the parking brake is
The parking brake is not set automatically, if ready for operation again.
the drive-ready state is switched off, while the
vehicle is coasting to a halt. Automatic Hold is
deactivated.
Turn signal
Switching operational readiness off
Turn signal in exterior mirror
Press the button.
When driving and during operation of the turn
The LED goes out. signals or hazard warning system, do not fold
in the exterior mirrors, so that the turn signal
The indicator light goes out.
lamps on the exterior mirror are easy to see.
Automatic Hold is switched off.

If the vehicle is being held by Automatic Hold,
press additionally on the brake pedal, when
switching off.
140
Driving CONTROLS
Blinking The high beams light up when the low

▷ High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2.
Window wiper system

Safety information
Press the lever past the resistance point. Warning

If the wipers start moving in the folded away
state, body parts can be jammed or damage
Triple turn signal activation may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a
Lightly tap the lever up or down. risk of injury or risk of damage to property.
The triple turn signal duration can be adjusted. Make sure that the vehicle is switched off
when the wipers are in the folded away state
1. "CAR" and the wipers are folded in when switching
2. "Settings" on.
3. "Exterior lighting"
4. "One-touch turn signal"
NOTICE
The wiper blades can wear out or become
Brief blinking damaged prematurely when wiping on a dry
window for a longer period of time. The wiper
Press the lever to the resistance point and hold motor can overheat. There is a risk of dam-
it there for as long as you want the turn signal age to property, among other potential dam-
to flash. age. Do not use the wipers when the window
is dry.
High beams,
headlight flasher NOTICE
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, the
Press the lever forward or pull it backward.
wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper
motor can overheat when switching on.
There is a risk of damage to property, among
other potential damage. Defrost the wind-
shield prior to switching the wipers on.
▷ High beams on, arrow 1.
141
CONTROLS Driving
Turn on window wiper system Rain sensor
Principle
The rain sensor automatically controls the
wiper operation depending on the intensity of
the rainfall.
General information
The sensor is located on the windshield, di-
rectly in front of the interior mirror.
Press the lever up until the desired position is
reached. Safety information
▷ Resting position of the wipers, position 0.
▷ Rain sensor, position 1. NOTICE
▷ Normal wiper speed, position 2. If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers can
▷ Fast wiper speed, position 3. accidentally start moving in car washes.
When the journey is interrupted with the win-
other potential damage. Deactivate the rain
dow wiper system turned on: when the journey
sensor in car washes.
continues, the wipers resume at their previous
speed.
Activate rain sensor
Turn off the window wiper system
and flick wipe
Press the lever up once from its 0 position, ar-

row 1.
Press the lever down. Wiping operation is started.
▷ Turn off: press the lever down until it The LED in the wiper lever is illuminated.
reaches the 0 position.
In frosty conditions, wiping operation may not
▷ Flick wipe: press the lever down from the 0 start.
position.
The lever automatically returns to its 0 po-
Deactivate rain sensor
sition when released.
Press the lever back into the 0 position.
142
Driving CONTROLS
Adjusting the rain sensor sensitivity Cleaning the windshield
Turn the thumbwheel to adjust the sensitivity Pull the lever.

of the rain sensor. The washer fluid is sprayed on the windshield,
Upward: high rain sensor sensitivity. and the wipers are turned on briefly.
Downward: low rain sensor sensitivity.
Windshield washer nozzles
Windshield washer system The windshield washer nozzles are automati-
cally heated while standby state is switched
Safety information on.
Fold-out position of the wipers

Warning
The washer fluid can freeze onto the window Principle
at low temperatures and obstruct the view.
In the fold-out position, the wipers can be
There is a risk of accident. Only use the
folded out from the windshield, which is impor-
washer systems, if the washer fluid cannot
tant, for instance, when changing the wiper
freeze. Use washer fluid with antifreeze, if
blades or for folding away under frosty condi-
needed.
tions.
Safety information
NOTICE
When the washer fluid reservoir is empty, the
Warning
washer pump cannot work as intended.
There is a risk of damage to property, among If the wipers start moving in the folded away
other potential damage. Do not use the state, body parts can be jammed or damage
washer system when the washer fluid reser- may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a
voir is empty. risk of injury or risk of damage to property.
Make sure that the vehicle is switched off
when the wipers are in the folded away state
and the wipers are folded in when switching
on.
143
CONTROLS Driving
NOTICE
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, the
Principle
wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper
motor can overheat when switching on. The Steptronic transmission combines the
There is a risk of damage to property, among functions of an automatic transmission with
other potential damage. Defrost the wind- the possibility of manual shifting, if needed.
shield prior to switching the wipers on.
Safety information
Folding out the wipers
Warning
1. Turn on standby state.
2. Press and hold the wiper lever down, until possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident.
the wipers stop in a close to vertical posi- Before leaving the vehicle, secure the vehicle
tion. against rolling away, e.g. by applying the
parking brake.
Selector lever positions
Gear position D
Selector lever position for normal driving. All
gears for forward travel are activated automat-
ically.
3. Fold the wipers all the way out from the
windshield. R is reverse
Engage selector lever position R only when the
Neutral N
The vehicle may be pushed or roll without
power, for instance in vehicle washes in selec-
tor lever position N.
Parking position P
Folding in the wipers General information

1. Fold the wipers back in onto the windshield. Selector lever position, for instance for parking
the vehicle. The transmission blocks the indi-
2. Switch on standby state and press and
vidual wheels in selector lever position P.
hold the wiper lever down again.
Engage selector lever position P only when the
Wipers return to their resting position and
are ready again for operation.
144
Driving CONTROLS
P is engaged automatically ▷ Unintentional shifting into selector lever po-

Selector lever position P is engaged automati- sition R.
cally in situations such as the following: ▷ Unintentional shifting from selector lever
▷ After the drive-ready state is switched off position P into another selector lever posi-
and selector lever position R, D or M/S is tion.
engaged. 1. Fasten driver's seat belt.
▷ After the standby state has been turned off 2. Press and hold the button to release the
when selector lever position N is engaged. selector lever lock.
▷ The driver's seat belt is unbuckled, the driv-
er's door is opened, and the brake pedal is
not pressed while the vehicle is stationary
and the selector lever is set to D, M/S, or R.
Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that se-
lector lever position P is set. Otherwise, the ve-
hicle may begin to move. Also set parking
brake.
Parking brake, refer to page 137. 3. Push the selector lever in the desired direc-
tion, past a resistance point, if needed. The
Engaging selector lever positions selector lever automatically returns to the
center position when released.
General information
To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you
select a gear position, maintain pressure on
the brake pedal until you are ready to drive off.
Only when the drive-ready state is switched on
and the brake pedal is depressed is it possible
to change from selector lever position P to an-
other selector lever position.
Engaging selector lever position P
The selection lever position P cannot be
changed until all technical prerequisites are
met.
Engaging selector lever position D, N,

R
A selector lever lock prevents the following in-
correct operation:
Press button P.
145
CONTROLS Driving
Rolling or pushing the vehicle Kickdown

Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving
General information performance.
In some situations, the vehicle is to roll without Step on the accelerator pedal beyond the re-
its own power for a short distance, for instance sistance point at the full throttle position.
in a car wash, or be pushed.
Sport program M/S
Engaging selector lever position N
Principle
NOTICE The shifting points and shifting times in the
Selector lever position P is automatically en- Sport program are designed for sportier han-
gaged when standby state is switched off. dling. The transmission, for instance shifts up
There is a risk of damage to property, among later and the shifting times are shorter.
other potential damage. Do not switch
standby state off in car washes. Activating the Sport program
1. Switch on drive-ready state while pressing

on the brake pedal.
2. If necessary, release the parking brake.
3. If necessary, switch off Automatic Hold.
Automatic Hold, refer to page 138.
4. Depress the brake pedal.
5. Touch the selector lever lock and engage
selector lever position N. Press the selector lever to the left from selector
6. Switch off drive-ready state. lever position D.
In this way, standby state remains switched The engaged gear is displayed in the instru-
on, and a Check Control message is dis- ment cluster, for instance S1.
played. The sport program of the transmission is acti-
The vehicle can roll. vated.
Selector lever position P is engaged automati-
cally after approximately 35 minutes. Ending the Sport program
If there is a malfunction, you may not be able Press the selector lever to the right.
to change the selector lever position.
D is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Electronically unlock the transmission lock, if
needed.
Manual mode M/S
Electronic unlocking of the transmission lock, Principle
refer to page 148. Manual gear-shifting is possible in manual
mode.
146
Driving CONTROLS
Activating manual mode Ending the manual mode

1. Press the selector lever to the left from se- Press the selector lever to the right.
lector lever position D, arrow 1. D is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Shift paddles
Principle
The shift paddles on the steering wheel allow
you to change gears quickly while keeping
both hands on the steering wheel.
General information
2. Press the selector lever forward or pull it
backward, arrows 2. Shifting
Manual mode becomes active and the gear is The vehicle only shifts at suitable RPM and
changed. road speeds.
The engaged gear is displayed in the instru-
ment cluster, for instance M1. Short-term manual mode
In selector lever position D, actuating a shift
Shifting paddle switches into manual mode tempora-
▷ To downshift: press the selector lever for- rily.
ward. After conservative driving in manual mode
▷ Upshifting: pull the selector lever rear- without acceleration or shifting via the shift
wards. paddles for a certain amount of time, the
transmission switches back to automatic
The transmission continues shifting automati- mode.
cally in certain situations, for instance when
RPM limits are reached. It is possible to switch into automatic mode:
▷ Keep the right shift paddle pulled until D is
Steptronic Sport transmission: prevent displayed in the instrument cluster.
automatic upshifting in M/S manual ▷ In addition to the pulled right shift paddle,
mode pull the left shift paddle.
Depending on the motorization: if driving mode
SPORT is selected, the Steptronic Sport trans- Continuous manual mode
mission does not automatically upshift in M/ In selector lever position S, actuating a shift
S manual mode once the maximum speed is paddle switches into manual mode perma-
reached. nently.
In addition, there is no downshifting for kick- With the transmission version it is possible to
down. switch into automatic mode:
Additional information: ▷ Keep the right shift paddle pulled until S is
SPORT, refer to page 136. displayed in the instrument cluster.
▷ In addition to the pulled right shift paddle,
pull the left shift paddle.
147
CONTROLS Driving
Steptronic Sport transmission ▷ The transmission shifts down to the

With the appropriate transmission version, the lowest possible gear and switches to
lowest possible gear can be selected by simul- manual operation M.
taneously activating kickdown and operating ▷ A dynamic setting has been activated
the left shift paddles. This is not possible in for the drivetrain.
short-term manual mode. 2. Change gears manually.
Shifting Automatic deactivation

The Sprint function is ended automatically
when driving moderately for a defined period
of time.
Manual deactivation
▷ Keep the right shift paddle pulled until
SPRINT is no longer displayed in the instru-
ment cluster.
▷ In addition to the pulled right shift paddle,
▷ Upshifting: pull the right shift paddle. pull the left shift paddle.
▷ Downshifting: pull left shift paddle. ▷ Press the selector lever from selector lever
▷ Downshifting to the lowest possible gear: position S to D.
keep the left shift paddle pulled.
The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in- Displays in the instrument cluster
strument cluster, followed by the current gear. The selector lever position is
displayed, for example P.
Steptronic Sport transmission: Sprint
function
Principle
Electronic unlocking of the
Depending on the equipment, the Sprint func-
tion can be used for an upcoming acceleration transmission lock
process. The Sprint function prepares the driv-
etrain for the acceleration process. General information
Electronically unlock the transmission lock to
General information maneuver vehicle from a hazardous area.
When the Sprint function is activated, the re- Before unlocking the transmission lock, set the
sponse characteristics of the vehicle will be- parking brake to prevent the vehicle from roll-
come more dynamic. ing away.
Activating
1. Keep the left shift paddle pulled until
SPRINT is displayed in the instrument clus-
ter.
148
Driving CONTROLS
Engage selector lever position N Do not use Launch Control during the break-in.
Unlocking is possible, if the starter can crank Do not steer the steering wheel when driving
the engine. off with Launch Control.
1. Press and hold down brake pedal. Additional information:
2. Press the Start/Stop button. The starter Breaking-in period, refer to page 296.
must audibly start. Hold the Start/Stop but-
ton pressed. Functional requirement
3. With your free hand, press the button on Launch Control is available when the engine is
the selector lever, arrow 1, and press the at operating temperature. The engine is at op-
selector lever into selector lever position N erating temperature after an uninterrupted trip
and hold, arrow N, until selector lever posi- of at least 6 miles/10 km.
tion N is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Start with launch control
A Check Control message is displayed.

TRACTION is displayed in the instrument
cluster and the indicator light for DSC OFF
lights up.
3. Engage selector lever position S.
4. With the left foot, forcefully press down on
the brake.
4. Release Start/Stop button and selector 5. Press and hold down the accelerator pedal
lever. beyond the resistance point at the full throt-
5. Release brake, as soon as the starter tle position, kickdown.
stops. A destination flag is displayed in the instru-
6. Maneuver the vehicle from the hazardous ment cluster.
area and secure it against rolling away. 6. The starting engine speed adjusts. Wait
Additional information: briefly until the engine speed is constant.
Keep the accelerator pedal in this position.
Tow-starting/towing, refer to page 361.
7. Release the brake within 3 seconds after
Launch Control the destination flag illuminates.
The vehicle accelerates.
Principle Upshifting occurs automatically as long as
Launch Control enables optimum acceleration the destination flag is displayed and the ac-
on roads with good traction under dry sur- celerator pedal is not released.
rounding conditions.
Repeated use during a trip
General information After Launch Control has been used, the trans-
The use of Launch Control causes premature mission must cool down for approx. 5 minutes
component wear since this function represents before Launch Control can be used again.
a very heavy load for the vehicle.
149
CONTROLS Driving
Launch Control adjusts to the surrounding

conditions, when used again.
After using Launch Control

To support driving stability, reactivate Dynamic
Stability Control as soon as possible.
System limits
An experienced driver may be able to achieve
better acceleration values in DSC OFF mode.
150
Displays CONTROLS
Displays
Vehicle features and options Overview

1 Fuel gauge 161
Range 164
Instrument cluster 2 Speedometer
3 Central display range 151
Principle Navigation display
The instrument cluster is a variable display. 4 Depending on the equipment: Driver Atten-
When you change to a different program via tion Camera
Driving Dynamics Control, the displays in the
5 Tachometer 161
instrument cluster adapt to the respective driv-
ing mode. Selection lists 167
Widgets 153
General information Trip odometer, see Trip data 168
Depending on the vehicle equipment, it may be ECO PRO displays 302
possible to deactivate the display change in
Power gauge 162
the instrument cluster via iDrive.
Status, Driving Dynamics Control 135
Some of the displays in the instrument cluster
may differ from the illustrations in the Owner's Transmission display 144
Manual. 6 Engine temperature 163
7 Outside temperature 163
8 Check Control 154
9 Speed Limit Assistant 231
Speed Limit Info 165
Time 64
Central display range

Depending on the equipment and configura-
tion, the following is displayed in the central
display range of the instrument cluster:
151
CONTROLS Displays
▷ Navigation displays such as the map view

or, if destination guidance is active, a route
Assisted Driving View
preview with route guidance information.
▷ Displays showing service notifications.
Principle
▷ Assisted Driving View. Information about Depending on the equipment, information
the assist systems is displayed in an ani- about the Driver Assistance is displayed in an
mated surrounding area of the vehicle. animated surrounding area of the vehicle when
driver assistance is active.
Some displays in the central display range can
be configured individually.
General information
The displays may vary depending on the
Depending on the settings, Assisted Driving
equipment and national-market version.
View can be displayed permanently or tempo-
rarily with active Driver Assistance in the in-
Driving mode view strument cluster.
Principle Safety information

Depending on the equipment, if the driving
mode view is activated, the displays in the in-
strument cluster will adapt to the respective Warning
driving mode when a program is changed via The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the Driving Dynamics Control. the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of the
Activate/deactivate system, it cannot independently react to all
1. "CAR" traffic situations. There is a risk of accident.
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions.
2. "Settings"
Watch the surrounding traffic situation
3. "Displays" closely, be ready to take over steering and
4. "Driving mode view" braking at any time, and actively intervene
where appropriate.
Settings
Individual displays in the instrument cluster Settings
can be configured individually.
1. "CAR" Permanent display
2. "Settings" 1. "CAR"
3. "Displays" 2. "Settings"
4. "Instrument panel" 3. "Displays"
5. Select the desired setting. 4. "Instrument panel"
5. "Central display area"
6. "Assisted Driving View"
152
Displays CONTROLS
Temporary display Instrument cluster with

1. "CAR"
extended features: Widgets
2. "Settings"
3. "Displays"
Principle
4. "Instrument panel"
Displays for specific functions can be displayed
5. "Display Assisted Driving View when Driver in the instrument cluster.
Assistance is active"
The following displays can be selected:
▷ Current entertainment source, e.g., radio.
Display
▷ Torque and power.
▷ G-meter.
▷ Trip data.
▷ Efficiency display.
Selecting
An example: the indicator and warning lights

for the Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go
function and the Automatic Lane Change As-
sistant indicate a lane change to the next lane.
At the same time, the lane change to the next
lane is shown with animation in the Assisted
Driving View.
Continue to press the button on the turn signal
System limits lever until the desired widget is selected.
The system's detection capability is limited.

The system may indicate something wrong. Display
Only objects that are detected by the system
are taken into account.
▷ Cameras, refer to page 37.
▷ Radar sensors, refer to page 38.
153
CONTROLS Displays
G-meter partially charged and fuel consumption can be

reduced.
The G-meter indicates the forces that are ap-
plied in longitudinal and transverse direction
on the vehicle occupants while driving. ECO PRO bonus range
In the ECO PRO driving mode, the yielded ex-
Efficiency display tension of the range as a result of fuel-efficient
driving is displayed as ECO PRO bonus range.
Principle
Information about driving style and consump- Check Control
tion can be displayed in the form of a con-
sumption display as a widget in the instrument
cluster, for example. Principle
The Check Control system monitors functions
General information in the vehicle and notifies you of faults in the
Depending on the activated driving mode, dif- monitored systems.
ferent information will be displayed:
General information
Driving Display
mode A Check Control message is displayed as a
combination of indicator or warning lights and
COMFORT Average consumption. text messages in the instrument cluster and, if
SPORT Current consumption. applicable, in the Head-up Display.
Energy recovery. In addition, an acoustic signal may sound and
a text message may appear on the Control
ECO PRO ECO PRO bonus range. Display.
Distance traveled in Coasting
mode. Hiding Check Control messages
Current consumption.
Average fuel consumption

The average consumption indicates the fuel
consumption when driving a specific route.
Current consumption
The current consumption displays the current
fuel consumption. Check whether you are cur-
rently driving in an efficient and environmen- Press the button on the turn signal lever.
tally-friendly manner.
Continuous display
Energy recovery
Some Check Control messages are displayed
During energy recovery, the kinetic energy of continuously and are not cleared until the fault
the vehicle is converted into electric energy in is eliminated. If several faults occur at once,
coasting/overrun mode. The vehicle battery is the messages are displayed consecutively.
154
Displays CONTROLS
The messages can be hidden for approx. 4. Select the desired text message.
8 seconds. After this time, they are displayed 5. Select the desired setting.
again automatically.
Messages after trip completion
Temporary display
Certain messages displayed while driving are
Some Check Control messages are hidden au- displayed again after drive-ready state is
tomatically after approx. 20 seconds. The switched off.
Check Control messages are stored and can
be displayed again later.
Displaying stored Check Control
messages Principle
1. "CAR" Indicator/warning lights in the instrument clus-
2. "Vehicle status" ter display the status of some functions in the
3. "Check Control messages" vehicle and indicate when a fault is present in
the monitored systems.
4. Select the text message.
Display General information

The indicator/warning lights can light up in a
Check Control variety of combinations and colors.
Several of the lights are checked for proper
At least one Check Control message is
functioning and light up temporarily when
displayed or stored.
drive-ready state is turned on.
Text messages Red lights

Text messages in combination with an icon in
the instrument cluster explain a Check Control Seat belt reminder
message and the meaning of the indicator/ Indicator lamp lights up in the following
warning lights. situations:
▷ Seat belt on the driver or passenger
Supplementary text messages side is not buckled.
Additional information, such as the cause of a
▷ The seat belt reminder can also be acti-
fault or the required action, can be called up
vated if objects are placed on the front pas-
via Check Control.
senger seat.
With urgent messages the added text will be
▷ The seat belt is not buckled on the corre-
automatically displayed on the Control Display.
sponding rear seat.
Depending on the Check Control message, fur-
Make sure that the seat belts are positioned
ther help can be selected.
correctly.
1. "CAR"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Check Control messages"
155
CONTROLS Displays
Rear seat belt reminder: Seat Additional information:

detection ▷ Intersection warning with City light braking
The seat belt is not buckled on the cor- function, refer to page 190.
responding rear seat.
Forward Collision Warning with light
braking function
Airbag system
The indicator light is illuminated: pre-
Airbag system and seat belt tensioner
warning. Brake and increase distance.
may not be working.
Indicator light flashes and an acoustic
Have the vehicle checked immediately
signal sounds: acute warning. Brake and make
by a dealer's service center or another quali-
an evasive maneuver, if necessary.
fied service center or repair shop.
Forward Collision Warning with light braking
Parking brake
function, refer to page 185.
The parking brake is set.
Additional information: Intersection Collision Warning: vehicle
For releasing the parking brake, refer to detected from the right
page 138.
Risk of collision with vehicle crossing
from the right.
Brake system Additional information:
Brake system fault. Continue to drive Intersection warning with City light braking
moderately. function, refer to page 190.
Have the vehicle checked immediately
by a dealer's service center or another
Intersection Collision Warning: vehicle
detected from the left
If equipped with Equipment Stop from the left.
Assistant
Emergency Stop function active.
Intersection warning with City light braking
Additional information: function, refer to page 190.
Emergency Stop Assistant, refer to
page 207.
Pedestrian Warning with City Collision
Mitigation
General risk of collision Indicator light flashes and an acoustic
Indicator light illuminates or flashes in signal sounds: imminent collision with
conjunction with an acoustic signal if a a detected person or a cyclist.
collision is imminent. Intervene immediately by braking or make an
evasive maneuver.
156
Displays CONTROLS
Pedestrian Warning with City Collision Mitiga- The Brake Assistant function may not
tion, refer to page 194. activate. Avoid abrupt braking. Take
the longer braking distance into ac-
count.
Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go
function Have the system immediately checked by a
dealer's service center or another qualified
Indicator light flashes and an acoustic service center or repair shop.
signal sounds: braking and evading.
Dynamic Stability Control
Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go function,
refer to page 222. Indicator light blinks: Dynamic Stability
Control controls the drive and brake
forces. The vehicle is stabilized. Re-
Steering Assistant duce speed and modify your driving style to
Indicator light flashes and an acoustic the driving circumstances.
signal sounds: the system will be Indicator light illuminates: the Dynamic Stabil-
switched off. ity Control has malfunctioned.
Additional information: Have the system immediately checked by a
Steering Assistant, refer to page 233. dealer's service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Drive power
Dynamic Stability Control, refer to page 213.
Reduced drive power due to an over-
heated drivetrain.
The Dynamic Stability Control
deactivated or the Dynamic Traction
Power gauge, refer to page 162. Control activated
The Dynamic Stability Control is deacti-
Yellow lights vated or the Dynamic Traction Control
is activated.
Steering Assistant Additional information:
The indicator light lights up and an ▷ Dynamic Stability Control, refer to
acoustic signal may sound: a system page 213.
interruption is imminent.
▷ Dynamic Traction Control, refer to
The indicator warning light flashes: lane boun- page 215.
dary driven over.
Flat Tire Monitor
Steering Assistant, refer to page 233.
Flat tire monitor reports tire pressure
loss in a tire.
Anti-lock Braking System Reduce your speed and stop cau-
tiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering
maneuvers.
157
CONTROLS Displays
Additional information: Emissions are deteriorating. Have

Flat tire monitor, refer to page 333. the vehicle checked as soon as pos-
sible.
▷ The warning light flashes under certain cir-
Tire pressure monitor
cumstances:
The indicator light illuminates: the Tire This indicates that there is excessive misfir-
Pressure Monitor reports a low tire ing in the engine.
pressure or a flat tire. Follow the infor-
Reduce the vehicle speed and have the
mation in the Check Control message.
system checked immediately; otherwise,
The indicator light flashes and is then illumi- serious engine misfiring within a brief pe-
nated continuously: flat tires or tire pressure riod can seriously damage emission control
losses cannot be detected. components, in particular the catalytic con-
▷ Fault caused by systems or devices with verter.
the same radio frequency: after leaving the Additional information:
area of the interference, the system auto-
Socket for OBD on-board diagnostics, refer to
matically becomes active again.
page 352.
▷ In the case of tires with special approval:
the tire pressure monitor was unable to
complete the reset. Reset the system Green lights
again.
▷ Wheel without wheel electronics installed: Rear seats: Seat belt fastened
have it checked by a dealer's service center The seat belt is buckled on the corre-
or another qualified service center or repair sponding rear seat.
shop as needed.
▷ Malfunction: have the system checked by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified Rear seats: Seat detection
service center or repair shop. The seat belt is buckled on the corre-
Additional information: sponding rear seat.
Tire pressure monitor, refer to page 325.
Turn signal
Steering system Turn signal is on.
Steering system may be faulty. Unusually rapid blinking of the indicator
Have the system checked by a dealer's light indicates that a turn signal bulb
service center or another qualified serv- has failed.
ice center or repair shop. Additional information:
Turn signal, refer to page 140.
Emissions
▷ The warning light lights up: Parking lights
Parking lights are switched on.
158
Displays CONTROLS
Parking lights/low beams, refer to page 173. Automatic Hold, refer to page 138.
Low beams Manual Speed Limiter

Low beams are switched on. The indicator light lights up: the system
Additional information: is switched on.
Parking lights/low beams, refer to The indicator light flashes: the set
page 173. speed limit has been exceeded.
Lane departure warning Manual Speed Limiter, refer to page 218.
The indicator light lights up: the system

is switched on. Warnings can be is- Cruise control
sued. The system is active.
Additional information: Additional information:
Lane departure warning, refer to page 196. Cruise control, refer to page 220.
Automatic High Beam Assistant Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go

Automatic High Beam Assistant is function switched on
switched on. The system is turned on.
High beams are switched on and off Additional information:
automatically depending on the traffic situa-
tion. Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go
Automatic High Beam Assistant, refer to
page 175. Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go
function: vehicle ahead
Automatic Hold: vehicle is held The indicator light lights up: the system
is switched on. Vehicle ahead has been
automatically
detected.
Automatic Hold is activated. The vehi- Indicator lamp flashes: preceding vehicle has
cle is automatically held in place when started driving.
it is stationary.
Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go function,
Automatic Hold, refer to page 138. refer to page 222.
Automatic Hold: vehicle secured Speed Limit Assistant activated

against rolling away
Depending on the equipment, the indi-
After the brake is applied, the vehicle is cator light is illuminated together with
kept from rolling away. the icon for a speed control system:
Additional information: Speed Limit Assistant is active and detected
159
CONTROLS Displays
speed limits can be accepted manually for the Automatic Lane Change Assistant:
displayed system. functional requirements not met
Additional information: Depending on the national-market ver-
Speed Limit Assistant, refer to page 231. sion:
Arrow symbol for lane change gray:
Speed Limit Assistant: Apply speed lane change not possible; functional require-
limit ments not met.
The detected speed limit can be ap-
plied with the SET button. As soon as Automatic Lane Change Assistant, refer to
the speed limit has been applied, a page 239.
green checkmark is displayed.
Additional information: Assisted Driving Plus
Speed Limit Assistant, refer to page 231. The system is active.
Steering Assistant Assisted Driving Plus, refer to
The system supports the driver in page 237.
keeping the vehicle within the lane.
Additional information: Blue lights
High beams
Automatic Lane Change Assistant: High beams have been switched on.
lane change in progress Additional information:
Arrow symbol for lane change green: High beams, refer to page 141.
the system carries out a lane change.
Additional information: Drive power
Automatic Lane Change Assistant, refer to Reduced drive power due to a cold
page 239. drivetrain.
Automatic Lane Change Assistant: Power gauge, refer to page 162.
lane change not possible
Gray line for lane boundary on the ap-
Gray lights
propriate side: system detected a lane
change request. Lane change not cur-
Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go
rently possible.
function
Indicator light is illuminated: the system
Automatic Lane Change Assistant, refer to
is interrupted.
page 239.
Indicator light flashes: the conditions
are not adequate for the system to work or the
system has been deactivated.
160
Displays CONTROLS
Additional information: Display

Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go function, An arrow next to the fuel pump
refer to page 222. symbol indicates the vehicle
side on which the fuel filler flap
Steering Assistant is located.
Indicator light is illuminated: the system The current range is displayed

is ready. as numerical value.
Steering Assistant, refer to page 233. Indicator light in the instrument
cluster
Assisted Driving Plus The yellow indicator light illuminates,
once the fuel reserve is reached.
Indicator light is illuminated: the system
is interrupted.
Assisted Driving Plus, refer to page 237.
Tachometer
General information
White lights
Always avoid RPM in the red warning field. In
this range, the fuel supply is reduced to protect
Assisted Driving Plus the engine.
Indicator light is illuminated: the system Depending on the equipment, the tachometer
is ready. can also be shown in the Head-up display.
Assisted Driving Plus, refer to page 237. Activating/deactivating
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
Fuel gauge 3. "Displays"
Principle 5. "Engine display"
The current fill level of the fuel tank is dis- 6. "Tachometer"
played.
When the setting for the driving mode view is
activated, the activated tachometer is only
General information shown in the COMFORT or SPORT driving
Vehicle inclination may cause the display to mode.
vary.
To display the tachometer in the Head-up dis-
Additional information: play, the sport displays of the Head-up display
Refueling, refer to page 308. must be activated.
161
CONTROLS Displays
Reduced engine speed range Drive power

The available engine speed range may be re- The available drive power may be reduced due
duced due certain factors such as a cold drive to certain factors, for instance a cold engine.
system. The tachometer display is automati- Depending on the available drive power, the
cally adjusted depending on the available en- range for POWER is adjusted automatically.
gine speed range. If needed, icons in the power gauge indicate a
reduction of the drive power.
Power gauge Example Description

symbol
Principle Reduced drive power due to a

The power gauge indicates the available drive cold drivetrain.
power as a percentage.
Reduced drive power due to an
overheated drivetrain.
Activate/deactivate
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Displays"
Shift lights
Principle
5. "Engine display"
The Shift lights indicate the shift point at which
6. "Power meter"
the best possible acceleration figures can be
When the setting for the driving mode view is achieved.
activated, the activated power gauge is only
shown in the COMFORT driving mode. General information
Depending on the equipment and national-
Display market version, the Shift lights are active in the
M manual mode of the Steptronic Sport trans-
mission and with manual transmission.
The Shift lights display is available either in the
instrument cluster or in the Head-up display.
▷ Depending on the equipment, either driving
program SPORT or SPORT PLUS is acti-
vated.
Needle in the area of arrow 1: display of the en-
▷ To display the Shift lights in the Head-up
ergy recovered by coasting or when decelerat-
display, the sport displays of the Head-up
ing, CHARGE.
display must be activated.
Needle in the range of arrow 2: the drive power
in percent, POWER.
162
Displays CONTROLS
Turning on/turning off The lettering READY in the in-

strument cluster indicates that
Steptronic Sport transmission:
the drive readiness is turned on
1. If applicable, select SPORT or SPORT and the Auto Start/Stop function
PLUS driving mode. is ready to start the engine auto-
Press Driving Dynamics Control. matically.
2. Activate the M manual mode of the trans- Additional information:

mission.
Operating condition of the vehicle, refer to
page 41.
Display
Engine temperature
Display
▷ Cold engine: the needle is at
the low temperature value.
Drive at moderate RPM and
vehicle speeds.
▷ Normal operating tempera-
ture: the needle is in the mid-
Information about the driving style dle or in the lower half of the
▷ The current RPM is displayed in the tach- temperature display.
ometer. ▷ Hot engine: the needle is at the high tem-
▷ Arrow 1: successive yellow illuminated fields perature value. In addition, a Check Control
indicate an increase in the RPM. message is displayed.
▷ Arrow 2: successive fields illuminated or- Additional information:
ange indicate an optimal shift point.
Coolant level, refer to page 348.
▷ Arrow 3: the field lights up red. Do not wait
any further to shift.
Indicator light in the instrument
When the maximum RPM is reached, the entire
cluster
display flashes red and the fuel supply is inter-
rupted in order to protect the engine. A red indicator light is displayed.
Standby state and drive-

ready state Outside temperature
The lettering OFF in the instru-
General information
ment cluster indicates that
drive-ready state is switched off If the indicator drops to +37 ℉/+3 ℃ or lower,
and standby state is switched a signal sounds.
on. A Check Control message is displayed.
163
CONTROLS Displays
There is an increased risk of ice on roads. Display

The current range is displayed
Safety information as a numerical value next to the
fuel gauge.
Warning
Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃
there can be a risk of icy roads, for instance
on bridges or shady sections of the road.
There is a risk of accident. Modify your driv-
Service notifications
ing style to the weather conditions at low
temperatures. Principle
The function displays the service notifications
and the corresponding maintenance scopes.
Range
General information
After turning on the drive readiness, the next
Principle
service appointment or the distance remaining
The range indicates the distance that can still until the next service is displayed briefly in the
be covered with the current full tank of fuel. instrument cluster.
A service advisor can read out the current
General information service notifications from your vehicle key.
The estimated range available with the re- Some information on service notifications can
maining fuel is permanently displayed in the also be shown on the BMW display key.
instrument cluster.
With a low remaining range, a Check Control Display
message is briefly displayed. With a sporty
driving style, for instance fast cornering, the Detailed information on service
engine function is not always ensured.
notifications
The Check Control message appears continu-
More information on the type of service re-
ously below a range of approx.
quired may be displayed on the Control Dis-
30 miles/50 km.
play.
Safety information 1. "CAR"

2. "Vehicle status"
NOTICE 3. "Required services"
With a range below 30 miles/50 km, the en- Maintenance work and legally mandated
gine may no longer have sufficient fuel. En- inspections are displayed.
gine functions are not ensured anymore. 4. Select an entry to call up detailed informa-
There is a risk of damage to property, among tion.
other potential damage. Refuel promptly.
164
Displays CONTROLS
Icons Steptronic transmission: displaying

Suggestions to upshift or downshift are dis-
Icons Description played in the instrument cluster.
No service is currently required. On vehicles without a gear shift indicator, the
engaged gear is displayed.
Example Description
The time for recommended mainte-
nance or a legally mandated in- Efficient gear is set.
spection is approaching.
Service interval is exceeded.

Shift into efficient gear.
Entering appointment dates

Enter the dates for the mandatory vehicle in- Speed Limit Info
spections.
Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are Speed Limit Info
set correctly.
1. "CAR" Principle
2. "Vehicle status" Speed Limit Info shows the currently valid
speed limit in the instrument cluster and, if
3. "Required services"
necessary, the Head-up Display.
4. "Vehicle inspection"
5. "Date:" General information
6. Select the desired setting. The camera in the area of the interior mirror
detects traffic signs at the edge of the road as
well as overhead sign posts.
Gear shift indicator Traffic signs with extra symbols are considered
and compared with the vehicle's onboard data.
Principle The traffic sign will then be either displayed or
The gear shift indicator recommends the opti- ignored depending on the situation in the in-
mal gear for the current driving situation and strument cluster and the Head-up Display.
supports an efficient driving style. With the navigation system, the system takes
into account the information stored in the navi-
General information gation system and also displays speed limits
present on routes without signs.
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-
market version, the gear shift indicator is active Without a navigation system, the system is
in manual mode M of the Steptronic transmis- subject to limitations imposed by technology.
sion. Traffic signs with speed limitations are de-
tected and displayed only. Speed limits due to
entering towns/cities, highway signs, etc., are
not displayed. Speed limits with extra traffic
signs are always displayed.
165
CONTROLS Displays
Safety information Display
Speed Limit Info

Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for Current speed limit.
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing Without a navigation system the
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of the traffic signals are grayed out af-
system, it cannot independently react to all ter curves or longer stretches of
traffic situations. There is a risk of accident. distance travelled.
Watch the surrounding traffic situation Depending on the equipment,
closely, be ready to take over steering and Speed Limit Info not available.
braking at any time, and actively intervene
where appropriate.
Overview
Sensors
The system is controlled by the following sen-
sors: If the detected speed limit has been exceeded,
the indicator light will flash.
Settings
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 37.
1. "CAR"
Displaying Speed Limit Info 2. "Settings"

3. "Driver Assistance"
General information 4. If necessary, "Driving"
Depending on the vehicle equipment, Speed 5. "Speed Limit Assistance"
Limit Info is displayed permanently in the in- 6. Select the desired setting:
strument cluster or via iDrive.
▷ "Warn when speeding": activate/deacti-
vate the flashing of the Speed Limit Info
Activating
display in the instrument cluster and,
1. "CAR" where applicable, the Head-up Display
2. "Settings" when the currently valid speed limit is
3. "Driver Assistance" exceeded. The warning that is issued
when a speed limit is exceeded may de-
4. If necessary, "Driving"
pend on the Speed Limit Assistant set-
5. "Speed Limit Assistance" tings.
6. "Speed limits" ▷ "Excess speed display": the speed limit
7. "Show current limit" that is detected by Speed Limit Info is
displayed with a mark on the speedom-
eter.
166
Displays CONTROLS
System limits If necessary, the corresponding menu will open

System limits of the sensors
Display
The system function may be limited and may
provide incorrect information in the following
situations:
▷ For traffic signs that are fully or partially
concealed by objects, stickers, or paint.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in Depending on the equipment version, the list
front of you. in the instrument cluster may differ from the il-
▷ In the case of navigation data that is inva- lustration.
lid, outdated or not available.
▷ In areas not covered by the navigation sys-
Displaying and using the list
tem.
The lists can be displayed and operated using
▷ When roads deviate from the navigation,
the buttons on the steering wheel.
such as due to changes in road layout.
▷ In case of electronic traffic signs. Button Function
▷ When passing buses or trucks with traffic Change the entertainment

signs applied to them. source.
▷ When the traffic signs do not correspond to Pressing the button again will
the standard. close the currently displayed
▷ When traffic signs that are valid for a paral- list.
lel road are detected. Show list of most recent tele-
▷ In the presence of country-specific road phone calls.
signs or road layouts.
Turn the thumbwheel to select
the desired setting.
Selection lists Press the thumbwheel to con-
firm the setting.
Principle The list of the current enter-
tainment source can be dis-
Lists can be displayed and, if necessary, used
played in the instrument clus-
for certain functions in the instrument cluster or
ter again by turning the
the Head-up Display.
thumbwheel.
▷ Entertainment source.
▷ Current audio source.
▷ List of most recent telephone calls.
167
CONTROLS Displays
Trip data Display in the instrument cluster

Depending on the equipment, information
about the distance covered can be displayed
Principle
as widget in the instrument cluster.
Values for the trip, such as the average con-
The following information is displayed:
sumption or trip kilometers, are displayed.
▷ Total kilometers.
General information ▷ Configured interval for displaying trip data.
The trip data can be displayed on the Control ▷ Distance traveled depending on the config-
Display and in the instrument cluster. ured interval.
The values can be displayed and reset de- ▷ Average speed.
pending on various intervals, such as after re- Selecting and setting widgets in the instrument
fueling. cluster.
Display on the Control Display
Widgets, refer to page 153.
Overview
Adjusting the display of the trip data
The following information is displayed depend-
ing on the equipment and the set interval and The intervals for the display of the trip data in
driving mode: the instrument cluster and on the Control Dis-
play are adjustable.
▷ Configured interval for displaying trip data.
▷ Average consumption depending on the 1. "CAR"
configured interval. 2. "Driving information"
▷ Average speed. 3. "Trip data"
▷ Total time for shut off engine through the 4. "Data since"
Auto Start/Stop function. 5. Select the desired setting:
▷ Distance traveled in Coasting mode. ▷ "Start of trip ( )": the values are auto-
▷ Consumption history in form of a chart. matically reset approx. four hours after
the vehicle has come to a standstill.
Displays ▷ "Refueling ( )": the values are automati-
1. "CAR" cally reset after refueling with a larger
quantity of fuel.
2. "Driving information"
▷ "Factory": average consumption since
3. "Trip data"
delivery from the factory.
Consumption history The values since the time of the factory
delivery are displayed.
The average consumption is shown in the con-
sumption history in form of a chart based on ▷ "Individual ( )": the values since the last
the distance traveled and the driving mode. manual reset are displayed. The values
can be reset at any time.
168
Displays CONTROLS
Resetting average values manually ▷ Boost pressure.

The following interval can be reset manually at ▷ Engine oil temperature.
any time: "Individual ( )". ▷ G-meter.
With the button on the turn signal lever: ▷ Torque.
1. Continue to press the button on the turn ▷ Power.
signal lever until the widget for the trip data
is selected. Displays
1. "CAR"
3. "Sport displays"

The Sport displays can be displayed in form of
widgets in the instrument cluster.
The following widgets can be selected:
2. Press and hold the button on the turn sig- ▷ Widget for torque and power.
nal lever. ▷ Widget for G-meter.
Via iDrive: Additional information:
1. "CAR" Widgets, refer to page 153.
3. "Trip data" Vehicle status
4. "Data since"
5. "Reset individual" General information
The average values and counters are reset. The status can be displayed and actions per-
Once the average values and counters have formed for several systems.
been reset, the following interval is automati-
cally set: "Individual ( )". Going to the vehicle status
1. "CAR"
Sport displays 2. "Vehicle status"
Principle Information at a glance

The Sport displays especially support a sporty
Icons Description
driving style.
"Flat Tire Monitor": Status of
Display on the Control Display the flat tire monitor, refer to
page 333.
Overview "Tire Pressure Monitor": status
The following information is displayed: of the Tire Pressure Monitor,
refer to page 325.
169
CONTROLS Displays
Icons Description Turning on/off

1. "CAR"
"Engine oil level": electronic oil
measurement, refer to 2. "Settings"
page 345. 3. "Displays"
"Check Control messages": 4. "Head-up display"
displaying stored Check Con- 5. "Head-up display"
trol messages, refer to
page 154. Display
"Required services": displaying
service notifications, refer to Overview
page 164. The following information is displayed on the
Head-up Display:
▷ Vehicle speed.
Head-up Display ▷ Navigation instructions.
▷ Check Control messages.
Principle
▷ Selection list in the instrument cluster.
The Head-up display projects important infor-
▷ Driver assistance systems.
mation in the driver's field of view, for instance
the speed. ▷ Sport displays.
The driver can get information without averting Some of this information is only displayed
his or her eyes from the road. briefly as needed.
General information Selecting displays in the Head-up

Display
Follow instructions for cleaning the Head-up
display in the Vehicle Care chapter. 1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
Overview 3. "Displays"
4. "Head-up display"
Setting the brightness

The brightness is automatically adjusted to the
ambient brightness.
The base setting can be adjusted manually.
1. "CAR"
The protective glass of the Head-up display is 2. "Settings"
located in the position marked.
3. "Displays"
5. "Brightness"
170
Displays CONTROLS
6. Turn the Controller until the desired bright- ▷ "Speed Limit Assistance": access the
ness is set. settings for the speed assistant.
7. Press the Controller. ▷ "Display infotainment lists in": set up if
When the low beams are switched on, the the selection lists are displayed in the
brightness of the Head-up Display can be ad- instrument cluster or the Head-up Dis-
justed using the instrument lighting. play.
▷ "Reduced height": if not all of the infor-
Adjusting the height mation is in the driver's field of view, the
1. "CAR" information can be displayed in the
lower section of the Head-up Display.
2. "Settings"
3. "Displays" Visibility of the display
4. "Head-up display" The visibility of the displays in the Head-up
5. "Height" Display is influenced by the following factors:
6. Turn the Controller until the desired height ▷ Seat position.
is reached. ▷ Objects on the protective glass of the
7. Press the Controller. Head-up display.
The height of the Head-up Display can be ▷ Dust or dirt on the protective glass of the
stored using the memory function. Head-up display.
▷ Windshield dirty on inside or outside.
Setting the rotation ▷ Sunglasses with certain polarization filters.
The Head-up Display view can be rotated. ▷ Wet road.
1. "CAR" ▷ Unfavorable light conditions.
2. "Settings" If the image is distorted, have the base set-
3. "Displays" tings checked by a dealer’s service center or
another qualified service center or repair shop.
5. "Rotation"
Special windshield
6. Turn the Controller until the desired setting
The windshield is part of the system.
is selected.
The shape of the windshield makes it possible
to display a precise illustration.
Additional settings A film in the windshield prevents double im-

ages from being generated.
1. "CAR"
For this reason, it is strongly recommended to
2. "Settings" have the special windshield replaced by a
3. "Displays" dealer’s service center or another qualified
4. "Head-up display" service center or repair shop, if necessary.
171
CONTROLS Lights
Lights
Vehicle features and options Icon Function
Low beams.
Instrument lighting.
Right roadside parking light.
Left roadside parking light.
Lights and lighting

Switches in the vehicle Automatic headlight control
Principle
The low beams are switched on and off auto-
matically depending on the ambient bright-
ness, for example in tunnels, in twilight or if
there is precipitation.
General information
A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can
The light switch element is located next to the cause the lights to be turned on.
steering wheel.
If the low beams are switched on manually, the
automatic headlight control is deactivated.
Icon Function
Lights off. Activating

Daytime driving lights. Press the button on the light switch el-
ement.
Parking lights.
The LED in the button lights up.
Automatic headlight control.
cluster is illuminated when the low
Adaptive lighting functions. beams are switched on.
172
Lights CONTROLS
System limits After the drive-ready state is switched on, the

automatic headlight control will be activated.
The automatic headlight control cannot re-
place your personal judgment of lighting condi-
tions. Low beams
For example, the sensors are unable to detect
Turning on
fog or hazy weather. In these situations, turn
the lights on manually. Press the button on the light switch el-
ement.
Parking lights, low-beams The low beams illuminate when drive-ready

state is switched on.
and roadside parking lights
cluster lights up.
General information
If the driver's door is opened when the drive- Press the button again to switch on the low
ready state is switched off, the exterior lighting beams when the standby state is switched on.
is automatically switched off after a period of
time. Turning off
Parking lights low beams can be switched off in the low
speed range.
General information
Press the button on the light switch el-
The parking lights can only be switched on in ement.
the low speed range.
Turning on Roadside parking lights

When the vehicle is parked, a one-sided road-
side parking light can be switched on.
ement.
Button Function
cluster lights up. Right roadside parking light on.
The vehicle is illuminated on all sides. Left roadside parking light off.
Do not use the parking lights for extended peri-
ods; otherwise, they might drain the vehicle
battery and it would then be impossible to Switching off the roadside parking light:
switch on drive-ready state.
ement or switch on the drive-ready
Turning off
state.
ement or switch on the drive-ready
state.
173
CONTROLS Lights
Welcome lights Setting the duration

1. "CAR"
Principle 2. "Settings"
The welcome light turns on automatically for a 3. "Exterior lighting"
limited period of time when approaching or un- 4. "Pathway lighting"
locking the vehicle. 5. Select the desired setting.
6. "OK"
General information
Depending on the equipment, the exterior
lighting of the vehicle can be set individually. Daytime driving lights
Activating/deactivating welcome General information
light
The daytime driving lights light up when drive-
1. "CAR" ready state is switched on.
2. "Settings"
3. "Exterior lighting" Activate/deactivate daytime driving
4. Depending on the equipment, select the lights
following setting: In some countries, daytime driving lights are
▷ "Welcome and goodbye" mandatory, so it may not be possible to deacti-
vate the daytime driving lights in front.
When unlocking the vehicle, individual
lighting functions are switched on for a 1. "CAR"
limited time. 2. "Settings"
▷ "BMW Kidney 'Iconic Glow'" 3. "Exterior lighting"
The radiator grille lighting can only be 4. Depending on the national-market version:
adjusted when the vehicle is stationary "Daytime driving lights" or "Daytime driving
and the drive-ready state is switched lights, rear"
off.
Pathway lighting Adaptive lighting functions

Principle
Principle
Adaptive lighting functions enable dynamic il-
For the pathway lighting, the exterior lighting lumination of the road.
turns on for a certain period of time after leav-
ing the vehicle in order to illuminate the area
surrounding the vehicle.
General information
The adaptive lighting functions may consist of
Switching pathway lighting on one system or multiple systems, depending on
the equipment version:
After switching off the drive-ready state, briefly
push the turn signal lever forward. ▷ Adaptive Light Control.
▷ Cornering light.
174
Lights CONTROLS
Activating esses as well as the vehicle load conditions in

order to avoid blinding oncoming traffic.
ement.
The LED in the button lights up.

Automatic High Beam
The adaptive lighting functions are active Assistant
when the drive-ready state is switched on.
Principle
Adaptive Light Control The Automatic High Beam Assistant detects
other road users early on and automatically
switches the high beams on or off depending
General information on the traffic situation.
Depending on the steering-wheel angle and
other parameters, the light from the headlight General information
follows the course of the road. The Automatic High Beam Assistant ensures
To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adap- that the high beams are switched on, when-
tive Light Control does not swivel to the oppo- ever the traffic situation allows. In the low
site lane when the vehicle is at a standstill. speed range, the high beams are not switched
on by the system.
The system responds to light from oncoming
Cornering light traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to
ambient lighting, for instance in towns and cit-
Principle ies.
In tight curves, for instance on mountainous The high beams can be switched on and off
roads or when turning, an additional, cornering manually at any time.
light is switched on that lights up the inside of
the curve when the vehicle is moving below a Activate Automatic High Beam
certain speed. Assistant
General information 1. Press the button on the light switch
The cornering light is automatically switched element.
on depending on the steering-wheel angle or, The LED in the button lights up.
where applicable, the use of turn signals. 2. Press the button on the turn signal lever.
When driving in reverse, the cornering lights
may be automatically switched on regardless
of the steering-wheel angle.
Adaptive headlight range

control
The adaptive headlight range control feature
balances out acceleration and braking proc-
175
CONTROLS Lights
The indicator light in the instrument Safety information

cluster is illuminated when the low
Warning
The headlights are automatically changed be- If adjustments have been made or the sensi-
tween low beams and high beams. tivity has been modified, oncoming traffic
The blue indicator light in the instru- may be momentarily blinded. There is a risk
ment cluster lights up when the system of accident. If adjustments have been made
switches on the high beams. and the sensitivity has been modified, make
sure that oncoming traffic is not momentarily
Interruption of journey with activated Auto- blinded. Switch off the high beams manually
matic High Beam Assistant: the Automatic if required.
High Beam Assistant remains activated when
driving continues.
The Automatic High Beam Assistant is deacti- Functional requirements
vated when manually switching the high ▷ Setting at standstill only.
beams on and off. ▷ Drive-ready state is switched on.
To reactivate the Automatic High Beam Assis- ▷ Light is turned off.
tant, press the button on the turn signal lever.
Increase sensitivity
Deactivate Automatic High Beam Push the turn signal lever to the front for ap-
Assistant proximately 10 seconds.
A Check Control message is displayed. The
system responds more sensitively.
Resetting the sensitivity

Push the turn signal lever to the front again for
approx. 10 seconds or switch off the drive-
ready state.
The sensitivity of the Automatic High Beam
Assistant is reset to the factory settings.
Press the button on the turn signal lever.
System limits
Sensitivity of the Automatic High The Automatic High Beam Assistant cannot
Beam Assistant replace the driver's personal judgment of when
to use the high beams. In situation that require
General information this, therefore dimming manually.
The sensitivity of the Automatic High Beam The system is not fully functional in the follow-
Assistant can be adjusted. ing situations, and driver intervention may be
necessary:
176
Lights CONTROLS
▷ In very unfavorable weather conditions, Safety information

such as fog or heavy precipitation.
▷ When detecting poorly-lit road users such
as pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders
and wagons; when driving close to train or
ship traffic; or at animal crossings.
▷ In tight curves, on hilltops or in depressions,
in crossing traffic or half-obscured oncom-
ing traffic on highways.
▷ In poorly-lit towns and cities or in the pres-
ence of highly reflective signs. The respective info label is located in or on the
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior headlight and is visible from the outside or
mirror is fogged up, dirty or covered with when the hood is open.
stickers, etc.
Laser high beams

Principle
The headlight range of the high beams is in-
creased and provides better illumination of the
road.
Laser radiation.
General information
Do not look into the beam.
The laser high beams are integrated into the
headlights and emit from there. Laser class 2.
When the high beams are switched-on, start-
ing with a speed of approx. 37 mph/60 km/h,
the laser high beams in the headlight are auto- Instrument lighting
matically switched on in addition to the LED
high beams. Functional requirement
Depending on the national-market version, ad- The parking lights or low beams must be
ditional information can be taken from the la- switched on to set the brightness.
ser sign on the headlight.
Adjust the brightness with the
thumbwheel.
177
CONTROLS Lights
Interior lighting Ambient light

General information General information
Depending on the equipment version, interior Depending on the equipment version, lighting
lights, footwell lights, entry lights, ambient can be adjusted for some lights in the car's in-
lighting, and speaker lighting are automatically terior.
controlled.
Activating/deactivating ambient
Overview light
1. "CAR"
Buttons in the vehicle
2. "Settings"
3. "Interior lighting"
4. "Ambient lighting"
Turning ambient light on/off

The ambient light is switched on when the ve-
hicle is unlocked, and switched off when the
vehicle is locked.
If the ambient light was deactivated via iDrive,
Interior lights it will not be turned on when the vehicle is un-
locked.
Reading lights
Selecting the color
1. "CAR"
Turning interior lights on/off 2. "Settings"
Press the button. 3. "Interior lighting"

4. "Color"
To switch off permanently: press the button 5. Select the desired setting.
and hold for approx. 3 seconds.
Turning reading lights on/off 1. "CAR"
Press the button. 2. "Settings"
4. "Brightness"
178
Lights CONTROLS
Dynamic light Turning speaker lighting on/off

Individual actions, for example incoming calls The speaker lighting is switched on when the
or opened doors, are indicated by light effects. vehicle is unlocked, and switched off when the
vehicle is locked.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings" Setting the brightness
3. "Interior lighting" 1. "CAR"
4. "Dynamic light" 2. "Settings"
5. Select the desired setting. 3. "Interior lighting"
4. "Bowers & Wilkins"
Dimmed while driving
5. "Brightness"
Some lights of the interior lighting are dimmed
when the vehicle is driven in the dark. 6. Select the desired setting.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
4. "Dimmed for night driving"
Bowers & Wilkins Diamond

Surround Sound System
Principle
Some speakers in the vehicle are illuminated.
Brightness can be individually set.
General information
When the speakers are muted, the speaker
lighting is turned off.
Activating/deactivating speaker
lighting
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
4. "Bowers & Wilkins"
179
CONTROLS Safety
Safety
Airbags
1 Front airbag, driver 4 Side airbag

2 Front airbag, front passenger 5 Knee airbag
3 Head airbag
Front airbags Side airbag

Front airbags help protect the driver and the In the event of a side collision, the side airbag
front passenger by responding to frontal im- protects the side of the body in the chest and
pacts in which seat belts alone would not pro- lap area.
vide adequate protection.
180
Safety CONTROLS
Head airbag wheel. Select the settings so that the

shoulder rests against the backrest when
In the event of a side collision, the head airbag
crossing the hands and the upper body is
protects the head.
as far back as possible while still maintain-
ing a comfortable grip on the steering
Ejection Mitigation
wheel.
The head airbag system is designed as an
▷ Make sure that the front passenger is sit-
ejection mitigation countermeasure to reduce
ting correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and
the likelihood of ejections of vehicle occupants
legs in the footwell and does not support
through side windows during rollovers or side
them on the dashboard.
collision events.
▷ Make sure that occupants keep their heads
away from the side airbag.
Knee airbag
▷ There should be no additional persons, ani-
The knee airbag protects the legs in the event
mals or objects between an airbag and a
of a frontal impact.
person.
Protective effect ▷ Dashboard and windshield on the pas-

senger's side must stay clear - do not at-
tach adhesive film or coverings and do not
General information
attach brackets or cables, for instance for
Airbags are not deployed in every impact sit- navigation devices or mobile phones.
uation, e.g., in less severe accidents.
▷ Do not bond the airbag cover panels with
adhesive, do not cover them or modify
Information on optimum protective
them in any way.
effect of the airbags
▷ Do not use the cover of the front airbag on
the passenger's side as a storage area.
Warning ▷ Do not attach slip covers, seat cushions or
If the seat position is incorrect or the deploy- other objects to the front seats that are not
ment area of the airbags is impaired, the air- specifically suited for seats with integrated
bag system cannot provide protection as inside airbags.
tended and may cause additional injuries due ▷ Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as
to deployment. There is a risk of injury or jackets, over the backrests.
danger to life. Follow the information on ach-
▷ Never modify either the individual compo-
ieving the optimum protective effect of the
nents or the wiring in the airbag system.
airbag system.
This also applies to steering wheel covers,
the dashboard, and the seats.
▷ Keep a distance from the airbags.
▷ Do not disassemble the airbag system.
▷ Always grasp the steering wheel on the
steering wheel rim. Hold your hands at the Even when you follow all instructions very
3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to keep closely, injury from contact with the airbags
the risk of injury to your hands or arms as cannot be fully ruled out in certain situations.
low as possible when the airbag is de- The ignition and inflation noise may lead to
ployed. short-term and, in most cases, temporary
▷ Adjust seat and steering wheel so that hearing impairment in sensitive occupants.
hands can be crossed over the steering
181
CONTROLS Safety
Vehicle modifications for a person with disabili- Malfunction

ties may affect the air bag system; contact
▷ Warning light does not come on
BMW Customer Relations for further informa-
when drive-ready state is turned on.
tion.
▷ The warning light lights up continu-
Warnings and information on the airbags are
ously.
also found on the sun visors.
Have the system checked.
Operational readiness of the airbag
system Setting the front seat positions
The power that deploys the driver's/front pas-
Safety information senger airbags depends on the position of the
driver's/front passenger seat.
Warning To maintain the accuracy of this function, cali-
Individual components can be hot after de- brate the electrical front seats as soon as a re-
ployment of the airbag system. There is a risk spective message appears on the control dis-
of injury. Do not touch individual components. play.
Seats, refer to page 113.
Warning
Improperly executed work can lead to failure,
malfunction or unintentional deployment of
Automatic deactivation of
the airbag system. In the case of a malfunc- the front passenger airbags
tion, the airbag system might not deploy as
intended despite the accident severity. There Principle
is a risk of injury or danger to life. Have the
airbag system checked, repaired, disassem- The system reads if the front passenger seat is
bled and scrapped by a dealer’s service cen- occupied by measuring the human body's re-
ter or another qualified service center or resistance.
pair shop. Front, knee, and side airbag on the front pas-
senger's side are activated or deactivated.
Display in the instrument cluster General information

When drive-ready state is turned on, Before transporting a child on the front pas-
the warning light in the instrument senger seat, refer to the safety information and
cluster lights up briefly, thereby indicat- instructions for children on the front passenger
ing the operational readiness of the entire air- seat, see Children.
bag system and the seat belt tensioners.
182
Safety CONTROLS
Safety information Indicator light for the front

passenger airbags
Warning The indicator light for the front-seat passenger
airbag in the headliner indicates the operating
To ensure the front passenger airbag func-
state of the front-seat passenger airbag.
tion, the system must be able to detect
whether a person is sitting in the front pas- The light indicates whether the airbags are ei-
senger seat. The entire seat surface must be ther activated or deactivated.
used for this purpose. There is a risk of injury After drive-ready state is switched on, the light
or danger to life. Make sure that the front shortly lights up and then indicates whether
passenger keeps his or her feet in the foot- the airbags are either activated or deactivated.
well.
▷ The indicator light lights up
when a child is properly
Fault of the automatic deactivation seated in a child restraint
system or when the seat is
system empty. The airbags on the
When transporting older children and adults, passenger's side are not ac-
the front passenger airbags may be deacti- tivated.
vated in certain seat positions. In this case, the
▷ The indicator light does not light up when,
indicator light for the front passenger airbags
for instance a correctly seated person of
lights up.
sufficient size is detected on the seat. The
In this case, change the seat position so that airbags on the passenger's side are acti-
the front passenger airbags are activated and vated.
the indicator light goes out.
If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have
Detected child restraint systems
the person sit in the rear seat.
The system generally detects children seated
To enable accurate recognition of the occupied
in a child restraint system, particularly in child
seat surface:
restraint systems required by NHTSA at the
▷ Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats or point in time when the vehicle was manufac-
other items to the front passenger seat un- tured. After installing a child restraint system,
less they are specifically determined to be make sure that the indicator light for the front
safe for use on the front passenger seat. passenger airbags lights up. This indicates
▷ Do not place any electronic devices on the that the child restraint system has been de-
front passenger seat if a child restraint sys- tected and the front passenger airbags are not
tem is to be installed on it. activated.
▷ Do not place objects under the seat that
can press against the seat from below.
Intelligent Safety
▷ No moisture in or on the seat.
Principle
Intelligent Safety enables central operation of
the driver assistance systems.
183
CONTROLS Safety
General information tions. Watch surrounding traffic closely and

actively intervene where appropriate.
Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, In-
telligent Safety consists of one or more sys-
tems that can help prevent an imminent colli-
sion. Warning
▷ Forward Collision Warning with light brak- Due to system limits, individual functions can
ing function, refer to page 185. malfunction during tow-starting/towing with
▷ Evasion Assistant, refer to page 188. the Intelligent Safety systems activated.
There is a risk of accident. Switch all Intelli-
▷ Intersection warning with City light braking
gent Safety systems off prior to tow-starting/
towing.
▷ Pedestrian Warning with City Collision Miti-
gation, refer to page 194.
▷ Lane departure warning, refer to page 196. Overview
▷ Active Blind Spot Detection, refer to
page 200. Button in the vehicle
▷ Side collision mitigation, refer to page 203.
Safety information
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
system, it cannot independently react to all
Intelligent Safety
traffic situations. There is a risk of accident.
closely, be ready to take over steering and
Turning on/off
braking at any time, and actively intervene Some Intelligent Safety systems are automati-
where appropriate. cally active after every departure. Some Intelli-
gent Safety systems activate according to the
last setting.
Warning Button Status
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a Button lights up green: all Intelligent
substitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Safety systems are switched on.
Due to its limits, the system may not issue
warnings or reactions, or these may be is- Button lights up orange: some Intel-
sued late or in a manner that is not consis- ligent Safety systems are switched
tent with their normal use. There is a risk of off or currently unavailable.
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
Button does not light up: all Intelli-
gent Safety systems are switched
off.
184
Safety CONTROLS
Press the button. speeds above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h. The tim-
The menu for the Intelligent Safety ing of warnings may vary with the current driv-
system is displayed. ing situation.
If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched The driver’s own driving behavior is taken into
off, all systems are now switched on. account in the reactions of the system, e.g., if
you deliberately approach a vehicle, the For-
"Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the
ward Collision Warning and the brake interven-
equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys-
tion will take place later.
tems can be individually configured. The indi-
vidual settings are activated and stored. As Depending on the vehicle equipment, the
soon as a setting is changed on the menu, all Driver Attention Camera in the instrument clus-
settings of the menu are activated. ter captures the driver’s field of vision. Addi-
tionally, the system checks for visual impair-
Press the button repeatedly. The fol- ments. Field of vision and visibility also affect
lowing settings are switched between: the timing of the warnings.
"ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are
switched on. Basic settings are activated for Safety information
the sub-functions, for instance setting for
warning time. Warning
"INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems The system cannot serve as a substitute for
are switched on according to the individual set- the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
tings. the traffic situation. Based on the limits of the
Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be in- system, it cannot independently react to all
dividually switched off. traffic situations. There is a risk of accident.
Press and hold this button. Watch the surrounding traffic situation
All Intelligent Safety systems are closely, be ready to take over steering and
switched off. braking at any time, and actively intervene
where appropriate.
Forward Collision Warning

with light braking function Warning
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a
substitute for the driver’s personal judgment.
Principle Due to its limits, the system may not issue
The Forward Collision Warning warns of a pos- warnings or reactions, or these may be is-
sible risk of collision and may brake independ- sued late or in a manner that is not consis-
ently. In the event of an accident, the system tent with their normal use. There is a risk of
may reduce impact speed. accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
tions. Watch surrounding traffic closely and
General information actively intervene where appropriate.
Sensors detect the traffic situation.
The system issues a two-phase warning of a
possible risk of collision with vehicles at
185
CONTROLS Safety
The menu for the Intelligent Safety system is

Warning displayed.
Due to system limits, individual functions can If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched
malfunction during tow-starting/towing with off, all systems are now switched on.
the Intelligent Safety systems activated. "Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the
There is a risk of accident. Switch all Intelli- equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys-
gent Safety systems off prior to tow-starting/ tems can be individually configured. The indi-
towing. vidual settings are activated and stored. As
soon as a setting is changed on the menu, all
settings of the menu are activated.
Overview
Press the button repeatedly.
Button in the vehicle The following settings are switched
between:
switched on. Basic settings are activated for
the subfunctions.
"INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems
are switched on according to the individual set-
tings.
Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be in-
dividually switched off.
Intelligent Safety
Manual switching off
Sensors Press and hold this button.
The system is controlled by the following sen- All Intelligent Safety systems are
sors: switched off.
Button Status
▷ With radar sensor: front radar sensor.
Button lights up green: all Intelligent
Safety systems are switched on.
Button lights up orange: some Intel-
Turning on/off ligent Safety systems are switched
off or currently unavailable.
Turning on automatically Button does not light up: all Intelli-
The system is automatically active when the gent Safety systems are switched
vehicle is turned on. off.
Switching on manually Setting the warning time

Press the button. 1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
186
Safety CONTROLS
3. "Driver Assistance" companied by a brief activation of the braking

4. "Safety and Warnings" system.
5. "Forward Collision Mitigation" With the warning time setting "Late" the brief
activation of the braking system is omitted.
If an acute warning is provided, the system
▷ "Early"
may also provide assistance, such as through
▷ "Medium" automatic brake intervention, when there is
▷ "Late": only acute warnings are dis- risk of collision.
played. Acute warnings may be provided even when
there has been no prior warning.
Warning with braking function
Brake intervention
Display The warning prompts the driver to intervene. If
A warning symbol appears in the instrument a warning is active, the maximum braking force
cluster and in the Head-up Display, where necessary is used when the brake is applied.
available, if a collision with a detected vehicle The brake pedal must be applied sufficiently
is imminent. quickly and forcefully.
Icon Measure The system may also assist in braking if there

is a risk of collision.
Icon lights up red: prewarning.
When the vehicle is traveling at a low speed,
Brake and increase distance. the vehicle may come to a complete stop.
Symbol flashes red and an acoustic City brake function: the brake intervention oc-
signal sounds: acute warning. curs to up to approx. 50 mph/80 km/h.
Brake and make an evasive maneu- With radar sensor: the brake intervention oc-
ver, if necessary. curs to up to approx. 155 mph/250 km/h.
At speeds above approx. 130 mph/210 km/h,
the brake intervention occurs as a brief activa-
Prewarning
tion of the braking system. No automatic delay
This prewarning is provided, for instance when occurs.
there is impending risk of a collision or the dis-
The brake intervention can be interrupted by
tance to the vehicle ahead is too small.
stepping on the accelerator pedal or by actively
If a prewarning is provided, respond by braking moving the steering wheel.
as warranted.
The system’s ability to detect objects may be
limited in some circumstances. Refer to the in-
Acute warning with braking function formation in this Owner’s Manual regarding
An acute warning is displayed in case of the the limitations of the system and actively inter-
imminent risk of a collision when the vehicle vene as warranted.
approaches another object at a high differen-
tial speed.
Intervene in the case of an acute warning. De-
pending on the driving situation and the equip-
ment version, the acute warning may be ac-
187
CONTROLS Safety
System limits temporarily. When the vehicle slows down to

below this speed, the system is reactivated.
Safety information
Warning
The system is designed to operate in certain
conditions and circumstances. Due to condi- ▷ Radar sensors, refer to page 38.
tions or other factors, the system may not re-
spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk Functional limitations
of damage to property. Actively intervene as The system may be limited in the following sit-
warranted. Refer to the information in this uations:
Owner’s Manual regarding the scope of the ▷ In tight curves.
system’s operation and limitations.
▷ If the driving stability control systems are
limited or deactivated, for instance DSC
Detection range OFF.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en-
gine via the Start/Stop button.
Warning sensitivity
The more sensitive the warning settings are,
for example the warning time, the more warn-
ings are displayed. Therefore, there may also
be an excess of unwarranted warnings and re-
sponses.
Only objects that are detected by the system Evasion Assistant
Thus, a system response might not come or Principle

might come late. The Evasion Assistant supports the driver in
The following situations may not be detected, making evasive maneuvers in certain situa-
for instance: tions, such as when obstacles or persons sud-
▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach denly appear.
them at high speed.
▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of
General information
you, or strongly decelerating vehicles. The system issues a warning and intervenes
to support the driver if a lateral evasive ma-
▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear view.
neuver is possible. Sensors monitor and detect
▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you. the clearance around the vehicle. If the system
identifies space alongside the vehicle, it sup-
Upper speed limit ports an evasive maneuver begun by the driver
If the vehicle speed exceeds approx. by safely providing targeted supporting steer-
155 mph/250 km/h, the system is deactivated ing movements.
188
Safety CONTROLS
Safety information Pedestrian Warning with City Collision Miti-

gation, refer to page 194.
▷ Forward Collision Warning with light brak-
Warning
ing function is switched on.
Forward Collision Warning with light brak-
ing function, refer to page 185.
system, it cannot independently react to all ▷ Sensors detect sufficient clearance around
traffic situations. There is a risk of accident. the vehicle.
Watch the surrounding traffic situation Turning on/off
closely, be ready to take over steering and The system is automatically active when the
braking at any time, and actively intervene vehicle is turned on.
where appropriate.
Warning with evasion support
Warning Display in the instrument cluster

Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a If a collision with a detected vehicle or a de-
substitute for the driver’s personal judgment. tected person is imminent, a warning symbol
Due to its limits, the system may not issue appears on the instrument cluster and in the
warnings or reactions, or these may be is- Head-up Display.
sued late or in a manner that is not consis-
Icon Measure
tent with their normal use. There is a risk of
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi- Icon lights up red: prewarning.
Brake and increase distance.
Symbol flashes red and an acoustic
signal sounds: acute warning for ob-
Overview stacles.
Brake and make an evasive maneu-
Sensors
ver, if necessary.
sors: Symbol flashes red and an acoustic
signal sounds: acute warning for pe-
destrians.
Brake and make an evasive maneu-
▷ Radar sensors, side, front. ver, if necessary.
Additional information: Acute warning with evasion support
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 37. An acute warning is displayed when there is an
imminent danger of collision due to the vehicle
Functional requirements approaching another object at a high speed.
▷ Pedestrian Warning with braking function is Intervene in the case of an acute warning. The
switched on. system is designed to provide assistance by
189
CONTROLS Safety
taking evasive action when there is a risk of ▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear view.
collision. ▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.
Acute warnings may be provided even when
there has been no prior warning. System limits of the sensors
System limits ▷ Cameras, refer to page 37.
Safety information ▷ Radar sensors, refer to page 38.
Warning The system may be limited in the following sit-
The system is designed to operate in certain uations:
conditions and circumstances. Due to condi- ▷ In tight curves.
spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk ▷ If the driving stability control systems are
of damage to property. Actively intervene as limited or deactivated, for instance DSC
warranted. Refer to the information in this OFF.
Owner’s Manual regarding the scope of the ▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en-
system’s operation and limitations. gine via the Start/Stop button.
Detection range Intersection warning with

City light braking function
Principle
The system may prevent some accidents with
cross traffic at intersections and junctions. In
the event of an accident, the system may re-
duce impact speed.
The system sounds a warning in the city speed
range before an imminent risk of collision and
activates brakes independently, if needed.
Only objects that are detected by the system
General information
Thus, a system response might not come or Sensors detect the traffic situation.
might come late. Vehicles that cross your driving direction can
The following situations may not be detected, be detected by the system as soon as these
for example: vehicles enter into the detection range of the
▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach system.
them at high speed. At intersections and junctions, a warning is is-
▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of sued when a risk of collision with crossing traf-
you, or strongly decelerating vehicles. fic is detected.
190
Safety CONTROLS
The system issues a two-phase warning of a gent Safety systems off prior to tow-starting/
possible risk of collision with vehicles at towing.
speeds above approx. 6 mph/10 km/h. The
timing of warnings may vary with the current
driving situation. Overview
The Driver Attention Camera in the instrument
cluster captures the driver’s field of vision. Ad- Button in the vehicle
ditionally, the system checks for visual impair-
ments. Field of vision and visibility also affect
the timing of the warnings.
Safety information
Warning
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of the Intelligent Safety
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Sensors
Watch the surrounding traffic situation The system is controlled by the following sen-
closely, be ready to take over steering and sors:
where appropriate.
▷ Radar sensors, side, front.
Warning Additional information:
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 37.
Due to its limits, the system may not issue Turning on/off
warnings or reactions, or these may be is-
sued late or in a manner that is not consis- Turning on automatically
The system is automatically active when the
vehicle is turned on.
Switching on manually
Press the button.
Warning The menu for the Intelligent Safety
system is displayed.
Due to system limits, individual functions can
malfunction during tow-starting/towing with If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched
the Intelligent Safety systems activated. off, all systems are now switched on.
There is a risk of accident. Switch all Intelli- "Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the
191
CONTROLS Safety
tems can be individually configured. The indi- ▷ "Early"

vidual settings are activated and stored. As ▷ "Medium"
▷ "Late": only acute warnings are dis-
played.
Press the button repeatedly.
The following settings are switched
between:
Display
switched on. Basic settings are activated for General information
the subfunctions.
A warning symbol appears in the instrument
"INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems cluster and in the Head-up Display, where
are switched on according to the individual set- available, if a collision with a detected vehicle
tings. is imminent.
dividually switched off. Icon Meaning

Manual switching off from the right.
Press and hold this button. Risk of collision with vehicle crossing
All Intelligent Safety systems are from the left.
switched off.
Risk of collision with vehicle for which
Button Status the driving direction cannot be deter-
mined.
Display with prewarning
The respective icon lights up red: prewarning
ligent Safety systems are switched
for vehicles that cross your driving direction.
Intervene yourself, for instance by braking.
gent Safety systems are switched Display with acute warning
off.
The respective icon flashes red and an acous-
tic signal sounds: acute warning when vehicles
Setting the warning time cross your driving direction.
1. "CAR" Brake and make an evasive maneuver, if nec-
2. "Settings" essary.
Prewarning
4. "Safety and Warnings"
For example, a prewarning is displayed when
5. "Forward Collision Mitigation" a risk of collision with a crossing vehicle is de-
6. Select the desired setting: tected.
192
Safety CONTROLS
If a prewarning is provided, respond by braking Upper speed limit

as warranted. The system responds to crossing vehicles
when the vehicle speed is below approx.
Acute warning with braking function 50 mph/80 km/h.
An acute warning is displayed in the event of
an immediate risk of collision with a crossing Detection range
vehicle.
Intervene in the case of an acute warning. If an
acute warning is provided, the system may
provide assistance, such as through automatic
brake intervention, when there is risk of colli-
sion.
Acute warnings may be provided even when
there has been no prior warning.
Brake intervention The system's detection capability is limited.

The warning prompts the driver to intervene. Thus, a system response might not come or
The system may also assist in braking if there might come late.
is a risk of collision.
The following situations may not be detected,
The vehicle can be decelerated to a standstill.
for instance:
The brake intervention can be interrupted by
▷ Crossing vehicles when they are hidden by
buildings, for instance.
moving the steering wheel.
▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of
you, or strongly decelerating vehicles.
limited in some circumstances. Refer to the in-
formation in this Owner’s Manual regarding ▷ Crossing bicycles.
the limitations of the system and actively inter- ▷ Vehicles with an unusual side view.
vene as warranted.
System limits Additional information:
Safety information
Warning Functional limitations

The system is designed to operate in certain The system may be limited in the following sit-
conditions and circumstances. Due to condi- uations:
▷ In tight curves.
spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk
of damage to property. Actively intervene as ▷ If the driving stability control systems are
warranted. Refer to the information in this limited or deactivated, for instance DSC
Owner’s Manual regarding the scope of the OFF.
system’s operation and limitations. ▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en-
193
CONTROLS Safety
Warning sensitivity
The more sensitive the warning settings are, Warning
for example the warning time, the more warn- Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a
ings are displayed. Therefore, there may also substitute for the driver’s personal judgment.
be an excess of unwarranted warnings and re- Due to its limits, the system may not issue
sponses. warnings or reactions, or these may be is-
Pedestrian Warning with accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
City Collision Mitigation tions. Watch surrounding traffic closely and
Principle
The Pedestrian Warning warns in the city Warning
speed range of possible risk of collision with
Due to system limits, individual functions can
pedestrians and bicycle riders and may brake
malfunction during tow-starting/towing with
independently. In the event of an accident, the
the Intelligent Safety systems activated.
system may reduce impact speed.
General information towing.
Sensors detect the traffic situation.
The system issues a warning of a possible risk
of collision with pedestrians and cyclists at Overview
speeds above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h.
The system reacts to pedestrians and cyclists Button in the vehicle
who are within the detection range of the sys-
tem.
Safety information
Warning
system, it cannot independently react to all Intelligent Safety
Watch the surrounding traffic situation Sensors
closely, be ready to take over steering and The system is controlled by the following sen-
braking at any time, and actively intervene sors:
where appropriate. ▷ Cameras behind the windshield.
▷ With radar sensor: front radar sensor.
194
Safety CONTROLS
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 37. Press the button repeatedly.
The following settings are switched
Detection range between:
the subfunctions.
tings.
The detection range in front of the vehicle is

divided into two areas:
▷ Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the Press and hold this button.
vehicle. All Intelligent Safety systems are
▷ Extended area, arrows 2, to the right and switched off.
left of the central area.
Button Status
A collision is imminent if pedestrians are lo-
cated within the central area. A warning is is- Button lights up green: all Intelligent
sued about pedestrians who are located within Safety systems are switched on.
the extended area only if they are moving in
the direction of the central area.
Turning on/off
Turning on automatically off.
Display
Press the button.
If a collision with a pedestrian or a cyclist is im-
The menu for the Intelligent Safety minent, a warning symbol appears on the in-
system is displayed. strument cluster and in the Head-up Display.
If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched The red icon is displayed and a signal
off, all systems are now switched on. sounds.
equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys- Intervene immediately by braking or make an
tems can be individually configured. The indi- evasive maneuver.
vidual settings are activated and stored. As
195
CONTROLS Safety
Brake intervention Thus, a warning might not be issued or be is-

The warning prompts the driver to intervene. sued late.
When a warning occurs, the maximum braking The following situations may not be detected,
force is used when the brake is applied. In or- for instance:
der to activate the Brake Assistant function, ▷ Partially covered pedestrians.
the brakes must be applied sufficiently quickly
▷ Pedestrians that are not detected as such
and forcefully.
because of the viewing angle or contour.
If there is a risk of collision, the system may
▷ Pedestrians outside of the detection range.
also assist with brake intervention.
▷ Pedestrians having a body size less than
When the vehicle is traveling at a low speed,
32 in/80 cm.
the vehicle may come to a complete stop.
The brake intervention can be interrupted by System limits of the sensors
moving the steering wheel.
limited in some circumstances. Refer to the in- ▷ Radar sensors, refer to page 38.
formation in this Owner’s Manual regarding
the limitations of the system and actively inter- Functional limitations
vene as warranted. The system may be limited or may not be
available in the following situations:
System limits ▷ If the driving stability control systems are
deactivated, for instance DSC OFF.
Safety information
Warning
conditions and circumstances. Due to condi-
Lane departure warning
spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk Principle
of damage to property. Actively intervene as The lane departure warning alerts when the
warranted. Refer to the information in this vehicle is about to run off the road or exit the
Owner’s Manual regarding the scope of the lane.
General information
Upper speed limit This camera-based system warns starting at a
minimum speed.
The system responds to pedestrians and cy-
clists when the vehicle speed is below approx. The minimum speed is country-specific and is
50 mph/80 km/h. displayed in the menu for the intelligent Safety
systems.
Detection range Warnings are issued by means of a steering
The system's detection capability is limited. wheel vibration. The severity of the steering
wheel vibration can be adjusted.
196
Safety CONTROLS
The system does not provide a warning if the Overview

turn signal is set in the respective direction be-
fore exiting the lane. Button in the vehicle
Depending on the equipment version, if in the
speed range up to 130 mph/210 km/h a lane
boundary is crossed, the system may inter-
vene with a brief active steering intervention in
addition to vibrating. The system thus helps
keep the vehicle in the lane.
Safety information
Warning Intelligent Safety

road and traffic situation. There is a risk of Sensors
sors:
actively intervene where appropriate. Do not
jerk the steering wheel in response to a ▷ Cameras behind the windshield.
warning. Additional information:
Warning Functional requirement

Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a The camera must detect the lane boundaries
substitute for the driver’s personal judgment. for the lane departure warning to be active.
warnings or reactions, or these may be is- Turning on/off
tent with their normal use. There is a risk of Turning on automatically
system is automatically active after every driv-
ing off.
Press the button.
The menu for the Intelligent Safety
If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched
off, all systems are now switched on.
197
CONTROLS Safety
tems can be individually configured. The indi- ▷ "Early"

vidual settings are activated and stored. As ▷ "Medium"
▷ "Reduced": some warnings are sup-
pressed depending on the situation,
Press the button repeatedly. for instance when purposely driving over
pathway lines in curves or with dynamic
The following settings are switched passing without blinker.
between:
▷ "Off": no warnings are issued.
Setting the intensity of the steering
the subfunctions.
wheel vibration
1. "CAR"
tings. 2. "Settings"
Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be in- 3. "Driver Assistance"
dividually switched off. 4. "Steering Wheel Feedback"
5. "Vibration intensity"
Manual switching off 6. Select the desired setting.
Press and hold this button. The setting is applied to all Intelligent Safety
All Intelligent Safety systems are systems.
switched off.
Switch steering intervention on/off
Button Status The steering intervention can be switched on
and off separately for Active Blind Spot Detec-
tion and lane departure warning.
1. "CAR"
ligent Safety systems are switched 2. "Settings"
off or currently unavailable. 3. "Driver Assistance"
Button does not light up: all Intelli- 4. "Safety and Warnings"
gent Safety systems are switched 5. "Lane Departure Warning"
off. 6. "Steering intervention"
Setting the warning time steering intervention is automatically active af-
1. "CAR" ter every driving off.
2. "Settings"
5. "Lane Departure Warning"
198
Safety CONTROLS
Display in the instrument cluster ▷ With hazard warning system switched on.
▷ In driving situation with high driving dynam-
Icon Meaning ics.
The icon is illuminated green: the ▷ The Dynamic Stability Control adjusts.
system is turned on. A lane boundary ▷ Immediately following a steering interven-
was detected on at least one side of tion by the vehicle systems.
the vehicle and warnings can be is- ▷ When actively merging back to your own
sued. lane after passing.
Depending on the equipment and national- Warning signal

market version, information for the system is
Depending on the equipment version: in the
displayed in the Assisted Driving View of the
event of multiple active steering interventions
instrument cluster.
by the system within 3 minutes without the
Additional information: driver's intervention at the steering wheel, an
Assisted Driving View, refer to page 152. acoustic warning will sound. A short warning
signal will sound at the second steering inter-
Warning function vention. Beginning with the third steering inter-
vention, a continuous warning will sound.
If you leave the lane In addition, a Check Control message is dis-
played.
If you leave the lane and if a lane boundary
has been detected, the steering wheel vibrates The warning signal and Check Control mes-
in accordance with the steering wheel vibration sage are an encouragement to pay closer at-
setting. tention to the lane.
When the turn signal is switched on in the cor-
responding direction before changing the lane, End of warning
a warning is not issued. For instance, the warning will be canceled in
Steering intervention ▷ Automatically after a few seconds.
Depending on the equipment and national- ▷ When returning to your own lane.
market version: if, in the speed range up to
▷ When braking hard.
130 mph/210 km/h a lane boundary is crossed,
the system may intervene with a brief active ▷ When blinking.
steering intervention in addition to vibrating. ▷ The Dynamic Stability Control adjusts.
The steering intervention helps keep the vehi-
cle in the lane. The steering intervention can System limits
be noticed on the steering wheel and can be
manually overridden at any time. During an ac- Safety information
tive steering intervention, the display in the in-
strument cluster will blink.
Warning
For instance, the steering intervention will be
suppressed in the following situations: The system is designed to operate in certain
▷ With accelerating or braking hard.
▷ When blinking. spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk
199
CONTROLS Safety
of damage to property. Actively intervene as General information

warranted. Refer to the information in this
Owner’s Manual regarding the scope of the

Radar sensors monitor the area behind and
The system may be limited in the following sit- next to the vehicle when traveling faster than a
uations: minimum speed.
▷ In the event of missing, worn, poorly visible, The minimum speed is country-specific and is
merging, diverging, or multiple lane boun- displayed in the menu for the intelligent Safety
daries such as in construction areas. systems.
▷ With lane boundaries that are covered in The system indicates whether there are vehi-
snow, ice, dirt or water. cles in the blind spot, arrow 1, or approaching
▷ In tight curves or on narrow roads. from behind in the adjacent lane, arrow 2.
▷ With lane boundaries that are covered by The light in the exterior mirror lights up dim-
objects. med.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in Before you change lanes after setting the turn
front of you. signal, the system issues a warning in the sit-
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en- uations described above.
gine via the Start/Stop button. The light in the exterior mirror flashes and the
A Check Control message may be displayed steering wheel vibrates.
when the system is limited.
Vehicles with side collision mitigation: at
speeds of up to 130 mph/210 km/h, the system
Active Blind Spot Detection can intervene with a brief active steering inter-
vention and help guide the vehicle back into
the lane. The steering intervention occurs
Principle when a minimum speed is reached. This mini-
Active Blind Spot Detection detects vehicles in mum speed is displayed on the Control Display
the blind spot or vehicles approaching from in the menu for the steering intervention.
behind in the adjacent lane.
The light in the exterior mirror warns the driver Safety information
in different steps.
Warning
200
Safety CONTROLS
traffic situations. There is a risk of accident. Turning on/off

Watch the surrounding traffic situation Switching on manually
braking at any time, and actively intervene Press the button.
where appropriate. The menu for the Intelligent Safety
If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched
Warning off, all systems are now switched on.
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a "Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the
substitute for the driver’s personal judgment. equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys-
Due to its limits, the system may not issue tems can be individually configured. The indi-
warnings or reactions, or these may be is- vidual settings are activated and stored. As
sued late or in a manner that is not consis- soon as a setting is changed on the menu, all
tent with their normal use. There is a risk of settings of the menu are activated.
tions. Watch surrounding traffic closely and Press the button repeatedly.
actively intervene where appropriate. The following settings are switched
between:
Overview switched on. Basic settings are activated for
the subfunctions.
Button in the vehicle
tings.

Press and hold this button.
All Intelligent Safety systems are
Intelligent Safety switched off.
Button Status
Sensors Button lights up green: all Intelligent
The system is controlled by the following sen- Safety systems are switched on.
sors:
Additional information: off or currently unavailable.
off.
201
CONTROLS Safety
Setting the warning time Warning function

1. "CAR"
2. "Settings" Light in the exterior mirror
5. "Active Blind Spot Detection"
Setting the intensity of the steering

wheel vibration
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
Prewarning
The dimmed light in the exterior mirror indi-
4. "Steering Wheel Feedback" cates when there are vehicles in the blind spot
5. "Vibration intensity" or approaching from behind.
Acute warning
The setting is applied to all Intelligent Safety
systems. When the turn signal is switched on while a ve-
hicle is in the critical zone, the steering wheel
Vehicles with side collision mitigation: vibrates briefly and the light in the exterior mir-
switching steering intervention on/off ror flashes brightly.
The steering intervention can be switched on The warning stops when the other vehicle has
and off separately for Active Blind Spot Detec- left the critical area or the turn signal has been
tion and lane departure warning. deactivated.
1. "CAR" Vehicles with side collision mitigation

2. "Settings" When there is no response to the vibration of
3. "Driver Assistance" the steering wheel at speeds of up to
4. "Safety and Warnings" 130 mph/210 km/h and the lane marking is
crossed, the system intervenes with a brief ac-
5. "Active Blind Spot Detection" tive steering intervention. The steering inter-
6. "Steering intervention" vention helps return the vehicle into the lane.
The steering intervention can be noticed on
Displays in the instrument cluster the steering wheel and can be manually over-
Depending on the equipment and national- ridden at any time.
displayed in the Assisted Driving View of the Flashing of the light
instrument cluster. A flashing of the light during vehicle unlocking
Additional information: serves as system self-test.
Assisted Driving View, refer to page 152.
202
Safety CONTROLS
System limits ▷ In the event of missing, worn, poorly visible,

merging, diverging, or multiple lane boun-
Safety information daries such as in construction areas.
▷ With lane boundaries that are covered in
snow, ice, dirt or water.
Warning
▷ With lane boundaries that are not white.
conditions and circumstances. Due to condi- ▷ With lane boundaries that are covered by
tions or other factors, the system may not re- objects.
spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk ▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in
of damage to property. Actively intervene as front of you.
warranted. Refer to the information in this ▷ If the camera is impaired.
A Check Control message may be displayed
Upper speed limit when the system is limited.
If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.
155 mph/250 km/h, the system is deactivated Displaying warnings
temporarily. Depending on the selected warning settings,
If the vehicle speed falls below approx. e.g., warning time, more or fewer warnings can
155 mph/250 km/h, the system once again re- be displayed. However, there may also be an
sponds according to the setting. excess of unwarranted warnings of critical sit-
uations.
Additional information: Side collision mitigation
▷ On vehicles with side collision warning: Principle
cameras, refer to page 37.
The side-collision warning helps to avoid im-
minent side collisions.
The system may be limited in the following sit-
uations:
▷ When a vehicle is approaching at a speed
much faster than your own.
▷ In tight curves or on narrow roads.
▷ The bumper is dirty, iced up or covered,
for instance by stickers.
For vehicles with side collision mitigation, the
steering intervention can be limited, for in-
stance in the following situation:
203
CONTROLS Safety
General information
Warning
Radar sensors monitor the space next to the
vehicle when traveling faster than a minimum
speed and up to approx. 130 mph/210 km/h. Overview
The minimum speed is country-specific and is
displayed in the menu for the intelligent Safety Button in the vehicle
systems.
The front camera determines the lane boun-
dary positions.
If, for instance, another vehicle is detected next
to the vehicle and if there is a risk of collision
with this vehicle, the system helps avoid the
collision. For this purpose, the system issues a
warning with a blinking LED in the exterior mir-
ror and a vibrating steering wheel. If neces-
sary, the system will carry out an active steer-
ing intervention. Intelligent Safety
Safety information Sensors

Warning sors:
The system cannot serve as a substitute for ▷ Cameras behind the windshield.
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing ▷ Radar sensors, side, front.
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of the ▷ Radar sensors, side, rear.
traffic situations. There is a risk of accident. Additional information:
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 37.
closely, be ready to take over steering and Functional requirement
braking at any time, and actively intervene The camera must detect the lane markings for
where appropriate. the side collision mitigation with steering inter-
vention to be active.
204
Safety CONTROLS
Turning on/off Setting the intensity of the steering

wheel vibration
Switching on manually 1. "CAR"
Press the button. 2. "Settings"
The menu for the Intelligent Safety 3. "Driver Assistance"
system is displayed. 4. "Steering Wheel Feedback"
If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched 5. "Vibration intensity"
off, all systems are now switched on.
The setting is applied to all Intelligent Safety
systems.
tems can be individually configured. The indi-
vidual settings are activated and stored. As
soon as a setting is changed on the menu, all Displays in the instrument cluster
settings of the menu are activated. Depending on the equipment and national-
Press the button repeatedly. displayed in the Assisted Driving View of the
The following settings are switched instrument cluster.
between: Additional information:
"ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are Assisted Driving View, refer to page 152.
the subfunctions. Warning function
are switched on according to the individual set- Light in the exterior mirror
tings.

All Intelligent Safety systems are
switched off.
Button Status Acute warning

Button lights up green: all Intelligent If there is a risk of collision, the light in the ex-
Safety systems are switched on. terior mirror flashes and the steering wheel vi-
brates.
ligent Safety systems are switched A Check Control message is displayed at the
off or currently unavailable. same time.
If necessary, an active steering intervention is
performed to prevent the collision and main-
tain the vehicle within its own lane.
off.
205
CONTROLS Safety
The steering intervention can be noticed on A Check Control message may be displayed
the steering wheel and can be manually over- when the system is limited.
ridden at any time.
System limits Rear-end collision

preparation
Safety information
Principle
Warning Depending on the equipment and national-
The system is designed to operate in certain market version, the rear-end collision prepara-
conditions and circumstances. Due to condition can react to vehicles approaching from be-
tions or other factors, the system may not re- hind.
of damage to property. Actively intervene as General information

Radar sensors monitor the area behind the ve-
Functional limitations hicle.
The system may be limited in the following sit- When a vehicle approaches from the rear at a
uations: certain speed, the system can react as follows:
▷ When a vehicle is approaching at a speed ▷ Where applicable, the hazard warning
much faster than your own. flashers will be switched on.
▷ In tight curves or on narrow roads. ▷ Where applicable, the PreCrash functions
▷ In the event of missing, worn, poorly visible, are triggered.
merging, diverging, or multiple lane boun-
daries such as in construction areas.
Safety information
▷ With lane boundaries that are covered in
snow, ice, dirt or water.
▷ With lane boundaries that are covered by Warning
objects. The system cannot serve as a substitute for
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
front of you. the traffic situation. Based on the limits of the
206
Safety CONTROLS
closely, be ready to take over steering and ▷ When a vehicle is approaching at a speed
braking at any time, and actively intervene much faster than your own.
where appropriate. ▷ The approaching vehicle is approaching
slowly.
Warning
If equipped with Equipment
substitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Stop Assistant
Principle
tent with their normal use. There is a risk of If the driver is no longer fit to drive, the Emer-
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi- gency Stop Assistant helps to safely bring the
tions. Watch surrounding traffic closely and vehicle to a standstill.
General information
The emergency stop function is not triggered
Overview automatically. The emergency stop function
can only be triggered manually by the occu-
Sensors pants.
The system is controlled by the following sen- When the system is activated, the vehicle is
sors: brought to a standstill in its own lane by use of
▷ Radar sensors, side, rear. lane guidance.
Additional information: Depending on the vehicle equipment and na-
tional-market version, the system includes a
lane change function.
Turning on/off With lane change function: on motorways or

motorway-like roads, the system steers the ve-
hicle to the side of the road or shoulder where
possible. On other roads or with high traffic
The system is deactivated in the following sit- volume, the vehicle is brought to a standstill on
uations: the actual road.
▷ When driving in reverse.
Overview
System limits

The system function may be limited in the fol-
lowing situations:
207
CONTROLS Safety
Parking brake At standstill

As soon as the vehicle is stationary, the sys-
tem will carry out the following settings:
▷ The vehicle is secured against rolling away.
▷ The function can be activated at speeds of
▷ The interior lights are switched on.
approx. 6 mph/10 km/h up to approx.
155 mph/250 km/h. ▷ The central locking system is unlocked.
▷ With lane change function: lane changes
are executed when the traffic situation al- Displays in the instrument cluster
lows.
Icon Status
Activating the emergency stop Emergency Stop function active.
function
Pull the switch for the parking brake
briefly to activate the emergency stop Without lane change function:
function.
Icon Status
▷ With lane change function: releasing the
switch may trigger an automatic lane Green steering wheel symbol:
change. When lane markings are detected,
▷ The system will take control of the vehicle the system keeps the vehicle in the
for a maximum of 2 minutes. lane.
▷ The hazard warning system is switched on.
Gray steering wheel symbol:
▷ An emergency call is triggered.
Lane guidance is briefly interrupted.
Yellow steering wheel symbol:

Canceling the emergency stop
function Lane boundary driven over.
The driver can cancel the emergency stop When lane markings are detected,
function by actively taking control of the vehicle the system keeps the vehicle in the
throughout the entire process. lane.
For instance, the emergency stop function will Yellow steering wheel symbol:
be canceled in the following situations: The hands are not grasping the
▷ When steering. steering wheel. The system is still ac-
▷ When blinking. tive.
▷ When depressing the accelerator pedal.

▷ When switching off the hazard warning sys-
tem.
▷ When canceling the Emergency Request.
▷ When switching the selector lever position
at standstill.
▷ The parking brake switch is pressed.
208
Safety CONTROLS
Icon Status ▷ Date.

▷ Time.
Red steering wheel symbol and a sig-
nal sounds: ▷ Vehicle speed.
The hands are not grasping the ▷ Global Positioning System coordinates.
steering wheel. Interruption of lane
guidance is imminent. Data protection
The permissibility of recording and using video
recordings is contingent upon the statutory
nal sounds:
regulations of the country in which the system
Lane guidance is switched off. is to be used. The user is responsible for the
use of the system and compliance with the re-
System limits spective regulations.
Use the system only in the event of a driver The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
failure. confirming there are no statutory or regulatory
constraints on use of the system in your state
The system cannot replace the driving per-
or country prior to the initial use. In addition,
formance of a driver who is fit to drive.
the laws regarding use of the system should
be verified at regular intervals, especially when
BMW Drive Recorder frequently crossing borders.
Other drivers of the vehicle must be informed
about the system. In addition, information
Principle about the system is required when handing off
The BMW Drive Recorder stores brief video re- the vehicle.
cordings of the vehicle surroundings, e.g., to
document surrounding traffic. Functional requirements
▷ BMW Drive Recorder is activated.
General information
▷ Privacy Policy was accepted.
There are various ways for storing video re-
cordings: ▷ Recording type was selected.
▷ Automatic storage of the recording. ▷ Recording time was selected.
The function allows the documentation of

the event of an accident.
Activating/deactivating the BMW
Drive Recorder
▷ Manual storage of the recording.
The BMW Drive Recorder must be activated
The function allows the documentation of
before the first use of the recording function.
traffic situations.
The system saves recordings made up to 1. "Apps"
20 seconds before and after the storage was 2. "Drive Recorder"
triggered. 3. Accept Privacy Policy.
Cameras of the assistance systems are used, 4. "Settings"
for instance Panorama View.
5. "Recording allowed"
Additionally, the following parameters are
stored for the trip:
209
CONTROLS Safety
Recording functions Settings
Automatic recording General information

The recording is stored automatically when the Different settings can be made.
vehicle sensors detect an accident occurrence.
Recording type
Manual recording 1. "Apps"
2. "Drive Recorder"
Using the button
3. "Settings"
4. "RECORDING TYPE"
Via iDrive
1. "Apps" Recording time
2. "Drive Recorder" 1. "Apps"
3. "Start recording" 2. "Drive Recorder"
To stop the recording: "Cancel". 3. "Settings"
Recording can also be started by selecting the 4. Select the desired setting.
widget on the Control Display.
Cameras
Recording playback and 1. "Apps"
administration 2. "Drive Recorder"
Stored video recordings can be played back, 3. "Settings"
exported and deleted.
4. "Camera selection"
For your own safety, the video recording is
5. Select desired camera.
only displayed on the Control Display up to ap-
prox. 2 mph/3 km/h. In some national-market In case of an accident, the system switches
versions, the video recording is only displayed automatically to "All" cameras.
if the parking brake is engaged or if the selec- If driver assistance systems are active, their
tor lever is in the P position. camera views are selected automatically.
1. "Apps"
System limits
2. "Drive Recorder"
In the event of serious accidents, it may not be
3. "Saved recordings" possible to store recordings if the damage on
4. Select desired recording. the vehicle is too great or the power supply
5. Select the desired setting. was interrupted.
If a camera change occurred during the record-
ing, different segments of the video can be se-
lected.
210
Safety CONTROLS
PostCrash – iBrake Safety information
Principle Warning
In certain accident situations, the PostCrash The system cannot serve as a substitute for
iBrake can automatically bring the vehicle to a the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
standstill without intervention by the driver. one's physical state. An increasing lack of
alertness or fatigue may not be detected or
General information not be detected in time. There is a risk of ac-
cident. Make sure that the driver is rested
The PostCrash iBrake can reduce the risk of a
and alert. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
further collision and its consequences.
tions.
At standstill
After coming to a halt, the brake is released Function
automatically. The system is switched on each time drive-
ready state is switched on.
Harder vehicle deceleration After start of the trip, the system monitors cer-
In certain situations, it can be necessary to tain aspects of the driver's behavior, so that
bring the vehicle to a halt more quickly than decreasing alertness or fatigue can be de-
with automatic brake actuation. tected.
To do this, quickly apply extra force to the This procedure takes the following criteria into
brake. For a brief period, the brake pressure account:
will be higher than the brake pressure that is ▷ Personal driving style, for instance steering
achieved by the automatic braking function. behavior.
Automatic brake actuation is interrupted.
▷ Driving conditions, for instance time, length
of trip.
Canceling automatic braking
▷ Depending on the equipment: attention of
It can be necessary to interrupt automatic
the driver through the Driver Attention
braking in certain situations, for instance for an
Camera.
evasive maneuver.
Starting at approx. 43 mph/70 km/h, the sys-
Canceling automatic braking:
tem is active and can also display a break rec-
▷ By pressing the brake pedal. ommendation.
▷ By pressing the accelerator pedal.
Break recommendation
Fatigue alert Setting break recommendation
The fatigue alert is active automatically with
Principle each switching on of drive-ready state and can
The Fatigue Alert can detect decreasing alert- thus display a break recommendation.
ness or fatigue of the driver during long, mo-
notonous trips, for instance on highways. The
system recommends a break.
211
CONTROLS Safety
The break recommendation can also be

switched on or off and adjusted via iDrive.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
4. "Fatigue and Focus Alert"
Display
If the driver becomes less alert or fatigued, a
message is displayed in the Control Display
with the recommendation to take a break.
During the display, various settings can be se-
lected.
After a break, another break recommendation
cannot be displayed until after approximately
45 minutes.
System limits
The function may be limited in the following
situations and may issue an incorrect warning
or no warning at all:
▷ When the time is set incorrectly.
▷ When the vehicle speed is mainly below
about 43 mph/70 km/h.
▷ With a sporty driving style, such as during
rapid acceleration or when cornering fast.
▷ In active driving situations, such as when
changing lanes frequently.
▷ When the road condition is poor.
▷ In the event of strong side winds.
The system is reset approx. 45 minutes after
parking the vehicle, for instance in the case of
a break during longer trips on highways.
212
Driving stability control systems CONTROLS
Driving stability control systems

Vehicle features and options Drive-off assistant
series. It also describes features and functions The drive-off assistant supports driving off on
that are not necessarily available in your vehi- uphill grades.
versions. This also applies to safety-related Driving off
functions and systems. When using these 1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot
functions and systems, the applicable laws brake.
2. Release the foot brake and drive off without
delay.
Anti-lock Braking System After the foot brake is released, the vehicle is
held in place for approx. 2 seconds.
The Antilock Braking System prevents locking Depending on the vehicle loading, the vehicle
of the wheels during braking. may roll back slightly.
The vehicle maintains its steerability even dur-
ing emergency braking, which increases the
active driving safety.
Dynamic Stability Control
The Antilock Braking System is ready after
each engine start. Principle
The Dynamic Stability Control helps to keep
the vehicle on a steady course by reducing
Brake assistant drive power and by brake intervention on indi-
vidual wheels.
The braking assistance effects maximum brak-
ing assistance when the brake is applied General information
quickly. It reduces the braking distance to a
The Dynamic Stability Control will detect, e.g.,
minimum during emergency braking. The ad-
the following unstable driving conditions:
vantages of the Antilock Braking System are
thereby utilized. ▷ Skidding, which can lead to oversteering.
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal ▷ Loss of adhesion of the front wheels, which
for the duration of emergency braking. can lead to understeering.
Adaptive brake assistant

In combination with Active Cruise Control, this
system ensures that the brake responds even
more rapidly when braking in critical situations.
213
CONTROLS Driving stability control systems
Safety information Deactivating/activating the Dynamic

Stability Control
Warning
General information
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing When the Dynamic Stability Control is deacti-
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of the vated, driving stability is limited when acceler-
system, it cannot independently react to all ating and cornering.
traffic situations. There is a risk of accident. To support driving stability, reactivate Dynamic
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Stability Control as soon as possible.
closely, be ready to take over steering and Deactivating the system
Hold the button down until DSC OFF
where appropriate.
is displayed in the instrument cluster
and the DSC OFF indicator light is illu-
minated.
Warning
When driving with a roof load, for instance Activating the system
with roof-mounted luggage rack, the vehicle's
center of gravity is higher, which increases Press the button.
the risk of the vehicle tipping in critical driving DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator
situations. There may be a risk of accident or light turn off.
risk of damage to property. Driving with roof
load only with activated Dynamic Stability
Control. Display
In the instrument cluster

Overview If the Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated,
DSC OFF is displayed in the instrument clus-
Button in the vehicle ter.
Indicator light illuminates: Dynamic
Stability Control is deactivated.
Indicator light blinks: Dynamic Stability

Control controls the drive and brake
forces.
Indicator light illuminates: the Dynamic Stabil-
DSC OFF ity Control has malfunctioned.
214
Dynamic Traction Control Activating/deactivating the Dynamic

Traction Control
Principle
Activating the system
The Dynamic Traction Control is a variant of
the Driving Stability Control where the drive Press the button.
power is optimized. TRACTION is displayed in the instru-
The system ensures maximum drive power on ment cluster and the indicator light for DSC
unusual road conditions, for instance unp- OFF lights up.
lowed snow covered roads, or loose road sur-
faces, but with somewhat limited driving stabil- Deactivating the system
ity.
Press the button again.
General information TRACTION and the DSC OFF indica-
tor light turn off.
When the Dynamic Traction Control is acti-
vated, there is maximum traction. Driving sta-
bility is limited during acceleration and when Display
cornering.
A brief activation of the Dynamic Traction Con- Display in the instrument cluster
trol may be useful in the following situations: When the Dynamic Traction Control is acti-
▷ When driving in slush or on uncleared, vated, TRACTION is displayed in the instru-
snow-covered roads. ment cluster.
▷ When driving off from deep snow or loose
ground. Indicator/warning lights
▷ When driving with tire chains. The indicator light illuminates: the Dy-
namic Traction Control is activated.
Overview
Button in the vehicle Automatic program change

In certain situations, the Dynamic Stability
Control is activated automatically:
▷ The Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go
function is activated.
▷ On a brake intervention by the Intelligent
Safety systems.
▷ The vehicle has a flat tire.
DSC OFF
xDrive
Principle
xDrive is the all-wheel-drive system of the ve-
hicle. Concerted action by the xDrive and other
215
CONTROLS Driving stability control systems
suspension control systems, such as Dynamic speeds by turning the rear wheels slightly in
Stability Control, further optimizes traction and the opposite direction to the front wheels.
driving dynamics. At higher speeds, the rear wheels are turned in
the same direction as the front wheels. For in-
General information stance, this results in a harmonious lane
xDrive variably distributes the driving power to change.
the front and rear axles as demanded by the In critical driving situations, the Integral Active
driving situation and road condition. Steering can stabilize the vehicle through pur-
The Driving Dynamics Control is used to poseful steering of the rear wheels before the
change the all-wheel distribution from traction driver intervenes, for instance in case of over-
oriented to sport oriented. steering.
Because of the needs-based use of the all-
wheel-drive system, Efficient4x4 yields a re- Setting
duction in consumption. The system offers several different settings.
Driving mode Integral Active Steering

M sport differential COMFORT Comfortable, for optimal
ECO PRO travel comfort.
The active M Sport differential provides for
continuously variable locking of the rear axle SPORT Dynamic, for greater agil-
differential, depending on the driving situation. ity.
It prevents a single rear wheel from spinning
and depending on the situation, increases the The different settings are assigned to the dif-
drive power of the wheel with greater road ferent driving modes of the Driving Dynamics
grip. This significantly improves the traction Control.
and driving dynamics of the vehicle.
The driver is responsible adapting his or her
Driving Dynamics Control, refer to page 135.
driving style to the situation.
Using tire chains

Integral Active Steering In order to guarantee free movement of the
wheels when operating with tire chains, rear
axle steering of the integral active steering
Principle must be switched off when tire chains are
The Integral Active Steering increases the ma- mounted.
neuverability and makes a more direct steering
response possible.
Rear axle steering during operation with tire
chains, refer to page 325.
General information
Integral Active Steering is a combination of
Malfunction
variable steering ratio and rear axle steering.
In the event of a malfunction, the steering
The steering is more direct because the varia-
wheel must be turned further at lower speeds,
ble steering ratio amplifies the steering-wheel
while the vehicle responds more sensitively to
angle while maneuvering. The rear axle steer-
ing acts to increase maneuverability at low
216
steering wheel movements in the higher speed

range.
There is no longer support of the Integral Ac-
tive Steering in critical driving situations.
Proceed cautiously and drive defensively.
Have the system checked by a dealer's service
center or another qualified service center or re-
pair shop.
217
CONTROLS Driver assistance systems
Driver assistance systems

Vehicle features and options Operation
This chapter describes all standard, country- Turning on

specific and optional features offered with the Press the button on the steering
series. It also describes features and functions wheel.
cle, e.g., due to the selected options or country The current speed is accepted as the speed
versions. This also applies to safety-related limit.
functions and systems. When using these If the system is switched on while the vehicle is
functions and systems, the applicable laws stationary or driving at low speeds,
and regulations must be observed. 20 mph/30 km/h is set as the speed limit.
The marking in the speedometer is set to the
Manual Speed Limiter corresponding speed.
When the speed limit is activated, Dynamic
Stability Control is switched on and the vehicle
Principle may change to COMFORT drive mode.
The system can be used to set a speed limit,
for instance to prevent the vehicle from ex- Turning off
ceeding speed limits.
wheel.
General information
The system can limit the speed, starting at a The system switches off automatically in the
value of 20 mph/30 km/h. The vehicle can be following situations, for example:
driven at any speed below the set speed limit. ▷ When the engine is switched off.
▷ When cruise control is switched on.
Overview
▷ When certain programs are activated via
the Driving Dynamics Control.
Buttons on the steering wheel
The displays turn off.
Button Function
Interrupting
System on/off.
If the reverse gear is engaged or in Neutral, the
system is interrupted when rolling backwards.
Store current speed.
Speed Limit Assistant: accept sug-
gested speed manually.
Rocker switch:
Changing the speed limit.
218
Driver assistance systems CONTROLS
Changing the speed limit Warning when the speed limit is

exceeded
Visual warning
If the speed limit is exceeded: the indi-
cator light in the instrument cluster
flashes while the vehicle speed is
greater than the set speed limit.
Acoustic warning
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
until the desired speed limit is set. ▷ If the speed limit is exceeded unintention-
ally, a signal sounds.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to
the resistance point, the speed limit in- ▷ When the speed limit is reduced to below
creases or decreases by 1 mph/1 km/h. the vehicle speed while driving, the signal
sounds after some time.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed past
the resistance point, the desired speed ▷ When the speed limit is intentionally ex-
changes by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h. ceeded by stepping on the accelerator
pedal all the way down, there is no signal.
If the set speed limit is reached or unintention-
ally exceeded, such as when driving downhill,
the vehicle is not actively braked.
When the speed limit is set during a trip to a
Display in the speedometer
value below the current speed, the vehicle
coasts until it drops to the set speed limit. Depending on the equipment, a mark in the
speedometer displays the status of the sys-
The current speed can also be stored by
tem.
pressing a button:
▷ Green marking: system is ac-
tive.
wheel.
▷ Gray marking: system is in-
terrupted.
Exceeding the speed limit ▷ No marking: system is
When the vehicle speed exceeds the set speed switched off.
limit, a warning is issued.
The speed limit can be exceeded intentionally. Indicator light
Press the accelerator pedal all the way down
▷ The indicator light lights up: the sys-
to intentionally exceed the set speed limit.
tem is switched on.
When the vehicle speed drops below the set
▷ The indicator light flashes: the set
speed limit, the limit is automatically reacti-
speed limit has been exceeded.
vated.
▷ Gray indicator light: the system has been
interrupted.
219
Cruise control There may be a risk of accident or risk of

damage to property. Only use the system if
driving at constant speed is possible.
Principle
With the Cruise Control, a set speed can be ad-
justed using the buttons on the steering wheel. Warning
The system maintains the set speed. The sys-
The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted or
tem accelerates and brakes automatically as
called up by mistake. There is a risk of acci-
needed.
dent. Adjust the set speed to the traffic condi-
General information actively intervene where appropriate.
The system can be activated starting at
20 mph/30 km/h.
Depending on the vehicle setting, the cruise Overview
control settings may change under certain
conditions. For instance, acceleration can Buttons on the steering wheel
change depending on the driving mode.
Button Function
Safety information Cruise control on/off.
Warning
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing Continue cruise control with the last
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of the setting.
traffic situations. There is a risk of accident. Interrupt cruise control.
Watch the surrounding traffic situation Store current speed.
where appropriate.
Rocker switch:
Set speed.
Warning
The use of the system can lead to an in- Switching cruise control on/off
creased risk of accidents in the following sit-
uations, for instance: Turning on
▷ On winding roads.
Depending on the equipment version,
▷ With high traffic volume. press the relevant button on the steer-
▷ On slippery roads, in fog, snow, or wet ing wheel.
conditions, or on a loose road surface.
220
The indicator lights in the instrument cluster Adjusting the speed

light up and the mark on the speedometer is
set to the current speed. Maintaining and storing the speed
Cruise control is active. The current speed is
maintained and stored as set speed.
If necessary, the Dynamic Stability Control will
be turned on.
Turning off
press the relevant button on the steer-
ing wheel.
Press the rocker switch up or down once while
The displays turn off. The stored set speed is the system is interrupted.
deleted. When the system is switched on, the current
speed is maintained and stored as the set
Interrupting cruise control speed.
The stored speed is displayed on the speed-
Interrupting manually ometer.
When active, press the button. If necessary, the Dynamic Stability Control will
be turned on.
The speed can also be stored by pressing a
Interrupting automatically button.
The system is automatically interrupted in the Press the button.
following situations, for example:
▷ When braking manually.
▷ Selector lever position D is disengaged. Changing the speed
▷ The Dynamic Traction Control is activated
or the Dynamic Stability Control is deacti-
vated.
▷ The Dynamic Stability Control adjusts.

until the desired speed is set.
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the
vehicle reaches the stored speed when the
road is clear.
221
▷ Each time the rocker switch is tapped to the ▷ Green marking: system is ac-
resistance point, the set speed increases or tive, the marking indicates
decreases by 1 mph/1 km/h. the desired speed.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed past ▷ Gray marking: system is in-
the resistance point, the desired speed terrupted, the marking indi-
changes by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h. cates the stored speed.
The maximum speed that can be set de- ▷ No marking: system is switched off.
pends on the vehicle.
▷ Pressing the rocker switch to the resistance Indicator light
point and holding it: vehicle accelerates or
decelerates without pressure on the accel- ▷ Indicator light green: system is ac-
erator pedal. tive.
After the rocker switch is released, the vehi- ▷ Gray indicator light: the system has
cle maintains its final speed. Pressing the been interrupted.
switch beyond the resistance point causes ▷ No indicator light: system is switched off.
the vehicle to accelerate more rapidly.
Displays in the Head-up Display

Continuing cruise control
Some system information can also be dis-
An interrupted cruise control can be continued
played in the Head-up Display.
by calling up the stored speed.
Make sure that the difference between current The icon is displayed when the set
speed and stored speed is not too large before speed is reached.
calling up the stored speed. Otherwise, unin-
tentional deceleration or acceleration may oc-
System limits
cur.
The set speed is also maintained downhill.
Press the button with the system in- The speed may not be maintained on uphill
terrupted. grades if the drive power is insufficient.
Cruise control is continued with the stored val- In ECO PRO driving mode, the vehicle may ex-
ues. ceed or drop below the set desired speed in
some situations, for instance on downhill or
In the following cases, the stored speed value
uphill grades.
is deleted and cannot be called up again:
▷ When the system is switched off.
▷ When drive-ready state is switched off. Active Cruise Control with
Stop&Go function
Display in the speedometer Principle

Depending on the equipment, a mark in the Using the Cruise Control, a desired speed and
speedometer displays the status of the sys- a distance to a vehicle ahead can be adjusted
tem. using the buttons on the steering wheel.
222
General information ▷ Set the parking brake.

The system maintains the set speed on clear ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
roads. The vehicle accelerates or brakes auto- turn the front wheels in the direction of
matically. the curb.
If a vehicle is driving ahead of you, the system ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
adjusts the speed of your vehicle so that the also secure the vehicle, for instance with
set distance to the vehicle ahead is main- a wheel chock.
tained. The speed is adjusted as far as the
given situation allows.
The distance can be adjusted at several levels. Warning
For safety reasons, it depends on the respec- The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted or
tive speed. called up by mistake. There is a risk of acci-
If the vehicle ahead of you brakes to a stand- dent. Adjust the set speed to the traffic condi-
still and then drives off again within a brief pe- tions. Watch surrounding traffic closely and
riod, the system is able to detect this within the actively intervene where appropriate.
given system limits.
Depending on the vehicle setting, the cruise
control settings may change under certain Warning
conditions. For instance, acceleration can Risk of accident due to too high speed differ-
change depending on the driving mode. ences to other vehicles, for instance in the
following situations:
Safety information ▷ When fast approaching a slowly moving
vehicle.
Warning ▷ Vehicle suddenly swerving into own
lane.
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing ▷ When fast approaching standing vehi-
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of the cles.
system, it cannot independently react to all There is a risk of injury or danger to life.
traffic situations. There is a risk of accident. Watch surrounding traffic closely and actively
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. intervene where appropriate.
braking at any time, and actively intervene Overview
where appropriate.
Buttons on the steering wheel
Warning Button Function

An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and With Steering Assistant:
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident. Cruise control on/off.
against rolling away. With Steering Assistant:
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured Select function.
223
Button Function The maximum speed that can be set is limited

and depends, for example, on the vehicle and
Without Steering Assistant: the vehicle equipment.
Cruise control on/off. The system can also be activated when sta-
tionary.
Store current speed.
Turning on/off and interrupting
cruise control
With Steering Assistant:
Interrupt cruise control. With Steering Assistant: Assisted
Continue cruise control with the last Driving Mode
setting.
General information
Without Steering Assistant:
This button is used to switch the con-
Continue cruise control with the last figured function on and off.
setting.
Without Steering Assistant: The button can be used to set the pri-
marily used function.
Interrupt cruise control.
Increase the distance. Set function

Switch distance control on/off.
When the system is active, press the
Reduce distance. button repeatedly until the desired
Switch distance control on/off. function is selected in the toolbar. The
toolbar for Assisted Driving mode is displayed
Rocker switch: at the bottom of the instrument cluster.
Set speed.
Icon Function
Sensors Cruise control with distance control.

sors:
cruise control with distance control
▷ Front radar sensor. and Steering Assistant.
Application range The selected function is shown in green.

The system is best used on well-constructed
roads.
The minimum speed that can be set is
20 mph/30 km/h.
224
Turning on Interrupting automatically

With Steering Assistant: The system is automatically interrupted in the
1. Press the button on the steering ▷ The driver applies the brakes.
wheel. ▷ Selector lever position D is disengaged.
▷ The Dynamic Traction Control is activated
2. If necessary, set the cruise control.
or the Dynamic Stability Control is deacti-
Without Steering Assistant: vated.
Press the button on the steering ▷ The Dynamic Stability Control is adjusting.
wheel. ▷ When the vehicle is stationary, the seat belt
is unbuckled and the driver's door are
The indicator lights in the instrument cluster
opened.
light up and the mark on the speedometer is
set to the current speed. ▷ The system has not detected objects for an
extended period, for instance on a road
Cruise control is active. The current speed is
with very little traffic without curb or
maintained and stored as set speed.
shoulder markings.
If necessary, the Dynamic Stability Control will
▷ The detection range of the radar is im-
be turned on.
paired, for instance by contamination or
heavy precipitation.
Turning off
▷ After a longer stationary period when the
To switch off the system while standing, step
vehicle has been braked to a stop by the
on brake pedal at the same time.
system.
Press the button on the steering wheel:
With Steering Assistant. Adjusting the speed
Maintaining and storing the speed

Without Steering Assistant.
The displays turn off. The stored set speed is

deleted.
Interrupting manually
When active, press the button on the steering
wheel:
With Steering Assistant.
Press the rocker switch up or down once while
Without Steering Assistant. the system is interrupted. The system will be
activated.
If interrupting the system while stationary, The current speed is maintained and stored as
press on the brake pedal at the same time. desired speed.
The stored speed is displayed on the speed-
ometer.
225
If necessary, the Dynamic Stability Control will the traffic and weather conditions and main-
be turned on. tain the prescribed safety distance, possibly
The speed can also be stored by pressing a by braking.
button.
Press the button. Reduce distance
Press the button repeatedly until the
desired distance is set.
Changing the speed
Instrument cluster will display selected dis-
tance.
Increase the distance

Press the button repeatedly until the
desired distance is set.
Instrument cluster will display selected dis-

tance.
until the desired speed is set. Automatic adaptation of the distance
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the market version: the system can be adjusted so
vehicle reaches the stored speed when the that the distance to the vehicle driving in front
road is clear. is automatically adjusted within the configured
▷ Each time the rocker switch is tapped to the distance according to the traffic situation or the
resistance point, the set speed increases or ambient conditions, for instance poor visibility.
decreases by 1 mph/1 km/h.
1. "CAR"
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed past
2. "Settings"
the resistance point, the desired speed
changes by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h. 3. "Driver Assistance"
Hold the rocker switch in position to repeat the 4. If necessary, "Driving"
action. 5. "Speed Limit Assistance"
6. "Adjust distance acc. to situation"
Adjusting the distance
Continuing cruise control
Safety information
An interrupted cruise control can be continued
by calling up the stored speed.
Warning Make sure that the difference between current
The system cannot serve as a substitute for speed and stored speed is not too large before
the driver’s personal judgment. Due to the calling up the stored speed. Otherwise, unin-
system limits, deceleration can be late. There tentional deceleration or acceleration may oc-
may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to cur.
property. Be aware to the surrounding traffic Press the button on the steering wheel with
situation at all times. Adjust the distance to the system interrupted:
226
With Steering Assistant. After changing, a Check Control message is

displayed.
Without Steering Assistant.
Cruise control is continued with the stored val-
General information
ues.
Depending on the equipment version, the dis-
In the following cases, the stored speed value
plays in the instrument cluster may vary.
is deleted and cannot be called up again:
▷ When the system is switched off. Display in the speedometer
▷ When drive-ready state is switched off. Depending on the equipment, a mark in the
speedometer displays the status of the sys-
Changing between cruise control tem.
with/without distance control ▷ Green marking: system is ac-
tive, the marking indicates
Safety information the desired speed.
▷ Gray marking: system is in-
Warning terrupted, the marking indi-
The system does not react to traffic driving cates the stored speed.
ahead of you, but instead maintains the ▷ No marking: system is switched off.
stored speed. There may be a risk of accident
or risk of damage to property. Adjust the set
Distance to vehicle ahead of you
speed to the traffic conditions and brake as
needed. Selected distance to the vehicle ahead of you
is shown.
Icon Description
Change over mode of the cruise control
Switching cruise control without distance con- Distance 1
trol off and on:
▷ Press and hold this button.
▷ Press and hold this button. Distance 2

With Steering Assistant: switch on distance
control:
Press the button.
Without Steering Assistant: switch on distance Distance 3

control:
227
Icon Description Icon Description
Distance 4 Gray icon:

This value is set automatically System interrupted.
after the system is switched
on. Symbol flashes gray:
The conditions are not adequate for
No distance control display, as the system to work.
the accelerator pedal is being The system was deactivated but ap-
pressed. plies the brakes until you actively re-
sume control by pressing on the
brake pedal or accelerator pedal.
Vehicle symbol flashes red and a sig-

Detected vehicle nal sounds:
Icon Description Brake and make an evasive maneu-

ver, if necessary.
Green icon:
A vehicle has been detected Alternative displays
ahead of you.
Icon Description
Indicator light green: system is

When the distance to the detected vehicle inactive.
creases, the vehicle symbol in the distance dis- No indicator light: system is
play will move away. switched off.
If necessary, drive off on your own, such as by
Vehicle symbol flashes:
stepping on the accelerator pedal or by press-
ing the rocker switch. The conditions are not ade-
quate for the system to work.
Indicator/warning lights The system was deactivated
but applies the brakes until you
Icon Description actively resume control by
pressing on the brake pedal or
Vehicle symbol white: accelerator pedal.
No distance control display, as the
accelerator pedal is being pressed.
Green icon:
A vehicle has been detected ahead of
you.
The vehicle symbol goes out if no ve-
hicle in front is detected.
Vehicle symbol flashes green:
Vehicle in front drove off.
228
Icon Description ▷ Distance too short.

▷ Speed greater than approx.
The vehicle symbol and dis-
40 mph/70 km/h.
tance bars blink red and an
acoustic signal sounds:
System limits
Brake and make an evasive
maneuver, if necessary.
System interrupted. Additional information:
Detection range
Assisted Driving View
displayed in the Assisted Driving View in the
central display area of the instrument cluster.
Displays in the Head-up Display The detection capability of the system and the
automatic braking performance are limited.
Set speed
For instance, two-wheeled vehicles may not be
Some system information can also be dis- detected.
played in the Head-up Display.
The icon is displayed when the set Deceleration
speed is reached.
The system does not decelerate in the follow-
ing situations:
Distance information ▷ For pedestrians or similarly slow-moving
The icon is displayed when the dis- road users.
tance from the vehicle traveling ahead ▷ Depending on the vehicle equipment and
is too short. country availability for red traffic lights.
▷ For cross traffic.
The distance information is active in the fol-
lowing situations: ▷ For oncoming traffic.
▷ Active Cruise Control switched off.
▷ Display in the Head-up Display selected.
Head-Up Display, refer to page 170.
229
Merging vehicles
When you approach a curve the system may

briefly report vehicles in the next lane due to
If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly the bend of the curve. If the system deceler-
merges into your lane, the system may not be ates you may compensate it by briefly acceler-
able to automatically restore the selected dis- ating. After releasing the accelerator pedal the
tance. It may not be possible to restore the se- system is reactivated and controls speed inde-
lected distance in certain situations, including if pendently.
you are driving significantly faster than vehi-
cles driving ahead of you, for instance when
rapidly approaching a truck. When a vehicle Driving off
driving ahead of you is reliably detected, the In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive off
system requests that the driver intervene by automatically; for example:
braking and carrying out evasive maneuvers, if
▷ On steep uphill grades.
needed.
▷ In front of bumps in the road.
In these cases, step on the accelerator pedal.
Cornering
Weather
The following restrictions can occur under un-
favorable weather or light conditions:
▷ Poorer vehicle detection.
▷ Short-term interruptions for vehicles that
are already recognized.
Drive attentively, and react to the current sur-
rounding traffic situation. If necessary, inter-
When the set speed is too high for a curve, the vene actively, for instance by braking, steering
speed is reduced slightly. Because curves may or evading.
not be anticipated in advance, drive into a
curve at an appropriate speed. Drive power
The system has a limited detection range. Sit- The set speed is also maintained downhill.
uations can arise in tight curves where a vehi- The speed may not be maintained on uphill
cle driving ahead will not be detected or will be grades if the drive power is insufficient.
detected very late. In ECO PRO driving mode, the vehicle may ex-
ceed or drop below the set desired speed in
some situations, for instance on downhill or
uphill grades.
230
Speed Limit Assistant

Warning
The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted or
Principle
called up by mistake. There is a risk of acci-
Speed Limit Assistant supports driving at the dent. Adjust the set speed to the traffic condi-
speed limit. A suggested speed can be ap- tions. Watch surrounding traffic closely and
plied. actively intervene where appropriate.
General information
When the systems in the vehicle, e.g., Speed Overview
Limit Info, detect a change of the speed limit,
this new speed value can be applied for the Buttons on the steering wheel
following systems:
▷ Manual Speed Limiter. Button Function
▷ Cruise control. Accept suggested speed manually.

▷ Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go func-
tion. Rocker switch:
The speed value is suggested as the new de- Set speed, refer to Cruise Control.
sired speed to be applied. To apply the speed
value, the corresponding system must be acti-
vated.
Turning Speed Limit Assistant
on/off
Safety information 1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
Warning 3. "Driver Assistance"
The system cannot serve as a substitute for 4. If necessary, "Driving"
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing 5. "Speed Limit Assistance"
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of the 6. "Speed limits"
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. ▷ "Adjust manually": detected speed limits
Watch the surrounding traffic situation can be applied manually.
closely, be ready to take over steering and ▷ "Show anticipation": Depending on the
braking at any time, and actively intervene national-market version: current and up-
where appropriate. coming speed limits are displayed in the
instrument cluster without being ap-
plied.
▷ "Show current limit": current speed lim-
its are displayed without being applied
in the instrument cluster.
▷ "Off": depending on the national-market
version, Speed Limit Info and Speed
Limit Assistant will be turned off.
231
Displays in the instrument cluster Setting the speed adjustment

A message is displayed in the instrument clus- 1. "CAR"
ter when the system and a driver assistance 2. "Settings"
system are activated.
Icon Function 4. If necessary, "Driving"
Depending on the equipment version, 5. "Speed Limit Assistance"
the indicator light illuminates green, 6. To perform the desired setting:
together with the icon for a speed
▷ "Adjust speed limits": set tolerance for
control system:
the speed adaptation that affects all
Speed Limit Assistant is active and speeds.
detected speed limits can be applied
▷ "2nd adjustment up to": activate or de-
manually for the displayed system.
activate additional speed adaptation.
Detected change of a speed limit with ▷ "Adjust speed limits": with activated ad-
immediate effect. ditional speed adjustment, set the toler-
ance for speed limits up to
Indicator light illuminates green: the 40 mph/60 km/h.
detected speed limit can be applied
with the SET button. Adapt to route
After it has been applied, a green
checkmark is displayed. Principle
Manual adoption system can be configured so that the vehicle
adapts the speed automatically to the route.
A detected speed limit can be applied man-
ually for the active driver assistance system. For instance, the speed will be reduced in the
following situations as necessary:
When the SET icon lights up, press the
button. ▷ Before making turns.
▷ Before a roundabout.
Speed adjustment ▷ Before a curve.
Principle Adjustment
1. "CAR"
It can be adjusted, whether the speed limit is
exactly applied or with a tolerance. 2. "Settings"
A speed adaptation for all speed limits and an 5. "Speed Limit Assistance"
additional speed adaptation for speed limits up
6. "Adjust to route" or "Automatically adjust
to 40 mph/60 km/h can be set up.
speed to route"
The additional speed adaptation for speed lim-
its up to 40 mph/60 km/h can be activated or
deactivated.
232
System limits Watch the surrounding traffic situation

Speed Limit Assistant is based on the Speed
Limit Info system.
where appropriate.
Consider the system limits of Speed Limit Info.
Upcoming speed limits can only be accepted
for the Active Cruise Control. Overview
system may not respond at all or with limita- Buttons on the steering wheel
tions to the route when the navigation system
is unable to clearly identify the position of the Button Function
vehicle.
Steering Assistant with Traffic Jam
Additional information: Assistant on/off.
▷ System limits of Speed Limit Information,
Switch function on.
refer to page 167.
▷ System limits of the sensors, refer to
page 37.
Sensors
Steering Assistant sors:
Principle ▷ Front radar sensor.
The Steering Assistant helps keep the vehicle ▷ Radar sensors, side, front.
in the lane. For this purpose, the system exe- ▷ Radar sensors, side, rear.
cutes supporting steering movements, for in- Additional information:
stance when cornering.
General information
Depending on the speed, the system orients it-
▷ Speed below 130 mph/210 km/h.
self according to the lane boundaries or vehi-
cles in front. ▷ Sufficient lane width.
Sensors on the steering wheel detect whether ▷ Above approx. 43 mph, 70 km/h: lane
the steering wheel is being touched. boundary on both sides is detected.
▷ Below approx. 43 mph, 70 km/h: lane
Safety information boundary on both sides or a vehicle driving
ahead is detected.
Warning ▷ Hands on the steering wheel rim.
The system cannot serve as a substitute for ▷ Wide curves.

the driver’s personal judgment in assessing ▷ Drive in the center of the lane.
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of the ▷ Turn signal switched off.
▷ The sensor system calibration process is
complete.
233
▷ Cruise control with distance control active. Turning on

▷ Seat belt on the driver's side fastened.
1. Press the button on the steering
▷ Forward Collision Warning active.
wheel.
▷ Pedestrian Warning active.
▷ Side Collision Warning active. 2. Adjust the Steering Assistant if
necessary.
Turning on/off Steering wheel symbol lights up gray.
The system is on standby and does not
Assisted Driving Mode
manipulate steering movements.
General information System activates automatically as soon as all
This button is used to switch the con- function conditions are fulfilled.
figured function on and off. Steering wheel symbol lights up green.
The button can be used to set the pri- The system is active.
marily used function. With the system switched on, the Daytime Pe-
destrian Collision Mitigation system and the
Set function Side Collision Warning are activated.
When the system is active, press the
Turning off
button repeatedly until the desired
function is selected in the toolbar. The Press the button on the steering
toolbar for Assisted Driving mode is displayed wheel.
at the bottom of the instrument cluster.
The indicator goes out.
Icon Function The system does not perform supportive
steering wheel movements.
Cruise control with distance control.
Interrupting automatically
Depending on the equipment version, The system interrupts the supporting steering
cruise control with distance control movements automatically, for example in the
and Steering Assistant. following situations:
▷ At a speed above 130 mph/210 km/h.
▷ When the steering wheel is released.
▷ The driver applies the brakes.
The selected function is shown in green. ▷ With strong steering intervention.
▷ When leaving own lane.
▷ When the turn signal is switched on.
▷ When the lane is too narrow.
▷ If a lane boundary is not detected for a cer-
tain period of time and no vehicle is driving
ahead.
234
▷ The Active Cruise Control is interrupted. Icon Description

▷ The seat belt on the driver's side is unfas-
tened.
The hands are not grasping the
Steering wheel symbol lights up gray.
steering wheel. The system is still ac-
The system is on standby and does not tive.
manipulate steering movements.
System activates automatically as soon as all nal sounds:
function conditions are fulfilled. The hands are not grasping the
steering wheel. System interruption is
Displays in the instrument cluster imminent.
The system reduces the speed to a
Icon Description standstill if applicable.
Gray steering wheel symbol: It is possible that the system will not
The system is on standby. execute any supporting steering
movements.
Green steering wheel symbol:
The system is activated. Depending on the equipment and national-
The system supports the driver in
keeping the vehicle within the lane.
central display area of the instrument cluster.
Yellow flashing steering wheel sym- Additional information:
bol:
Lane boundary driven over.
The steering wheel vibrates where Alternative displays
applicable.
Yellow steering wheel symbol and a plays in the instrument cluster may vary and
signal sounds, if applicable: are displayed as follows:
System interruption is imminent. Icon Description
Depending on the equipment and na- Gray steering wheel symbol:
tional-market version: steering wheel
The system is on standby.
symbol flashes red or lights up red. A
signal sounds: Green steering wheel symbol:
System is switching off. The system is activated.
Depending on equipment, yel-

low flashing steering wheel
symbol:
Lane boundary driven over.
The steering wheel vibrates
where applicable.
235
Icon Description Displays on the steering wheel

Yellow steering wheel symbol
and a signal sounds, if applica-
ble:
System interruption is immi-
nent.
Depending on the equipment

and national-market version:
steering wheel symbol flashes
red or lights up red. A signal
The two LED lights above the buttons illumi-
sounds:
nate analogously to the displays in the instru-
System is switching off. ment cluster:
Green steering wheel icon and ▷ Yellow: system interruption is imminent.
lane boundary icon: ▷ Red: system will be deactivated.
The system supports the driver
The steering wheel displays can be switched
in keeping the vehicle within
on/off if required.
the lane.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
The hands are not grasping
the steering wheel. The system 3. "Driver Assistance"
is still active. 4. "Steering Wheel Feedback"
5. "Light elements"
Red steering wheel symbol
and a signal sounds: Displays in the Head-up Display
The hands are not grasping All system information can also be displayed in
the steering wheel. System in- the Head-up Display.
terruption is imminent.
It is possible that the system System limits
will not execute any supporting
steering movements. General information
With Active Cruise Control, the The system cannot be activated or meaning-
system may reduce the speed. fully used in certain situations.
Safety information
Warning
236
of damage to property. Actively intervene as

Assisted Driving Plus
system’s operation and limitations. Principle
Assisted Driving Plus supports the driver with
vehicle control in traffic queues.
Supporting steering movements take place
Additional information: without the driver actively steering.
▷ Radar sensors, refer to page 38. General information
The system uses the sensors of the Steering
Hands on the steering wheel Assistant.
The sensors cannot detect hand-steering
wheel contact in the following situations: Safety information
▷ Driving with gloves.
▷ Protective covers on the steering wheel. Warning
Narrow lanes the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
When driving within narrow lanes, the system the traffic situation. Based on the limits of the
cannot be activated or effectively used, for in- system, it cannot independently react to all
stance in the following situations: traffic situations. There is a risk of accident.
▷ In construction areas. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions.
▷ Depending on the equipment, with auto-
matic formation of emergency lanes.
▷ Within city limits. where appropriate.
Weather State laws differ and the use of this function

The following restrictions can occur under un- may violate the law. Before use, check your
favorable weather or light conditions: state and local laws.
▷ Poorer recognition of vehicles and lane Additionally, the notices for the Steering Assis-
boundaries. tant apply.
▷ Short-term interruptions for vehicles that Additional information:
are already recognized. Steering Assistant, refer to page 233.
Drive attentively, and react to the current sur-
rounding traffic situation. If necessary, inter- Functional requirements
vene actively, for instance by braking, steering ▷ The functional requirements of the Steering
or evading. Assistant are fulfilled.
Functional requirements, refer to page 233.
▷ The Steering Assistant is active.
▷ The function is only available on certain
street types, e.g. freeways.
237
▷ Driving on a road without pedestrians or cy- Alternative displays

clists.
▷ Sufficient lane width. plays in the instrument cluster may vary and
▷ Lane markings and a vehicle driving ahead are displayed as follows:
are detected.
Icon Description
▷ Speed less than approx. 40 mph/60 km/h.
Indicator light green: system is active.
▷ The Driver Attention Camera in the instru-
ment cluster detects that the driver is pay-
ing attention to the surrounding traffic.
▷ The function must be available in the coun- Displays on the steering wheel
try in which the vehicle is driven.
Turning on
As soon as all functional requirements
are met, Assisted Driving Plus will be
displayed as an additional icon in the
toolbar. The toolbar is displayed at the
bottom of the instrument cluster.
Select Assisted Driving Plus with the

The two LED lights above the buttons illumi-
button on the steering wheel.
nate analogously to the displays in the instru-
The icon for Assisted Driving Plus is shown in ment cluster:
green.
▷ Green: the system is active.
Two green LED lights are illuminated on the
▷ Yellow: system will be interrupted.
steering wheel.
▷ Red: system will be deactivated.
The indicator light in the instrument cluster is
shown in green.
The system begins to assist the driver with ve- System limits
hicle control.
General information
Displays in the instrument cluster The limits of the Steering Assistant system ap-
ply.
Icon Description Additional information:
Indicator light green: system is active.
Driver Attention Camera

Indicator light white: system is ready. The limits of the Driver Attention Camera sys-
tem apply.
Gray indicator light: the system has Driver Attention Camera, refer to page 65.
been interrupted.
238
Automatic Lane Change ▷ The minimum speed is country-specific.

▷ The function must be available in the coun-
Assistant try in which the vehicle is driven.
Principle Switch lane change assist on/off

The Automatic Lane Change Assistant also 1. "CAR"
assists when changing lanes on multi-lane 2. "Settings"
roads.
The system uses the sensors of the Steering 5. "Steering Assistance"
Assistant. 6. "Automatic Lane Change"
Safety information Changing lanes

1. Ensure that the traffic situation permits
Warning changing lanes.
The system cannot serve as a substitute for 2. Press the turn signal lever in the required
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing direction to the pressure point for signaling
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of the briefly.
system, it cannot independently react to all A supporting steering movement in the re-
traffic situations. There is a risk of accident. quired direction can be detected a short
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. time later.
where appropriate.
Additionally, the notices for the Steering Assis-

tant apply.
After the lane change, the system helps keep
Functional requirements the vehicle in the new lane.
▷ The functional requirements of the Steering
Assistant are fulfilled. Canceling a lane change
Functional requirements, refer to page 233. The lane change can be canceled by steering
▷ Driving on a road without pedestrians or cy- movement into the opposite direction.
clists and with physical barriers to oncom-
ing traffic, such as crash barriers.
▷ Lane boundaries have been detected.
▷ Maximum speed approx. 110 mph,
180 km/h.
239
Displays in the instrument cluster Icon Description
Green steering wheel symbol.

Icon Description
Gray line for lane marking on
Green steering wheel symbol. the appropriate side.
Green arrow symbol for lane-chang- Green arrow symbol for lane-
ing. changing.
The system carries out a lane The system carries out a lane
change. change.
Green steering wheel symbol. Green steering wheel symbol.
Gray line for lane marking on the ap- Gray line for lane marking on
propriate side. the appropriate side.
The system detected the lane change No arrow symbol for lane-
request. Lane change not currently changing on the display.
possible.
The system detected the lane
Depending on the national-market change request. Lane change
version: not currently possible.
Green steering wheel symbol. Depending on the national-
Gray arrow symbol for lane-changing. market version:
Lane change not possible; functional Green steering wheel symbol.
requirements not met. Gray line for lane marking on
the appropriate side.
Depending on the equipment and national- Gray arrow symbol for lane-
market version, information for the system is changing.
central display area of the instrument cluster. Lane change not possible;
functional requirements not
Additional information: met.
System limits
Alternative displays
The limits of the Steering Assistant system ap-
Depending on the equipment version, the dis- ply.
plays in the instrument cluster may vary and
are displayed as follows: Additional information:
Parking assistance systems

General information
The parking assistance systems include differ-
ent individual systems. The individual systems
provide support with assistance functions, sen-
240
sors and different camera views when parking Safety information

and maneuvering or driving in reverse.
Warning
▷ Park Distance Control, refer to page 241.
▷ Active Park Distance Control, refer to the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
page 244. the traffic situation. Based on the limits of the
▷ Side protection, refer to page 245. system, it cannot independently react to all
▷ Rearview camera without Surround View, traffic situations. There is a risk of accident.
refer to page 245. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions.
Check surrounding traffic and vehicle's sur-
▷ Automatic Parking Assistant, refer to
roundings closely and actively intervene
page 248.
where appropriate.
▷ Automatic Parking Assistant, driving out of
parking space, refer to page 252.
▷ Back-up Assistant, refer to page 254. Warning
▷ Surround View with rearview camera, refer Due to high speeds when the Park Distance
to page 255. Control is activated, the warning can be de-
▷ Panorama View, refer to page 260. layed due to physical circumstances. There is
▷ Cross traffic warning, refer to page 262. a risk of injury or risk of damage to property.
Avoid approaching an object too fast. Avoid
▷ Remote 3D View, refer to page 264.
driving off quickly while Park Distance Control
is not yet active.
Park Distance Control
Overview
Principle
The Park Distance Control helps with parking. Button in the vehicle
Acoustic and visual warnings signal obstacles
in front of or behind the vehicle.
Depending on the equipment, obstacles that
are detected by the side ultrasonic sensors
may also be reported by the side protection.
General information
The range of the system, depending on obsta-
cles and environmental conditions, is approx.
6 ft/2 m. Park assistance button
An acoustic warning sounds in case of an im-
pending collision at a distance to the object of
approx. 27 in/70 cm. Sensors
For objects behind the vehicle, the acoustic The system is controlled by the following sen-
warning is already issued at a distance to the sors:
object of approx. 5 ft/1.50 m.
241
▷ Ultrasound sensors in the front/rear bump- ▷ On: the LED lights up.
ers. ▷ Off: the LED goes out.
▷ Depending on the equipment: ultrasonic The rearview camera image is displayed if the
sensors on the side. reverse gear is engaged when pressing the
Additional information: park assistance button.
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 37. Depending on the equipment version, the sys-
tem cannot be switched off manually if the re-
Turning on/off verse gear is engaged.
Turning on automatically Warning

The system switches on automatically in the
following situations: Signal tones
▷ When the engine is running, selector lever
General information
position R is engaged.
An intermittent tone indicates when the vehicle
▷ Depending on the equipment version: while
is approaching an object. E.g., when an object
approaching detected obstacles at a speed
is detected at the rear left of the vehicle, a sig-
lower than approx. 2.5 mph/4 km/h. The
nal tone sounds from the rear left speaker.
activation distance depends on the situa-
tion in question. The shorter the distance to the object, the
shorter the intervals.
You may switch automatic activation when ob-
stacles are detected on and off. When the distance to a detected object is less
than approx. 8 in/20 cm, a continuous tone is
1. "CAR" sounded.
2. "Settings" When there are objects in front of and behind
3. "Driver Assistance" the vehicle at the same time, with a distance
4. "Parking and Maneuvering" smaller than approx. 8 in/20 cm, an alternating
continuous tone will sound.
5. If necessary, "Automatic PDC Activation"
The intermittent tone and continuous tone are
6. "Automatic PDC Activation" switched off if the selector lever position P is
Depending on equipment, an additional cam- engaged.
era view is also switched on. Depending on national-market version, the in-
termittent tone is switched off after a short
Automatic deactivation during forward time when the vehicle is stationary.
travel
The system switches off when a certain dis- Volume
tance travelled or speed is exceeded. The volume of the Park Distance Control
Switch the system back on, if needed. acoustic signals can be adjusted.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
Press the park assistance button.
4. "Parking and Maneuvering"
242
5. "Volume PDC signal" System limits

6. Set the desired value.
Safety information
Visual warning
Warning
The approach of the vehicle to an object is
shown on the Control Display. Objects that are
farther away are already displayed on the Con- System limits of the sensors
trol Display before a signal sounds. Additional information:
▷ Ultrasonic sensors, refer to page 39.
The display appears as soon as the Park Dis-
tance Control is activated.
Limits of ultrasonic measurement
The detection range of the sensors is repre-
sented in the colors green, yellow and red The detection of objects with ultrasonic meas-
when obstacles are detected. urements can run into physical limits, e.g., in
Pathway lines are faded in for better estima-
tion of the space required. ▷ With obstacles and persons at the edge of
the lane.
When the image of the rearview camera is dis-
played, you can switch to the Park Distance ▷ Low objects already displayed, for instance
Control or to a different view with obstacle curbs, can move into the blind area of the
markings if necessary: sensors before or after a continuous tone
sounds.
1. Press the Controller to the left, if needed.
2. For instance "Park. sensors only" Unwarranted warnings
Cross traffic warning: depending on the equip- Reaching the system limits can cause unwar-
ment, you will be warned in the Park Distance ranted warnings.
Control display against vehicles approaching in To prevent unwarranted warnings, for instance
the front or rear from the side. in car washes, turn off automatic Park Dis-
Additional information: tance Control activation on obstacle detection.
Cross traffic warning, refer to page 262.
Malfunction
White icon is displayed, and the detec-
tion range of the sensors is dimmed on
A Check Control message is displayed.
243
Park Distance Control malfunction. Have the roundings closely and actively intervene
system checked by a dealer's service center or where appropriate.
In addition, the safety information for the Park
Distance Control and the Automatic Parking
Active Park Distance Control Assistant apply.
Principle ▷ Park Distance Control, refer to page 241.
The Park Distance Control brake function ini- ▷ Automatic Parking Assistant, refer to
tiates emergency braking if there is an acute page 248.
risk of collision.
Temporary switching off
General information The Park Distance Control brake function can
Due to system limits, a collision cannot be pre- be temporarily switched off:
vented under all circumstances.
Confirm the message on the Control Display.
The function is available below walking speed
During continued driving in this surrounding
when driving in reverse or rolling backward.
situation, no further emergency braking will oc-
A press of the accelerator pedal interrupts the cur.
brake intervention.
After emergency braking to a stop, further Settings
creeping toward an obstacle is possible. Pro- It is possible to set which areas on the vehicle
ceed with caution. To move forward, lightly will be protected by the system.
press the accelerator pedal and release as
needed. 1. "CAR"
If the accelerator pedal is depressed longer, 2. "Settings"
the vehicle drives off. Manual braking is possi- 3. "Driver Assistance"
ble at any time.
The system uses the ultrasonic sensors of
5. "Active PDC with braking interv."
Park Distance Control and the Automatic Park-
ing Assistant. 6. Select the desired setting.
Safety information System limits

The limits of the systems of the Park Distance
Control and the Automatic Parking Assistant
Warning apply.
The system cannot serve as a substitute for If required, deactivate the system via iDrive
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing where applicable.
244
Side protection Display
Principle
The side protection warns of obstacles on the
side of the vehicle.
General information
The system uses the ultrasonic sensors of
Park Distance Control and the Automatic Park-
ing Assistant.
To protect the sides of the vehicle, obstacle
markings are displayed on the sides of the ve-
Safety information hicle.
▷ Color marks: warning against detected ob-
Warning stacles.
The system cannot serve as a substitute for ▷ Gray marks, hatched area: no obstacles
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing were detected.
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of the ▷ No marks, black area: the area next to the
system, it cannot independently react to all vehicle was not yet captured.
Check surrounding traffic and vehicle's sur- Limits of the side protection
roundings closely and actively intervene The system only displays stationary obstacles
where appropriate. that were previously detected by sensors while
passing them.
In addition, the safety information for the Park The system does not detect whether an obsta-
Distance Control and the Automatic Parking cle moves later on. If the vehicle is stationary,
Assistant apply. the marks are shown in black after a certain
Additional information: time. The area next to the vehicle must be
▷ Park Distance Control, refer to page 241. newly captured.
▷ Automatic Parking Assistant, refer to In addition, the limits of the systems of the
page 248. Park Distance Control and the Automatic Park-
ing Assistant apply.
Without Surround View:

rearview camera
Principle
The rearview camera helps when reverse
parking and maneuvering. The area behind the
vehicle is shown on the Control Display.
245
Additionally, assistance functions can be Turning on/off

shown in the display, e.g., help lines.
Turning on automatically
Safety information The system is switched on automatically if se-
lector lever position R is engaged when the en-
Warning gine is running.
Automatic deactivation during forward
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of the travel
system, it cannot independently react to all The system switches off when a certain dis-
traffic situations. There is a risk of accident. tance travelled or speed is exceeded.
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Switch the system back on, if needed.
roundings closely and actively intervene Depending on the vehicle equipment:
where appropriate. switching on/off manually
Overview
▷ On: the LED lights up.
Depending on the vehicle equipment: ▷ Off: the LED goes out.
button in the vehicle
The parking assistance functions are shown
Switching the view via iDrive

If the rearview camera view is not displayed,
change the view via iDrive:
1. If necessary, tilt the Controller to the side.
2. "Rear view camera"
The rearview camera image is displayed.
Park assistance button
▷ The trunk lid is fully closed.
Sensors
▷ Keep the detection range of the camera
The system is controlled by the following sen- open. Protruding cargo, a rear-mounted
sors: luggage rack or trailer can limit the detec-
▷ Rearview camera. tion range of the camera.
246
Display on the Control Display The pathway lines are continuously adjusted
to the steering wheel movements depending
Toolbars on the steering-wheel angle.
The assistance functions can be activated

manually via the toolbars on the sides of the Turning circle lines
Control Display.
1. Move the Controller to the right, if needed.

2. With corresponding equipment:
"Camera image"
3. ▷ "Parking aid lines".
Pathway lines and turning circle lines
are displayed.
▷ "Obstacle mark.".
Depending on the equipment, the ob- Turning circle lines can only be superimposed
stacles detected by the Park Distance on the camera image together with pathway
Control are displayed by marks. lines.
More than one assistance function can be ac- Turning circle lines show the course of the
tive at the same time. smallest possible turning radius on a level
road.
Parking aid lines Only one turning circle line is displayed after
the steering wheel is turned past a certain an-
General information gle.
Additional assistance functions can be shown
in the camera image on the control display. Parking using lanes and turning circle lines
More than one assistance function can be ac- 1. Position the vehicle so that the red turning
tive at the same time. circle line leads to within the limits of the
parking space.
Pathway lines
2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where
the green pathway line covers the corre-
sponding turning circle line.
Pathway lines help you to estimate the space

required when parking and maneuvering on
level roads.
247
Obstacle marking Depending on the equipment, some assis-

tance functions also take into account data
from the Park Distance Control.
Follow the notes in the Park Distance Control
chapter.
The objects displayed on the Control Display
may be closer than they appear. Do not esti-
mate the distance from the objects on the dis-
play.
Depending on the equipment, obstacles be-

hind the vehicle are detected by the Park Dis-
Automatic Parking Assistant
tance Control sensors.
Obstacle markings can be faded into the im- Principle
age of the rearview camera.
The colored steps of the obstacle markings
match the marks of the Park Distance Control.
Setting brightness and contrast

With the rearview camera switched on:
1. Move the Controller to the right, if needed.

2. "Camera image"
The Automatic Parking Assistant supports the
3. Select the desired setting. driver in the following situations:
▷ When parking parallel to the road, parallel
System limits parking.
System limits of the sensors ▷ When reverse parking perpendicular to the

road, perpendicular parking. The system
Additional information: orients itself with the middle of the parking
▷ Cameras, refer to page 37. space.
▷ Depending on the equipment version: when
Deactivated camera driving out of parallel parking spaces.
When the camera is deactivated, for instance
when the trunk lid is open, the camera image is General information
displayed hatched in gray.
Handling
Detection of objects
Automatic Parking Assistant handling is div-
Very low obstacles as well as high, protruding ided into three steps:
objects such as ledges may not be detected by
▷ Turn on and activate.
the system.
▷ Parking space search.
▷ Parking.
248
System status and instructions on required ac- Overview

tions are displayed on the Control Display.
Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces Button in the vehicle
on both sides of the vehicle.
The Automatic Parking Assistant calculates
the best possible parking line and takes control
of the following functions during the parking
operation:
▷ Steering.
▷ Acceleration and braking.
▷ Changing gears. Park assistance button
The parking operation is automatic.
Safety information Sensors

sors:
Warning
▷ Ultrasound sensors in the front/rear bump-
The system cannot serve as a substitute for ers.
▷ Ultrasonic sensors, side.
system, it cannot independently react to all Additional information:
traffic situations. There is a risk of accident. Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 37.
Check surrounding traffic and vehicle's sur- Functional requirements
where appropriate. For the measurement od parking
spaces
▷ Maximum speed while driving forward ap-
NOTICE prox. 22 mph/35 km/h.
The system can steer the vehicle over or onto ▷ Maximum distance to row of parked vehi-
curbs. There is a risk of damage to property, cles: 5 ft/1.5 m.
among other potential damage. Watch sur-
rounding traffic closely and actively intervene Suitable parking space
where appropriate.
General information:
In addition, the safety instructions of the Park ▷ Gap behind an object that has a min. length
Distance Control apply. of 1.7 ft/0.5 m.
Additional information: ▷ Gap between two objects with a minimum
length of approx. 1.7 ft/0.5 m.
Park Distance Control, refer to page 241.
Parallel parking to the road:
249
▷ Minimum length of gap between two ob- Display on the Control Display
jects: own vehicle length plus approx.
2.6 ft/0.8 m. System activated/deactivated
▷ Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.
Perpendicular parking: Icon Meaning
▷ Minimum width of the gap: own vehicle Gray: the system is not available.
width plus approx. 2.3 ft/0.7 m. White: the system is available but
▷ Minimum depth: own vehicle length. not activated.
The depth of diagonal parking spaces must System is activated.
be estimated by the driver. Due to technical
limitations, the system is only able to ap- Parking space search is active.
proximate the depth of diagonal parking
The parking operation is active. The
spaces.
system takes over the steering.
For the parking operation

Parking space search and system
▷ Doors and trunk lid are closed.
status
▷ Driver's seat belt is fastened.
Switching on with the button

The LED lights up.
The current status of the parking space search

is indicated on the Control Display.
Automatic Parking Assistant is activated
automatically. ▷ Parking assistant is activated and park-
ing space search is active.
Switching on with reverse gear ▷ Control Display shows suitable parking
1. Shift into reverse. spaces at the edge of the road next to the
The current status of the parking space vehicle symbol. When Park Assistant is ac-
search is indicated on the Control Display. tive, suitable parking spaces are highlighted
and an acoustic signal sounds.
2. If necessary, activate: "Autom. Parking"
▷ If a diagonal or parallel parking space is
Switching on via iDrive clearly detected, the system automatically
adjusts the suitable parking method. In the
The display of the rearview camera or the view
case of parking spaces suitable for parallel
of the Park Distance Control must be active.
and diagonal parking, a selection menu is
1. Move the Controller to the right. displayed. In this case, the desired parking
method must be selected manually.
2. Activate the parking assistant on the Con-
trol Display: "Autom. Parking"
250
▷ The parking operation is active. The sys- The status of the parking space search and
tem takes over the steering. possible parking spaces are displayed on
▷ Parking space search is always active the Control Display.
whenever the vehicle is moving forward 3. Confirm the suggested parking space for
slow and straight, even if the system is de- the parking operation: select the parking
activated. When the system is deactivated, space on the Control Display.
the displays on the Control Display are The system takes over the steering.
shown in gray.
4. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis-
play.
Switching signal tone for suitable
At the end of the parking operation, the P
parking spaces on/off selector lever position is set.
1. "CAR"
The end of the parking operation is indi-
2. "Settings" cated on the Control Display.
3. "Driver Assistance" 5. Adjust the parking position yourself, if
4. "Parking and Maneuvering" needed.
5. "Automatic Parking"
Canceling manually
6. "Alert if parking space detected"
The Automatic Parking Assistant can be inter-
rupted at any time:
Acoustic signals of the Park
Distance Control ▷ Press the park assistance button.
During an automatic parking operation, no in-

termittent tone will sound from the PDC Park ▷ "Autom. Parking": select the icon on the
Distance Control. Control Display.
A continuous tone sounds when the distance

Canceling automatically
to a detected object is less than approx. 8 in-
ches/20 cm. The system is interrupted automatically in the
Parking using the Automatic ▷ When the driver grasps the steering wheel
Parking Assistant or takes over steering.
▷ Possibly on snow-covered or slippery road.
Parking ▷ When there are obstacles that are hard to
1. Switching on and activating the parking as- overcome, such as curbs.
sistant. ▷ When there are obstacles that suddenly ap-
For this, engage the reverse gear or press pear.
the parking assist button and activate the ▷ The Park Distance Control indicates distan-
system on the Control Display, if needed. ces that are too small.
Automatic Parking Assistant is acti- ▷ When a maximum number of parking at-
vated. tempts or the time taken for parking is ex-
2. Pass the row of parked vehicles forward at ceeded.
a speed of up to approx. 22 mph/35 km/h ▷ When changing over to another function on
and at a distance of maximum 5 ft/1.5 m. the Control Display.
251
▷ If the trunk lid is open. System limits of the sensors

▷ If doors are open. Additional information:
▷ When setting the parking brake. ▷ Ultrasonic sensors, refer to page 39.
▷ During acceleration.
▷ The brake pedal remains depressed for Functional limitations
longer while the vehicle is at a standstill. The system may be limited in the following sit-
▷ When unfastening the driver's seat belt. uations:
A Check Control message is displayed. ▷ On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel

roads.
Resuming ▷ On slippery ground.
An interrupted parking operation can be con- ▷ On steep uphill or downhill grades.
tinued, if needed. ▷ With accumulations of leaves/snow in the
Reactivate the parking assistant and follow the parking space.
instructions on the Control Display. ▷ In case of changes to an already-measured
parking space.
Turning off ▷ With ditches or edges, for instance an edge
The system can be switched off manually: of a port.
Press the park assistance button. ▷ Parking spaces that are not suitable may
be detected or suitable parking spaces may
not be detected at all.
System limits
Malfunction
Safety information A Check Control message is displayed.
The Automatic Parking Assistant has malfunc-
tioned. Have the system checked by a dealer's
Warning
The system is designed to operate in certain ter or repair shop.
spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk Driving out of a parking
warranted. Refer to the information in this space using the parking
Owner’s Manual regarding the scope of the assistant
Principle
No parking assistance The system makes driving out of parallel park-
The Automatic Parking Assistant does not of- ing spaces easier.
fer assistance in the following situations:
▷ For diagonal parking spaces.
252
General information tected. The distance to a detected curb is at

least 6 inches/15 cm.
Steptronic transmission ▷ The vehicle was parked using the parking
The parking assistant calculates an optimal assistant and an object is detected in front
line for pulling out of a parking space and takes of the vehicle.
control of the following functions during the ▷ The parking space is at least 2.6 ft/0.8 m
maneuver: longer than your vehicle.
▷ Steering. ▷ The vehicle has been parked in reverse.
▷ Accelerating and braking.
▷ Changing gears.
Driving out of parking spaces
The vehicle maneuvers automatically until the 1. Turn on drive-ready state.
vehicle reaches a position in which the driver 2. Steptronic transmission:
can drive out of the parking space without fur- Press the park assistance button or shift
ther steering movements. into reverse gear when the vehicle is sta-
tionary to switch on the Automatic Parking
Safety information Assistant.
3. Tilt the Controller to the right and activate
Warning the Automatic Parking Assistant on the
Control Display: "Autom. Parking"
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing 4. On the Control Display, confirm the re-
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of the quired direction for driving out of the park-
system, it cannot independently react to all ing space if necessary.
traffic situations. There is a risk of accident. 5. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis-
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. play.
Check surrounding traffic and vehicle's sur- Steptronic transmission:
The system takes control of the maneuver.
where appropriate.
A message will be displayed at the end of
the maneuver.
Distance Control and the Automatic Parking 6. Make sure that the traffic situation permits
Assistant apply. driving out of parking space and driving off
as usual.
The Automatic Parking Assistant is
▷ Park Distance Control, refer to page 241.
switched off automatically.
page 248. System limits
The driving out of a parking space function
Functional requirements may not be offered temporarily under certain
▷ The vehicle was parked manually and ob- environmental conditions. The system limits of
jects in front of and behind the car are de- the Park Distance Control and the Automatic
Parking Assistant continue to apply.
253
Back-up assistant ▷ Park Distance Control, refer to page 241.

page 248.
Principle
The Back-up Assistant supports the driver Functional requirements
when driving in reverse, for instance when
▷ Drive forward without interruption to store
driving out of tight or confusing parking or
the distance covered.
street situations.
▷ A maximum of 165 ft/50 m will be stored.
The vehicle stores the driving movements of
the last distance covered. This stored distance ▷ To save the distance covered, do not drive
covered can be driven back with automated faster than 22 mph/36 km/h.
steering. ▷ Dynamic Stability Control is activated.
General information Driving back with automated

The system takes control of the steering when steering
driving in reverse along the stored route. 1. Press the park assistance button or shift
The driver controls driving the vehicle via ac- into reverse gear when the vehicle is sta-
celerator pedal and brake. tionary and the drive-ready state is
The Back-up Assistant uses the operating ele- switched on.
ments and sensors of the Park Distance Con- 2. Move the Controller to the right.
trol and the Automatic Parking Assistant. 3. "Back-up Assistant"
Additional information: The system takes over the steering.
▷ Park Distance Control, refer to page 241. 4. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis-
▷ Automatic Parking Assistant, refer to play where required.
page 248. 5. Take your hands off the steering wheel and
carefully drive off using the accelerator
Safety information pedal and the brake.
When driving in reverse, pay attention to
Warning the vehicle's surroundings, and if you en-
counter an obstacle, stop immediately and
take over control of the vehicle. Follow the
instructions for Park Distance Control.
system, it cannot independently react to all 6. Stop no later than when normal road traffic
traffic situations. There is a risk of accident. is reached and take control of the vehicle,
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. such as by shifting to a forward gear.
Check surrounding traffic and vehicle's sur- At the end of the stored distance travelled,
roundings closely and actively intervene a signal will sound and a request will be
where appropriate. displayed, also with the instruction to take
control of the vehicle.
Distance Control and the Automatic Parking Aborting the system
Assistant apply.
The system automatically cancels in situations
Additional information: such as the following:
254
▷ When the driver grasps the steering wheel

or takes over steering.
Surround View
▷ When engaging a forward gear.
Principle
▷ During activation or intervention by driving
control systems or assist systems. The Surround View uses various vehicle cam-
eras, for instance, a rearview camera and front
▷ After a few minutes when the vehicle is sta- camera to assist with parking and maneuver-
tionary. ing. Depending on the view, the vehicle's sur-
▷ The vehicle leaves the stored lane when re- roundings or a part of it is depicted on the con-
versing, for instance at maximum steering trol display.
angle.
▷ The view on the control display is overlaid General information
with messages such as incoming calls. Several cameras capture the area from differ-
ent selectable perspectives.
System limits The following camera perspectives can be dis-
▷ When you reach normal road traffic or if you played:
encounter an obstacle, stop immediately ▷ The automatic camera perspective auto-
and take over control of the vehicle. matically shows the appropriate perspec-
▷ The maximum speed for driving in reverse tive according to the respective driving sit-
is limited to approximately 6 mph/9 km/h. uation.
If the maximum speed is exceeded, a warn- ▷ The rearview camera shows the areas be-
ing is issued and the function may be can- hind the vehicle.
celed. ▷ The flank view on the right and left shows
▷ After driving a stored distance covered with the areas on the sides of the vehicle.
major steering-wheel angles, the function ▷ The free camera perspective, which can be
of the system will be limited for the return moved via iDrive, shows defined perspec-
trip. tives on a circular path.
▷ In addition, the limits of the systems of the ▷ The Panorama View shows crossing traffic,
Park Distance Control and the Automatic depending on the gear currently engaged.
Parking Assistant apply.
Different influences can lead to side deviations Safety information
when driving back on the stored distance cov-
ered. For example, this includes the following
factors: Warning
▷ Steering movements when the vehicle is The system cannot serve as a substitute for
stationary while storing the distance cov- the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
ered. the traffic situation. Based on the limits of the
▷ The speed is not adapted to the distance
covered.
▷ Road characteristics, such as gradients or Check surrounding traffic and vehicle's sur-
inclines. roundings closely and actively intervene
where appropriate.
255
Overview ▷ On: the LED lights up.

▷ Off: the LED goes out.
Buttons in the vehicle Depending on the equipment version, the rear-
view camera cannot be switched off when the
reverse gear is engaged.
Automatic deactivation during forward

travel
The system switches off when a certain dis-
tance travelled or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on, if needed.
Park assistance button Display on the Control Display
Panorama View Overview
Sensors
sors:
▷ Front camera.
▷ Top view cameras.
▷ Rearview camera.
Additional information: 1 Toolbar, left
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 37. 2 Camera image
3 Side view
Turning on/off
4 Automatic camera perspective
Turning on automatically 5 Movable unobstructed camera perspective
The system is switched on automatically if se- 6 Toolbar, right

lector lever position R is engaged when the en- 7 Rearview camera
gine is running. 8 Selection window
The camera perspective suitable for the re-
spective driving situation is displayed.
Toolbar on the left
The left toolbar can be used for the direct se-
Park Distance Control, turn on/off, refer to lection of various views via iDrive. Move the
page 242. Controller to the left, if needed.
▷ "Parking": around the vehicle.
▷ "3D view": available camera.
▷ "Car wash".
256
Side view Toolbar on the right

The side view can be selected for the right or Assistance functions can be activated and set-
left vehicle side. tings can be entered via the right toolbar via
This view helps when positioning the vehicle at iDrive. Move the Controller to the right, if
the curb or with other obstacles on the side by needed.
displaying the side surroundings. ▷ "Autom. Parking".
The side view looks from rear to front and in ▷ "Back-up Assistant".
case of danger, focuses automatically on pos- ▷ "Camera image":
sible obstacles.
▷ "Brightness".
Automatic camera perspective ▷ "Contrast".
The automatic camera perspective shows a ▷ "Parking aid lines".

steering-dependent view in the respective driv- ▷ "Obstacle mark.".
ing direction. ▷ "Settings": apply settings, for instance
This perspective adapts to the respective driv- to use the activation points for Panorama
ing situation. View.
As soon as obstacles are detected, the view
changes to a fixed display of the area in front Rearview camera
or at the rear behind the bumper or, if neces- The rearview camera helps when reverse
sary, changes to a side view. parking and maneuvering. The area behind the
When reverse gear is engaged, the automatic vehicle is shown on the Control Display.
camera perspective is, if necessary, exited and
the system uses a fixed perspective of the Selection window
rearview camera. If necessary, manually select The individual camera perspectives can be se-
the automatic camera perspective when re- lected in the selection window via iDrive.
verse gear is engaged. The automatic camera
perspective will be retained for the current Parking aid lines
parking operation.
General information
Movable unobstructed camera
Additional assistance functions can be shown
perspective in the camera image on the control display.
With selection of the movable camera perspec- More than one assistance function can be ac-
tive, a circle appears on the Control Display. tive at the same time.
By turning the Controller or via touch function,
specified perspectives on the circle can be se-
lected.
The current perspective is marked with a cam-
era symbol.
To leave the function, move the Controller
sideways and select another camera function.
257
Pathway lines Parking using lanes and turning circle lines

1. Position the vehicle so that the red turning
circle line leads to within the limits of the
parking space.
2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where
the green pathway line covers the corre-
sponding turning circle line.
Obstacle marking
Pathway lines help you to estimate the space

required when parking and maneuvering on
level roads.
The pathway lines are continuously adjusted
to the steering wheel movements depending
on the steering-wheel angle.
Turning circle lines

Obstacles behind the vehicle are detected by
the Park Distance Control sensors.
Obstacle markings can be shown in the cam-
era image.
The colored steps of the obstacle markings
match the marks of the Park Distance Control.
Car wash view
Turning circle lines can only be superimposed

on the camera image together with pathway
lines.
Turning circle lines show the course of the
smallest possible turning radius on a level
road.
Only one turning circle line is displayed after
the steering wheel is turned past a certain an-
gle.
The car wash view assists when entering a car
wash by displaying the floor and the vehicle's
own track.
258
Side protection Display
Principle
The side Park Distance Control is automati-
cally displayed when the automatic camera
perspective is turned on. The function shows
obstacles located next to the vehicle.
Display
The maximum opening angle of the doors is

displayed in selector lever position P. As soon
as the vehicle begins moving, the opening an-
gles are replaced by parking aid lines.
Limits of the display

The vehicle's surroundings are displayed with
distorted image for technical reasons.
To protect the sides of the vehicle, obstacle
markings are displayed on the sides of the ve- Even if the symbols for the door opening an-
hicle. gles do not cross other objects on the Control
Display, the following needs to be noted when
▷ No marks: no obstacles were detected. parking next to other objects:
▷ Color marks: warning against detected ob- Because of the perspective, higher, protruding
stacles. objects may be closer than they appear on the
Control Display.
Limits of the side protection
The system only displays stationary obstacles Setting brightness and contrast
that were previously detected by sensors while Brightness and contrast can be adjusted with
passing them. Surround View or Panorama View switched on.
The system does not detect whether an obsta- 1. Move the Controller to the right, if needed.
cle moves later on. For this reason, at stand-
still, the marks are not shown anymore in the 2. "Camera image"
display after a certain time. The area next to 3. Select the desired setting.
the vehicle must be newly captured.
Door opening angle The system can be used only to a limited ex-
tent in the following situations:
Principle
▷ In poor light.
If obstacle marking is activated, the Surround
▷ In case of soiled cameras.
View indicates fixed obstacles that obstruct the
opening angles of the doors. ▷ With a door open.
The system does not provide a warning of ap- ▷ With the trunk lid open.
proaching road users. ▷ With exterior mirrors folded in.
259
Areas with gray hatching with an icon in the

camera image identify areas that are currently
Panorama View
not shown, such as an open door.
Principle
System limits

Non-visible areas
Because of the camera angle, the areas under
the vehicle cannot be viewed by the cameras.
Panorama View gives you an earlier view of
crossing traffic at blind driveway exits and in-
Detection of objects
tersections.
Very low obstacles as well as high, protruding
objects such as ledges may not be detected by
the system. General information
Some assistance functions also take into con- Road users concealed by obstacles to the left
sideration data from the Park Distance Control. and right of the vehicle can only be detected
relatively late from the driver's seat. The cam-
Follow the notes in the Park Distance Control
eras in the front and rear capture the side
chapter.
areas around the vehicle to improve the view.
The objects displayed on the Control Display
Yellow lines in the screen display mark the
may be closer than they appear. Do not esti-
front and rear end of the vehicle.
mate the distance from the objects on the dis-
play. The camera image shows different levels of
distortion in some areas and is thus not suita-
ble for distance estimations.
Park Distance Control, refer to page 241.
Depending on the equipment version, the
function can only be used when driving for-
Malfunction ward.
A camera failure is displayed on the Control
Display.
Surround View, refer to page 255.
A yellow icon is displayed and the de-
tection range of the malfunctioning
Safety information
camera is displayed in black on the
Control Display.
Warning
260
Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Cross traffic warning, refer to page 262.
roundings closely and actively intervene With navigation system: activation
where appropriate. points
Principle
Overview
Positions where Panorama View should switch
Button in the vehicle on automatically can be stored as activation
points provided that a Global Positioning Sys-
tem signal is received.
General information
Up to ten activation points can be stored.
Activation points can be used when driving for-
ward for the front camera.
Storing activation points

1. Drive to the position at which the system is
Panorama View
to be switched on, and stop.

Sensors
sors: 4. "Activation point"
▷ Front camera. The current position is displayed.
▷ Depending on the equipment: rearview 5. "Save activation point"
camera. Activation points are stored with one of the fol-
Additional information: lowing pieces of information if possible:
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 37. ▷ With the city/town.
▷ With the city/town and the street.
Display on the Control Display ▷ With the GPS coordinates.
Press the button when the engine is run-
ning. Using activation points
The use of activation points can be switched
Depending on the driving direction, the image on and off.
of the respective camera is displayed:
▷ "Front": front camera image. 1. Press the button.
▷ "Rear": rear camera image. 2. Tilt the Controller to the right.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, cross 3. "Settings"
traffic warning can additionally warn of ap-
proaching vehicles using radar sensors. 4. "Panorama View, GPS-based"
Additional information: 5. "Panorama View is displayed automatically

when set activation points are reached."
261
Displaying activation points General information

3. "Manage points"
A list of all activation points is displayed.
Renaming or deleting activation points

2. Tilt the Controller to the right. Two radar sensors in the rear bumper monitor
the area behind the vehicle.
3. "Manage points"
The system indicates approaching road users.
A list of all activation points is displayed.
4. Select an activation point as needed. Depending on the vehicle equipment, the area
5. Select the desired setting. around the vehicle in front of the vehicle is
monitored as well. Two additional radar sen-
sors are located in the front bumpers.
The Surround View functional limitations ap- Safety information
ply.
Warning
Surround View, refer to page 255.
System limits
The limits of the Surround View system apply. system, it cannot independently react to all
Additional information: traffic situations. There is a risk of accident.
Surround View, refer to page 255. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions.
Cross traffic warning braking at any time, and actively intervene
where appropriate.
Principle
At blind driveway exits or when driving out of
perpendicular parking spaces, road users ap-
proaching from the side are detected sooner
by the cross traffic warning than is possible
from the driver's seat.
262
Overview 5. "Cross traffic warning"

6. "Cross traffic warning"
Button in the vehicle
Turning on automatically
If the system was activated on the control dis-
play, it will automatically be turned on as soon
as the Park Distance Control or the Panorama
View is active and a gear is engaged.
If reverse gear is engaged, the rear system is
switched on.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the front
system is switched on when a forward gear is
Park assistance button engaged.
Switching off automatically

Sensors The system is automatically switched off in the
The system is controlled by the following sen- following situations:
sors: ▷ When the speed exceeds walking speed.
▷ Radar sensors, side, rear. ▷ When a certain distance travelled is ex-
▷ Depending on the equipment: radar sen- ceeded.
sors, side, front. ▷ With an active parking operation of the Au-
Additional information: tomatic Parking Assistant.
Warning
Turning on/off
General information
Activating/deactivating the system The respective display is called up on the Con-
trol Display. A signal tone may sound and the
With the button light in the exterior mirror may flash.
1. Press the park assistance button.

3. "Settings"
Via iDrive
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
263
Light in the exterior mirror Yellow lines, arrow 2, mark the bumper of your
own vehicle.
Acoustic warning
In addition to the optical indicator, a warning
signal sounds if your own vehicle moves into
the respective direction.
System limits
The light in the exterior mirror flashes if vehi- System limits of the sensors
cles are detected by the rear sensors and your Additional information:
own vehicle is moving in reverse.
Display in the Park Distance Control Functional limitations

view The system may be limited in the following sit-
uations:
▷ Crossing objects are moving at a very slow
or a very fast speed.
▷ Other objects that hide cross traffic are in
the capture range of the sensors.
Remote 3D View
In the Park Distance Control view, the respec-
tive boundary area flashes red if vehicles are
detected by the sensors. Principle
The BMW app and the pictures of the Sur-
round View cameras in combination with the
Display in the camera view
corresponding equipment enable the display of
the vehicle’s surroundings on a mobile device.
The function displays a snapshot of the situa-
tion.
Sensors
sors:
▷ Front camera.
The respective boundary area, arrow 1, in the ▷ Top view cameras.
camera view flashes red, if vehicles are de- ▷ Rearview camera.
tected by the sensors. Additional information:
264
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 37. System limits of the sensors
▷ Data transfer must be activated.
Data protection, refer to page 69. Functional limitations
▷ The BMW app must be installed on the mo- The system may not be fully functional or may
bile end device. not be available in the following situations:
▷ ConnectedDrive countries: a driver profile ▷ With a door or the trunk lid open. Dark fields
with an existing ConnectedDrive account in the display indicate areas that are not re-
must be activated. corded by the system.
Driver profiles, refer to page 70. ▷ With manually folded in exterior mirrors.
▷ When other camera functions are being
Switching the function on/off performed in the vehicle.
▷ The vehicle moves faster than walking
Switching on/off with other functions
speed.
1. "CAR"
▷ It may not be possible to use the function in
2. "Settings" every country.
3. "General settings" ▷ For reasons of data protection, the function
4. "Data privacy" can only be used three times within two
5. Select the desired setting. hours.
Switching on/off individually
Pre-adjustment
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
4. "Data privacy"
5. "Select services individually"
6. "My BMW app & customer portal"
7. "Remote 3D View"
Turning on/off
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
4. "Data privacy"
5. "Individual selection"
265
CONTROLS Driving comfort
Driving comfort
Vehicle features and options as, depending on the equipment, the selected
driving mode.
This chapter describes all standard, country- Additional information:
specific and optional features offered with the Driving Dynamics Control, refer to page 135.
cle, e.g., due to the selected options or country Active roll stabilization
Principle
and regulations must be observed. Active roll stabilization reduces the roll ten-
dency of the body that occurs during rapid cor-
nering or during quick evasive maneuvers.
Chassis components
General information
The chassis components are optimized for the The roll tendency of the vehicle is balanced out
vehicle and its application range and thereby by permanent adjustment on the front and rear
ensure the best possible Driving Dynamics. axles. The vehicle is thus always stabilized.
Agility and driving comfort are increased under
Adaptive M suspension all driving conditions.
Setting
Principle
The system offers different settings ranging
The adaptive suspension is an intelligent con- from comfortable travel to sporty driving.
trollable suspension.
The settings are assigned to the different driv-
The chassis reduces body movements with a ing modes of the Driving Dynamics Control.
sporty driving style or on an uneven road.
General information Driving Dynamics Control, refer to page 135.
The intelligent control of the chassis increases

the driving dynamics and driving comfort de- Adaptive M Suspension
pending on the road condition and driving
style. Professional
Setting Principle
The system offers different shock absorber The Adaptive M Chassis Professional is an ac-
settings ranging from comfortable travel to tively controlled sport chassis/suspension. The
sporty driving. system increases driving comfort and mini-
The shock absorbers are adjusted depending mizes the roll tendency when cornering.
on the road condition and driving style as well
266
Driving comfort CONTROLS
The Adaptive M Chassis Professional encom-

passes the following systems:
▷ Low-lying sport chassis.
▷ Adaptive M chassis.
▷ Active roll stabilization.
General information
For active control, this system uses the availa-
ble information, for instance from the naviga-
tion system or the Driving style analysis.
This information influences the control of the
following systems, especially in ADAPTIVE
driving mode:
▷ Adaptive suspension.
▷ Active roll stabilization.
▷ Integral Active Steering.
This further increases the agility and comfort
of the vehicle.
The function may be restricted if the navigation
data is invalid, outdated or not available,
for example.
Performance Control
Performance Control enhances the agility of
the vehicle.
To increase maneuverability, wheels are
braked individually when a sporty driving style
is used.
Engine sound
market version, you may be able to configure
the sound of the engine.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
4. "Engine sound"
267
CONTROLS Climate control
Climate control
Vehicle features and options The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
having the interior filter changed during vehicle
maintenance.
Automatic climate control
versions. This also applies to safety-related Overview
functions and systems, the applicable laws Buttons in the vehicle
Air quality
General information
The air quality in the interior is improved by the
following components:
▷ Emission tested passenger compartment.
▷ Interior filter.
Climate control functions
▷ Air conditioning system to control the tem-
perature, air flow and recirculated-air Button Function
mode.
Temperature.
▷ Pre-ventilation.
▷ Automatic recirculated-air control.
Maximum cooling.
Interior filter
The interior filter cleans the incoming fresh air AUTO program.
or the circulated interior air in recirculation
mode. Air recirculation mode.
Depending on the equipment:
▷ Dust and pollen is filtered out from the in- Air flow, manual.
flowing air. Intensity AUTO program.
▷ Nano-particle emissions are reduced.
Air distribution, manual.
▷ Gaseous pollutants are filtered.
▷ Microbial particles, viruses and allergens
Defrost function.
are filtered.
268
Climate control CONTROLS
Button Function ▷ Maximum cooling.

▷ AUTO program.
Rear window defroster.
▷ Air recirculation mode.
▷ Upper side of the air flow, manual button.
Depending on the equipment:
▷ Air distribution, manual.
Seat and armrest heating, refer
▷ Defrosting the windshield
to page 122.
or Turning off
Active seat ventilation, refer to Complete system:
page 123. ▷ Button on the driver's side:
Air conditioning. Press and hold the button until the
integrated automatic climate con-
Open Climate menu, such as
trol switches off.
for the following settings: up-
per body temperature adjust- ▷ Button on the passenger's side:
ment, pre-ventilation. Press and hold the bottom button.
Some of the functions can also be used via

voice, e.g., temperature. Temperature
Opening the Climate menu Principle

Press the button on the upper side. The automatic climate control cools or heats to
the configured temperature and then keeps
the temperature constant.
The Climate menu is displayed.
For example, the following climate control Setting the temperature
functions can be accessed via the Climate
Using the button:
menu:
▷ Air quality. Press the upper or lower button side
to set the desired temperature.
▷ Heating/ventilation.
▷ Pre-ventilation/heating Via iDrive:
Individual settings can be entered for some of 1. "CAR"
the climate functions, e.g., switching on/off, in-
2. "Settings"
tensity.
Switching climate control functions 4. "Heating/ventilation"
on/off 5. "Driver" or "Front passenger"
6. "Temperature:"
Turning on 7. Set the desired temperature.
Press one of the following buttons: 8. "OK"
▷ Temperature. Do not rapidly change between different tem-
▷ Climate/air conditioning menu perature settings. Otherwise, the automatic cli-
269
mate control will not have sufficient time to ad- Via iDrive:
just the set temperature.
1. "CAR"
Temperature of the ventilation 2. "Settings"

General information 4. "Heating/ventilation"
The temperature of the ventilation in the upper 5. "A/C"
body area can be adjusted. Depending on the weather, the windshield and
The air flow of the ventilation in the upper body the side windows may fog up briefly when
area heats or cools noticeably, depending on drive-ready state is switched on.
the adjusted temperature. Air conditioning is switched on automatically
This does not change the set interior tempera- with the AUTO program.
ture for the driver and front passenger. When using the cooling mode, condensation
that will exit below the vehicle.
Adjust temperature of the ventilation
1. "CAR" Maximum cooling
2. "Settings"
3. "Climate control" Principle
4. "Heating/ventilation" The system is set to the lowest temperature,
optimum air flow and recirculated-air mode
5. "Driver" or "Front passenger"
with the drive-ready state switched on.
6. "Temperature adjustment"
7. Set the desired temperature. Functional requirement
The temperature is individually adjusted, e.g. The function is available at an outside temper-
colder toward blue, warmer toward red. ature above approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ and with the
drive-ready state switched on.
Air conditioning
Switching maximum cooling on/off
Principle Press the button.
The air in the interior will be cooled and dehu- The LED is illuminated when maxi-
midified and, depending on the temperature mum cooling is switched on.
setting, warmed again.
Air flows out of the air vents to the upper body
Functional requirement area. The air vents need to be open for this.
The interior can only be cooled with the drive- The air flow can be adjusted with the program
ready state switched on. active.
Switch air conditioning on/off AUTO program

Using the button:
Principle
Press the button on the lower side.
The AUTO program cools, ventilates or heats
the car's interior automatically.
270
The air distribution and the temperature are Via iDrive:

controlled automatically depending on the in-
1. "CAR"
terior temperature and the desired tempera-
ture setting including the selected intensity of 2. "Settings"
the air flow. 3. "Climate control"
4. "Heating/ventilation"
Switching the AUTO program on/off
Using the button:
6. "Level"
Press the button. 7. Set the desired intensity.
The LED of the button is illuminated The selected intensity is shown on the climate
with the AUTO program switched on. control display.
Via iDrive:
Automatic recirculated-air control
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings" Principle
3. "Climate control" The automatic recirculated-air control recog-
4. "Heating/ventilation" nizes pollutants in the outside air. The outside
air supply is shut off and the interior air is recir-
culated.
6. "Automatic"
Depending on the selected settings and out- General information
side influences, the air is directed to the wind- If the system is activated, a sensor detects pol-
shield, side windows, upper body, and into the lutants in the outside air and controls the shut-
footwell. off automatically.
Point the side air vents toward the side win- If the system is deactivated, outside air contin-
dows. uously flows into the interior.
The air conditioning is switched on with the With constant air recirculation mode, the air
AUTO program. quality in the interior deteriorates and window
At the same time, a condensation sensor con- fogging increases.
trols the program so as to prevent window If there is window condensation, switch off re-
condensation as much as possible. circulated-air mode or defog the windows.
The AUTO program is switched off automati-
cally, when manual air distribution is set. Switching automatic recirculated-air
control on/off
Adjusting the intensity of the air flow
1. "CAR"
With the AUTO program switched on, the in-
2. "Settings"
tensity can be adjusted. This changes the au-
tomatic control for the air mass. 3. "Climate control"
Using the button: 4. "Air quality"

5. "Automatic"
Press the lower or upper side of the
button: decrease or increase intensity.
271
Air recirculation mode General information

To adjust the air flow manually switch off
Principle AUTO program first.
You may react to unpleasant odors or pollu-
tants in the immediate environment by tempo- Adjusting the air flow manually
rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The Press the lower or upper side of the
system then recirculates the interior air. button: decrease or increase air flow.
When recirculated-air mode is switched off,
fresh air is directed into the vehicle's interior. The selected air flow is shown on the climate
control display.
Switch air recirculation on/off The air flow may be reduced to preserve the
Using the button: vehicle battery.
Press the button.

Manual air distribution
The LED of the button is illuminated
when the air-recirculation mode is switched Principle
on.
The air distribution for climate control can be
Via iDrive: adjusted manually.
1. "CAR" Adjusting the air distribution manually

2. "Settings"
Press the button repeatedly. Select
3. "Climate control" the desired setting:
4. "Air quality"
▷ Windows, upper body area, and footwell.
▷ Upper body area and footwell.
▷ "Air recirculation"
▷ Footwell.
▷ "Fresh air"
▷ Windows and footwell.
To prevent window condensation, recirculated-
air mode switches off automatically after a cer- ▷ Windows.
tain amount of time, depending on the envi- ▷ Windows and upper body area.
ronmental conditions. ▷ Upper body area.
With constant air recirculation mode, the air The selected air distribution is shown on the
quality in the interior deteriorates and window climate control display.
fogging increases.
If there is window condensation, switch off re- SYNC program
circulated-air mode or defog the windows.
Principle
Air flow, manual The Sync program can be used to apply the
settings on the driver's side to the passenger’s
Principle side.
The air flow for climate control can be adjusted
manually.
272
Switching the SYNC program on/off Functional requirement

1. "CAR" The function is operational when the drive-
2. "Settings" ready state is switched on.
Switching rear window defroster on/off
4. "Synchronize"
Press the button. The LED is illumi-
The following settings of the driver's side can
nated with rear window defroster
be transferred to the passenger's side:
switched on.
▷ Temperature.
The rear window defroster switches off auto-
▷ Air flow. matically after a certain period of time.
▷ Air distribution.
▷ AUTO program.
The program is switched off automatically if Ventilation
the settings on the front passenger side are
changed. Principle
The air flow directions can be adjusted individ-
Defrost function ually for direct or indirect ventilation.
Principle Setting the ventilation

Ice and condensation are quickly removed
from the windshield and the front side win- General information
dows.
Open the air vents and position them to ensure
effective climate control.
Switching the Defrost function on/off
Press the button. Direct ventilation
The LED of the button is illuminated The air flow is directed towards the passen-
when the system is switched on. gers. The air flow heats or cools noticeably,
depending on the adjusted temperature.
The air flow can be adjusted manually with the
system switched on.
Indirect ventilation
If there is window condensation, switch on the
The air flow is not directed towards the pas-
AUTO program or the air conditioning to utilize
sengers. The vehicle interior is warmed or
the condensation sensor. Make sure that air
cooled indirectly, depending on the set tem-
can flow to the windshield.
perature.
Rear window defroster
Principle
Ice and condensation are removed from the
rear window quickly.
273
Front ventilation again after the engine is started or after a

short trip.
▷ Make sure that the vehicle's date and time
are set correctly.
▷ Open the air vents to allow air to flow out.
Switching on/off directly
General information
There are different ways to switch the system
▷ Lever for changing the airflow direction, ar- on or off.
row 1. The system switches off automatically after a
▷ Thumbwheel for variable opening and clos- certain period of time. The system continues to
ing of the air vents, arrow 2. run for some time after being switched off.
Using the button

Pre-ventilation
When the vehicle is in standby state, the pre-
Principle ventilation can be switched on or off with the
The car's interior can be cooled or heated be- automatic climate control buttons.
fore driving off with the pre-ventilation. De-
pending on set temperature and ambient tem- Turning on
perature, the car's interior is ventilated or
Press one of the following buttons:
possibly heated using the residual engine heat.
▷ Temperature.
General information ▷ Air conditioning.
The system can be switched on and off directly ▷ Maximum cooling.
or via a preset departure time. ▷ AUTO program.
The activation time is determined based on the ▷ Air recirculation mode.
outside temperature. The system promptly ▷ Upper side of the air flow, manual button.
switches on before the selected departure
time. ▷ Air distribution, manual.
▷ Defrosting the windshield
Turning off
▷ The vehicle is in idle state or standby state
and not in drive-ready state. Press and hold the bottom button.
▷ The vehicle battery is sufficiently charged.
If pre-ventilation is switched on, the vehicle The system switches off after leaving and lock-
battery will be discharged. Thus, limit the ing the vehicle.
maximum activation time to save the vehi-
cle battery. The system will be available
274
Via iDrive ▷ One-time departure time: the time can be

set.
Turning on The system is switched on once.
1. "CAR" ▷ Departure time with weekday: time and day
2. "Settings" of the week can be set.
3. "Climate control" On the desired weekdays, the system will
4. "Pre-ventilation" be switched on before the set departure
time.
5. "Start now"
The departure time is preselected in two steps:
Via BMW display key ▷ Set departure times.
▷ Activate departure times.
Turning on A minimum of 10 minutes should pass be-
1. Switch on the display of the BMW display tween setting/activating the departure time
key. and the planned departure time to allow a suf-
2. "Preconditioning setting" ficient period of time for the climate control.
3. Tap the icon or the icon.
Setting the departure time
4. "Activate now"
5. "Start" Via iDrive
1. "CAR"
Turning off
2. "Settings"
1. Switch on the display of the BMW display
key. 3. "Climate control"
2. "Preconditioning setting" 4. "Pre-ventilation"
3. Tap the icon or the icon. 5. "Departure plan"
4. "Stop" 6. Select the desired departure time.

7. Set the departure time.
Display 8. Select day of the week, if needed.
9. "OK"
Icon Description
Symbol on the climate con- Via BMW display key

trol display. 1. Switch on the display of the BMW display
Flashing: the pre-ventila- key.
tion is switched on. 2. "Preconditioning setting"
3. Tap the icon or the icon.
Departure time 4. Select the desired departure time.
5. Set the departure time.
Principle
6. Select day of the week, if needed.
Different departure times can be set to ensure
7. "OK"
a comfortable interior temperature in the vehi-
cle at the time of departure.
275
Activating the departure time Safety information

DANGER
To switch on the parked-car ventilation auto-
matically at the departure time, the departure If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventilation is
time must be activated first. insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can pol-
lute the area in and around the vehicle or
Via iDrive penetrate the vehicle. The exhaust gases
contain pollutants which are colorless and
1. "CAR"
odorless. In enclosed areas or areas with in-
2. "Settings" sufficient ventilation, exhaust gases can also
3. "Climate control" accumulate outside of the vehicle. There is a
4. "Pre-ventilation" danger to life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and
ensure sufficient ventilation. Do not switch on
5. "Departure plan" stationary climate control in enclosed areas
6. Activate the desired departure time. or areas with insufficient ventilation, e.g. in
enclosed garages.
Via BMW display key
key. Warning
2. "Preconditioning setting" When stationary climate control is in opera-
3. Tap the icon or the icon. tion, high temperatures can occur under-
4. Tap on the icon. neath the body, for instance caused by the
exhaust system. If combustible materials,
5. Activate the desired departure time.
such as leaves or grass, come in contact with
hot parts of the exhaust system, these mate-
Display rials can ignite. There is a risk of fire. Make
, Symbol on the climate control display sure that no combustible materials can come
signals an activated departure time. in contact with hot vehicle parts during sta-
tionary climate control operation, e.g. leaves,
grass, gas, gasoline, oil or other combustible
Pre-conditioning through objects.
Remote Engine Start
Principle ▷ The vehicle is in idle state or standby state
Pre-conditioning cools or heats the car's inte- and not in drive-ready state.
rior prior to start of the trip to a comfortable ▷ Battery is sufficiently charged.
temperature. The system automatically cools,
vents, and heats depending on the interior, ex- ▷ For reasons of safety, the system can only
ternal, and set temperature. Snow and ice may be switched on twice consecutively. The
be removed more easily. system will be available again as soon as
the drive-ready state is activated and deac-
The system starts the engine automatically tivated again.
and allows it to run for a limited period of time.
▷ The fuel tank capacity is sufficient.
276
▷ Hood is closed. Press the button on the vehicle key three

▷ Make sure that the vehicle's date and time times within 1 second.
are set correctly. After operating the vehicle key, it will take ap-
▷ Air vents are opened. proximately 3 seconds until the engine is
switched on.
Enabling the automatic engine start To switch off the system, press the button
function again three times.
The automatic engine start must be enabled
once before using the system. Otherwise, the Switching on via BMW display key
engine cannot switch on automatically to cli- 1. Switch on the display of the BMW display
matize the car's interior. key.
Via iDrive: 2. "Preconditioning setting"
1. "CAR" 3. Tap on the icon.
2. "Settings" 4. "Activate now"
3. "Climate control" 5. "Start"
4. "Preconditioning/ventilation"
Switching off via BMW display key
5. "Remote Engine Start"
6. "Starting engine for clim. control"
key.
7. Confirm the disclaimer.
2. "Preconditioning setting"
3. Tap on the icon.
Switching on/off directly
4. "Stop"
General information
Switching off with the Start/Stop
The system switches off automatically after
approx. 15 minutes. button
For reasons of safety, the system can only be The system can be switched off directly as fol-
switched on twice consecutively. The system lows: pressing the Start/Stop button, without
will be available again as soon as the drive- operating the brake pedal.
ready state is activated and deactivated again.
Switching on via departure time
Switching on via iDrive
General information
1. "CAR"
Scheduled departure times can be set up in
2. "Settings"
the system to ensure a comfortable interior
3. "Climate control" temperature in the vehicle at the time of depar-
4. "Preconditioning/ventilation" ture.
5. "Start now" ▷ One-time departure time: the time of the
scheduled departure can be set.
Switching on/off via vehicle key
The system can be switched on and off using
the vehicle key.
277
The system is switched on once. 4. Select the desired departure time.

▷ Departure time with weekday: time and day 5. Set the departure time.
of the week of the scheduled departure can 6. Select day of the week, if needed.
be set.
7. "OK"
The departure time is preselected in two steps:
▷ Set departure times. Activating the departure time via iDrive
▷ Activate departure times. 1. "CAR"
The climate control function will start approxi- 2. "Settings"
mately 10 minutes before the set departure 3. "Climate control"
time and continue for approximately 5 more
minutes after the departure time. 4. "Preconditioning/ventilation"
A minimum of 10 minutes should pass be- 5. "Departure plan"

tween setting/activating the departure time 6. Activate the desired departure time.
and the planned departure time to allow a suf-
ficient period of time for the climate control. Activating the departure time via BMW
For reasons of safety, the system can only be display key
switched on once. The system will be available 1. Switch on the display of the BMW display
again as soon as the drive-ready state is acti- key.
vated and deactivated again. 2. "Preconditioning setting"
Observe the information about the intended 3. Tap on the icon.
use of the vehicle.
4. Activating the desired departure time:
Tap on the icon.
For Your Own Safety, refer to page 8.
Display
Adjusting the departure time via iDrive
1. "CAR" In the instrument cluster:
2. "Settings" The engine runs for the purpose

of operating the pre-condition-
3. "Climate control" ing. The vehicle is not ready to
4. "Preconditioning/ventilation" drive.
5. "Departure plan"
The icon on the automatic climate con-
6. Select the desired departure time. trol signals an activated departure time.
7. Set the departure time. The icon flashes while Remote Engine Start
8. Select day of the week, if needed. is running.
Adjusting the departure time via BMW Confirmation signals from the
display key vehicle
1. Switch on the display of the BMW display The activation of the system is confirmed by
key. flashing twice.
2. "Preconditioning setting" The parking lights are switched on as long as
3. Tap on the icon. the system is switched on.
278
Interior equipment CONTROLS
Interior equipment
This chapter describes all standard, country- Warning

The operation of remote-controlled systems
with the integrated universal remote control,
such as the garage door, may result in injury,
for example, body parts becoming jammed in
a garage door. There is a risk of injury or risk
of damage to property. Make sure that the
travel path of the respective system is clear
during programming and operation. Also fol-
low the safety information for the hand-held
Integrated Universal transmitter.
Remote Control
Compatibility
Principle If this symbol is printed on the packag-
The integrated Universal Remote Control in ing or in the operating instructions of
the interior mirror can operate up to 3 functions the system to be controlled, the system
of remote-controlled systems such as garage is generally compatible with the integrated
door drives, barriers, or lighting systems. Universal Remote Control.
Additional questions are answered by:
General information ▷ A dealer's service center or another quali-
The Integrated Universal Remote Control re- fied service center or repair shop.
places up to 3 different hand-held transmitters. ▷ www.homelink.com on the Internet.
To operate the remote control, the buttons on
the interior mirror must be programmed with HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gentex
the desired functions. The hand-held transmit- Corporation.
ter for the particular system is required in order
to program the remote control.
Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored
functions for the sake of security.
If possible, do not install the antenna of the re-
mote-controlled system, e.g. the garage door
drive, near metal objects to ensure the best
possible operation.
279
CONTROLS Interior equipment
Control elements on the interior Canada: if programming with the hand-held

mirror transmitter was interrupted, hold down the
interior mirror button and repeatedly press
and release the hand-held transmitter but-
ton for 2 seconds.
6. ▷ The LED lights up green: programming
completed.
Release the button.
▷ The LED flashes fast: programming is
not complete.
Press the button on the interior mirror
▷ Buttons, arrow 1. for 2 seconds and release. Perform this
procedure three times to complete the
▷ LED, arrow 2.
programming procedure.
▷ The hand-held transmitter, arrow 3, is re-
If the integrated universal remote con-
quired for programming.
trol remains nonoperational, continue
with the special features for change
Programming code wireless systems.
▷ LED does not flash green after 60 sec-
General information onds: programming not completed.
The battery of the hand-held transmitter must Repeat steps 3 to 6.
be fully charged at the time of programming to To program other functions on other buttons,
ensure an optimal range of the integrated uni- repeat steps 3 to 5.
versal remote control.
1. Turn on standby state. Special feature of the rolling code
2. Initial commissioning: wireless system
Press and hold the two outer buttons on If you are unable to operate the remote-con-
the interior mirror simultaneously for ap- trolled system after repeated programming,
proximately 10 seconds until the LED please check if the system to be controlled fea-
flashes green rapidly. This erases all pro- tures a rolling code radio system.
gramming of the buttons on the interior Refer to the operating instructions for the sys-
mirror. tem.
3. Press the interior mirror button to be pro- For systems with a rolling code radio system,
grammed. The LED on the interior mirror the integrated Universal Remote Control and
will slowly begin flashing orange. the system also have to be synchronized.
4. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the sys- Please read the operating instructions to find
tem to be used approx. 1 to 12 in/2.5 to out how to synchronize the system.
30 cm away from the buttons on the inte- Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a sec-
rior mirror. The required distance depends ond person.
on the hand-held transmitter.
5. Press and hold the button of the desired
function on the hand-held transmitter.
280
Synchronizing the universal remote control Release the button.

with the system: ▷ The LED flashes fast: the hand-held
1. Park the vehicle within range of the remote- transmitter was detected but program-
controlled system. ming is not complete.
2. Program the relevant button on the interior Press the button on the interior mirror
mirror as described. for 2 seconds and release. Perform this
procedure three times to complete the
3. Locate and press the synchronizing button
programming procedure.
on the system being programmed, e.g. at
the garage gate. You have approx. 30 sec- If the integrated universal remote con-
onds for the next step. trol remains nonoperational, continue
with the special features for change
4. Hold down the programmed button on the
code wireless systems.
interior mirror for approximately 3 seconds
and then release it. If necessary, repeat this ▷ LED does not flash green after 60 sec-
step up to three times in order to end syn- onds: programming not completed.
chronization. Once synchronization is com- Repeat steps 3 to 6.
plete, the programmed function will be car- If the programming procedure is not com-
ried out. pleted, the previous programming will remain
unchanged.
Reprogramming individual buttons
1. Turn on standby state. Operation
2. Press and hold the interior mirror button to
be programmed. Warning
3. As soon as the LED on the interior mirror The operation of remote-controlled systems
flashes orange after approx. 20 seconds, with the integrated universal remote control,
release the button. such as the garage door, may result in injury,
4. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the sys- for example, body parts becoming jammed in
tem to be used approx. 1 to 12 in/2.5 to a garage door. There is a risk of injury or risk
30 cm away from the buttons on the inte- of damage to property. Make sure that the
rior mirror. The required distance depends travel path of the respective system is clear
on the hand-held transmitter. during programming and operation. Also fol-
5. Press and hold the button of the desired low the safety information for the hand-held
function on the hand-held transmitter. transmitter.
Canada: if programming with the hand-held
The system, such as the garage door, can be
transmitter was interrupted, hold down the
operated using the button on the interior mirror
interior mirror button and repeatedly press
while the drive-ready or standby state is
and release the hand-held transmitter but-
switched on. To do this, hold down the button
ton for 2 seconds.
within receiving range of the system until the
6. The LED can light up in different ways. function is activated. The interior mirror LED
▷ The LED lights up green: the program- stays lit while the wireless signal is being
ming procedure is completed. transmitted.
281
Deleting stored functions Ashtray

All stored functions will be deleted. The func-
tions cannot be deleted individually.
Front center console
Press and hold the two outer buttons on the
interior mirror simultaneously for approxi- Opening
mately 10 seconds until the LED on the interior
1. Press onto the cover.
mirror flashes green fast.
Sun visor
Glare shield
Fold the sun visor down or up.
Glare shield from the side

2. The ashtray is located in a cup holder. Fold
Folding out
the ashtray cover upward.
1. Fold the sun visor down.
2. Detach it from the holder and swing it to-
ward the side window.
Folding in
Proceed in the reverse order to close the sun
visor.
Vanity mirror
A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor be-
hind a cover. When the cover is opened, the
mirror lighting switches on.
282
Emptying dle. Make sure that children do not use the

1. Pull the ashtray with the closed cover out of cigarette lighter.
the cup holder.
NOTICE
If metal objects fall into the socket, they can
cause a short circuit. There is a risk of dam-
age to property, among other potential dam-
age. Insert the cigarette lighter or socket
cover again after using the socket.
Front center console

2. Turn the lid counterclockwise to open it.
Press onto the cover.

3. Empty the container.
Always empty the ashtray with the con-
tainer open to prevent contamination of the
lid.
Cigarette lighter
Safety information
The cigarette lighter is located between the

Warning cup holders.
Contact with the hot heating element or the
hot socket of the cigarette lighter can cause
burns. Flammable materials can ignite if the Operation
cigarette lighter falls down or is held against Push in the cigarette lighter.
the objects. There is a risk of fire and an in-
The cigarette lighter can be re-
jury hazard. There is a risk of damage to
moved as soon as it pops back
property, among other potential damage.
out.
Take hold of the cigarette lighter by its han-
283
Sockets
NOTICE
If metal objects fall into the socket, they can
Principle
cause a short circuit. There is a risk of dam-
The socket can be used for electronic devices age to property, among other potential dam-
when the standby or drive-ready state is age. Insert the cigarette lighter or socket
switched on. cover again after using the socket.
General information
The total load of all sockets must not exceed Front center armrest
140 watts at 12 volts.
Do not damage the socket by using unsuitable
connectors.
Safety information
Warning
Devices and cables in the unfolding area of
the airbags, such as portable navigation devi- The center armrest contains a socket.
ces, can hinder the unfolding of the airbag or
be thrown around in the car's interior during
unfolding. There is a risk of injury. Make sure Front center console
that devices and cables are not in the air-
bag's area of unfolding.
NOTICE
Battery chargers that charge the vehicle bat-
tery via sockets or cigarette lighters in the ve-
hicle may overload or damage the 12 V elec-
trical system. There is a risk of damage to
property, among other potential damage. Press onto the cover.
Only connect battery chargers for the vehicle
battery to the jump-start terminals in the en-
gine compartment.
A socket is located between the cup holders.
284
Detach the cover.
USB port
General information
Follow the information regarding the connec-
tion of mobile devices to the USB port in the
section on USB connections. Press onto the cover.
USB connections, refer to page 82.
In the center armrest
A USB port is located in the center console.
Properties:
▷ USB port Type A.
A USB port is located in the center armrest. ▷ For charging mobile devices and for data
Properties: transfer.
▷ USB port Type C. ▷ Charge current: max. 1.5 A.
▷ For charging of mobile devices.
▷ Charge current: max. 3 A. Wireless charging tray
In the center console Principle
The wireless charging tray allows wireless
NOTICE charging of mobile phones and other mobile
devices certified according to the Qi standard.
Objects in the storage compartment, e.g.,
large USB connectors, may block or damage
the cover when it is being opened or closed. General information
There is a risk of damage to property, among When inserting the device to be charged, en-
other potential damage. Make sure that the sure that there are no objects between the de-
area of movement of the cover is clear while vice to be charged and the wireless charging
opening and closing it. tray.
The charging process is shown by the
charge indicator on the control display.
285
NOTE
This device has been tested for human expo-
sure limits and found compliant at a minimum
distance of 2 in/5 cm during operation.
Therefore, a distance of 4 in/10 cm must be
maintained in every direction when operating
the device.
1 LED
2 Storage area
▷ The device to be charged must be certified
according to the Qi standard.
Mounting position of the product.
▷ The mobile phone must not exceed the
maximum size of approximately 6.0 x 3.1 x
Safety information 0.7 in/154.5 x 80 x 18 mm.
▷ Use only protective sleeves and covers up
to a maximum thickness of 0.07 in/2 mm;
Warning
otherwise, the charging function may be
When charging a device that meets the Qi impaired.
standard in the wireless charging tray, any
▷ The mobile phone to be charged is located
metal objects located between the device
in the center of the tray. The mobile phone
and the tray can become very hot. Placing
display is pointing upwards.
storage devices or electronic cards, such as
chip cards, cards with magnetic strips or
cards for signal transmission, between the Inserting the mobile phone
device and the tray may impair the card func- 1. Open the tray cover.
tion. There is a risk of injury and risk of dam- 2. Place the mobile phone centered in the tray
age to property. When charging mobile devi- with the display facing up.
ces, make sure there are no objects between
3. Close the tray cover.
the device and the tray.
Overview
Tray in the center console:
286
LED displays ▷ Due to excessive temperatures on the sur-

face of the tray and mobile phone.
Color Meaning ▷ If there are objects between the mobile
phone and the wireless charging tray.
Blue The mobile phone is charging.
▷ By settings on the mobile phone, for in-
The blue LED stays illuminated once
stance for charging. Follow the relevant in-
the inserted mobile phone with Qi
structions control display and in the instruc-
capability is fully charged.
tions for the mobile phone, if applicable.
Or- The mobile phone is not charging.
ange Temperature on the mobile phone LTE-Compensator - Information
possibly too high or foreign object in and User Manual
charging tray. Your car is equipped with a wireless charging
Red The mobile phone is not charging. tray (WCA) to charge your mobile phone and
connect it to the mobile network. To ensure the
Contact a dealer’s service center or
best possible connection a signal booster
another qualified service center or
(LTE-Compensator) is used in conjunction with
repair shop.
the WCA. The following paragraphs refer to
this booster:
Forgotten warning This is a CONSUMER device.
BEFORE USE, you MUST REGISTER THIS
General information DEVICE with your wireless provider and have
A warning can be given if a Qi-certified mobile your provider's consent. Most wireless provid-
phone was forgotten in the wireless charging ers consent to the use of Compensators. Some
tray when leaving the vehicle. providers may not consent to the use of this
The forgotten warning is displayed in the in- device on their network. If you are unsure, con-
strument cluster. tact your provider. You MUST operate this de-
vice with approved antennas and cables as
Activating specified by the manufacturer. Antennas
MUST be installed at least 20 cm (8 inches)
1. "CAR"
from any person. You MUST cease operating
2. "Settings" this device immediately if requested by the
3. "General settings" FCC or a licensed wireless service provider.
4. "Wireless charging tray" Warning E911 location information may not be
provided or may be inaccurate for calls served
5. Activate reminder.
by using this device.
Please observe additionally the following infor-
System limits
mation
The charge current may be reduced or the
▷ Sprint Nextel will allow consumers to regis-
charging process may be temporarily inter-
ter their signal boosters by calling their toll-
rupted in the following situations:
free number.
▷ T-Mobile online registration link: (www.T-
Mobile.com/BoosterRegistration); (https://
saqat.t-mobile.com/sites/SignalBooster#).
287
▷ Verizon’s online registration link: (http://

www.verizonwireless.com/wcms/
consumer/register-signal-booster.html).
▷ AT&T online registration link (https://
securec45.securewebsession.com/
attsignalbooster.com/).
▷ U.S.Cellular online registration link (http://
www.uscellular.com/uscellular/support/fcc-
booster-registration.jsp).
Before use you must register your booster de-
vice with your wireless provider.
If you should be requested by the FCC to cease
operating your booster you are not allowed to
insert your mobile phone in the charging tray
anymore unless the booster is permanently
deactivated by your local BMW dealer.
You must not remove the booster from the car
nor use it with any other than the preinstalled
coupling device or antenna. Any modification
of the existing antenna or coupling device as
well as the use of other antennas or coupling
devices will cause the cease of the booster´s
operating license.
The booster device fulfills the network protec-
tion standards as required by the FCC, such as
intermodulation limits, oscillation detection and
gain limits.
Booster Manufacturer: Kathrein Automotive
Model Number: LTECOMPB0
Part Number: 6803145-01
FCC-ID: 2ACC7LTECOMPB0
288
Storage compartments CONTROLS
Storage compartments
Vehicle features and options Glove compartment
This chapter describes all standard, country- Safety information
that are not necessarily available in your vehi- Warning
cle, e.g., due to the selected options or country Folded open, the glove compartment pro-
versions. This also applies to safety-related trudes in the car's interior. Objects in the
functions and systems. When using these glove compartment can be thrown into the
functions and systems, the applicable laws car's interior while driving, for instance in the
and regulations must be observed. event of an accident, braking or evasive ma-
neuvers. There is a risk of injury. Always
close the glove compartment immediately af-
Storage compartments ter using it.
General information
The vehicle interior contains multiple storage
Opening the glove compartment
compartments for stowing objects.
Safety information
Warning
Devices connected to the vehicle via a cable,
such as mobile phones or loose objects, can
be thrown through the vehicle interior while
driving such as in the event of an accident,
Pull the handle.
braking or evasive maneuver. There is a risk
of injury. Secure loose objects or devices that The light in the glove compartment switches
are connected to the vehicle via a cable. on.
Closing the glove compartment

NOTICE Fold lid closed.
Anti-slip pads such as anti-slip mats can
damage the dashboard. There is a risk of Locking the glove compartment
damage to property, among other potential The glove compartment can be locked with an
damage. Do not use anti-slip pads. integrated key. This prevents access to the
glove compartment.
After the glove compartment is locked, the ve-
hicle key can be handed over without the
289
CONTROLS Storage compartments
integrated key, for instance when the vehicle is

parked by valet parking.
Center armrest, front
General information
A storage compartment is located in the center
armrest between the seats.
Compartments in the doors
Opening the storage compartment
General information
There are storage compartments in the doors.
Safety information
Warning
Breakable objects, such as glass bottles or
glasses, can break in the event of an accident
or a braking or evasive maneuver. Broken Press the button.
glass can be scattered in the car's interior.
There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to
property. Do not use any breakable objects
Closing the storage compartment
while driving. Only stow breakable objects in Press the lid down until it clicks into place.
closed storage compartments.
Front cup holder

Storage compartment in the Safety information
center console
Warning
Unsuitable containers in the cup holders may
damage the cup holders or be thrown about
the car’s interior in the event of an accident,
an evasive maneuver, or forceful braking.
Spilled liquids can distract from the surround-
ing traffic conditions and lead to an accident.
Hot drinks can damage the cup holder or
lead to scalding. There is a risk of injury or
risk of damage to property. Do not force ob-
jects into the cup holder. Use lightweight,
shatterproof, and sealable containers. Do not
transport hot beverages.
Closing the storage compartment

Pull the cover on the handle back.
290
Storage compartments CONTROLS
Opening the cup holder Safety information
Warning
Clothing articles on the coat hooks can ob-
struct the view while driving. There is a risk of
accident. When suspending clothing articles
from the coat hooks, ensure that they will not
obstruct the driver's view.

Warning
Improper use of the coat hooks can lead to a
risk of objects flying about during braking and
evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury
and risk of damage to property. Only hang
lightweight objects, for instance clothing arti-
cles, from the coat hooks.
Two cup holders are located in the center con-

sole.
Closing the cup holder

Pull the cover on the handle back.
Coat hooks
General information
The coat hooks are located on the door pillar in
the rear.
291
CONTROLS Cargo area
Cargo area
Warning
This chapter describes all standard, country- Improperly stowed objects can slip and be
specific and optional features offered with the thrown into the car's interior, for instance in
series. It also describes features and functions the event of an accident or during braking
that are not necessarily available in your vehi- and evasive maneuver. Vehicle occupants
cle, e.g., due to the selected options or country can be hit and injured. There is a risk of in-
versions. This also applies to safety-related jury. Stow and secure objects and cargo
functions and systems. When using these properly.
NOTICE
Loading Fluids in the cargo area can cause damage.
other potential damage. Make sure that no
Safety information fluids leak in the cargo area.
Warning
Steps for Determining Correct Load
High gross vehicle weight can overheat the
Limit
tires, damage them internally and cause a
sudden tire pressure loss. Driving character- 1. Locate the statement “The combined
istics may be negatively impacted, reducing weight of occupants and cargo should
directional stability, lengthening the braking never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your
distances and changing the steering re- vehicle’s placard.
sponse. There is a risk of accident. Pay atten- 2. Determine the combined weight of the
tion to the permitted load-carrying capacity of driver and passengers that will be riding in
the tires and never exceed the permitted your vehicle.
gross vehicle weight. 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs
4. The resulting figure equals the available
Warning amount of cargo and luggage load ca-
Devices connected to the vehicle via a cable, pacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount
such as mobile phones or loose objects, can equals 1,400 lbs and there will be five
be thrown through the vehicle interior while 150 lbs passengers in your vehicle, the
driving such as in the event of an accident, amount of available cargo and luggage
braking or evasive maneuver. There is a risk load capacity is 650 lbs (1,400 - 750 (5 x
of injury. Secure loose objects or devices that 150) = 650 lbs)
are connected to the vehicle via a cable. 5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle.
That weight may not safely exceed the
292
Cargo area CONTROLS
available cargo and luggage load capacity ▷ Small and light cargo: secure with luggage
calculated in Step 4. straps or, depending on the equipment,
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load with a cargo net or draw straps.
from your trailer will be transferred to your ▷ Larger and heavy cargo: secure with cargo
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine straps.
how this reduces the available cargo and
luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
Lashing eyes in the cargo
Payload area
General information
Attach auxiliary materials to secure the cargo,
such as lashing straps, tensioning straps, draw
straps or cargo nets, to the lashing eyes in the
cargo area.
Lashing eyes
The maximum payload is the sum of the
weight of the occupants and the cargo.
The greater the weight of the occupants, the
less cargo that can be transported.
Stowing and securing cargo

▷ Cover sharp edges and corners on the
cargo.
▷ Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as possi- There are four lashing eyes in the cargo area
ble, directly behind and at the bottom of the for securing cargo.
rear seat backrests.
▷ Very heavy cargo: stow as far forward as
possible, directly behind and at the bottom Net
of the rear seat backrests. When the rear
seat is not occupied, secure each of the Small objects can be stowed in the net on the
outer seat belts in the opposite buckle. right side. To transport larger objects, slide the
▷ Fold down the rear seat backrests com- net down.
pletely to stow large cargo.
▷ Do not stack cargo above the upper edge of
the backrests.
293
CONTROLS Cargo area
Storage compartment on
Warning
the left side If a rear seat backrest is not locked, unse-
cured cargo can be thrown about the car’s in-
General information terior; for instance, in the event of an acci-
A storage compartment is located on the left dent, braking or an evasive maneuver. There
side in the cargo area. is a risk of injury. Make sure that the rear seat
backrest is locked after folding it back.
Warning
The stability of the child restraint system is
limited or compromised with incorrect seat
setting or improper installation of the child
seat. There is a risk of injury or danger to life.
Make sure that the child restraint system fits
securely against the backrest. If possible, ad-
just the backrest tilt for all affected backrests
and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that
Fold the cover up.
seats and backrests are securely engaged or
locked. If necessary, adjust the height of the
head restraints or remove them.
Enlarging the cargo area
Principle NOTICE
The cargo area can be enlarged by folding Vehicle parts can be damaged when folding
down the rear seat backrests. down the rear seat backrest. There is a risk of
damage to property, among other potential
General information damage. Make sure that the area of move-
ment of the rear seat backrest including head
The rear seat backrest is divided at a ratio of
restraint is clear when folding down.
50 to 50.
Safety information
Warning
There is a danger of jamming with folding
down the rear seat backrests. There is a risk
of injury or risk of damage to property. Make
sure that the area of movement of the rear
seat backrest and the of the head restraint is
clear prior to folding down.
294
Cargo area CONTROLS
Folding down the rear seat backrest
From the cargo area
Pull the corresponding lever in the cargo area

to release the rear seat backrest.
▷ Left lever: fold down the left rear seat back-
rest.
▷ Right lever: fold down the right rear seat
backrest.
Folding back the backrest

Return the rear seat backrest to the seat posi-
tion and engage it.
295
DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving
Things to remember when driving

Vehicle features and options Engine, transmission, and axle drive
This chapter describes all standard, country- Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km

specific and optional features offered with the Do not exceed the maximum engine and road
series. It also describes features and functions speed:
that are not necessarily available in your vehi- ▷ For gasoline engine 4,500 rpm and
cle, e.g., due to the selected options or country 100 mph/160 km/h.
Avoid full throttle or kickdown under all circum-
stances.
From 1,200 miles/2,000 km
The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be
Break-in increased.
General information Tires

Moving parts need to begin working together Tire traction is not optimal due to manufactur-
smoothly. ing circumstances when tires are brand-new;
they achieve their full traction potential after a
The following instructions will help you to ach-
break-in time.
ieve a long vehicle life and good efficiency.
Drive conservatively for the first
During break-in, do not use the Launch Con-
200 miles/300 km.
trol.
Brake system
Safety information
Brake disks and brake pads only reach their
full effectiveness after ap-
Warning prox. 300 miles/500 km. Drive moderately
Due to new parts and components, safety during this break-in period.
and driver assistance systems can react with
a delay. There is a risk of accident. After in- Following part replacement
stalling new parts or with a new vehicle, drive Observe the break-in procedures again, if
conservatively and intervene early if neces- components mentioned above are replaced.
sary. Observe the break-in procedures of the
respective parts and components.
296
Things to remember when driving DRIVING TIPS
General driving notes Hot exhaust system
Closing the trunk lid Warning

High temperatures can occur underneath the
Safety information body, for instance caused by the exhaust
system, while driving. Contact with the ex-
haust system can cause burns. There is a risk
Warning
of injury. Do not touch the hot exhaust sys-
An open trunk lid protrudes from the vehicle tem, including the exhaust pipe.
and can endanger occupants and other road
users or damage the vehicle in the event of
an accident, braking or evasive maneuvers.
Warning
In addition, exhaust fumes may enter the ve-
hicle interior. There is a risk of injury or risk of If combustible materials, such as leaves or
damage to property. Do not drive with the grass, come in contact with hot parts of the
trunk lid open. exhaust system, these materials can ignite.
There is a risk of fire and an injury hazard. Do
not remove the heat shields installed and
Driving with the trunk lid open never apply undercoating to them. Make sure
If the vehicle still needs to be driven with the that no combustible materials can come in
trunk lid open: contact with hot vehicle parts while driving, in
Neutral or during parking.
▷ Close all windows.
▷ Greatly increase the blower output.
▷ Drive moderately. Mobile radio in the vehicle
Ice on window glass Warning

Vehicle electronics and mobile communica-
NOTICE tion devices can influence one another. There
The window will be lowered slightly when is radiation due to the transmission opera-
pulling on the door handle. In the event of tions of mobile communication devices.
frost, the window may be frozen solid and not There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to
be lowered. There is a risk of damage to property. If possible, in the car's interior use
property, among other potential damage. only mobile communication devices, such as
When pulling on the door handle, make sure mobile phones with direct connections to an
that the window is lowered. If necessary, re- external antenna in order to exclude mutual
move snow and ice from the window. Do not interference and deflect the radiation from
open the door with force. the vehicle interior.
Aquaplaning
On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can
form between the tires and road surface.
297
This phenomenon is referred to as aquaplan- The pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds
ing. It is characterized by a partial or complete from the hydraulic circuits indicate that the An-
loss of contact between the tires and the road tilock Braking System is in its active mode.
surface, ultimately undermining your ability to In certain braking situations, the perforated
steer and brake the vehicle. brake disks can emit functional noises. How-
ever, functional noises have no effect on the
Driving through water performance and operational reliability of the
brake.
General information
When driving through water, follow the follow- Objects in the travel path of the pedals
ing:
▷ Deactivate Auto Start/Stop function. Warning
▷ Drive through calm water only. Objects in the driver's footwell can limit the
▷ Drive through water only up to a maximum pedal travel or block a depressed pedal.
height of 9.8 inches/25 cm. There is a risk of accident. Stow objects in the
▷ Drive through water at a maximum of walk- vehicle such that they are secured and can-
ing speed, up to 3 mph/5 km/h. not enter into the driver's footwell. Use floor
mats that are suitable for the vehicle and can
be safely attached to the floor. Do not use
Safety information
loose floor mats and do not layer several
floor mats. Make sure that there is sufficient
NOTICE clearance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor
When driving too quickly through deep water, mats are securely fastened again after they
the water can penetrate the engine compart- were removed, for instance for cleaning.
ment, the electrical system, or the transmis-
sion. There is a risk of damage to property,
Pedal feel when driving off
among other potential damage. When driving
through water, do not exceed the maximum After turning on the drive-ready state from the
indicated water level and the maximum idle state, the pedal may feel unusual, short
speed for driving through water. pedal travel. After the brake pedal has been
fully released, the pedal will feel as usual
again.
Braking safely
Driving in wet conditions
General information In case of wet roads, exposure to road salt, in
The vehicle is equipped with an Antilock Brak- heavy rain, gently press the brake pedal every
ing System as a standard feature. few kilometers.
Perform emergency braking in situations that Ensure that this action does not endanger
require such. other road users.
Steering is still responsive. You can still avoid The heat generated during braking dries brake
any obstacles with a minimum of steering disks and brake pads and protects them
movement. against corrosion.
In this way the brake force will be available
when you need it.
298
Things to remember when driving DRIVING TIPS
Hills Condensation water under the

parked vehicle
General information
When using the automatic climate control, con-
Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the densation water develops and collects under-
gear that requires least braking effort. Other- neath the vehicle.
wise, the brake system may overheat and re-
duce braking effect.
You can increase the engine's braking effect by Roof-mounted luggage rack
downshifting, going all the way to first gear, if
needed.
General information
Safety information Installation only possible in roof strip with
flaps.
Roof-mounted luggage racks are available as
Warning optional accessories.
Light but consistent pressure on the brake
pedal can lead to high temperatures, brake Safety information
wear and possibly even brake system failure.
There is a risk of accident. Avoid placing ex-
cessive stress on the brake system. Warning
When driving with a roof load, for instance
with roof-mounted luggage rack, the vehicle's
Warning center of gravity is higher, which increases
the risk of the vehicle tipping in critical driving
In idle state or with the engine switched off,
situations. There may be a risk of accident or
safety functions, for instance engine braking
risk of damage to property. Driving with roof
effect, braking assistance and steering assis-
load only with activated Dynamic Stability
tance, may not be available. There is a risk of
Control.
accident. Do not attempt to drive in idle state
or with the engine switched off.
Roof strip with flaps
Brake disk corrosion The mounting points are located in the roof
strip above the doors.
Corrosion on the brake disks and contamina-
tion on the brake pads are increased by the
following circumstances:
▷ Low mileage.
▷ Extended stationary periods.
▷ Infrequent use of the brakes.
▷ Aggressive, acidic, or alkaline cleaning
agents.
Corrosion buildup on the brake disks will cause
a pulsating effect on the brakes when braking Fold the cover outward.
slowly - generally this cannot be corrected.
299
Installation Higher mechanical and thermal loads during

racetrack operation lead to increased wear.
Follow the assembly instructions of the roof
Use of the vehicle in M Sport or motor sport
rack.
type competition is an improper use of the ve-
hicle and may affect your warranty coverage.
Magnetic roof-mounted luggage Please consult the “New Vehicle Limited War-
racks ranty” Booklet for further information on war-
Magnetic roof racks cannot be used. ranty matters.
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
Loading special sport tires, known as High Perform-
Because roof-mounted luggage racks raise the ance tires, that have been optimized for use on
vehicle's center of gravity when loaded, they racing tracks in dry conditions. To find out
have a major effect on vehicle handling and more information about sport tires, ask a deal-
steering response. er's service center or another qualified service
Therefore, note the following when loading
and driving:
▷ Do not exceed the approved roof/axle
weights and the approved gross vehicle
weight.
▷ Distribute the roof load uniformly.
▷ The roof load should not extend past the
loading area.
▷ Always place the heaviest pieces on the
bottom.
▷ Secure the roof luggage firmly, for instance
using luggage straps.
▷ Do not let objects project into the swiveling
range of the trunk lid.
▷ Drive cautiously and avoid driving off and
braking with jerky movements or fast cor-
nering.
Driving on racetracks
Warning
The vehicle is not designed for use in M Sport
or motor sport type competition. There is a
risk of accident. Do not use the vehicle for M
Sport or motor sport type competitions.
300
Saving fuel DRIVING TIPS
Saving fuel
Vehicle features and options Close the windows
Open windows increase drag and therefore
This chapter describes all standard, country- lead to greater fuel consumption.
series. It also describes features and functions Tires
cle, e.g., due to the selected options or country General information
Tires can affect consumption in various ways,
for instance tire size may influence consump-
tion.
Check the tire pressure regularly

Reducing fuel consumption Check and, if needed, correct the tire inflation
pressure at least twice a month and before
starting on a long trip.
General information
Low tire pressure increases rolling resistance
The vehicle contains advanced technologies
and thus fuel consumption and tire wear.
for the reduction of consumption and emission
values. Observe the correct tire inflation pressure as
well as the ECO tire inflation pressure, where
The fuel consumption depends on various fac-
applicable.
tors, such as driving style, road conditions,
maintenance or environmental factors. Additional information:
Carrying out certain measures, such as a mod- Tire pressure specifications, refer to page 310.
erate driving style and regular maintenance,
can influence fuel consumption and the envi- Drive away without delay
ronmental pollution. Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while
the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving
Remove unnecessary cargo right away, but at moderate RPM.
Additional weight increases fuel consumption. This is the fastest way of warming the cold en-
gine up to operating temperature.
Remove attached parts following
use Anticipating driving
Remove roof-mounted luggage racks that are A smooth and anticipating driving style re-
no longer required following use. duces fuel consumption.
Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aero- Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking.
dynamics and increase the fuel consumption. By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehi-
cle driving ahead of you.
301
DRIVING TIPS Saving fuel
Avoid high RPM The ECO PRO driving mode supports the en-
ergy conserving use of comfort features.
Driving at low engine speeds lowers fuel con-
sumption and reduces wear. These functions are automatically deactivated
partially or completely.
If necessary, observe the vehicle's gear shift
indicator.
Have maintenance carried out
Using coasting/overrun mode Have the vehicle maintained regularly to ach-
ieve optimal vehicle efficiency and service life.
When approaching a red traffic light, take your
BMW recommends that maintenance work be
foot off the accelerator and let the vehicle
performed by a dealer's service center.
coast to a halt.
Also refer to BMW Maintenance System.
For going downhill take your foot off the accel-
erator and let the vehicle roll.
The fuel supply is interrupted in coasting/over- ECO PRO
run mode.
Switch off the engine during longer Principle

stops ECO PRO supports a driving style that saves
on consumption. For this purpose, the engine
control and comfort features, for instance the
Switching off the engine
climate control output, are adjusted.
Switch off the engine during longer stops, for
Steptronic transmission: under certain condi-
instance at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in
tions the engine is automatically decoupled
traffic jam.
from the transmission in the D selector lever
position. The vehicle continues traveling in
Auto Start/Stop function Neutral to reduce consumption. The D selector
The Auto Start/Stop function of the vehicle au- lever position remains engaged.
tomatically switches off the engine during a
In addition, context-sensitive information, ECO
stop.
PRO tips, are displayed to assist with an effi-
If the engine is switched off and then restarted cient driving style.
rather than leaving the engine running con-
The achieved extended range is displayed in
stantly, fuel consumption and emissions are
the instrument cluster as bonus range.
reduced. Savings can begin within a few sec-
onds of an engine stop.
General information
Switch off any functions that are not The system includes the following
EfficientDynamics functions and
currently needed
EfficientDynamics displays:
Functions such as seat heating and the rear
▷ ECO PRO bonus range.
window defroster require a lot of energy and
increase fuel consumption, especially in city ▷ ECO PRO seat climate control.
traffic and with stop-and-go driving. ▷ ECO PRO climate control.
Switch off these functions if they are not ▷ ECO PRO light and sight.
needed. ▷ ECO PRO speed.
302
▷ Coasting mode. Set the desired speed for the ECO PRO
▷ Driving style analysis. speed.
Overview Activating/deactivating ECO PRO

functions
The following ECO PRO functions can be acti-
vated/deactivated:
▷ "Coasting"
▷ "ECO PRO seat heating"
▷ "ECO PRO climate control"
▷ "ECO PRO light and sight"
Coasting
Button Efficiency can be optimized by disengaging the
engine and coasting in Neutral.
Activating ECO PRO ECO PRO seat climate control

Press the button. ECO PRO is dis- The activation of ECO PRO will reduce the out-
played in the instrument cluster. put of the seat heating.
Configuring ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL ECO PRO climate control

Climate control is set to be efficient.
Via the Driving Dynamics Control This means, it is possible to deviate slightly
1. Activate ECO PRO. from the set temperature or to heat or cool
down the car's interior more slowly, to econo-
2. "ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL"
mize on consumption.
Via iDrive ECO PRO light and view

1. "CAR"
The output of exterior mirror heating and rear
2. "Settings" window defroster is reduced.
3. "Driving mode"
4. "ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL" Resetting the settings
5. Select the desired setting. Reset ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL to the standard
settings:
ECO PRO speed "Reset to ECO PRO STANDARD"
▷ "ECO PRO speed": activate ECO PRO
speed. Displays in the instrument cluster
An ECO PRO tip is displayed if the speed of
the set ECO PRO speed is exceeded.
General information
▷ "Notification at:" When ECO PRO driving mode is activated, the
display switches to a special configuration.
303
ECO PRO bonus range ▷ Depending on the equipment: the total dis-
tance driven in Coasting mode.
A modified driving style helps
you extend your driving range. ▷ The total time that the engine has been
switched off during automatic engine stops.
The range extension can be dis-
played as the bonus range in ▷ A gear shift indicator recommending the
the instrument cluster. use of a more efficient gear.
The efficiency display includes the bonus
range.
Indications on the Control Display
If the bonus range appears in gray, the current
General information
driving style is inefficient.
Information about the current operating princi-
The display turns blue as soon as all condi-
ple of the ECO PRO functions can be displayed
tions for efficient driving are met.
as energy flow.
The intervals for resetting the bonus range de-
pend on the settings of the trip data. Displaying energy flow information
1. "CAR"
Consumption display 2. "Driving information"
3. "Energy flow"
The following functions are displayed:
▷ Auto Start/Stop function.
▷ Energy recovery.
▷ Coasting.
Coasting
A needle in the consumption display informs
about the current driving style: Principle
▷ The current consumption in relation to the Under certain conditions the engine is auto-
average consumption is displayed. matically decoupled from the transmission in
▷ Needle in the area of arrow 1: display of the the D selector lever position. The vehicle con-
energy recovered by coasting or when tinues traveling in Neutral to reduce consump-
braking. tion. Selector lever position D remains en-
gaged.
▷ Needle in the area of arrow 2: display when
accelerating. This driving condition is referred to as coast-
ing.
If the acceleration is inefficient, the area be-
tween the average consumption and the cur- As soon as the brake or accelerator pedal is
rent consumption is colored red. depressed, the engine is automatically coupled
to the transmission again.
In addition, the following information is dis-
played, depending on the situation:
General information
Coasting is a component of the ECO PRO driv-
ing mode.
304
Coasting is automatically activated when ECO Display

PRO driving mode is called via the Driving Dy-
namics Control. Display in the instrument cluster
A proactive driving style helps the driver to use The coasting distance traveled is indi-
the function often and supports the efficient ef- cated in Coasting mode.
fect of coasting.
Indications on the Control Display
Functional requirements The Coasting mode is displayed under energy
The function is available in the speed range flow while driving.
from approx. 16 mph/25 km/h to
The distance traveled in Coasting mode is dis-
100 mph/160 km/h.
played in the trip data.
The function is active if the following conditions
are met:
▷ The accelerator pedal is not depressed or
the accelerator pedal is released.
▷ Brake pedal not depressed or only slightly
depressed.
▷ The selector lever is in selector lever posi-
tion D.
▷ Engine and transmission are at operating
temperature. Color code blue: Coasting mode.
▷ Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go func-
tion, ACC, not activated. Displaying energy flow information
1. "CAR"
Operation via shift paddles
Principle 3. "Energy flow"
The Coasting mode can be influenced with the
shift paddles. System limits
The function is not available under one of the
Activating/deactivating coasting via following conditions.
shift paddles ▷ DSC OFF or TRACTION activated.
1. Shift to the highest gear by pulling the right ▷ Driving in the dynamic limit range and on
shift paddle. steep uphill or downhill grades.
2. To activate Coasting mode, actuate the ▷ Battery charge status temporarily too low
right shift paddle again. or vehicle electrical system drawing exces-
To deactivate, actuate the left shift paddle. sive current.
305
Driving style analysis

Principle
The function helps develop an especially effi-
cient driving style and to conserve fuel.
For this purpose, the driving style is analyzed.
The assessment is done in various categories
and is displayed on the Control Display.
This display will help you adjust your driving
style and save some fuel.
General information
The current trip is assessed.
To support an efficient driving style, ECO PRO
tips are displayed during driving.
The range of the vehicle can be extended by
adjusting your driving style.
This gain in range is displayed as a bonus
range in the instrument cluster and on the
Control Display.
This function is available in ECO PRO driving
mode.
Calling up the Driving style analysis

1. "CAR"
3. "Driving style analysis"
Display on the Control Display

The display of the Driving style analysis shows
the efficiency of the Driving style.
The more efficient the driving style, the more
bars are displayed in color and the faster the
bonus range increases.
In contrast, a reduced number of bars will be
displayed with an inefficient driving style.
306
307
MOBILITY Refueling
Refueling
This chapter describes all standard, country- NOTICE

With a range below 30 miles/50 km, the en-
gine may no longer have sufficient fuel. En-
gine functions are not ensured anymore.
other potential damage. Refuel promptly.
NOTICE
Fuels are toxic and aggressive. Overfilling of
Follow the following when the fuel tank can damage the fuel system.
refueling Painted surfaces may be damaged by con-
tact with fuel. Escaping fuel can harm the en-
vironment. There is a risk of damage to prop-
General information erty, among other potential damage. Avoid
Follow the fuel recommendation prior to refu- overfilling.
eling.
When refueling, hook the filler nozzle com-
pletely into the filler pipe. Lifting up the filler
nozzle during refueling causes:
Fuel cap
▷ Premature switching off.
Opening
▷ Reduced return of the fuel vapors.
1. To open the fuel filler flap, press on the rear
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks
edge, arrow. The fuel filler flap opens.
off the first time.
Make sure that the fuel cap is closed properly
after refueling, otherwise the emissions warn-
ing light may light up.
Follow safety regulations posted at the filling
station.
Fuel quality, refer to page 343.
308
Refueling MOBILITY
2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise. Have fuel filler flap unlocked by a dealer’s
ter or repair shop.
3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached to

the fuel filler flap.
Closing
Warning
The retaining strap of the fuel cap can be
jammed and crushed during closing. The cap
cannot be correctly closed. Fuel or fuel va-
pors can escape. There is a risk of injury or
risk of damage to property. Pay attention that
the retaining strap is not jammed or crushed
when closing the cap.
1. Fit the fuel cap and turn it clockwise until

you clearly hear a click.
2. Press on the fuel filler flap until it engages.
Emergency unlocking
It may be necessary in certain situations to un-
lock the fuel filler flap manually, for instance
with an electrical malfunction.
309
MOBILITY Wheels and tires
Wheels and tires

Vehicle features and options Tire pressure specifications
This chapter describes all standard, country- In the tire inflation pressure table
specific and optional features offered with the The tire inflation pressure table, refer to
series. It also describes features and functions page 310, contains all tire inflation pressure
that are not necessarily available in your vehi- specifications for the specified tire sizes at the
cle, e.g., due to the selected options or country ambient temperature. The tire inflation pres-
versions. This also applies to safety-related sure values apply to tire sizes approved by the
functions and systems. When using these manufacturer of the vehicle for the vehicle
functions and systems, the applicable laws type.
and regulations must be observed. To identify the correct tire inflation pressure,
please note the following:
Tire pressure ▷ Tire sizes of your vehicle.

▷ Maximum speed for driving.
General information
On the Control Display
The tire condition and tire pressure influence
The current tire inflation pressure values and
the following:
the intended tire inflation pressure values for
▷ The service life of the tires. the mounted tires can be displayed on the
▷ Driving safety. Control Display.
▷ Driving comfort. To ensure that they are displayed correctly, the
▷ Fuel consumption. tire sizes must be stored in the system and
must have been set for the mounted tires.
Safety information The current tire inflation pressure value is lo-
cated on each tire.
The reference tire inflation pressure value is lo-
Warning
cated in the lower area of the Control Display.
A tire with too little or no tire inflation pres-
sure may heat up significantly and sustain Checking the tire pressure
damage. This will have a negative impact on
aspects of handling, such as steering and
General information
braking response. There is a risk of accident.
Regularly check the tire inflation pressure, Tires heat up while driving. The tire pressure
and correct it as needed, for instance twice a increases with the tire temperature.
month and before a long trip. Tires have a natural, consistent tire pressure
loss.
The displays of inflation devices may under-
read by up to 0.1 bar/2 psi.
310
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
Checking using tire inflation pressure Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.
specifications in the tire inflation With Tire Pressure Monitor:
pressure table The corrected tire inflation pressures are ap-
1. Determine the intended tire inflation pres- plied automatically. Make sure that the correct
sure levels for the mounted tires. tire settings have been made.
2. Check the tire inflation pressure in all four With tires that cannot be found in the tire pres-
tires, using a pressure gage, for example. sure values on the Control Display, reset the
3. Correct the tire inflation pressure if the ac- Tire Pressure Monitor TPM.
tual tire inflation pressure deviates from the
intended tire inflation pressure. Tire inflation pressures up to
4. Check whether all valve caps are screwed 100 mph/160 km/h
onto the tire valves. For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and for
The tire inflation pressure specifications in the optimum driving comfort, note the pressure
tire inflation pressure table only relate to cold values in the tire inflation pressure table and
tires or tires at the same temperature as the adjust as necessary.
ambient temperature.
Only check the tire inflation pressure levels
when the tires are cold, i.e.:
▷ A distance traveled of max. 1.25 miles/2 km
has not been exceeded.
▷ If the vehicle has not moved again for at
least 2 hours after a trip.
Checking using the tire inflation

pressure specifications on the Control These pressure values can also be found on
Display the tire pressure label on the driver's door pil-
lar.
1. "CAR"
2. "Vehicle status" Do not exceed a speed of 100 mph/160 km/h.
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor"
4. Check whether the current tire inflation
pressure levels deviate from the intended
tire pressure value.
5. Correct the tire inflation pressure if the ac-
tual tire inflation pressure deviates from the
intended tire inflation pressure.
The display of the current tire pressure may be
limited when the vehicle is stationary. After a
short drive, the tire pressure is updated.
After correcting the tire pressure

For the flat tire monitor:
311
Tire pressure values up to 100 mph/ 840i xDrive

160 km/h
Tire size Pressure specifica-
840i tions in bar/PSI
Specifications in
Tire size Pressure specifica- bar/PSI with cold
tions in bar/PSI tires
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold
245/40 R 19 98 H 2.4 / 35 2.6 / 38
tires
XL M+S
245/40 R 19 98 V
245/40 R 19 98 H 2.2 / 32 2.6 / 38 XL M+S
XL M+S
Front: 245/40 R 19 2.4 / 35 -
245/40 R 19 98 V 98 H XL A/S
XL M+S
Rear: 275/35 R 19 - 2.4 / 35
Front: 245/40 R 19 2.2 / 32 - 100 H XL A/S
98 H XL A/S
Front: 245/40 R 19 2.4 / 35 -
Rear: 275/35 R 19 - 2.4 / 35 98 Y XL
100 H XL A/S
Rear: 275/35 R 19 - 2.4 / 35
Front: 245/40 R 19 2.2 / 32 - 100 Y XL
98 Y XL
Front: 2.5 / 36 -
Rear: 275/35 R 19 - 2.4 / 35 245/35 R 20 95
100 Y XL Y XL
Front: 2.4 / 35 - Rear: 275/30 R 20 - 2.8 / 41
245/35 R 20 95 97 Y XL
Y XL
Front: 245/40 R 19 2.4 / 35 -
Rear: 275/30 R 20 - 2.8 / 41 98 V XL M+S
97 Y XL
Rear: 275/35 R 19 - 2.4 / 35
Front: 245/40 R 19 2.2 / 32 - 100 V XL M+S
98 V XL M+S
Rear: 275/35 R 19 - 2.4 / 35
100 V XL M+S
312
M850i xDrive values in the tire inflation pressure table and

adjust as necessary.
tions in bar/PSI Tire pressure values over 100 mph/
Specifications in 160 km/h
bar/PSI with cold
tires 840i

245/40 R 19 98 H 2.5 / 36 2.7 / 39 tions in bar/PSI
XL M+S
Specifications in
245/40 R 19 98 V bar/PSI with cold
XL M+S tires
Front: 245/40 R 19 2.5 / 36 -
98 H XL A/S
245/40 R 19 98 H 2.5 / 36 3.0 / 44
Rear: 275/35 R 19 - 2.5 / 36 XL M+S
100 H XL A/S
245/40 R 19 98 V 2.7 / 39 3.2 / 46
Front: 2.7 / 39 - XL M+S
245/35 R 20 95
Front: 245/40 R 19 2.5 / 36 -
Y XL
98 H XL A/S
Rear: 275/30 R 20 - 2.8 / 41
Rear: 275/35 R 19 - 2.8 / 41
97 Y XL
100 H XL A/S
Front: 245/40 R 19 2.5 / 36 -
Front: 245/40 R 19 2.5 / 36 -
98 V XL M+S
98 Y XL
Rear: 275/35 R 19 - 2.5 / 36
Rear: 275/35 R 19 - 2.8 / 41
100 V XL M+S
100 Y XL
Tire inflation pressures at max. Front: 2.7 / 39 -

245/35 R 20 95
speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h Y XL
Rear: 275/30 R 20 - 3.2 / 46
Warning
97 Y XL
In order to drive at maximum speeds in ex-
cess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please observe, Front: 245/40 R 19 2.7 / 39 -
and, if necessary, adjust tire pressures for 98 V XL M+S
speeds exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from Rear: 275/35 R 19 - 3.0 / 44
the relevant table on the following pages. 100 V XL M+S
Otherwise, tire damage and accidents could
occur.
For speeds over 100 mph/160 km/h and for

optimum driving comfort, note the pressure
313
840i xDrive M850i xDrive
Tire size Pressure specifica- Tire size Pressure specifica-

tions in bar/PSI tions in bar/PSI
Specifications in Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold bar/PSI with cold
tires tires
245/40 R 19 98 H 2.6 / 38 3.0 / 44 245/40 R 19 98 H 2.7 / 39 3.0 / 44

XL M+S XL M+S
245/40 R 19 98 V 2.8 / 41 3.2 / 46 245/40 R 19 98 V 3.0 / 44 3.3 / 48

XL M+S XL M+S
Front: 245/40 R 19 2.6 / 38 - Front: 245/40 R 19 2.7 / 39 -

98 H XL A/S 98 H XL A/S
Rear: 275/35 R 19 - 2.8 / 41 Rear: 275/35 R 19 - 2.8 / 41

100 H XL A/S 100 H XL A/S
Front: 245/40 R 19 2.6 / 38 - Front: 3.1 / 45 -

98 Y XL 245/35 R 20 95
Y XL
Rear: 275/35 R 19 - 2.8 / 41
100 Y XL Rear: 275/30 R 20 - 3.2 / 46
97 Y XL
Front: 2.9 / 42 -
245/35 R 20 95 Front: 245/40 R 19 3.0 / 44 -
Y XL 98 V XL M+S
Rear: 275/30 R 20 - 3.2 / 46 Rear: 275/35 R 19 - 3.1 / 45
97 Y XL 100 V XL M+S
Front: 245/40 R 19 2.8 / 41 -

98 V XL M+S
Tire marking
Rear: 275/35 R 19 - 3.0 / 44
100 V XL M+S
Tire size
245/45 R 18 96 Y
245: nominal width in mm
45: cross-sectional relationship in %
R: radial tire code
18: rim diameter in inches
96: load bearing capacity
Y: speed code letter
314
ZR tires: reinforced radial tire for speeds ex- Tire age

ceeding 150 mph/240 km/h
Recommendation
Maximum tire load Regardless of the tire tread depth, replace tires
Maximum tire load is the maximum permissi- at least every 6 years.
ble weight for which the tire is approved.
Locate the maximum tire load on the tire side- Manufacture date
wall and the Gross Axle Weight Rating – You can find the manufacture date of the tire
GAWR – on the certification label on the driver on the tire sidewall.
door B-pillar. Divide the tire load by 1.1. It must
be greater than one-half of the vehicle’s Gross Designation Manufacture date
Axle Weight Rating – GAWR. Note, front vs. DOT … 0122 1st week 2022
rear GAWR and tire loads, respectively.
Speed letter Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Quality grades can be found where applicable
Designation Maximum speed on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width.
Q up to 100 mph/160 km/h
E.g.: Treadwear 200; Traction AA; Tempera-
R up to 106 mph/170 km/h ture A
S up to 112 mph/180 km/h

DOT Quality Grades
T up to 118 mph/190 km/h Treadwear
H up to 131 mph/210 km/h Traction AA A B C
V up to 150 mph/240 km/h Temperature A B C

All passenger vehicle tires must conform to
W up to 167 mph/270 km/h Federal Safety Requirements in addition to
Y up to 186 mph/300 km/h these grades.
(Y) above 186 mph/300 km/h

Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
Tire Identification Number based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
DOT code: DOT xxxx xxx 0122 under controlled conditions on a specified gov-
xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand ernment test course. E.g., a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half, 1 g, times as
xxx: tire size and tire design
well on the government course as a tire graded
0122: tire age 100. The relative performance of tires depends
Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of upon the actual conditions of their use, how-
the U.S. Department of Transportation. ever, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service
practices and differences in road characteris-
tics and climate.
315
Traction M+S
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, Winter and all-season tires with better cold
are AA, A, B, and C. weather performance than summer tires.
Those grades represent the tire's ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified government Tire tread
test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction perform- Summer tires
ance.
Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than
The traction grade assigned to this tire is 0.12 in/3 mm, otherwise there is an increased
based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, risk of aquaplaning.
and does not include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics. Winter tires
Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than
Temperature 0.16 in/4 mm, as such tires are less suitable for
The temperature grades are A, the highest, B, winter driving conditions.
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate Minimum tread depth
heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to
a level of performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehi-
cle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades Band A
represent higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the minimum re- Distributed over the tire circumference are the
quired by law. tire manufacturer’s wear indicators with a
height of at least 0.06 in/1.6 mm, which serve
Warning as an indicator of tire tread wear.
The temperature grade for this tire is estab- The positions of the wear indicators are
lished for a tire that is properly inflated and marked on the tire sidewall with TWI, Tread
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla- Wear Indicator.
tion, or excessive loading, either separately Irrespective of the wear indicators, observe the
or in combination, can cause heat buildup statutory regulations on the minimum tread
and possible tire failure. depth.
Runflat tires
Runflat tires, refer to page 319, are labeled
with a circular icon containing the letters RSC
marked on the tire sidewall.
316
Tire damage vehicle towed or transported as needed. Do

not repair damaged tires, but have them re-
placed.
General information
Check your tires regularly for damage, foreign
bodies lodged in the tread, and tread wear. Warning
Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces, Tires can become damaged by driving over
as well as debris, curbs and other obstacles obstacles, e.g., curbs or road damage, at high
can cause serious damage to wheels, tires and speed. Larger wheels have a smaller tire
suspension parts. This is more likely to occur cross-section. The smaller the tire cross-sec-
with low-profile tires, which provide less cush- tion, the higher the risk of tire damage. There
ioning between the wheel and the road. Be may be a risk of accidents and risk of dam-
careful to avoid road hazards and reduce your age to property. If possible, avoid driving over
speed, especially if your vehicle is equipped objects or road conditions that may damage
with low-profile tires. tires, or drive over them slowly and carefully.
Indications of tire damage or other vehicle mal-
functions:
▷ Unusual vibrations.
Exchanging wheels and
▷ Unusual tire or running noises.
tires
▷ Unusual handling such as a strong ten-
dency to pull to the left or right.
▷ Uneven wear pattern, e.g., increased wear
Mounting and wheel balancing
in the area of the tire shoulder. Have mounting and wheel balancing carried
out by a dealer’s service center or another
Damage can be caused by the following situa-
tions, for instance:
▷ Driving over curbs.
Approved wheels and tires
▷ Road damage.
▷ Tire pressure too low. General information
▷ Vehicle overloading. The following sizes are recommended and ap-
▷ Incorrect tire storage. proved by the vehicle manufacturer for the ap-
proved wheels and tires per vehicle type and
special equipment:
Safety information
▷ Wheel and tire combinations.
▷ Rim designs.
Warning
▷ Tire sizes.
Damaged tires can lose tire inflation pres-
sure, which can lead to loss of vehicle control. ▷ Tire brands.
There is a risk of accident. If tire damage is You can ask a dealer's service center or an-
suspected while driving, immediately reduce other qualified service center or repair shop
speed and stop. Have wheels and tires about the approved wheels and tires for the
checked. For this purpose, drive carefully to vehicle and the special equipment.
the nearest dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop. Have
317
Safety information Recommended tire brands
Warning
Wheels and tires which are not suitable for
your vehicle can damage parts of the vehicle,
for instance due to contact with the body due
to tolerances despite the same official size
rating. There is a risk of an accident. The
manufacturer of your vehicle strongly sug-
gests that you use wheels and tires that have
been recommended by the vehicle manufac- For each tire size, the manufacturer of the ve-
turer for your vehicle type. hicle recommends certain tire brands. The tire
brands can be identified by a star on the tire
sidewall.
Warning
Mounted steel wheels can cause technical New tires
problems, for instance unexpected loosening Tire traction is not optimal due to manufactur-
of the lug bolts and damage to the brake ing circumstances when tires are brand-new;
disks. There is a risk of accident. Do not they achieve their full traction potential after a
mount steel wheels. break-in time.
Drive conservatively for the first
200 miles/300 km.
Warning
Incorrect wheel/tire combinations will impair Retreaded tires
the vehicle's handling characteristics and a
variety of system functions, such as the Anti-
lock Braking System or Dynamic Stability Warning
Control. There is a risk of accident. To main- Retreated tires can have different tire casing
tain good handling and vehicle response, use structures. With advanced age the service life
only tires with a single tread configuration can be limited. There is a risk of accident.
from a single manufacturer. The manufac- The manufacturer of the vehicle does not rec-
turer of the vehicle recommends that you use ommend the use of retreaded tires.
wheels and tires that have been recom-
mended by the vehicle manufacturer for your
vehicle type. Following tire damage, have the
original wheel/tire combination remounted on
the vehicle as soon as possible.
318
Winter tires Wheel change between axles
General information
Warning
A wheel change between the axles on vehi-
cles with different tire sizes or rim sizes on
the front and rear axles can cause damage to
the tires and the vehicle. There is a risk of ac-
cident. Do not rotate the tires between the
axles on vehicles with different tire sizes or
rim sizes on the front and rear axles.
Winter tires are recommended for operating on Storing tires

winter roads.
Winter tires can be identified by the symbol Tire pressure
with mountain and snowflake, as well as the M Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres-
+S marking on the tire sidewall. sure indicated on the tire sidewall.
So-called all-season tires with M+S designa- Storage

tion, but without symbol with mountain and
▷ Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry and
snowflake, have better winter characteristics
dark place.
than summer tires but generally do not achieve
the performance of winter tires. ▷ Always protect tires against all contact with
oil, grease, and solvents.
Maximum speed of winter tires ▷ Do not leave tires in plastic bags.
If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher ▷ Remove dirt from wheels or tires.
than the permissible speed for the winter tires,
then attach a sign showing the permissible
maximum speed in the field of vision. The sign Runflat tires
is available from a dealer's service center or
Principle
With winter tires mounted, observe and do not
Runflat tires permit continued driving under
exceed the permissible maximum speed.
limited conditions even in the event of a com-
plete tire pressure loss.
Changing runflat tires
When changing from runflat tires to standard General information
tires, it must be ensured that the vehicle con-
The wheels consist of tires that are self-sup-
tains an emergency wheel or tire mobility kit.
porting, to a limited degree, and possibly spe-
Further information is available from a dealer's
cial rims.
ter or repair shop. The reinforcement of the sidewall allows the
tire to remain drivable to a limited degree in
the event of a tire pressure loss.
319
Follow the instructions for continued driving ▷ Have all vehicle occupants get out and
with a flat tire. make sure that they remain outside the
hazardous area such as behind a guardrail.
Safety information ▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle at an
appropriate distance.
Warning
The vehicle handles differently when a runflat Tire repair set
tire has insufficient or no tire pressure; for in-
stance, reduced directional stability when
braking, braking distances are longer and the
Principle
self-steering properties will change. There is With the tire repair set, minor tire damage can
a risk of accident. Drive moderately and do be sealed temporarily to enable continued
not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. driving.
General information
Identification ▷ To enable continued driving, liquid sealant
is pumped into the tire, which hardens and
seals the damage from the inside.
▷ Follow the instructions on using the tire re-
pair set found on the compressor and seal-
ant bottle.
▷ The use of a tire repair set can be ineffec-
tive if the tire puncture measures above ap-
prox. 0.16 in/4 mm.
▷ Contact a dealer's service center or another
Runflat tires are labeled with a circular icon qualified service center or repair shop if the
containing the letters RSC marked on the tire tire cannot be made drivable.
sidewall.
▷ Do not remove foreign objects that have
penetrated the tire. Remove foreign objects
only when they are visibly protruding from
Repairing a flat tire the tire.
▷ Detach the speed limit sticker from the
Safety precautions sealant bottle and apply it to the steering
▷ Park the vehicle as far away as possible wheel.
from passing traffic and on solid ground. ▷ The use of a sealing compound can dam-
▷ Turn on the hazard warning system. age the wheel electronics. In this case,
have the electronics checked and replaced
▷ Secure the vehicle against rolling away by
at the next opportunity.
setting the parking brake.
▷ The compressor can be used to check the
▷ Turn the steering wheel until the front
tire inflation pressure.
wheels are in the straight-ahead position
and engage the steering wheel lock.
320
Overview 3 Tire pressure display

4 Reduce tire inflation pressure button
Storage
5 On/off switch
6 Compressor
7 Connector/cable for socket
8 Connection hose
Safety precautions
▷ Park the vehicle as far away as possible
from passing traffic and on solid ground.
Storage for the tire repair set is provided in the ▷ Turn on the hazard warning system.
left storage compartment of the trunk. ▷ Secure the vehicle against rolling away by
setting the parking brake.
Sealant bottle ▷ Turn the steering wheel until the front

wheels are in the straight-ahead position
and engage the steering wheel lock.
▷ Have all vehicle occupants get out and
make sure that they remain outside the
▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle at an
appropriate distance.
Filling the tire with sealing

▷ Sealant bottle, arrow 1.
compound
▷ Filler hose, arrow 2.
Safety information
Observe expiration date on the sealant bottle.
DANGER
Compressor
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventilation is
insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can pene-
trate the vehicle. The exhaust gases contain
pollutants which are colorless and odorless.
In enclosed areas, exhaust gases can also
accumulate outside of the vehicle. There is a
danger to life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and
ensure sufficient ventilation.
1 Sealant bottle unlocking

2 Sealant bottle mount
321
4. Screw the filler hose of the sealant bottle

NOTICE onto the tire valve of the faulty wheel.
The compressor can overheat during ex-
tended operation. There is a risk of damage
to property, among other potential damage.
Do not run the compressor for more than
10 minutes.
Filling
1. Shake the sealant bottle.
5. With the compressor switched off, insert the

connector into the power socket in the vehi-
cle interior.
2. Pull filler hose completely out of the cover

of the sealant bottle. Do not kink the hose.
6. With standby state or drive-ready state

switched on, switch on the compressor.
3. Slide the sealant bottle into the mount on

the compressor housing, ensuring that it
engages audibly.
Let the compressor run for a maximum of
10 minutes to fill the tire with sealant and reach
a tire pressure of approx. 2 bar.
While the tire is being filled with sealing com-
pound, the tire inflation pressure may sporadi-
cally reach approx. 5 bar. Do not switch off the
compressor in this phase.
322
Checking and adjusting the tire 4. Insert the connector into the power socket
inflation pressure in the vehicle interior.
Checking
1. Switch off the compressor.
2. Read the tire pressure on the tire pressure
display.
To continue the trip, a tire pressure of at least
2 bar must be reached.
Removing and stowing the sealant

5. With standby or drive readiness turned on,
bottle
turn on the compressor and let it run for a
1. Unscrew the filler hose of the sealant bottle maximum of 10 minutes.
from the tire valve.
When the tire pressure does not reach at
2. Press the red unlocking device. least 2 bar, contact a dealer's service center
3. Remove the sealant bottle from the com- or another qualified service center or repair
pressor. shop.
4. Wrap and store the sealant bottle in suita- When a tire pressure of at least 2 bar is
ble material to avoid contamination of the reached, see Minimum tire inflation pres-
cargo area. sure is reached.
6. Unscrew the connection hose of the com-
Minimum tire inflation pressure is not pressor from the tire valve.
reached 7. Pull the connector out of the power socket
1. Pull the connector out of the power socket in the vehicle interior.
in the vehicle interior. 8. Stow the tire repair set in the vehicle.
2. Drive 33 ft/10 m forward and back to dis-
tribute the sealing compound in the tire. Minimum tire inflation pressure is
3. Screw the connection hose of the compres- reached
sor directly onto the tire valve stem. 1. Unscrew the connection hose of the com-
pressor from the tire valve.
2. Pull the connector out of the power socket
in the vehicle interior.
3. Stow the tire repair set in the vehicle.
4. Immediately drive approx. 5 miles/10 km to
ensure that the sealing compound is evenly
distributed in the tire.
Do not exceed a speed of
50 mph/80 km/h.
If possible, do not drive at speeds less than
12 mph/20 km/h.
323
Adjustment Replace the faulty tire and the sealant bottle of

1. Stop at a suitable location. the tire repair set promptly.
2. Screw the connection hose of the compres- Additional information:

sor directly onto the tire valve stem. ▷ Flat tire monitor, refer to page 333.
▷ Tire pressure monitor, refer to page 325.
Tire chains
Safety information
Warning
With the mounting of tire chains on unsuita-
3. Insert the connector into the power socket
ble tires, the tire chains can come into contact
with vehicle parts. There may be a risk of ac-
cident or risk of damage to property. Only
mount tire chains on tires that are designated
by their manufacturer as suitable for the use
of tire chains.
Warning
Insufficiently tight tire chains may damage
tires and vehicle components. There may be
4. Correct the tire pressure to at least 2 bar: a risk of accident or risk of damage to prop-
▷ Increase tire pressure: with standby or erty. Make sure that the tire chains are al-
drive readiness turned on, turn on the ways sufficiently tight. Re-tighten as needed
compressor and let it run for a maxi- according to the tire chain manufacturer's in-
mum of 10 minutes. structions.
▷ Reduce tire inflation pressure: press the
button on the compressor.
Fine-link tire chains
5. Unscrew the connection hose of the com-
pressor from the tire valve. The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
the use of fine-link tire chains. Certain types of
6. Pull the connector out of the power socket
fine-link tire chains have been tested by the
manufacturer of the vehicle and recommended
7. Stow the tire repair set in the vehicle. as road-safe and suitable.
Information regarding suitable tire chains is
Continuing the trip available from a dealer’s service center or an-
Do not exceed the permissible maximum other qualified service center or repair shop.
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor again.
324
Use Safety information

Use only in pairs on the rear wheels, equipped
with the tires of the following size: Warning
▷ 245/45 R18. When rear axle steering is switched on and
▷ 245/40 R19. tire chains are mounted, there can be contact
Information on the wheel size and rim offset is between tire chains and the body. There may
located on the inside of the wheel. be a risk of accident or risk of damage to
property. With mounted tire chains, switch off
The list can also include wheel/tire sizes that
the rear axle steering.
are only suitable for certain models.
Information about approved wheels and tires
for the vehicle can be requested from a deal- Switching off rear axle steering
er's service center or another qualified service The rear axle steering is switched off by speci-
center or repair shop. fying that tire chains are installed.
Follow the tire chain manufacturer's instruc-
1. "CAR"
tions.
2. "Settings"
Do not initialize the flat tire monitor after
mounting tire chains, as doing so may result in 3. "General settings"
incorrect readings. 4. "Tire chains"
Do not reset the Tire Pressure Monitor after 5. "Tire chains installed"
mounting tire chains, as doing so may result in
Starting with the permissible maximum speed
incorrect readings.
with snow chains of 30 mph/50 km/h the rear
When driving with tire chains, activate the Dy- axle steering will be switched on again auto-
namic Traction Control briefly to optimize the matically.
drive power.
Maximum speed with tire chains Tire pressure monitor

Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h
when using tire chains. Principle
The Tire Pressure Monitor monitors the tire
Rear axle steering during operation pressure and issues a warning if the tire pres-
with snow chains sure has dropped.
General information General information

In order to guarantee free movement of the Sensors in the tire valves measure the tire in-
wheels when operating with tire chains, rear flation pressure and tire temperature.
axle steering of the integral active steering
Depending on the tires detected or registered,
must be switched off when tire chains are
the system displays the specified nominal
mounted.
pressures on the control display and compares
them with the current tire pressures.
If tires are being used that are not specified on
the tire inflation pressure details on the vehicle,
such as tires with special approval, the system
325
needs to be actively reset. The system will ▷ After a tire or wheel change, a reset was
then take over the actual tire inflation pres- performed with the correct tire inflation
sures as the target pressures. pressure.
When operating the system, also note the in- ▷ After the tire inflation pressure was ad-
formation found in the Tire inflation pressure justed to a new value, a reset was per-
chapter. formed.
Additional information: ▷ Wheels with wheel electronics.
Tire inflation pressure, refer to page 310.
Tire settings
Safety information
General information
The tire sizes of the mounted tires can be
Warning
gathered from the tire inflation pressure details
The display of the target pressures is not a on the vehicle or directly on the tires.
substitute for the tire inflation pressure de-
The tire details do not need to be re-entered
tails on the vehicle. Incorrect entries in the tire
when the tire pressure is corrected.
settings can lead to incorrect target tire infla-
tion pressure values. In this case, it cannot be For summer and winter tires, the tire details
guaranteed that the notification of a tire pres- entered last are stored. After a tire or wheel
sure loss will be reliable. There is a risk of in- change, the settings of the tire sets used last
jury and risk of damage to property. Ensure can be selected.
that the tire sizes of the mounted tires are
displayed correctly and match the details on Changing settings
the tires and on the vehicle. 1. "CAR"
2. "Vehicle status"
Functional requirements 3. "Tire Pressure Monitor"
The following prerequisites must be met for 4. "Tire settings"

the system; otherwise, reliable message of a 5. "Tire selection"
tire pressure loss is not assured: 6. "Manual"
▷ Every time a tire or wheel is changed, the 7. "Tire type"
correct details on the mounted tires must
8. Select the tire type that is mounted on the
be entered in the tire settings.
rear axle.
▷ The Tire Pressure Monitor does not acti-
For tires with special approval:
vate until after driving for a few minutes:
"Other tires"
▷ After a tire or wheel change.
Observe further proceeding in the perform
▷ After a reset, for tires with special ap-
a reset section.
proval.
9. Select the maximum road speed that will be
▷ After changing the tire setting.
used with the tires.
▷ For tires with special approval:
10. "Save tire settings"
The measurement of the current tire inflation
pressure is started. The measurement prog-
ress is displayed.
326
Status display The nominal pressure is immediately adjusted

if the vehicle load status is changed in the tire
Current status settings.
The system status can be displayed on the

Control Display, e.g., whether or not the sys-
Tire conditions
tem is active.
General information
1. "CAR"
Tire and system status are indicated by the
2. "Vehicle status" color of the wheels and a text message on the
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor" Control Display.
The current status is displayed. Any existing messages may not be deleted if
the nominal pressure is not reached after the
Current tire pressure tire inflation pressure is corrected.
The current tire pressure is displayed for each
tire. All wheels green
The current tire inflation pressures may ▷ The system is active and bases warnings
change during driving or depending on the out- on the target pressures.
side temperature. ▷ For tires with special approval: the system
is active and bases warnings on the tire in-
Current tire temperature flation pressures stored during the last re-
set.
Depending on the model, the current tire tem-
peratures are displayed.
One to four yellow wheels
The current tire temperatures may change
while driving or due to the outside tempera- A flat tire or major tire pressure loss has occur-
ture. red in the indicated tires.
Nominal pressure Gray wheels

The nominal pressure for the tires on the front It may not be possible to identify tire pressure
and rear axles is displayed. losses.
The specified nominal pressures take the influ- Possible causes:

ence of driving and outside temperature on the ▷ Malfunction.
tire temperature into account. The appropriate ▷ During tire inflation pressure measurement,
nominal pressure is always displayed, inde- after confirmation of the tire settings.
pendent of the weather situation, tire tempera-
▷ For tires with special approval: a reset is
tures and travel times.
performed for the system.
The displayed nominal pressure may change
and may differ from the tire inflation pressure For tires with special approval:
details on the door pillar of the driver's door.
The tire inflation pressure can thus be cor-
perform a reset
rected to the value of the displayed target 1. "CAR"
pressures. 2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor"
327
4. Make sure that correct tire settings have If a tire inflation pressure check is
been made. required
Tire settings, refer to page 326.
5. Turn on drive-ready state and do not drive Message
off. An icon with a Check Control message appears
6. Reset tire pressure: "Perform reset". on the Control Display.
7. Drive away. Icon Possible cause

The wheels are displayed in gray and the fol- Inflation was not carried out accord-
lowing is displayed "Resetting tire pressure…". ing to specifications, for instance
After a travel time of several minutes, the set when the tire has not been suffi-
tire inflation pressures are accepted as the ciently inflated or in the case of a nat-
predefined tire inflation pressures. The reset is ural steady tire pressure loss.
completed automatically while driving.
After a successfully completed reset, the Measure
wheels on the Control Display are shown in Check the tire pressure and correct as needed.
green and the following is displayed: "Reset
successful." If the tire inflation pressure is too low
You may interrupt this trip at any time. When
you continue driving the reset resumes auto- Message
matically.
A yellow warning light is illuminated in
the instrument cluster.
Messages: for tires without special
approval In addition, an icon with a Check Control mes-
sage appears on the Control Display.
General information
Icon Possible cause
When a flat tire is indicated, the Dynamic Sta-
bility Control may be turned on. There is a tire pressure loss.
Safety information
Measure
Warning 1. Reduce the vehicle speed. Do not exceed a
A damaged regular tire with low or missing speed of 80 mph/130 km/h.
tire inflation pressure impacts handling, such 2. At the next opportunity, for instance at a fill-
as steering and braking response. Runflat ing station, check the tire inflation pressure
tires can maintain limited stability. There is a in all four tires and correct if necessary.
risk of accident. Do not continue driving if the
vehicle is equipped with normal tires. Follow
the information on runflat tires and continued
driving with these tires.
328
If there is a significant tire pressure Safety information

loss
Warning
Message
A damaged regular tire with low or missing
A yellow warning light is illuminated in tire inflation pressure impacts handling, such
the instrument cluster. as steering and braking response. Runflat
tires can maintain limited stability. There is a
In addition, an icon with the affected tire ap-
pears in a Check Control message on the Con-
vehicle is equipped with normal tires. Follow
trol Display.
Icon Possible cause driving with these tires.
There is a flat tire or a major tire

pressure loss. If a tire inflation pressure check is
required
Measure
Message
1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
An icon with a Check Control message appears
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu-
vers.
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with Icon Possible cause
standard tires or runflat tires. Inflation was not carried out accord-
Runflat tires are labeled with a circular icon ing to specifications, e.g., the tire
containing the letters RSC marked on the has not been sufficiently inflated.
tire sidewall. The system has detected a wheel
Runflat tires, refer to page 319. change, but no reset was done.
3. Read the description on What to do in case The tire inflation pressure has fallen
of a flat tire. below the level of the last reset.
Actions in the event of a flat tire, refer to No reset was performed for the sys-
page 330. tem. The system issues a warning
based on the tire inflation pressures
Messages: for tires with special stored during the last reset.
approval
Measure
General information 1. Check the tire pressure and correct as
When a flat tire is indicated, the Dynamic Sta- needed.
bility Control may be turned on. 2. Perform a system reset.
329
If the tire inflation pressure is too low Measure

Message Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu-
A yellow warning light is illuminated in vers.
the instrument cluster. 2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with
standard tires or runflat tires.
In addition, an icon with a Check Control mes- Runflat tires are labeled with a circular icon
sage appears on the Control Display. containing the letters RSC marked on the
Icon Possible cause tire sidewall.
Runflat tires, refer to page 319.
There is a tire pressure loss.
3. Read the description on What to do in case
No reset was performed for the sys-
of a flat tire.
tem. The system issues a warning
based on the tire inflation pressures Actions in the event of a flat tire, refer to
stored during the last reset. page 330.
Measure Actions in the event of a flat tire

1. Reduce the vehicle speed. Do not exceed a
Standard tires
speed of 80 mph/130 km/h.
1. Identify the damaged tire.
2. At the next opportunity, for instance at a fill-
ing station, check the tire inflation pressure Check the tire pressure in all four tires, for
in all four tires and correct if necessary. instance using the tire pressure display
from a tire repair set.
3. Reset the system.
For tires with special approval: when the
If there is a significant tire pressure tire pressure in all four tires is correct, the
Tire Pressure Monitor may not have been
loss
reset. In this case, perform the reset.
Message If tire damage cannot be found, contact a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
2. Repair the flat tire, for instance with a tire
In addition, an icon with the affected tire ap- repair set or by changing the wheel.
pears in a Check Control message on the Con- Using a sealing compound, for instance from
trol Display. the tire repair set, may damage the wheel
electronics. Have the electronics replaced at
Icon Possible cause
the next opportunity.
pressure loss.
No reset was performed for the sys-
tem. The system issues a warning
based on the tire inflation pressures
stored during the last reset.
330
Runflat tires Vehicle handling with damaged tires

Vehicles driven with a damaged tire will handle
Safety information differently, potentially leading to conditions
such as the following:
Warning ▷ Greater likelihood of skidding of the vehicle.
The vehicle handles differently when a runflat ▷ Longer braking distances.
tire has insufficient or no tire pressure; for in- ▷ Changed self-steering properties.
stance, reduced directional stability when Modify your driving style. Avoid abrupt steering
braking, braking distances are longer and the or driving over obstacles, for instance curbs or
self-steering properties will change. There is potholes.
a risk of accident. Drive moderately and do
not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. Final tire failure
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indi-
Maximum speed cate the final failure of a tire.
You may continue driving with a damaged tire Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of
at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h. the tire could come loose and cause an acci-
dent.
Continued driving with a flat tire Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’s
Follow the following when continuing to drive service center or another qualified service cen-
with a damaged tire: ter or repair shop.
1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu-

System limits
vers.
2. Do not exceed a speed of Temperature
50 mph/80 km/h.
The tire inflation pressure depends on the
3. Check the tire inflation pressure in all four tire's temperature.
tires at the next opportunity.
Driving or exposure to the sun will increase the
tire temperature, thus increasing the tire infla-
Possible distance travelled with a
tion pressure.
depressurized tire
The tire inflation pressure is reduced when the
The distance travelled for which it may be pos-
tire temperature falls again.
sible to drive safely varies depending on how
the vehicle is loaded and used, e.g., speed, These circumstances may cause a warning
road conditions, outside temperature. The dis- when temperatures fall very sharply.
tance travelled may be less but may also be Following a temperature-related warning, the
more if an economical driving style is used. target pressures are displayed on the Control
If the vehicle is loaded with an average weight Display again after a short distance.
and used under favorable conditions, the dis-
tance travelled for which it may be safe to drive Sudden tire pressure loss
may be up to 50 miles/80 km. The system cannot indicate sudden serious
tire damage caused by external circumstances.
331
Failure performing a reset has been equipped with a tire pressure moni-
Tires with special approval: the system will not toring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low
function correctly if a reset was not performed, tire pressure telltale when one or more of your
for example a flat tire may be indicated al- tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly,
though the tire inflation pressures are correct. when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates,
you should stop and check your tires as soon
as possible, and inflate them to the proper
Malfunction pressure. Driving on a significantly under-in-
flated tire causes the tire to overheat and can
Message lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces
The yellow warning light flashes and is fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
then illuminated continuously. A Check the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.
Control message is displayed. It may Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute
not be possible to identify tire pressure losses. for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driv-
er's responsibility to maintain correct tire pres-
sure, even if under-inflation has not reached
Measure the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
▷ A wheel without wheel electronics is low tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also
mounted: have the wheels checked, if been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indi-
needed. cator to indicate when the system is not oper-
▷ Fault caused by systems or devices with ating properly. The TPMS malfunction indica-
the same radio frequency: after leaving the tor is combined with the low tire pressure
area of the interference, the system auto- telltale. When the system detects a malfunc-
matically becomes active again. tion, the telltale will flash for approximately one
minute and then remain continuously illumi-
▷ For tires with special approval: the system
nated. This sequence will continue upon sub-
was unable to complete the reset. Perform
sequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal-
a system reset again.
function exists. When the malfunction indicator
▷ Tire Pressure Monitor malfunction: have is illuminated, the system may not be able to
the system checked by a dealer's service detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
center or another qualified service center or TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
repair shop. reasons, including the installation of replace-
ment or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle
Declaration according to NHTSA/ that prevent the TPMS from functioning prop-
FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction tell-
System tale after replacing one or more tires or wheels
Each tire, including the spare (if provided) on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement
should be checked monthly when cold and in- or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
flated to the inflation pressure recommended to continue to function properly.
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the
size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire in-
flation pressure label, you should determine
the proper tire inflation pressure for those
tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehicle
332
Flat Tire Monitor ▷ After the tire inflation pressure has been
adjusted.
▷ After a tire or wheel change.
Principle
The Flat Tire display detects a tire pressure Performing initialization
loss while driving and issues a warning if the
When initializing, the set tire inflation pressures
tire pressure has dropped.
serve as reference values in order to detect a
flat tire. Initialization is started by confirming
General information the tire inflation pressures.
The system detects tire pressure loss on the Do not initialize the system when driving with
basis of rotation speed differences between tire chains.
the individual wheels while driving.
In the event of a tire pressure loss, the diame- 1. "CAR"
ter and therefore the rotational speed of the 2. "Vehicle status"
corresponding wheel changes. The difference 3. "Flat Tire Monitor"
will be detected and reported as a flat tire.
4. Turn on drive-ready state and do not drive
The system does not measure the actual infla- off.
tion pressure in the tires.
5. Start the initialization with: "Perform reset"
6. Drive away.
The initialization is completed while driving,
The following prerequisites must be met for
which can be interrupted at any time.
the system; otherwise, reliable message of a
tire pressure loss is not assured: The initialization automatically continues when
driving continues.
▷ After a tire or wheel change, an initialization
was performed with the correct tire inflation
pressure. Messages
▷ After the tire pressure was adjusted to a
new value, an initialization was performed.
General information
When a flat tire is indicated, the DSC Dynamic
Status display Stability Control is turned on, if needed.
The current status of the flat tire monitor can

Safety information
be displayed, e.g., whether the flat tire monitor
is active.
Warning
1. "CAR"
A damaged regular tire with low or missing
2. "Vehicle status"
tire inflation pressure impacts handling, such
3. "Flat Tire Monitor" as steering and braking response. Runflat
The status is displayed. tires can maintain limited stability. There is a
Initialization required vehicle is equipped with normal tires. Follow
An initialization must be performed in the fol-
driving with these tires.
lowing situations:
333
Indication of a flat tire Runflat tires

Safety information
In addition, an icon with a Check Control mes- Warning

sage appears on the Control Display.
The vehicle handles differently when a runflat
Icon Possible cause tire has insufficient or no tire pressure; for in-
stance, reduced directional stability when
braking, braking distances are longer and the
pressure loss.
self-steering properties will change. There is
a risk of accident. Drive moderately and do
not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
Measure
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu- Maximum speed
vers. You may continue driving with a damaged tire
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
standard tires or runflat tires.
Runflat tires are labeled with a circular icon Continued driving with a flat tire
containing the letters RSC marked on the Follow the following when continuing to drive
tire sidewall. with a damaged tire:
Runflat tires, refer to page 319. 1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu-
vers.
Actions in the event of a flat tire 2. Do not exceed a speed of
50 mph/80 km/h.
Standard tires
3. Check the tire inflation pressure in all four
1. Identify the damaged tire. tires at the next opportunity.
To do this, check the tire pressure in all four When the tire inflation pressure in all four
tires, for instance using the tire pressure tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may
display from a tire repair set. not have been initialized. In this case, initi-
When the tire inflation pressure in all four alize the system.
tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may
not have been initialized. In this case, initi- Possible distance travelled with a
alize the system. depressurized tire
If identification of flat tire damage is not The distance travelled for which it may be pos-
possible, please contact a dealer’s service sible to drive safely varies depending on how
center or another qualified service center or the vehicle is loaded and used, e.g., speed,
repair shop. road conditions, outside temperature. The dis-
2. Repair the flat tire, for instance with a tire tance travelled may be less but may also be
repair set or by changing the wheel. more if an economical driving style is used.
If the vehicle is loaded with an average weight
and used under favorable conditions, the dis-
334
tance travelled for which it may be safe to drive

may be up to 50 miles/80 km.
Changing wheels/tires
Vehicle handling with damaged tires General information

Vehicles driven with a damaged tire will handle When using runflat tires or a tire repair set, the
differently, potentially leading to conditions wheel does not always need to be changed
such as the following: immediately in the event of a breakdown when
▷ Greater likelihood of skidding of the vehicle. there is tire pressure loss.
▷ Longer braking distances. If needed, the appropriate tool for a wheel

change, e.g., a jack, is available as an acces-
▷ Changed self-steering properties. sory from a dealer's service center, another
Modify your driving style. Avoid abrupt steering qualified service center or a repair shop.
or driving over obstacles, for instance curbs or
potholes. Safety information
Final tire failure
Warning
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indi-
cate the final failure of a tire. The jack is only provided for short-term lifting
of the vehicle for wheel changes. Even if all
Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of
safety precautions are observed, there is a
the tire could come loose and cause an acci-
risk of the raised vehicle falling, if the jack tips
dent.
over. There is a risk of injury or danger to life.
Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’s When the vehicle is raised with the jack, do
service center or another qualified service cen- not lie under the vehicle and do not switch on
ter or repair shop. the drive-ready state.
System limits
The system could be delayed or malfunction in Warning
Supports such as wooden blocks under the
▷ A natural, even tire pressure loss in all four jack reduce the load-carrying capacity of the
tires will not be recognized. Therefore, jack to bear weight. The load-carrying ca-
check the tire inflation pressure regularly. pacity of the wooden blocks may be ex-
▷ Sudden serious tire damage caused by exceeded and the vehicle may tip over. There is
ternal circumstances cannot be recognized a risk of injury or danger to life. Do not place
in advance. supports under the jack.
▷ The system has not been initialized.
▷ When driving on a snowy or slippery road.
Warning
▷ Sporty driving style: slip on traction wheels,
high lateral acceleration (drifting). The jack, issued by the vehicle manufacturer,
is provided in order to perform a wheel
▷ When driving with tire chains.
change in the event of a breakdown. The jack
is not designed for frequent use; for example,
changing from summer to winter tires. Using
the jack frequently may cause it to become
jammed or damaged. There is a risk of injury
335
and risk of damage to property. Only use the Securing the vehicle against rolling
jack to change an emergency or spare wheel away
in the event of a breakdown.
General information
The vehicle manufacturer recommends to ad-
Warning ditionally secure the vehicle against rolling
On soft, uneven or slippery ground, for exam- away when changing a wheel.
ple snow, ice, tiles, etc., the jack can slip
away. There is a risk of injury. If possible, On a level surface
change the wheel on a flat, solid, and slip-re-
sistant surface.
Warning
The jack is optimized for lifting the vehicle
and for the jacking points on the vehicle only.
There is a risk of injury. Do not lift any other
vehicle or cargo using the jack.
Place wheel chocks or other suitable objects in
front and behind the wheel that is diagonal to
Warning the wheel to be changed.
When the jack is not inserted into the jacking
point provided for this purpose, the vehicle On a slight downhill gradient
may be damaged or the jack may slip when it
is being cranked up. There is a risk of injury
or risk of damage to property. When cranking
up the jack, ensure that it is inserted in the
jacking point next to the wheel well.
Warning
A vehicle that is raised on a jack may fall off
of the jack if lateral forces are exerted on it.
If you need to change a wheel on a slight
There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to
downhill grade, place chocks and other suita-
property. While the vehicle is raised, do not
ble objects, for instance rocks, under the
exert lateral effort on the vehicle or pull
wheels of both the front and rear axles against
abruptly on the vehicle. Have a stuck wheel
the rolling direction.
removed by a dealer’s service center or an-
other qualified service center or repair shop.
336
Lug bolt lock Preparing the vehicle

▷ Park the vehicle on solid and non-slip
Principle ground at a safe distance from road traffic.
The wheel lug bolts have a special coding. The ▷ Turn on the hazard warning system.
lug bolts can only be released with the adapter
which matches the coding.
▷ Engage a gear or move the selector lever to
Overview position P.
The adapter of the lug bolt lock is in the on- ▷ As soon as permitted by the traffic flow,
board vehicle tool kit or in a storage compart- have all vehicle occupants get out and
ment close to the onboard vehicle tool kit. make sure that they remain outside the
▷ Depending on the vehicle equipment, get
wheel change tools and, if necessary, the
emergency wheel from the vehicle.
▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle or
portable hazard warning light at an appro-
priate distance.
▷ Secure the vehicle additionally against roll-
ing away.
▷ Lug lock bolt, arrow 1. ▷ Loosen the lug bolts a half turn.
▷ Adapter, arrow 2.
Jacking points
Unscrewing
1. Attach the adapter to the lug lock bolt.
2. Unscrew the lug lock bolt.
3. Remove the adapter after unscrewing the
lug bolt.
Screwing on
1. Attach the adapter to the lug lock bolt. If
necessary, turn the adapter until it fits on The jacking points are located at the indicated
the lug lock bolt. positions.
2. Screw on the lug lock bolt. The tightening
torque is 101 lbs ft/140 Nm.
3. Remove the adapter and stow it after
screwing on the lug bolt.
337
Jacking up the vehicle 4. Take your hand away from the jack as soon
as the jack is under load and continue turn-
ing the jack crank handle or lever with one
Warning hand.
Hands and fingers can be jammed when us- 5. Make sure that the car jack foot stands ver-
ing the jack. There is a risk of injury. Comply tically and at a right angle beneath the jack-
with the described hand position and do not ing point.
change this position while using the jack.
1. Hold the vehicle jack with one hand, ar-

row 1, and grasp the jack crank handle or
lever with your other hand, arrow 2.
6. Make sure that the car jack foot stands ver-

tically and perpendicularly beneath the
jacking point after extending the vehicle
jack.
2. Insert the jack into the rectangular recess of

the jacking point closest to the wheel to be
changed.
7. Crank the vehicle up, until the vehicle jack is

with the entire surface on the ground and
the relevant wheel is maximum 1.2 in-
ches/3 cm above ground.
3. Extend the jack by turning the jack crank
handle or lever clockwise. Mounting a wheel
Mount one emergency wheel only, as required.
1. Unscrew the lug bolts.
2. Remove the wheel.
3. Put the new wheel or emergency wheel on
and screw in at least two lug bolts in a
crosswise pattern until hand-tight.
338
When non-original light-alloy wheels of the

vehicle manufacturer are mounted, the ac-
companying lug bolts may have to be used
as well.
4. Hand-tighten the remaining lug bolts and
tighten all lug bolts well in a crosswise pat-
tern.
5. Turn the jack crank handle counterclock-
wise to retract the jack and lower the vehi-
cle.
6. Remove the jack and stow it securely.
After the wheel change

1. Tighten the lug bolts crosswise. The tight-
ening torque is 101 lbs ft/140 Nm.
2. Stow the faulty wheel in the cargo area, if
necessary.
3. Check tire inflation pressure at the next op-
portunity and correct as needed.
4. Re-initialize the flat tire monitor or reset the
Tire Pressure Monitor.
5. Check to make sure the lug bolts are tight
with a calibrated torque wrench.
6. Have the damaged tire renewed at the
nearest dealer's service center or another
339
MOBILITY Engine compartment
Engine compartment
Overview
6-cylinder engine
1 Filler neck for washer fluid 5 Coolant reservoir, engine

2 Jump-starting, positive battery terminal 6 Jump-starting, negative battery terminal
3 Oil filler neck 7 Vehicle identification number
4 Coolant reservoir, auxiliary cooling
340
Engine compartment MOBILITY
8-cylinder engine
1 Filler neck for washer fluid 5 Oil filler neck

2 Jump-starting, positive battery terminal 6 Jump-starting, negative battery terminal
3 Coolant reservoir, engine 7 Vehicle identification number
4 Coolant reservoir, auxiliary cooling
Hood
Warning
The engine compartment accommodates
Safety information
moving components. Certain components in
the engine compartment can also move with
Warning the vehicle switched off, for instance the radi-
Improperly executed work in the engine com- ator fan. There is a risk of injury. Do not reach
partment can damage vehicle components into the area of moving parts. Keep articles of
and impair vehicle functions. There is a risk of clothing and hair away from moving parts.
an accident and damage to property. Have
work in the engine compartment performed
by a dealer’s service center or another quali- Warning
fied service center or repair shop. There are protruding parts, for instance lock-
ing hooks, on the inside of the hood. There is
a risk of injury. If the hood is open, pay atten-
tion to protruding parts and keep clear of
these areas.
341
MOBILITY Engine compartment
Opening hood
Warning 1. Pull lever, arrow 1. Hood is unlocked.
An incorrectly locked hood can open while
driving and restrict visibility. There is a risk of
accident. Stop immediately and correctly
close the hood.
Warning
Body parts can be jammed when opening
and closing the hood. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the area of movement of 2. After the lever is released, pull the lever
hood is clear during opening and closing. again, arrow 2.
Hood can be opened.
3. Be careful of protruding parts on the hood.
NOTICE
Folded-away wipers can be jammed when Closing the hood
the hood is opened. There is a risk of dam-
age. Make sure that the wipers with the wiper
blades mounted are folded down onto the
windshield before opening the hood.
NOTICE
When the hood is closed, it must engage on
both sides. Pressing again can damage the
Energetically close the hood from approx.
hood. There is a risk of damage to property,
20 in/50 cm.
among other potential damage. Open the
hood again and then close it energetically. The hood must engage on both sides.
Avoid pressing again.
342
Operating materials MOBILITY
Operating materials
functions and systems, the applicable laws Ethanol should meet the following quality
and regulations must be observed. standards:
US: ASTM 4806–xx
Fuel recommendation CAN: CGSB-3.511–xx

xx: comply with the current valid standard in
each case.
General information
The use of fuels of minimum quality has no in-
Depending on the region, many filling stations fluence on the service life of the engine.
sell fuel that has been customized to winter or
summer conditions. Fuel that is available in Safety information
winter, for instance helps make a cold start
easier.
CAUTION
Gasoline The use of poor-quality fuels may result in
harmful engine deposits or damage. Addi-
General information tionally, problems relating to drivability, start-
For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline should ing and stalling, especially under certain envi-
be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur content. ronmental conditions such as high ambient
temperature and high altitude, may occur.
Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as
containing metal must not be used. If drivability problems are encountered, we
recommend switching to a high quality gaso-
Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of
line brand and a higher octane grade — AKI
25 %, i. e. E10 or E25, may be used for refuel-
number — for a few tank fills. To avoid harm-
ing.
ful engine deposits, it is highly recommended
To achieve nominal values for mileage and to purchase gasoline from Top Tier retailers.
consumption, follow the specified fuel quality in
Failure to comply with these recommenda-
the sales literature.
tions may result in the need for additional
maintenance.
343
MOBILITY Operating materials
If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rat-

NOTICE ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds
when starting at high external temperatures.
Even small quantities of the wrong fuel or
This has no effect on the engine life.
wrong fuel additives can damage the fuel
system and engine. Furthermore, the cata-
lytic converter is permanently damaged.
other potential damage. Do not refuel or add
the following in the case of gasoline engines:
▷ Leaded gasoline.
▷ Metallic additives, for instance manga-
nese or iron.
Do not press the Start/Stop button after refu-
eling with the wrong fuel. Contact a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service Engine oil
General information
NOTICE The engine oil consumption is dependent on
your driving style and driving conditions.
Fuel that does not comply with the minimum
quality can compromise engine function or Therefore, regularly check the engine oil level
cause engine damage. There is a risk of after refueling by taking a detailed measure-
damage to property, among other potential ment.
damage. Do not fill with fuel that does not The engine oil consumption can increase in
comply with the minimum quality. the following situations, for instance:
▷ Sporty driving style.
▷ Break-in of the engine.
NOTICE ▷ Idle operation of the engine.
Incorrect fuels can damage the fuel system ▷ With use of engine oil types that are classi-
and the engine. There is a risk of damage to fied as not suitable.
property, among other potential damage. Do
not use fuels with a higher ethanol content Different Check Control messages appear on
than recommended. Do not refuel with fuels the Control Display depending on the engine
containing methanol, e.g. M5 to M100. oil level.
The vehicle manufacturer recommends that
you have a dealer's service center or another
Recommended gas quality qualified service center or repair shop change
BMW recommends AKI 91. the engine oil.
M Performance model:
BMW recommends AKI 93.
Minimum fuel grade

BMW recommends AKI 87.
344
Safety information Monitoring
Principle
NOTICE
The engine oil level is monitored electronically
An engine oil level that is too low causes en- while driving and can be shown on the Control
gine damage. There is a risk of damage to Display.
property, among other potential damage. Im-
If the engine oil level is outside its permissible
mediately add engine oil.
operating range, a Check Control message is
displayed.
NOTICE Functional requirements

Too much engine oil can damage the engine A current measured value is available after ap-
or the catalytic converter. There is a risk of prox. 30 minutes of normal driving.
damage. Do not add too much engine oil. Displaying the engine oil level
When too much engine oil is added, have the
1. "CAR"
engine oil level corrected by a dealer’s serv-
ice center or another qualified service center 2. "Vehicle status"
or repair shop. 3. "Engine oil level"
The engine oil level is displayed.
NOTICE System limits

Engine oil that is not changed in timely fash- When making frequent short-distance trips or
ion can cause increased engine wear and using a sporty driving style, it may not be pos-
thus engine damage. There is a risk of dam- sible to calculate a measured value. In this
age to property. It is recommended that you case, the measured value for the last, suffi-
do not exceed the service intervals indicated ciently long trip is displayed.
in the vehicle.
Detailed measurement
Electronic oil measurement Principle

The engine oil level is checked when the vehi-
General information cle is stationary and displayed via a scale.
The electronic oil measurement has two If the engine oil level is outside its permissible
measuring principles: operating range, a Check Control message is
▷ Monitoring. displayed.
▷ Detailed measurement.
General information
When making frequent short-distance trips or
During the measurement, the idle speed is in-
using a sporty driving style, for instance when
creased somewhat.
cornering aggressively, regularly perform a de-
tailed measurement.
345
▷ Vehicle is parked in a horizontal position. NOTICE
▷ Selector lever in selector lever position N or An engine oil level that is too low causes en-
P and accelerator pedal not depressed. gine damage. There is a risk of damage to
▷ The drive-ready state is switched on by property, among other potential damage. Im-
pressing the Start/Stop button. mediately add engine oil.
▷ The engine is at operating temperature.
Performing a detailed measurement NOTICE

1. "CAR" Too much engine oil can damage the engine
or the catalytic converter. There is a risk of
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Engine oil level" damage. Do not add too much engine oil.
4. "Engine oil measurement" When too much engine oil is added, have the
5. "Start measurement" engine oil level corrected by a dealer’s serv-
ice center or another qualified service center
The engine oil level is checked and displayed
or repair shop.
via a scale.
Adding engine oil Overview

The oil filler neck is located in the engine com-
General information partment.
Only add engine oil when the message is dis- Additional information:
played in the instrument cluster. The top-up
For an overview, refer to page 340.
quantity is indicated in the message shown on
Adding engine oil
Only add suitable types of engine oil.
1. Opening the hood.
Safely park the vehicle and switch off drive-
ready state before adding engine oil. Opening, refer to page 342.
Take care not to add too much engine oil. 2. Open the lid counterclockwise.
Safety information
Warning
Operating materials, for instance oils,
greases, coolants, fuels, can contain harmful
ingredients. There is a risk of injury or danger
to life. Follow the instructions on the contain-
ers. Avoid the contact of articles of clothing,
3. Add engine oil.
skin or eyes with operating materials. Do not
refill operating materials into different bottles. 4. Close the lid.
Store operating materials out of reach of chil-
dren.
346
Engine oil types to add gine oil with the following oil rating can be
added:
General information Oil specification
The engine oil grade is critical for the service
API SL.
life of the engine.
Only add with the types of engine oil which are API SM.
listed.
API SN.
Safety information
Viscosity grades
When selecting an engine oil, make sure that
NOTICE the engine oil has a suitable viscosity grade.
Oil additives can damage the engine. There The suitable viscosity grade is indicated on a
is a risk of damage to property, among other sign in the engine compartment.
potential damage. Do not use oil additives.
Viscosity grades
SAE 0W-20.
NOTICE SAE 0W-30.
Incorrect engine oil can cause malfunctions in
the engine or damage it. There is a risk of The viscosity grade SAE 0W-20 is not suitable
damage to property, among other potential for gasoline engine 50i.
damage. When selecting an engine oil, make
More information about suitable oil specifica-
sure that the engine oil has the correct oil
tions and viscosity grades of engine oils can be
specification.
requested from a dealer’s service center or an-
Suitable engine oil types
Up to 1 US quart/liter of an engine oil with the
following oil specification can be topped up:
Gasoline engine
BMW Longlife-01 FE.
BMW Longlife-14 FE+.
BMW Longlife-17 FE+.
The BMW Longlife-14 FE+ and BMW Long-

life-17 FE+ oil specifications are not suitable for
Coolant
the 50i gasoline engine.
General information
Alternative engine oil types Coolant consists of water and coolant additive.
If an engine oil suitable for continuous use is Not all commercially available additives are
not available, up to 1 US quart/liter of an en- suitable for the vehicle. The vehicle manufac-
turer recommends using coolant with the
347
BMW LC-18 specification. Do not mix additives For an overview, refer to page 340.
of different colors. Observe the water - additive
mixture ratio of 50:50. Information about suita- Checking the coolant level
ble additives is available from a dealer’s serv- 1. Let the engine cool down.
ice center or another qualified service center or
repair shop. 2. Opening the hood.
Opening, refer to page 342.
Safety information 3. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly
counterclockwise to allow any excess pres-
sure to dissipate, then open it.
Warning
4. Open the coolant reservoir lid.
With the engine hot and the cooling system
open, coolant can escape and lead to scald- 5. The coolant level is correct if it lies between
ing. There is a risk of injury. Only open the the minimum and maximum marks in the
cooling system with the engine cooled down. filler neck.
Warning
Additives are harmful and incorrect additives
can damage the engine. There is a risk of in-
jury and risk of damage to property. Do not
allow additives to come into contact with skin,
eyes or articles of clothing. Use suitable addi-
tives only.
6. Close the lid.
Coolant level Adding coolant

1. Let the engine cool down.
General information
2. Opening the hood.
Depending on the motorization, there are up to
Opening, refer to page 342.
two coolant reservoirs in the engine compart-
ment. Check and add the coolant levels on a 3. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly
regular basis. counterclockwise to allow any excess pres-
sure to dissipate, then open it.
The coolant may be overfilled in the coolant
reservoir when the vehicle is delivered from the 4. Open the coolant reservoir lid.
factory. The normal coolant level is achieved 5. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up
by operating the vehicle for a longer period. to the specified fill level; do not overfill.
The coolant level is indicated using minimum 6. Close the lid.
and maximum marks in the filler neck of the 7. Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi-
coolant reservoir. nated as soon as possible.
Depending on the motorization, the coolant
reservoir is located on the right side or the left
side of the engine compartment.
348
Disposal
Warning
Comply with the relevant environmen-
tal protection regulations when dispos- Washer fluid can ignite and catch fire on con-
ing of coolant and coolant additives. tact with hot engine parts. There is a risk of
injury or risk of damage to property. Only add
washer fluid when the engine is cooled down.
Next, fully close the lid of the washer fluid
Washer fluid reservoir.
General information
All windshield washer jets are supplied from NOTICE
one tank. Silicon-containing additives in the washer
Use a mixture of tap water and windshield fluid for the water-repelling effect on the win-
washer concentrate. If desired, a windshield dows can lead to damage to the washing
washer concentrate containing antifreeze can system. There is a risk of damage to prop-
be used. erty, among other potential damage. Do not
Recommended minimum fill quantity: add silicon-containing additives to the
0.2 US gal/1 liter. washer fluid.
Safety information
NOTICE
Warning Mixing different windshield washer fluid con-

centrates or antifreeze can damage the car
Some types of antifreeze can contain harmful wash. There is a risk of damage to property,
substances and are flammable. There is a among other potential damage. Do not mix
risk of fire and an injury hazard. Follow the in- different windshield washer fluid concen-
structions on the containers. Keep antifreeze trates or antifreeze. Follow the information
away from ignition sources. Do not refill oper- and mixture ratios provided on the contain-
ating materials into different bottles. Store ers.
operating materials out of reach of children.
United States: the washer fluid mixture ratio
is regulated by the U.S. EPA and many indi- Overview
vidual states; do not exceed the allowable
washer fluid dilution ratio limits that apply.
Follow the usage instructions on the washer
fluid container.
Use of BMW’s Windshield Washer Concen-
trate or the equivalent is recommended.
The washer fluid reservoir is located in the en-

gine compartment.
349
Malfunction
The use of undiluted windshield washer fluid
concentrate or alcohol-based antifreeze can
lead to incorrect readings at temperatures be-
low +5 ℉/-15 ℃.
350
Maintenance MOBILITY
Maintenance
Vehicle features and options General information
Information on service notifications can be dis-
This chapter describes all standard, country- played on the Control Display.
specific and optional features offered with the Additional information:
Service notifications, refer to page 164.
versions. This also applies to safety-related Service data in the vehicle key
functions and systems. When using these Information on the service notifications is con-
functions and systems, the applicable laws tinuously stored in the vehicle key. The service
and regulations must be observed. center can read this data out and suggest a
maintenance scope for the vehicle.
Therefore, hand the service advisor the vehicle
BMW maintenance system key with which the vehicle was driven most re-
cently.
The maintenance system provides service no-
tifications and thereby provides support in Stationary periods
maintaining road safety and the operational
reliability of the vehicle. Stationary periods during which the vehicle
battery was disconnected are not taken into
In some cases, scopes and intervals of the
account.
maintenance system may vary according to
the country version. Replacement work, spare If this occurs, have a dealer's service center or
parts, fuels and lubricants, and wear materials another qualified service center or repair shop
are calculated separately. Further information update the time-dependent maintenance pro-
is available from a dealer's service center or cedures, such as checking brake fluid and, if
another qualified service center or repair shop. necessary, changing the engine oil and the mi-
crofilter/activated-charcoal filter.
Condition Based Service

Maintenance Booklet for US
Principle Models
Condition Based Service determines the main-
Please consult your Maintenance Booklet for
tenance recommendation using sensors and
additional information on the performance of
special algorithms that take into account the
service and maintenance work.
operating conditions of the vehicle.
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
The system makes it possible to adapt the
that maintenance and repair be performed by
amount of maintenance corresponding to your
a service center or another qualified service
user profile.
center or repair shop. Records of regular main-
tenance and repair work should be retained.
351
MOBILITY Maintenance
Diagnostic socket Emissions

▷ The warning light lights up:
General information Emissions are deteriorating. Have
Devices connected to the diagnostic socket will the vehicle checked as soon as pos-
trigger the alarm system after locking the vehi- sible.
cle. ▷ The warning light flashes under certain cir-
Remove devices connected to the diagnostic cumstances:
socket before locking the vehicle. This indicates that there is excessive misfir-
ing in the engine.
Safety information Reduce the vehicle speed and have the
system checked immediately; otherwise,
serious engine misfiring within a brief pe-
NOTICE
riod can seriously damage emission control
The socket for Onboard Diagnosis is an intri- components, in particular the catalytic con-
cate component intended to be used in converter.
junction with specialized equipment to check
the vehicle’s primary emissions system. Im-
proper use of the socket for Onboard Diagno-
sis, or contact with the socket for Onboard
Diagnosis for other than its intended pur-
pose, can cause vehicle malfunctions and
creates risks of personal and property dam-
age. Given the foregoing, the manufacture of
your vehicle strongly recommends that ac-
cess to the socket for Onboard Diagnosis be
limited to a dealer's service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop or
other persons that have the specialized train-
ing and equipment for purposes of properly
utilizing the socket for Onboard Diagnosis.
Position
There is a diagnostic socket on the driver’s

side for reading out vehicle data.
352
Replacing components MOBILITY
Replacing components
Vehicle features and options in or switch on the wiper without a wiper
blade installed.
series. It also describes features and functions NOTICE
that are not necessarily available in your vehi- Folded-away wipers can be jammed when
cle, e.g., due to the selected options or country the hood is opened. There is a risk of dam-
versions. This also applies to safety-related age to property, among other potential dam-
functions and systems. When using these age. Make sure that the wipers with the wiper
functions and systems, the applicable laws blades mounted are folded down onto the
and regulations must be observed. windshield before opening the hood.
Onboard vehicle tool kit Replacing the wiper blades

1. To change the wiper blades, bring wipers
into fold-out position.
Fold-out position of the wipers, refer to
page 143.
2. Lift the wiper off of the windshield and hold.
The onboard vehicle tool kit is located in the

left storage compartment of the cargo area.
Wiper blades
3. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull out the
Safety information wiper blade, arrow 2.
NOTICE
The window may sustain damage if the wiper
falls onto it without the wiper blade installed.
other potential damage. Hold the wiper firmly
when changing the wiper blade. Do not fold
353
MOBILITY Replacing components
4. Insert the new wiper blade and press it on Headlight glass

until it you hear it snap into the holder.
The inside of the headlight glass can fog up in
5. Fold in the wipers. cool or humid weather. When driving with the
lights switched on, the condensation evapo-
rates after a short time. The headlight glass
Lights and bulbs does not need to be changed.
If despite driving with the headlights switched
General information on, increasing moisture forms, for instance wa-
Lights and bulbs make an essential contribu- ter droplets in the light, have the headlights
tion to driving safety. checked.
All headlights and lights are made using LED
or laser technology.
Vehicle battery
Some items of equipment use light-emitting
diodes installed behind a cover as a light
source. These light-emitting diodes are related
General information
to conventional lasers and are officially desig- The battery is maintenance-free.
nated as Class 1 light-emitting diodes. More information about the battery can be re-
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends quested from a dealer's service center or an-
that you let a dealer's service center or another other qualified service center or repair shop.
qualified service center or repair shop perform
the work in case of a malfunction. Safety information
Safety information
DANGER
Contact with live components can lead to an
Warning electric shock. There is a risk of injury or dan-
Focused laser light can irritate or perma- ger to life. Do not touch any components that
nently damage the retina of the eye. There is are under voltage.
a risk of injury. The manufacturer of the vehi-
cle recommends that the work on the lighting
system including bulb exchange be per- Warning
formed by a dealer’s service center or an-
Vehicle batteries that are not compatible can
damage vehicle systems and impair vehicle
functions. There is a risk of an accident and
damage to property. Only vehicle batteries
Warning that are compatible with your vehicle type
Intensive brightness can irritate or damage should be installed in your vehicle. Informa-
the retina of the eye. There is a risk of injury. tion on compatible vehicle batteries is availa-
Do not look directly into the headlights or ble at your dealer’s service center.
other light sources. Do not remove the LED
covers.
Register the battery to the vehicle
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
that you have a dealer's service center or an-
354
Replacing components MOBILITY
other qualified service center or repair shop Power interruption

register the vehicle battery to the vehicle after
After a power interruption, some equipment
the battery has been changed. Once the bat-
needs to be newly initialized or individual set-
tery has been registered again, all comfort fea-
tings updated, for example:
tures will be available without limitation and
any Check Control messages displayed which ▷ With Memory function: store the positions
relate to comfort features will disappear. again.
▷ Time: update.
Charging the battery ▷ Date: update.
General information Disposing of old batteries

Make sure that the battery is always suffi- Have old batteries disposed of by a
ciently charged to guarantee that the battery dealer's service center or another
remains usable for its full service life. qualified service center or repair shop
A discharged battery is indicated by a or take them to a collection point.
red indicator light. Maintain the filled battery in an upright position
for transport and storage. Secure the battery
Charge the battery when acceleration is insuffi- so that it does not tip over during transport.
cient.
The following circumstances can have a nega-
tive effect on the performance of the battery: Fuses
▷ Frequent short-distance drives.
▷ Stationary periods of more than one month. General information
The fuses are located at different places in the
Safety information
vehicle.
NOTICE Safety information

Battery chargers that charge the vehicle bat-
tery via sockets or cigarette lighters in the ve-
Warning
hicle may overload or damage the 12 V elec-
trical system. There is a risk of damage to Incorrect and repaired fuses can overload
property, among other potential damage. electrical lines and components. There is a
Only connect battery chargers for the vehicle risk of fire. Never attempt to repair a blown
battery to the jump-start terminals in the en- fuse. Do not replace a nonworking fuse with a
gine compartment. substitute of another color or amperage rat-
ing.
Charging the battery

In the car's interior
Charge the battery only when the engine is off
and via the jump-start terminals in the engine The fuses are located in the car's interior in the
compartment. front passenger footwell behind a cover.
Jump-start terminals, refer to page 360.
355
MOBILITY Replacing components
Loosen fasteners, arrows, and open cover.
The fuse box is located on the front right.
In the cargo area

The fuses are located in the cargo area on the
right side behind a cover.
Remove the cover.
The fuse box may be located behind the sound

insulation.
Information on the fuse layout as well as the
positions of other fuse boxes is available on
the Internet: fusecard.bmw.com.
Additional fuse boxes

Additional fuse boxes are located in the vehi-
cle. In the case of a malfunction, contact a
Replacing fuses
The vehicle manufacturer recommends that
you have a dealer's service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop replace
the fuses.
356
Breakdown Assistance MOBILITY
Breakdown Assistance
Vehicle features and options Warning triangle
The warning triangle is located in the cargo
area.
Hazard warning flashers
Release the hook and loop fastener to remove
it.
First-aid kit
General information
Depending on the vehicle equipment and na-
tional-market version, the vehicle is equipped
with a first-aid kit.
The button is located in the center console.
Some of the articles have a limited service life.
The red light in the button flashes when the
hazard warning flashers are activated. Check the expiration dates of the contents reg-
ularly and replace any expired items promptly.
Storage
Storage for the first-aid kit is provided in the

left storage compartment of the cargo area.
357
MOBILITY Breakdown Assistance
BMW Roadside Assistance transmitted automatically. It may be necessary

to approve this on the Control Display.
Principle Teleservice Help

Contact the BMW Group Roadside Assistance Depending on the country, Teleservice Help
if assistance is needed in the event of a break- enables an in-depth diagnosis of the vehicle by
down. BMW Roadside Assistance via wireless trans-
mission.
General information You can launch Teleservice Help by requesting
In the event of a breakdown, data on the vehi- it through BMW Roadside Assistance.
cle's condition is transmitted to the BMW
Roadside Assistance. 1. Park the vehicle in a safe place.
There are various ways of contacting BMW 2. Set the parking brake.
Roadside Assistance. 3. Control Display is switched on.
▷ Via a Check Control message. 4. Confirm Teleservice Help.
Supplementary text messages, refer to
page 155.
BMW Accident Assistance
▷ Via a call with a mobile phone.
▷ Via the BMW app.
Principle
Functional requirements BMW Group Accident Assistance can be con-
tacted if assistance is needed in the event of
▷ Active ConnectedDrive contract, equipment an accident.
with intelligent emergency call or BMW
ConnectedDrive services.
General information
▷ Cellular network reception.
If the vehicle sensors detect a minor to moder-
▷ Standby state is switched on. ately severe accident, which did not deploy any
airbags, a Check Control message appears on
Starting manually the instrument cluster. In addition, a text mes-
If the vehicle is equipped with Teleservices, sage appears on the Control Display.
support is offered through Teleservice Diagno- When BMW Accident Assistance is triggered,
sis. data on the vehicle's condition is sent to BMW.
1. "APPS"
2. "Installed apps"
▷ Active ConnectedDrive contract, equipment
3. "BMW Assist"
with intelligent emergency call or BMW
4. If necessary, "BMW Roadside Assistance" ConnectedDrive services.
A voice connection is established. ▷ Cellular network reception.
Teleservice Diagnosis
Teleservice Diagnosis enables the wireless
transmission of detailed vehicle data that is
important for vehicle diagnosis. This data is
358
Starting BMW Accident Assistance The Intelligent Assist system establishes a

connection with the BMW Response Center.
If an accident is detected automatically For technical reasons, the Emergency Call
A text message relating to BMW Accident As- cannot be guaranteed under unfavorable con-
sistance appears on the Control Display. ditions.
The connection can be established directly:

Overview
"Contact accident assistance"
The Check Control message for BMW Accident
Assistance can also be called up from the
stored Check Control messages for a certain
length of time.
Check Control, refer to page 154.
Starting manually
BMW Accident Assistance can also be con- SOS button.
tacted independently of the automatic accident
detection function.
1. "APPS" Functional requirements

2. "Installed apps" ▷ Standby state is switched on.
3. "BMW Assist" ▷ The Assist system is functional.
4. "BMW Accident Assistance" ▷ If the vehicle is equipped with intelligent
emergency call: the integrated SIM card in
Follow the displays on the Control Display.
the vehicle has been activated.
A voice connection is established.
Automatic triggering
Emergency Call Under certain conditions, for instance if the air-
bags deploy, an emergency call is automati-
cally initiated immediately after an accident of
Intelligent emergency call corresponding severity. Automatic Collision
Notification is not affected by pressing the SOS
Principle button.
In case of an emergency, an emergency call
can be triggered automatically by the system Manual triggering
or manually.
1. Tap the cover flap.
2. Press and hold the SOS button until the
General information
LED in the area of the button illuminates
Depending on the vehicle equipment and na- green.
tional-market version, the vehicle is equipped
▷ The LED is illuminated green when an
with an Assist system.
emergency call has been initiated.
Only press the SOS button in an emergency.
359
If a cancel prompt appears on the control and two jumper cables. Only use jumper ca-
display, the emergency call can be aborted. bles with fully insulated clamp handles.
If the situation allows, wait in your vehicle
until the voice connection has been estab- Safety information
lished.
▷ The LED flashes green when a connection DANGER
to the BMW Response Center has been es-
Contact with live components can lead to an
tablished.
electric shock. There is a risk of injury or dan-
The BMW Response Center then makes ger to life. Do not touch any components that
contact with the occupants of the vehicle are under voltage.
and initiates further steps to help.
Even if you are unable to respond, the
BMW Response Center can take further
Warning
steps to help you under certain circumstan-
ces. If the jumper cables are connected in the in-
correct order, spark formation may occur.
For this purpose, data that serves to deter-
There is a risk of injury. Pay attention to the
mine the necessary rescue measures, for
correct order during connection.
instance the current position of the vehicle
when it can be determined, is transmitted
to the BMW Response Center.
NOTICE
Even if the BMW Response Center is no
longer heard through the loudspeakers, the In the case of body contact between the two
BMW Response Center may still be able to vehicles, a short circuit can occur during
hear the occupants of the vehicle. jump-starting. There is a risk of damage to
property, among other potential damage.
The BMW Response Center ends the emer-
Make sure that no body contact occurs.
gency call.
Malfunction Preparation
The function of the emergency call may be im-
1. Check whether the battery of the other ve-
paired.
hicle has a voltage of 12 volts. The voltage
The LED in the area of the SOS button blinks information can be found on the battery.
for approximately 30 seconds. A Check Control
2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi-
message is displayed.
cle.
Have it checked by a dealer's service center or
3. Switch off any electrical components in
both vehicles.
Jump-starting Jump-start terminals

The jump-start terminal in the engine com-
partment acts as the positive battery terminal.
General information
A special connection on the body in the engine
If the battery is discharged, the engine can be
compartment acts as the negative battery ter-
started using the battery of another vehicle
minal.
360
Additional information: Check the battery and recharge, if needed.

Overview of engine compartment, refer to
page 340.
Open the cover of the positive battery terminal.
Tow-starting and towing
Connecting the cables Safety information

Before you begin, switch off all unnecessary
electronic systems/components, such as the Warning
radio, on the assisting and receiving vehicles. Due to system limits, individual functions can
1. Open the lid of the jump-start terminal. malfunction during tow-starting/towing with
the Intelligent Safety systems activated.
2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive
jumper cable to the positive battery termi-
nal, or to the corresponding jump-start ter-
towing.
minal of the vehicle providing assistance.
3. Attach the terminal clamp on the other end
of the cable to the positive battery terminal, Steptronic transmission:
or to the corresponding jump-start terminal transporting the vehicle
of the vehicle to be started.
4. Attach one terminal clamp of the negative General information
jumper cable to the negative battery termi-
The vehicle is not permitted to be towed.
nal, or to the corresponding engine or body
ground of assisting vehicle.
Safety information
5. Attach the second terminal clamp to the
negative battery terminal, or to the corre-
sponding engine or body ground of the ve- NOTICE
hicle to be started. The vehicle can be damaged when towing
the vehicle with a single lifted axle. There is a
Starting the engine risk of damage to property, among other po-
Never use spray fluids to start the engine. tential damage. The vehicle should only be
transported on a loading platform.
1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle and
let it run for several minutes at an increased
idle speed.
NOTICE
2. Start the engine of the vehicle that is to be
The vehicle can become damaged when lift-
started in the usual way.
ing and securing it.
If the first attempt to start the engine is not
successful, wait a few minutes before mak-
other potential damage.
ing another attempt in order to allow the
discharged battery to recharge. ▷ Lift the vehicle using suitable means.
3. Let both engines run for several minutes. ▷ Do not lift or secure the vehicle by its tow
fitting, body parts, or suspension parts.
4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the reverse
order.
361
Pushing the vehicle

To remove a broken-down vehicle from the NOTICE
hazardous area, it can be pushed for a short If the tow bar or tow rope is attached incor-
distance. rectly, damage to other vehicle parts can oc-
Additional information: cur. There is a risk of damage to property,
among other potential damage. Correctly at-
Rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to
tach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow fitting.
page 146.
Tow truck Tow bar

The tow fittings used should be on the same
side on both vehicles.
If it is impossible to avoid mounting the tow
bar at an inclination, note the following:
▷ Free movement is limited when cornering.
▷ The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it
is secured with an inclination.
The vehicle should only be transported on a

Tow rope
loading platform. Observe the following notes when using the
tow rope:
▷ Use nylon ropes or straps, which will enable
Towing other vehicles
the vehicle to be towed without jerking.
General information ▷ Make sure the tow rope is not twisted when
fastening.
Switch on the hazard warning system, de-
pending on local regulations. ▷ Check the attachment of the tow fitting and
tow rope in regular intervals.
If the electrical system has failed, clearly iden-
tify the vehicle being towed by placing a sign or ▷ Do not exceed a towing speed of
a warning triangle in the rear window. 30 mph/50 km/h.
▷ Do not exceed a towing distance of
Safety information 3 miles/5 km.
▷ When driving off to tow the vehicle, make
sure that the tow rope is taut.
Warning
If the approved gross vehicle weight of the
towing vehicle is lighter than the vehicle to be
towed, the tow fitting can tear off or it will not
be possible to control handling. There is a
risk of accident. Make sure that the gross ve-
hicle weight of the towing vehicle is heavier
than the vehicle to be towed.
362
Tow fitting Safety information
General information NOTICE

If the tow fitting is not used as intended, there
may be damage to the vehicle or to the tow
fitting. There is a risk of damage to property,
among other potential damage. Follow the
notes on using the tow fitting.
Screw thread for tow fitting
The screw-in tow fitting should always be car-

ried in the vehicle.
The tow fitting can be screwed in at the front
or rear of the vehicle.
The tow fitting is found in the onboard vehicle
tool kit.
Observe the following notes when using the
tow fitting:
Press on the mark on the edge of the cover to
▷ Use only the tow fitting provided with the
push it out.
vehicle.
▷ Turn the tow fitting at least 5 turns clock-
wise and screw it in as far as it will go. If Tow-starting
necessary, tighten with a suitable object. Do not tow-start the vehicle.
▷ After use, unscrew the tow fitting counter- Start the engine by jump-starting, if possible.
clockwise.
Have the cause of the starting difficulties cor-
▷ Use the tow fitting for towing on paved rected by a dealer’s service center or another
roads only. qualified service center or repair shop.
▷ Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, for Additional information:
instance do not lift the vehicle by the tow
Jump-starting, refer to page 360.
fitting.
▷ Check the attachment of the tow fitting in
regular intervals.
Onboard vehicle tool kit, refer to page 353.
363
MOBILITY Vehicle Care
Vehicle Care
Vehicle features and options Steam cleaner and high pressure
cleaner
specific and optional features offered with the Safety information
NOTICE
versions. This also applies to safety-related When cleaning with high pressure cleaners,
functions and systems. When using these components can be damaged due to the
functions and systems, the applicable laws pressure or temperatures being too high.
and regulations must be observed. There is a risk of damage to property, among
other potential damage. Maintain sufficient
distance and do not spray too long continu-
Washing the vehicle ously. Follow the operating instructions for
the high pressure cleaners.
General information
Regularly remove foreign bodies such as Distances and temperature
leaves in the area below the windshield when ▷ Maximum temperature: 140 ℉/60 ℃.
the hood is raised.
▷ Minimum distance from sensors, cameras,
Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly in seals and lights: 12 inches/30 cm.
winter. Intense contamination and road salt
can damage the vehicle.
Automatic car washes or car
washes
Safety information
Safety information
NOTICE
When washing with an open fuel filler flap, NOTICE
damage may occur. There is a risk of dam-
Using a car wash with high pressure washers
may result in water penetration of window
age. Close the fuel filler flap before washing.
areas. There is a risk of damage to property,
Clean dirt behind the fuel filler flap with a
among other potential damage. Do not drive
cloth.
into high-pressure car wash systems.
364
Vehicle Care MOBILITY
NOTICE Rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to
Improper use of automatic car washes can page 146.
cause damage to the vehicle. There is a risk
of damage to property, among other poten- Driving out of a car wash
tial damage. Follow the following instruc- Ensure that the vehicle key is in the car.
tions:
Turn on drive-ready state.
▷ Give preference to cloth car washes or
those that use soft brushes in order to
avoid paint damage. Drive-ready state, refer to page 42.
▷ Do not drive through a car wash with
guide rails higher than 4 in/10 cm to Lights
avoid damage to the body. Do not rub wet lights dry and do not use abra-
▷ Observe the tire width of the guide rail to sive or acidic cleaning agents or cleaning
avoid damage to tires and rims. agents containing alcohol.
▷ Fold in exterior mirrors to avoid damage Soak areas that have been dirtied, for instance
to the exterior mirrors. from insects, with auto shampoo and wash off
with water.
▷ Deactivate the wiper and, if necessary,
rain sensor to avoid damage to the win- Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an ice
dow wiper system. scraper.
After washing the vehicle

Driving into a car wash with a
After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes
Steptronic transmission briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking effect
can be reduced. The heat generated during
Safety information
braking dries brake disks and brake pads and
protects them against corrosion.
NOTICE Completely remove all residues on the win-
Selector lever position P is automatically en- dows, to minimize loss of visibility due to
gaged when standby state is switched off. smearing and to reduce wiper noises and
There is a risk of damage to property, among wiper blade wear.
other potential damage. Do not switch
standby state off in car washes.
Vehicle care
General information
Vehicle care products
In a car wash, the vehicle must be able to roll
freely. General information
Some car washes do not permit persons in the BMW recommends using vehicle care and
vehicle. The vehicle cannot be locked from the cleaning agents from BMW. Suitable vehicle
outside when in selector lever position N. A care products are available from a dealer’s
signal sounds when an attempt is made to lock service center or another qualified service cen-
the vehicle. ter or repair shop.
365
Safety information Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and

grease will gradually break down the protective
coating of the leather surface.
Warning
Cleaning agents can contain substances that Synthetic leather care
are dangerous and harmful to your health.
Clean synthetic leather regularly with a damp
There is a risk of injury. When cleaning the in-
microfiber cloth or vacuum cleaner.
terior, open the doors or windows. Only use
products intended for cleaning vehicles. Fol- Otherwise, dust and road grime particles will
low the instructions on the packaging. rub into pores and folds, causing significant
abrasion and premature degradation of the
surface.
Vehicle paintwork In case of major soiling, use a moist soft
sponge or microfiber cloth with suitable interior
General information cleaners.
Regular vehicle care contributes to driving Immediately remove aggressive substances
safety and value retention. Environmental in- such as sunscreen to prevent the synthetic
fluences in areas with elevated air pollution or leather from being altered or discolored.
natural contaminants, such as tree resin or
pollen can affect the vehicle paintwork. Tailor Upholstery material care
the frequency and extent of your vehicle care
to these influences. General information
Corrosive substances such as spilled fuel, oil, Vacuum the cushions regularly with a vacuum
grease or bird droppings, must be removed cleaner.
immediately to prevent the finish from being
If upholstery is very contaminated, for instance
altered or discolored.
with beverage stains, use a soft sponge or mi-
crofiber cloth with a suitable interior cleaner.
Matte paintwork
Clean the cushions down to the seams using
Only use cleaning and care products suitable
large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the
for vehicles with matte paintwork.
material vigorously.
Leather care Safety information

Remove dust from the leather regularly, using
a cloth or vacuum cleaner.
NOTICE
Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime
chafe in pores and folds, and lead to heavy Open hook and loop fasteners on articles of
abrasion and premature degradation of the clothing can damage the seat covers and
leather surface. other cloth upholstery in the vehicle. There is
a risk of damage to property, among other
To guard against discoloration, such as from
potential damage. Ensure that any Velcro®
clothing, clean leather and provide leather care
fasteners are closed.
roughly every two months.
Clean light-colored leather more frequently be-
cause contamination on such surfaces is sub-
stantially more visible.
366
Caring for special components Kenaf

Only treat parts made of Kenaf fibers using
Light-alloy wheels suitable care products.
When cleaning the vehicle, use only neutral rim
cleaners having a pH value from 5 to 9. Do not Plastic components
use abrasive cleaning agents or steam clean-
ers above 140 ℉/60 ℃. Follow the manufac-
NOTICE
turer's instructions.
Solvent cleaners that contain alcohol or sol-
Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning agents
vents, such as lacquer thinners, cold cleaning
can destroy the protective coating of adjacent
agents, fuel and such, can damage plastic
components, such as the brake disk.
parts. There is a risk of damage to property,
After cleaning, apply the brakes shortly to dry among other potential damage. Clean with a
them. The heat generated during braking dries microfiber cloth. Dampen the cloth lightly with
brake disks and brake pads and protects them water, if needed.
against corrosion.
Clean with a microfiber cloth.
Chrome surfaces
Dampen the cloth lightly with water, if needed.
Carefully clean Chrome surfaces, especially in
Do not soak the headliner.
case of exposure to road salt, with plenty of
water and added auto shampoo as needed.
Seat belts
Rubber components
Environmental influences can cause surface Warning
contamination of rubber parts and a loss of Chemical solvent cleaners can destroy the
gloss. Use only water and suitable cleaning seat belt fabric. Missing protective effect of
agents for cleaning. the seat belts. There is a risk of injury or dan-
Treat especially worn rubber parts with rubber ger to life. Use only a mild soap solution for
care products at regular intervals. When clean- cleaning the seat belts.
ing rubber seals, do not use any silicon-con-
taining vehicle care products in order to avoid Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and
damage or noises. thus have a negative impact on safety.
Use only a mild soap solution for cleaning the
Wiper blades installed belt straps.
The wiper blades are cleaned by using the Seat belts should only be allowed to retract if
washer system. they are dry.
Avoid cleaning the wiper blades manually, as
this may reduce wiper performance. Carpets and floor mats
Fine wood parts Warning

Clean the fine wood veneer and fine wood
Objects in the driver's footwell can limit the
components solely with a moist rag. Then dry
pedal travel or block a depressed pedal.
with a soft cloth.
There is a risk of accident. Stow objects in the
vehicle such that they are secured and can-
367
not enter into the driver's footwell. Use floor Taking the vehicle out of service
mats that are suitable for the vehicle and can
When the vehicle is shut down for longer than
be safely attached to the floor. Do not use
three months, special measures must be
loose floor mats and do not layer several
taken. Further information is available from a
floor mats. Make sure that there is sufficient
clearance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor
mats are securely fastened again after they
were removed, for instance for cleaning.
The floor mats can be removed from the inte-

rior for cleaning.
If the floor carpets are very contaminated,
clean with a microfiber cloth and water or a
textile cleaner. To prevent matting of the car-
pet, rub back and forth in the driving direction
only.
Sensors and camera lenses

To clean sensors and camera lenses, use a
cloth moistened with a small amount of glass
detergent.
Displays, screens and the protective

glass of the Head-up display
NOTICE
Chemical solvent cleaners, moisture or fluids
of any kind can damage the surface of dis-
plays and screens. There is a risk of damage
Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber cloth.
NOTICE
The surface of displays can be damaged with
improper cleaning. There is a risk of damage
Avoid pressure that is too high and do not
use any scratching materials.
Use a dry, clean antistatic microfiber cloth.

Clean the protective glass of the Head-up Dis-
play using a microfiber cloth and commercially
available household detergent.
368
369
REFERENCE Technical data
Technical data
General information
The technical data and specifications in the specific measuring process. Detailed values
Owner's Manual are used as guidance values. can be found in the approval documents, on
Vehicle-specific data may deviate from this, for signs on the vehicle or can be obtained from a
instance due to the optional equipment dealer’s service center or another qualified
chosen, national-market version, or country- service center or repair shop.
Dimensions
The dimensions can vary depending on the The height of the vehicle can also differ, e.g.,
model version, equipment version or country- due to tires and vehicle load.
specific measurement procedure.
BMW 8 Series Coupe
Width with mirrors in/mm 84.1/2,137
Width without mirrors in/mm 74.9/1,902
Height in/mm 53/1,346
Length in/mm 191.2/4,856
Wheelbase in/mm 111.1/2,822
Smallest turning radius diam. ft/m 39.0/11.9
370
Technical data REFERENCE
Weights
840i
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 4,905/2,225
Payload lbs/kg 911/413
Approved front axle weight lbs/kg 2,425/1,100
Approved rear axle weight lbs/kg 2,712/1,230
840i xDrive
M850i xDrive powered by BMW M
Filling capacities
BMW 8 Series Coupe
Fuel tank, approx. US gal/liters 18.0/68.0
Observe further information on fuel quality, re-

fer to page 343.
371
REFERENCE Appendix
Appendix
General information ▷ Operation: driver assistance systems: Re-
mote 3D View.
Any updates to the Owner's Manual of the ve- ▷ Operation: interior equipment: USB port: in
hicle are listed here. the center armrest.
In contrast to the description in the Integrated
Owner's Manual in the vehicle, the Screen Mir-
Updates made after the roring equipment is not available.
editorial deadline
License Texts and Certifications
The following chapters were updated in the
printed version of the Owner's Manual after USA/Canada
the editorial deadline for the Integrated Own-
er's Manual in the vehicle had closed: Wireless Charging
▷ Operation: iDrive: operating concept: gen- Canada
eral. IC: 5927A-WCACS
▷ Operation: iDrive: operating concept: input This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
and display: letters and numbers. Rules and Industry Canada license-exempt
▷ Operation: iDrive: control display and con- RSS standard(s).
troller: overview. Operation is subject to the following two condi-
▷ Operation: iDrive: control display and con- tions:
troller: general. (1) This device may not cause harmful interfer-
▷ Operation: iDrive: operation via touchpad: ence, and
general. (2) this device must accept any interference re-
▷ Operation: iDrive: operation via touch- ceived, including interference that may cause
screen: general. undesired operation.
▷ Operation: driver assistance systems: Auto- Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
matic Lane Change. d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils
radio exempts de licence.
▷ Operation: driver assistance systems: side
parking aid. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux condi-
tions suivantes:
▷ Operation: driver assistance systems: Auto-
matic Parking Assistant. (1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage,
et
▷ Operation: driver assistance systems: Re-
versing Assistant. (2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
▷ Operation: driver assistance systems: Sur-
brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre
round View.
le fonctionnement.
▷ Operation: driver assistance systems: Pan-
orama View.
372
Appendix REFERENCE
373
REFERENCE Everything from A to Z
Everything from A to Z
Index
0-9 Air distribution, manual 272
Air drying, see air conditioning 270
3D View, see Surround View 255 Air flow, automatic climate control 272
Air outlets, see Ventilation 273
A Air pressure, tires 310
Air quality 268
ABS, see Antilock Braking System 213 Air vent, see Ventilation 273
Acceleration Assistant, see Launch Con- Alarm system 109
trol 149 Alarm, unintentional 111
Accessories and parts 8 All-season tires, see Winter tires 319
ACC, see Cruise Control with Distance Con- All-wheel-drive, see xDrive 215
trol 222 Ambient light 178
Activated carbon filter, see Interior filter 268 Android Auto, connection to the vehicle 81
Activation points, panorama View 260 Android Auto preparation, connection to the
Activation word 53 vehicle 81
Active Blind Spot Detection 200 Android Auto preparation, smartphone inte-
Active Cruise Control 222 gration 81
Active damping control, see Adaptive M chas- Antifreeze, see Washer fluid 349
sis/suspension 266 Antilock Braking System 213
Active Guard Plus, see Intelligent Safety 183 Anti-theft protection, lug bolt lock 337
Active Guard, see Intelligent Safety 183 Apple CarPlay preparation, connection to the
Active M Sport differential 216 vehicle 80
Active Park Distance Control 244 Apple CarPlay preparation, smartphone inte-
Active roll stabilization 266 gration 80
Active seat ventilation 123 Approach control warning with City braking
Active Steering, integral 216 function 185
Adaptive brake assistant 213 Approach control warning with City light brak-
Adaptive Light Control 175 ing function 185
Adaptive lighting functions 174 Approach control warning with light braking
Adaptive M chassis/suspension 266 function 185
Adaptive M suspension Professional 266 Apps, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, En-
ADAPTIVE, see Driving Dynamics Control 137 tertainment, Communication 6
Adding engine oil types 347 Aquaplaning 297
Additives, engine oil types 347 Armrest heating 122
Adjusting contents, iDrive 49 Ashtray 282
Adjustments, steering wheel 121 Assistance when driving off, see Drive-off as-
Airbags 180 sistant 213
Airbags, indicator and warning light 182 Assistance with breakdown 357
Air circulation, see Recirculated-air mode 272 Assisted Driving Mode, see Steering Assis-
air conditioning, climate 270 tant 233
374
Everything from A to Z REFERENCE
Assisted Driving Plus 237 Battery, vehicle 354

Assisted Driving View 152 Being towed, see Tow-starting and tow-
Audio, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, En- ing 361
tertainment and Communication 6 Belts, see Seat belts 116
AUTO H button, see Parking brake 137 Blind spot collision warning 200
Automatic activation, see Climate control Blower 272
rules 124 Bluetooth connection 78
Automatic climate control 268 Blu-ray, see Owner's Manual for Navigation,
Automatic control, headlight 172 Entertainment, Communication 6
Automatic Curb Monitor, exterior mirror 120 BMW Accident Assistance 358
Automatic deactivation, front-seat passenger BMW Assist, see Owner's Manual for Naviga-
airbags 182 tion, Entertainment and Communication 6
Automatic dimming, see Automatic High Beam BMW Digital Key 95
Assistant 175 BMW display key 89
Automatic headlight control 172 BMW display key, malfunction 92
Automatic High Beam Assistant 175 BMW Drive Recorder 209
Automatic Hold, see Parking brake 137 BMW Gesture Control 56
Automatic Lane Change Assistant 239 BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant 52
Automatic locking 109 BMW maintenance system 351
Automatic Parking Assistant 248 BMW Roadside Assistance 358
Automatic program, automatic climate con- Bonus range, ECO PRO 304
trol 270 Bottle holder, front, see Cup holder, front 290
Automatic Recirculating Air Control 271 Brake assistant 213
Automatic time setting 64 Brake assistant, adaptive 213
Automatic transmission, see Steptronic trans- Brake disks, breaking in 296
mission 144 Brake disks, see Brake system 296
Automatic unlocking 108 Brake pads, breaking in 296
Automating routines, BMW Intelligent Personal Brake pads, see Brake system 296
Assistant 55 Brake system 296
AUTO program, automatic climate control 270 Braking, information 298
AUTO program, intensity 271 Breakdown assistance 357
Auto Start/Stop function 132 Breaking in 296
Average consumption 154 Break recommendation, see Fatigue alert 211
Average consumption, see Trip data 168 Brightness, Control Display 66
Axle loads, approved 371 Button, central locking system 99
Buttons on the steering wheel 32
B Button, SOS, see Intelligent emergency
call 359
Backrest curvature, see Lumbar support 115 Button, Start/Stop 132
Backrest, seats 113 Bypassing, see Jump-starting 360
Backrest tilt 114
Backrest width 115 C
Back-up Assistant 254
Bandages, see First-aid kit 357 Cable for tow-starting/towing 362
Bar for tow-starting/towing 362 Calendar day, see Date 64
Battery, disposing of 355 Calibration of the front seats 114
375
California Proposition 65 Warning 9 Central locking switch, see Central locking sys-
Call, gesture control 57 tem 99
Camera-based assistance systems, see Intelli- Central locking system 99
gent Safety 183 Central screen, see Control Display 47
Camera, instrument cluster, see Driver Atten- Changes, technical, see For Your Own
tion Camera 65 Safety 8
Camera lenses, care 368 Change, wheels and tires 317
Camera, rearview camera, see Surround Changing parts 353
View 255 Changing wheels 335
Camera, rearview camera, without Surround Charging cradle 285
View 245 Charging smartphone, see Wireless charging
Camera, see Surround View 255 tray 285
Cameras, see Sensors of the vehicle 37 Charging tray for smartphones, see Wireless
CANCEL button, Active Cruise Control 222 charging tray 285
CANCEL button, cruise control 220 Chassis/suspension, electronic, see Adaptive
Can holder, front, see Cup holder, front 290 M chassis/suspension 266
Care 364 Chassis number, see Vehicle identification
Care, displays, screens 368 number 12
Care, Head-up Display 368 Check Control 154
Care, light-alloy wheels 367 Checking the engine oil level electronically 345
Care, vehicle 365 Children, seating position 126
Cargo 292 Children, transporting safely 126
Cargo area 292 Child restraint seats 126
Cargo area, enlarging 294 Child restraint systems, mounting 127
Cargo, stowing and securing 293 Child restraint systems, see Transporting chil-
Cargo straps, see Lashing eyes in the cargo dren safely 126
area 293 Child seat installation 127
Caring Car, BMW Intelligent Personal Assis- Child seat, mounting 127
tant 56 Child seat mountings LATCH 128
Car key, see Vehicle key 84 Child seats, see Transporting children
Carpet, care 367 safely 126
CarPlay, connection to the vehicle 80 Chrome-plated surfaces, care 367
Car seats, see Transporting children Chrome surfaces, care 367
safely 126 Cigarette lighter 283
Car wash 364 Cigarette lighter, front 283
Car wash, automatic 364 Cleaning, displays, screens 368
Car wash view, Surround View 256 Cleaning, Head-up Display 368
Catalytic converter, see Hot exhaust gas sys- Clearance, water 298
tem 297 Climate control 268
CBS, see Condition Based Service 351 Climate control rules 124
Cell phone, see Owner's Manual for Naviga- Closing with the Key Card 93
tion, Entertainment and Communication 6 Closing with the smartphone, see BMW Digital
Center armrest, front 290 Key 95
Center console 34 Clothes hooks 291
Central Information Display (CID), see Control Coasting 304
Display 47 Coasting with idling engine 304
376
Coat hooks 291 Coolant temperature, see Engine tempera-

Combination switch, see Turn signals 140 ture 163
Combination switch, see Washer/wiper sys- Cooling, maximum 270
tem 141 Cooling system 347
Comfort Access 100 Cornering light 175
COMFORT, see Driving Dynamics Control 135 Corrosion, brake disks 299
Communication, see Owner's Manual for Navi- Cosmetic mirror 282
gation, Entertainment and Communication 6 Cross traffic warning 262
Comparison of entries, see Entry compari- Cruise Control, see Cruise Control with Dis-
son 45 tance Control 222
Compartments in the doors 290 Cruise Control with Distance Control 222
Compatible devices, see Suitable devices 76 Cruise Control without Distance Control 220
Compatible mobile phones 76 Cruising range 164
Compressor 321 Cup holder, front 290
Concierge Service, see Owner's Manual for Current consumption 154
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6 Customer service, see Owner's Manual for
Condensation water under the parked vehi- Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6
cle 299 Customer Support 6
Condensation, windshield 273
Condition Based Service 351 D
Confirmation signal from the vehicle 108
ConnectedDrive, see Owner's Manual for Navi- Damage, tires 317
gation, Entertainment and Communication 6 Damping control active, see Adaptive M chas-
Connection, electrical devices, see Sock- sis/suspension 266
ets 284 Dashboard 32
Consumption display, average consump- Dashboard, see Instrument cluster 151
tion 154 Dashcam, see BMW Drive Recorder 209
Consumption display, current consump- Data memory 10
tion 154 Data protection, settings 69
Consumption display, ECO PRO 304 Data, see Personal data, deleting 69
Consumption, see Trip data 168 Data, technical 370
Contacts, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Date 64
Entertainment, Communication 6 Daytime driving lights 174
Continued driving with a flat tire, see Tire Pres- Daytime running lights 174
sure Monitor 325 DCC, see Cruise Control without Distance Con-
Continued driving with flat tire, see Flat tire trol 220
monitor 333 Defrost function 273
Control Display 47 Defrost, windshield 273
Control Display, brightness 66 Deleting, personal data 69
Control display, pop-ups 66 Departure schedule, see Pre-ventilation 274
Controller 47 Departure time, pre-conditioning 277
Control systems, driving stability 213 Departure time, pre-ventilation 275
Convenient closing, vehicle key 86 Destination input 6
Convenient opening, vehicle key 85 Device, connecting 75
Coolant 347 Device list 76
Coolant level 348 Device, registering 75
377
Devices, managing 76 Driver assistance systems 218

Devices, suitable 76 Driver Attention Camera 65
Diagnostic connection 352 Drive readiness, see Operating condition of the
Diagnostic socket 352 vehicle 41
Differential lock 216 Drive-ready state, engine start 42
Digital Key 95 Driver profiles 70
Digital Key, see BMW Digital Key 95 Driver profile, setup 70
Dimensions 370 Driver profiles, welcome screen 70
Dimmable exterior mirrors 120 Driving 132
Dimmable interior mirror 120 Driving Assistant, see Intelligent Safety 183
Direct dial buttons, see Programmable mem- Driving comfort 266
ory buttons 46 Driving Dynamics Control 135
Direction indicator, see Turn signals 140 Driving mode, ECO PRO 302
Display, iDrive 44 Driving mode, see Driving Dynamics Con-
Display in the windshield, see Head-up Dis- trol 135
play 170 Driving notes, breaking in 296
Display key 89 Driving notes, general 297
Display key, malfunction 92 Driving out of parking space 252
Display key, see BMW display key 89 Driving stability control systems 213
Display lighting, see Instrument lighting 177 Driving, Start/Stop button 132
Display, notifications, BMW Intelligent Per- Driving style analysis, ECO PRO 306
sonal Assistant 67 Driving through water 298
Display panel, see Instrument cluster 151 Driving tips, see General driving notes 297
Displays 151 DSC, see Dynamic Stability Control 213
Displays and symbols 7 DTC, see Dynamic Traction Control 215
Displays, ECO PRO 302 Dynamic damping, see Adaptive M chassis/
Display, speed limiting function, see Speed suspension 266
Limit Info 165 Dynamic Drive 266
Display SPRINT 148 Dynamic Stability Control 213
Disposal, coolant 349 Dynamic Traction Control 215
Disposal, vehicle battery 355
Distance control, see Cruise Control 222 E
Distance warning, see Park Distance Con-
trol 241 ECO PRO 302
Door handle lighting, see Welcome lights 174 ECO PRO, bonus range 304
Door opening angle, Surround View 256 ECO PRO, driving style analysis 306
Drive-off assistant 213 ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL, see Driving Dynamics
Drive-off assistant, see Dynamic Stability Con- Control 135
trol 213 ECO PRO, see Driving Dynamics Control 135
Drive power, reduced 162 Efficient4x4, see xDrive 215
Driver activity, see Driver Attention Camera 65 Electronic oil measurement 345
Driver assistance, driving, see Intelligent Electronic Stability Program ESP, see Dynamic
Safety 183 Stability Control 213
Driver assistance, parking, see Parking assis- E-mail, see Owner's Manual for Navigation,
tance systems 240 Entertainment, Communication 6
Driver assistance, see Intelligent Safety 183
378
Emergency brake, see Emergency stop assis- Experience Modes, BMW Intelligent Personal
tant 207 Assistant 56
Emergency braking, see PostCrash – Exterior lighting during unlocking 85
iBrake 211 Exterior lighting, locked vehicle 86
Emergency call 359 Exterior mirror 119
Emergency service, see BMW Accident Assis- Exterior mirror, Automatic Curb Monitor 120
tance 358 Exterior mirror, automatic dimming 120
Emergency service, see BMW Roadside Assis- Exterior mirrors, malfunction 120
tance 358 External start, see Jump-starting 360
Emergency stop assistant 207 Eyelet for towing 363
Emergency unlocking, transmission lock 148 Eyes, see Lashing eyes in the cargo area 293
Emergency unlocking, trunk lid 106
Energy recovery 154 F
Energy savings, see Gear shift indicator 165
Engine, automatic Start/Stop function 132 Factory settings, see Vehicle data, reset-
Engine compartment 340 ting 66
Engine coolant 347 Failure message, see Check Control 154
Engine idling when driving, see Coasting 304 Fan, see Air flow 272
Engine oil filler neck 346 Fastening seat belts, see Seat belts 116
Engine oil temperature 163 Fatigue Alert 211
Engine oil, topping up 346 Fatigue Alert, see Driver Attention Camera 65
Engine oil types to add 347 Fatigue warner, see Fatigue Alert 211
Engine sound, setting 267 Fault indicators, see Check Control 154
Engine start, see Drive-ready state 42 Filler neck for engine oil 346
Engine start, see Jump-starting 360 Filter, see Interior filter 268
Engine stopping, see Drive-ready state 42 Fine wood, care 367
Engine temperature 163 Fine wood parts, care 367
Entering a destination, see Owner's Manual for First-aid kit 357
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6 First Steps, see Setup Wizard 70
Entering an address, navigation, see Owner's Flat tire, changing wheels 335
Manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Flat tire, continued driving, see Flat tire moni-
Communication 6 tor 333
Entertainment, see Owner's Manual for Navi- Flat tire, continued driving, see Tire Pressure
gation, Entertainment and Communication 6 Monitor 325
Entertainment, selection list in the instrument Flat tire message, see Flat tire monitor 333
cluster 167 Flat tire message, see Tire Pressure Moni-
Entry comparison 45 tor 329
Equipment, interior 279 Flat tire monitor 333
Error indicators, see Check Control 154 Flat tire, repairing 320
ESP Electronic Stability Program, see Dynamic Flat tire, see Flat tire monitor 333
Stability Control 213 Flat tire, see Tire Pressure Monitor 325
Evasion Assistant 188 Flat tire warning light, see Flat tire moni-
Exchange, wheels and tires 317 tor 333
Exhaust gas system 297 Flat tire warning light, see Tire Pressure Moni-
Exhaust, see Exhaust gas system 297 tor 329
Flooding, driving through 298
379
Floor carpet, care 367 Gear change, Steptronic transmission 144

Floor mats, care 367 Gear shift indicator 165
Fold-away position, wiper 143 General driving notes 297
Fold-out position 143 General settings 64
Foot brake 298 Gesture Control 56
Forward collision mitigation, see Intelligent Gestures, see BMW Gesture Control 56
Safety 183 Glare shield, see Sun visor 282
For Your Own Safety 8 Glopal Positioning System, navigation 6
Front airbags 180 Glove compartment 289
Front collision mitigation 185 G-meter, widget in the instrument cluster 154
Front collision mitigation, see Forward Colli- GPS, navigation, see Owner's Manual for Navi-
sion Warning 185 gation, Entertainment, Communication 6
Front collision mitigation, see Intersection Col- Gross vehicle weight, approved 371
lision Warning 190
Front collision mitigation, see Pedestrian H
Warning 194
Front fog lights, changing, see Lights and Handbrake, see Parking brake 137
bulbs 354 Hand-held transmitter, alternating code 280
Front lights, replacing, see Lights and Hands-free device, see Owner's Manual for
bulbs 354 Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6
Front passenger's side exterior mirror, tilting Hands-free system 6
down, see Automatic Curb Monitor 120 Hazard warning system 357
Front passenger airbags, automatic deactiva- Head airbag 181
tion 182 Headlight control, automatic 172
Front-seat passenger airbags, indicator Headlight flasher 141
light 183 Headlight glass 354
Front seats 113 Headlights, care 365
Fuel 343 Headlights, replacing, see Lights and
Fuel cap 308 bulbs 354
Fuel filler flap 308 Headlights, turning up, dimming, see Auto-
Fuel filler flap, emergency unlocking 309 matic High Beam Assistant 175
Fuel filler flap, manual operation 309 Headliner 35
Fuel filler flap, unlocking manually 309 Head restraints and seats 113
Fuel gauge 161 Head restraints, front 118
Fuel quality 343 Head-up Display 170
Fuel recommendation 343 Head-up Display, care 368
Fuel, saving 301 Head-up display, position, saving see Memory
Fuel tank, see Filling capacity 371 function 121
Fuses 355 Heated steering wheel 121
Heavy cargo, stowing 293
G Height, vehicle 370
High beams 141
Garage door opener, see Integrated Universal Hills 299
Remote Control 279 Hill start assistant, see Drive-off assistant 213
Gasoline 343 Holder for beverages, front 290
Gasoline quality 344
380
HomeLink, see Integrated Universal Remote Interior equipment 279

Control 279 Interior filter 268
Homepage, see Internet 6 Interior lights 178
Hood 341 Interior lights during unlocking 85
Horn 32 Interior lights, locked vehicle 86
Hotel function, see Valet parking mode 106 Interior mirror 120
Hot exhaust gas system 297 Interior mirror, automatic dimming feature 120
Hour, see Time 64 Interior motion sensor 111
Humidity in the headlight, see Headlight Internet page 6
glass 354 Intersection collision warning 190
Intersection warning with City light braking
I function 190
Interval indicator, see Service notifications 164
iBrake – PostCrash 211
Ice, see Outside temperature 163 J
Ice warning, see Outside temperature 163
Identification marks, tires 314 Jacking points 337
Identification number, see Vehicle identification Jacking points for the vehicle jack 337
number 12 Jam protection system, windows 112
iDrive 44 Joystick, Steptronic transmission 144
ID transmitter, see Vehicle key 84 Jump-starting 360
Ignition key, see Vehicle key 84 Jump-starting terminals 360
Inclination 114 Jump-start terminals 360
Indicator light, front-seat passenger air-
bags 183 K
Indicator lights 155
Individual air distribution 272 Kenaf, care 367
Individual settings, see Driver profiles 70 Key Card 93
Inductive charging, smartphone, see Wireless Keyless Go, see Comfort Access 100
charging tray 285 Key, mechanical 98
Information 6 Key, see BMW display key 89
Initialization, see flat tire monitor 333 Key, see Vehicle key 84
Input, iDrive 44 Kickdown, Steptronic transmission 144
Installation of child restraing systems 127 Knee airbag 181
Instrument cluster 151
Instrument lighting 177 L
Instrument panel, see Instrument cluster 151
Integral Active Steering 216 Labeling 314
Integrated key 98 Label on recommended tires 318
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle 15 Lane boundary 196
Integrated Universal Remote Control 279 Lane change assistant 239
Intelligent emergency call 359 Lane control assistant with active side collision
Intelligent Personal Assistant 52 mitigation 203
Intelligent Safety 183 Lane control assistant with active side collision
Intended use 8 protection, see Side collision mitigation 203
Intensity, AUTO program 271 Lane departure warning 196
381
Lane lines, Surround View 256 Lower back support, see Lumbar support 115
Lane threshold, warning 196 Lug bolt lock 337
Language, setting 65 Luggage rack, see Roof-mounted luggage
Laser headlights, changing, see Lights and rack 299
bulbs 354 Luggage straps 293
Laser high beams 177 Lumbar support 115
Lashing eyes in the cargo area 293
LATCH child seat mountings 128 M
Launch Control 149
Leather care 366 Maintenance 351
LED headlights, changing, see Lights and Maintenance requirement, see Condition
bulbs 354 Based Service 351
Length, vehicle 370 Maintenance, see Service notifications 164
Letters and numbers, entering 45 Maintenance system, BMW 351
Light-alloy wheels, care 367 Make-up mirror 282
Light control, adaptive 175 Malfunction, BMW display key 92
Lighter, cigarettes 283 Malfunction, vehicle key 88
Lighting 172 Manual brake, see Parking brake 137
Lighting, loudspeaker, see Bowers & Wil- Manual control, air distribution 272
kins 179 Manual control, air flow 272
Light in the exterior mirror, see Active Blind Manual mode, Steptronic transmission 144
Spot Detection 200 Manual Speed Limiter 218
Light in the exterior mirror, see Cross traffic Map update, see Owner's Manual for Naviga-
warning 262 tion, Entertainment, Communication 6
Light replacement, see Lights and bulbs 354 Marking, run-flat tire 319
Lights 172 Matte paintwork 366
Lights and bulbs 354 Matt paint, care 366
Lights, care 365 Maximum cooling 270
Light switch 172 Maximum speed, display, see Speed Limit
LIM button, see Manual Speed Limiter 218 Info 165
List, instrument cluster, see Selection lists 167 Maximum speed, winter tires 319
List, notifications, see Notifications 67 M chassis/suspension, adaptive, see Adaptive
Load 293 M chassis/suspension 266
Loading 292 Media of the Owner's Manual 15
Loading the cargo area, see Stowing Medical supplies, see First-aid kit 357
cargo 293 Memory function 121
Local time, see Time 64 Menus, operating, iDrive 44
Locking, automatic 109 Messages, see Check Control 154
Locking, see Opening and Closing 84 Meters, see Instrument cluster 151
Locking, settings 108 Microfilter, see Interior filter 268
Locking using the vehicle key 86 Minimum tread depth, tires 316
Lock, lug bolts 337 Mirror position, saving, see Memory func-
Loop 363 tion 121
Loudspeaker lighting, see Bowers & Wil- Mobile devices, connecting 75
kins 179 Mobile devices, managing 76
Low beams, operation 173 Mobile phone, connecting 75
382
Mobile phone, see Owner's Manual for Navi- Oil level, checking electronically 345
gation, Entertainment and Communication 6 Oil service interval, see Service notifica-
Mobile phones, suitable 76 tions 164
Mobile radio in the vehicle 297 Oil, topping up 346
Mobile Service, see BMW Accident Assis- Oil types to add, engine 347
tance 358 Old battery 355
Mobile Service, see BMW Roadside Assis- On-board diagnosis 352
tance 358 Onboard literature, printed 15
Mobility System, see Tire repair set 320 Onboard vehicle tool kit 353
MODE button, see Active Cruise Control 222 On-call service, see BMW Accident Assis-
Mode, ECO PRO 302 tance 358
Modifications, technical, see For Your Own On-call service, see BMW Roadside Assis-
Safety 8 tance 358
Moisture 354 Opening and closing 84
Monitor, see Control Display 47 Opening with the Key Card 93
Mounting of child restraint systems 127 Opening with the smartphone, see BMW Digi-
MP3 player, see Owner's Manual for Naviga- tal Key 95
tion, Entertainment, Communication 6 Operating concept, iDrive 44
M Sport differential, active 216 Operating condition of the vehicle 41
Multi-function steering wheel 32 Operation via voice 52
Multifunction steering wheel, buttons 32 Optional equipment, see Vehicle equipment 7
Multimedia, see Owner's Manual for Naviga- Outside air, see Automatic Recirculating Air
tion, Entertainment and Communication 6 Control 271
Outside temperature 163
N Overheating of the engine, see Engine temper-
ature 163
Navigation, see Owner's Manual for Naviga- Overwintering, see Long-term vehicle stor-
tion, Entertainment and Communication 6 age 368
Neck restraints, front, see Head restraints, Owner's Manual, printed 15
front 118 Owner's Manual via voice operation, BMW In-
Net, cargo area 293 telligent Personal Assistant 54
Neutral cleaner, see Light-alloy wheels,
care 367 P
Notifications 67
No-touch opening and closing of the trunk Paint, vehicle care 366
lid 102 Paintwork 366
Nylon rope for tow-starting/towing 362 Panel heating 122
Panic alarm, see Panic mode 110
O Panic mode 110
Panorama View 260
OBD, see On-board diagnosis 352 Park Distance Control 241
Obstacle marking, rearview camera 247 Parking assistance, see Park Distance Con-
Obstacle marking, Surround View 256 trol 241
Octane number, see Gasoline quality 344 Parking assistance systems 240
Odometer, see Trip data 168 Parking assistant 248
Oil filler neck 346
383
Parking Assistant, driving out of parking Pressure warning, see Tire Pressure Moni-
space 252 tor 325
Parking Assistant for driving out of parking Pre-ventilation 274
space 252 Prevention of rear-end collision, see Rear-end
Parking assistant Plus, see Surround collision preparation 206
View 255 Printed onboard literature 15
Parking Assistant, see Automatic Parking As- Profiles, see Driver profiles 70
sistant 248 Programmable memory buttons, iDrive 46
Parking, Automatic Hold, see Parking Protective function, windows, see Jam protec-
brake 137 tion system 112
Parking brake 137 Push-and-turn reel, see Controller 47
Parking brake function, Active Park Distance
Control 244 Q
Parking lights 173
Parts and accessories 8 Queuing Assistant, see Assisted Driving
Pathway lighting 174 Plus 237
Pathway lighting, turning on 87
Pathway lines 256 R
Pathway lines, rearview camera 247
Payload 293 Racing track 300
Payload, technical data 371 Radar sensors, see Sensors of the vehicle 37
PDC, see Park Distance Control 241 Radiator fluid 347
Pedestrian Warning with braking function 194 Radio, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, En-
Performance Control 267 tertainment and Communication 6
Performance display, see Sport displays 169 Rain sensor 142
Personal Assistant 52 Rear axle steering, see Integral Active Steer-
Personal data, deleting 69 ing 216
Personal profile, see Driver profiles 70 Rear-end collision preparation 206
Personal settings 69 Rear lights, replacing, see Lights and
Physical units, see Units of measurement, set- bulbs 354
ting 65 Rear seat backrests, folding down 294
Plastic, care 367 Rearview camera, see Surround View 255
Plastic parts, care 367 Rearview camera, without Surround View 245
Pop-ups, control display 66 Rear-view mirror, exterior 119
Possible gestures, gesture control 57 Rearview mirror, interior 120
PostCrash – iBrake 211 Rear window defroster 273
Power Display, instrument cluster 162 Recirculated-air mode 272
Power failure 355 Recirculating air filter, see Interior filter 268
Power interruption 355 Recommended tire brands 318
Power Meter, see Power Display 162 Reduced drive power 162
Power windows 111 Refueling 308
Pre-conditioning 276 Registering, mobile devices, see Connec-
Pressure monitor, tire, see Tire Pressure Moni- tions 75
tor 325 Remote 3D View 264
Pressure, tires 310
Pressure warning, see Flat tire monitor 333
384
Remote control for audio, see Owner's Manual Runflat tires 319
for Navigation, Entertainment, Communica- Runflat tires, see Runflat tires 319
tion 6
Remote control, see Vehicle key 84 S
Remote control, universal 279
Remote Engine Start, see Stationary climate Safe braking 298
control 276 Safe Share function, see BMW Digital Key 95
Remote services, app, see Owner's Manual for Safety systems, see Airbags 180
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6 Safety systems, see Intelligent Safety 183
Remote Software Upgrade 60 Screen, see Control Display 47
Renewal, wheels and tires 317 Sealing compound, see Tire repair set 320
Replace battery, vehicle key 87 Seat and armrest heating 122
Replacement, wheels and tires 317 Seat belt reminder for driver and front passen-
Replacing bulbs, see Lights and bulbs 354 ger seat, see Seat belts 117
Replacing light diodes, see Lights and Seat belt reminder for the rear seats 118
bulbs 354 Seat belts 116
Replacing parts 353 Seat belts, care 367
Reporting safety malfunctions 13 Seat calibration 114
RES CNCL button, Active Cruise Control 222 Seat heating 122
RES CNCL button, cruise control 220 Seat heating, climate control rules 124
Reserve warning, see Range 164 Seating position for children 126
Reservoir, washer fluid 349 Seat position, saving, see Memory function 121
Resetting, Tire Pressure Monitor 327 Seats and head restraints 113
Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor 327 Seats, front 113
Reset, vehicle settings 66 Seat ventilation, active 123
Restricted Driving, see BMW Digital Key 95 Seat ventilation, climate control rules 124
RESUME button, Active Cruise Control 222 Securing, cargo 293
RESUME button, cruise control 220 Securing the trunk lid, see Valet parking
Retreaded tires 318 mode 106
Reversing Assistant 254 Selection list on the instrument cluster 167
Roadside parking lights 173 Selector lever, Steptronic transmission 144
Rolling code hand-held transmitter 280 Sensors, care 368
Rolling to a stop with engine decoupled, see Sensors of the vehicle 37
Coasting 304 Service and warranty 9
Roll stabilization, see Active roll stabiliza- Service Center, see BMW Accident Assis-
tion 266 tance 358
RON, see gasoline quality 344 Service Center, see BMW Roadside Assis-
Roofliner 35 tance 358
Roof-mounted luggage rack 299 Service notifications 164
Rope for tow-starting/towing 362 Service notifications, see Condition Based
Route, navigation, see Owner's Manual for Service 351
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6 Services, ConnectedDrive, see Owner's
RSC, see Runflat tires 319 Manual for Navigation, Entertainment and
RTTI, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, En- Communication 6
tertainment, Communication 6 SET button, Active Cruise Control 222
Rubber components, care 367 SET button, cruise control 220
385
Set clock 64 Software Update, see Remote Software Up-

Set day, see Date 64 grade 60
Set time, see Time 64 Software Upgrade, see Remote Software Up-
Setting, Control Display 66 grade 60
Settings, general 64 SOS button, see Intelligent emergency
Settings, locking/unlocking 108 call 359
Settings, resetting, vehicle 66 Sound 6
Settings, seats and head restraints 113 Sound, engine, setting 267
Setup Wizard 70 Sound output, see Owner's Manual for Navi-
Shift lights 162 gation, Entertainment, Communication 6
Shift paddles on the steering wheel 144 Speech recognition 52
Shift point indicator, tachometer 162 Speed Limit Assist 231
Side airbag 180 Speed Limit Assistant 231
Side collision mitigation 203 Speed Limit Device, Speed Limiter 218
Side parking aid, Surround View 256 Speed limit, display, see Speed Limit Info 165
Side parking aid without Surround View 245 Speed Limit Info 165
Side protection 245, 256 Speed warning 66
Side protection aid, Surround View, see Side Sport chassis/suspension, see Adaptive M
parking aid 256 chassis/suspension 266
Side protection aid without Surround View, see Sport displays 169
Side parking aid 245 SPORT INDIVIDUAL, see Driving Dynamics
Signaling, horn 32 Control 135
Signals when unlocking, see Confirmation sig- SPORT PLUS, see Driving Dynamics Con-
nals from the vehicle 108 trol 135
Sitting safely 113 Sport program, Steptronic transmission 144
Sleep mode, see Operating condition of the ve- SPORT, see Driving Dynamics Control 135
hicle 41 Sport suspension, see Adaptive M suspension
Slipperiness, see Outside temperature 163 Professional 266
Slippery road, see Outside temperature 163 Sprint function 148
Smallest turning circle, vehicle 370 Stability control systems 213
Smartphone, connecting 75 Standard equipment, see Vehicle equipment 7
Smartphone Integration, Android Auto prepa- Standby, see Operating condition of the vehi-
ration 81 cle 41
Smartphone Integration, Apple CarPlay prepa- Start/stop, automatic function 132
ration 80 Start/Stop button 132
Smartphone, see Owner's Manual for Naviga- Starting aid terminals 360
tion, Entertainment and Communication 6 Starting, see Drive-ready state 42
Smartphone, using via voice control 55 Starting the engine, see Drive-ready state 42
Smoker's package 282 Starting the engine with the Key Card 93
SMS, see Short messages, see Owner's Stationary climate control via Remote Engine
Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, Com- Start 276
munication 6 Stations, AM/FM, see Owner's Manual for
Sockets, electrical devices 284 Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6
Soft-close automatic, doors 106 Status control display, tires 327
Soft-close automatic function 106 Status information, iDrive 45
Status of Owner's Manual 7
386
Status, vehicle 169 T

Steering and Lane Control Assistant 233
Steering Assistant 233 Tachometer 161
Steering Assistant, see Steering and Lane Tail light, changing, see Lights and bulbs 354
Control Assistant 233 Taking the vehicle out of service 368
Steering column adjustment 121 Tank capacity 371
Steering, see Integral Active Steering 216 Technical changes, see For Your Own
Steering wheel, adjusting 121 Safety 8
Steering wheel, buttons 32 Technical data 370
Steering wheel heating 121 Telephone, see Owner's Manual for Naviga-
Steering wheel position, saving, see Memory tion, Entertainment and Communication 6
function 121 Telephone, selection list in the instrument
Steptronic Sport transmission, see Steptronic cluster 167
transmission 144 Teleservices, see Owner's Manual for Naviga-
Steptronic transmission 144 tion, Entertainment, Communication 6
Stopping the engine, see Drive-ready state 42 Temperature, automatic climate control 269
Storage compartment, cargo area 294 Temperature display, see outside tempera-
Storage compartment, center console 290 ture 163
Storage compartments 289 Temperature, engine oil 163
Storage compartments, locations 289 Theft alarm system, see Alarm system 109
Storage, tires 319 Thigh support 115
Storing the vehicle 368 Tilt alarm sensor 111
Stowing, cargo 293 Tilt, backrest 114
Straps for cargo, see Lashing eyes in the cargo Tilting down, front passenger's side exterior
area 293 mirror, see Automatic Curb Monitor 120
Suitable devices 76 Time 64
Suitable mobile phones 76 Time of day, see Time 64
Summer tires, tread 316 Time setting, automatic 64
Sun visor 282 Tire brands, recommended 318
Supplementary Owner's Handbooks 15 Tire chains 324
Supplementary Owner's Manuals 15 Tire change 317
Surface heating, see Seat and armrest heat- Tire damage 317
ing 122 Tire identification marks 314
Surround View 255 Tire inflation pressure 310
Surround View, gesture control 57 Tire marking 314
Suspension settings, see Driving Dynamics Tire pressure 310
Control 135 Tire Pressure Monitor 325
Switches, see Dashboard 32 Tire pressure monitoring, see Flat tire moni-
Switch for driving dynamics, see Driving Dy- tor 333
namics Control 135 Tire Pressure Monitor, reset 327
Symbols and displays 7 Tire Pressure Monitor, resetting 327
SYNC program, automatic climate control 272 Tire pressure, tires 310
System language, setting, see Language, set- Tire pressure warning, see Flat tire moni-
ting 65 tor 333
System settings, see General settings 64 Tire repair set 320
Tires and wheels 310
387
Tire sealant, see Tire repair set 320 Turn signal, indicator light 158
Tire settings 326 Turn signal, replacing bulbs, see Lights and
Tires, run-flat 319 bulbs 354
Tire tread 316 Turn signals, high beams, headlight
Title, gesture control 57 flasher 140
Tone, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, En-
tertainment and Communication 6 U
Tools 353
Top View, see Surround View 255 Ultrasonic sensors, see Sensors of the vehi-
Torque display, see Sport displays 169 cle 37
Touchpad, Controller 50 Unintentional alarm, avoiding 111
Tow bar 362 Units of measurement, setting 65
Tow fitting 363 Units, see Units of measurement, setting 65
Towing 361 Universal remote control 279
Tow rope 362 Unlock button, Steptronic transmission 144
Tow-starting 361 Unlocking, automatic 108
Traction Control 215 Unlocking, see Opening and Closing 84
Traction control system, see Dynamic Stability Unlocking, settings 108
Control 213 Unlocking, vehicle key 85
TRACTION, driving dynamics 215 Updates made after the editorial deadline 7
Traffic bulletins, see Owner's Manual for Navi- Upgrade, see Remote Software Upgrade 60
gation, Entertainment, Communication 6 Upholstery material care 366
Traffic Jam Assistant, see Assisted Driving Upper retaining strap, top tether 130
Plus 237 USB connection 82
Traffic jam assistant, see Steering and Lane USB port, position in vehicle 285
Control Assistant 233 Used battery, disposing of 355
Transmission lock, electronic unlocking 148 Use, intended 8
Transmission, see Steptronic transmis-
sion 144 V
Transporting children safely 126
Tread, tires 316 Valet parking mode 106
Trip computer, see Trip data 168 Vanity mirror 282
Trip data 168 Variable steering, see Integral Active Steer-
Triple turn signal activation 141 ing 216
Trip odometer, see Trip data 168 Vehicle battery 354
Trunk, emergency unlocking 106 Vehicle breakdown, see Breakdown assis-
Trunk lid 104 tance 357
Trunk lid, emergency unlocking 106 Vehicle, breaking in 296
Trunk lid, opening and closing with no-touch Vehicle care 365
activation 102 Vehicle care products 365
Trunk lid, operating, vehicle key 86 Vehicle data, resetting 66
Trunk lid, see Trunk lid 104 Vehicle equipment 7
Trunk, see Cargo area 292 Vehicle identification number 12
Turning circle lines, rearview camera 247 Vehicle issues 357
Turning circle line, Surround View 256 Vehicle key 84
Turning circle, vehicle 370 Vehicle key, additional 87
388
Vehicle key, integrated key 98 Washer system 141

Vehicle key, loss 88 Washing the vehicle 364
Vehicle key, malfunction 88 Washing, vehicle 364
Vehicle key, replace battery 87 Water on roads 298
Vehicle key with display, malfunction 92 Water, see Condensation water under the
Vehicle key with display, see BMW display parked vehicle 299
key 89 Web page 6
Vehicle paint, care 366 Website, see Internet 6
Vehicle paintwork 366 Weights 371
Vehicle status 169 Welcome light during unlocking 85
Vehicle storage 368 Welcome lights 174
Ventilation 273 Welcome screen, driver profiles 70
Ventilation, see Pre-ventilation 274 Wheelbase 370
Venting, see Ventilation 273 Wheel base, vehicle 370
Version Software, see Remote Software Up- Wheel change 335
grade 60 Wheels and tires 310
Video recording, see BMW Drive Re- Wheels and tires, exchange 317
corder 209 Widgets, iDrive 45
Video, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, En- Widgets, instrument cluster 153
tertainment and Communication 6 Width, vehicle 370
VIN, see Vehicle identification number 12 Wi-Fi 79
Voice activation system 52 WiFi connection, see WLAN connection 79
Voice command response 52 Wi-Fi hotspot 79
Voice control 52 Wi-Fi hotspot, see Wi-Fi hotspot 79
Voice control, gesture control 57 WiFi, see Wi-Fi 79
Voice control, see BMW Intelligent Personal Window, defrosting 273
Assistant 52 Windows, powered 111
Voice control system 52 Windshield, defrosting 273
Volume, gesture control 57 Windshield washer fluid, see Washer fluid 349
Windshield washer nozzles 143
W Windshield wiper, see Wiper system 141
Winter storage, see Long-term vehicle stor-
Wake word 53 age 368
Warning against cross traffic 262 Winter tires 319
Warning function, rear-end collision 206 Winter tires, tread 316
Warning light in the exterior mirror, see Active Wiper blades, changing 353
Blind Spot Detection 200 Wiper fluid, see Washer fluid 349
Warning light in the exterior mirror, see Cross Wiper, fold-away position 143
traffic warning 262 Wiper, see Washer/wiper system 141
Warning lights 155 Wiper system 141
Warning messages, see Check Control 154 Wireless charging, smartphone, see Wireless
Warning triangle 357 charging tray 285
Warranty 8 Wireless charging tray for smartphones 285
Warranty Booklet, see Warranty 8 WLAN connection 79
Washer fluid 349 Wood, care 367
Washer nozzles, windshield 143
389
Wordmatch principle, see Entry compari-

son 45
Wrench, see Onboard vehicle tool kit 353
xDrive 215
390
*BL5A5598700B*
01405A55987 ue

California Proposition 65
Warning
For vehicles sold in California:

BMW DRIVER'S GUIDE APP.
YOUR DIGITAL VEHICLE INFORMATION.
The BMW Driver's Guide app explains the equipment of your

vehicle and offers further scopes and functions:
All information surrounding navigation,

entertainment and communication
Photorealistic animations for various

vehicle functions
Keyword search
360° view: Explore your vehicle

interactively inside and out
Smart Scan for Apple iPhone: Icon and

optical character recognition on the
buttons in the vehicle
Available in more than 30 languages
Can be used offline after download

*BL5A5598700B*
01405A55987 ue

2023 BMW 8 Series Owners Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2023 BMW 8 Series Owners Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Content A-Z

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A55987 - II/22

After a vehicle software update – such as, a Remote Software Upgrade –

© 2022 Bayerische Motoren Werke

Symbols and displays Vehicle equipment and

California Proposition 65 Warning Service and warranty

Event Data Recorder EDR Vehicle identification

Engine compartment Windshield

Reporting safety defects

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle

For Canadian customers

Owner's Manual media

Scrolling through the Owner's

Opening via iDrive

1. Press the button.

Opening when a Check Control

2. Press the button on the vehicle key.

Comfort Access Opening and closing the trunk lid with

Grasp the handle of a vehicle door completely.

Locking the vehicle

Touch the grooved surface on the handle of a

▷ Unlock the vehicle and then press the but-

▷ Press and hold the button on the

Depending on the setting, the doors may Driver's door

Displays, control elements

1 Light switch element

Buttons on the Controller

Call up the main menu.

Call up the Media/Radio menu.

Call up the Communication menu.

Call up the navigation map.

Call up the destination input menu

Call up the previous display.

Call up the Options menu.

Activating the voice control system

Say the command.

Canceling voice control

Set-up and use

▷ Back: press the button and push the head

Adjusting the height Adjusting the exterior mirrors

Press switch up or down. 1 Adjusting

Adjusting the steering wheel Entering the rear

Electrical steering wheel adjustment Fold the seat backrest forward

Press the switch to adjust the forward/back

1. Pull the lever.

Infotainment The search term may be completed auto-

Entering a destination via the search Accepting a call

"Accept" ▷ Bluetooth®, Wi-Fi, and Siri voice control

Apple CarPlay© preparation

Turning off drive-ready state Engaging selector lever position D, N,

1. Engage selector lever position P with the

Auto Start/Stop function

Releasing the selector lever lock Light and view

Press the button.

High beams, headlight flasher

Press the lever forward or pull it backward.

Lights and lighting ▷ Normal wiper speed: position 2.

Automatic headlight control.

Activate/deactivate rain sensor

Window wiper system

Turn on window wiper system

Activate: press the lever up once from its 0 po-

Press the lever up until the desired position is